Reference Manual

Access Control and Security Management Software

DN1415‐1208/ Version 5.02

Copyright © 2012 Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved. All specifications
were current as of publication date and are subject to change without notice. EntraPass, Kantech and the Kantech
logo are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies.
 iii

TYCO INTERNATIONAL LTD

END‐USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR KANTECH Software Provided With or Without Products or Components
IMPORTANT ‐ READ CAREFULLY
KANTECH Software purchased with or without Products and Components is copyrighted and is purchased under
the following license terms:

• This End‐User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between You (the company, individual or
entity who acquired the Software and any related Hardware) and KANTECH, the manufacturer of the inte‐
grated security systems and the developer of the software and any related products or components (“HARD‐
WARE”) which You acquired.
• If the KANTECH software product (“SOFTWARE PRODUCT” or “SOFTWARE”) is intended to be accompanied by
HARDWARE, and is NOT accompanied by new HARDWARE, You may not use, copy or install the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes computer software, and may include associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation.
• Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is associated with a separate end‐user
license agreement is licensed to You under the terms of that license agreement.
• By installing, copying, downloading, storing, accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, You agree
unconditionally to be bound by the terms of this EULA, even if this EULA is deemed to be a modification of any
previous arrangement or contract. If You do not agree to the terms of this EULA, KANTECH is unwilling to
license the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to You, and You have no right to use it.

SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE

a The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as
other intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed, not sold.
1 GRANT OF LICENSE ‐ This EULA grants You the following rights:
a Software Installation and Use ‐ For each license You acquire, You may have only one copy of the SOFT‐
WARE PRODUCT installed.
b Storage/Network Use ‐ The SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be installed, accessed, displayed, run, shared
or used concurrently on or from different computers, including a workstation, terminal or other digital
electronic device (“Device”). In other words, if You have several workstations, You will have to acquire a
license for each workstation where the SOFTWARE will be used.
c Backup Copy ‐ You may make back‐up copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, but You may only have one
copy per license installed at any given time. You may use the back‐up copy solely for archival purposes.
Except as expressly provided in this EULA, You may not otherwise make copies of the SOFTWARE PROD‐
UCT, including the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE.

2 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS

a Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly ‐ You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. You may not make any changes or
modifications to the Software, without the written permission of an officer of KANTECH. You may not
iv

remove any proprietary notices, marks or labels from the Software Product. You shall institute reasonable
measures to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this EULA.
b Separation of Components ‐ The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product. Its component parts
may not be separated for use on more than one HARDWARE unit.
c Single INTEGRATED PRODUCT ‐ If You acquired this SOFTWARE with HARDWARE, then the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT is licensed with the HARDWARE as a single integrated product. In this case, the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT may only be used with the HARDWARE as set forth in this EULA.
d Rental ‐ You may not rent, lease or lend the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. You may not make it available to others
or post it on a server or web site.
e Software Product Transfer ‐ You may transfer all of Your rights under this EULA only as part of a perma‐
nent sale or transfer of the HARDWARE, provided You retain no copies, You transfer all of the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades and this EULA),
and provided the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is an upgrade,
any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT
f Termination ‐ Without prejudice to any other rights, KANTECH may terminate this EULA if You fail to com‐
ply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such event, You must destroy all copies of the SOFT‐
WARE PRODUCT and all of its component parts.
g Trademarks ‐ This EULA does not grant You any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks
of KANTECH or its suppliers.

3 COPYRIGHT

All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including but not limited to any
images, photographs, and text incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT), the accompanying printed materi‐
als, and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, are owned by KANTECH or its suppliers. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the
content, which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, are the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties.
This EULA grants You no rights to use such content. All rights not expressly granted under this EULA are reserved
by KANTECH and its suppliers.

4 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS

You agree that You will not export or re‐export the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to any country, person, or entity sub‐
ject to US export restrictions.

5 CHOICE OF LAW

This Software License Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York.

6 LIMITED WARRANTY
a NO WARRANTY
KANTECH PROVIDES THE SOFTWARE “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY. KANTECH DOES NOT WARRANT THAT
THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR‐FREE.
b CHANGES IN OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
KANTECH shall not be responsible for problems caused by changes in the operating characteristics of the
 v

HARDWARE, or for problems in the interaction of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT with non‐KANTECH SOFT‐
WARE or HARDWARE PRODUCTS.
c LIMITATION OF LIABILITY; WARRANTY REFLECTS ALLOCATION OF RISK
IN ANY EVENT, IF ANY STATUTE IMPLIES WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS NOT D IN THIS LICENSE AGREE‐
MENT, KANTECH'S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIM‐
ITED TO THE GREATER OF THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT
AND FIVE US DOLLARS (USD$5.00). BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
d DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
THIS WARRANTY CONTAINS THE ENTIRE WARRANTY AND SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WAR‐
RANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL‐
ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) AND OF ALL OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE
PART OF KANTECH. KANTECH MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES. KANTECH NEITHER ASSUMES NOR
AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON PURPORTING TO ACT ON ITS BEHALF TO MODIFY OR TO CHANGE THIS
WARRANTY, NOR TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR LIABILITY CONCERNING THIS SOFTWARE
PRODUCT.
e EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL KANTECH BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INDIRECT DAMAGES BASED UPON BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY. SUCH DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO,
LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPI‐
TAL, COST OF SUBSTITUTE OR REPLACEMENT EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES OR SERVICES, DOWN TIME, PUR‐
CHASERS TIME, THE CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO PROPERTY.

WARNING: KANTECH recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However,
despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible
for this SOFTWARE PRODUCT to fail to perform as expected.
vi
 vii

Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................... 1
EntraPass Main Features ............................................................................................. 2
EntraPass Manual and Help ......................................................................................... 4
Using the Reference Manual .......................................................................................... 4
Getting Help .................................................................................................................. 5
Technical Support .......................................................................................................... 6
System Architecture ................................................................................................... 7
Software Installation ................................................................................... 9
Recommended Operating Systems ............................................................................... 9
Minimum System Requirements .................................................................................. 9
EntraPass WebStation Server ......................................................................................... 9
Operating System Compatibility ................................................................................. 10
Virtual Environment Supported .................................................................................. 10
Additional Requirements .............................................................................................. 10
Installation Kit ..........................................................................................................10
InstallShield Wizard ...................................................................................................11
Installing EntraPass (New Installation) .......................................................................... 11
Customizable Contact Information ............................................................................... 11
Customizable Background ............................................................................................ 13
System Installation ....................................................................................................14
System Registration ...................................................................................................16
Registering the System ................................................................................................. 17
Adding System Components ......................................................................................... 18
System Components Edition .......................................................................................19
Assigning a Descriptive Name to an Application ............................................................ 20
Communication with the EntraPass Server ...................................................................20
Establishing Communication with the Server ................................................................. 20
Upgrading EntraPass .................................................................................................... 21
Updating EntraPass ...................................................................................................21
Before Updating EntraPass ........................................................................................... 22
Updating EntraPass ...................................................................................................... 22
Removing EntraPass ..................................................................................................23
Getting Started ......................................................................................... 25
Session Start and End ................................................................................................25
Starting the EntraPass Server ....................................................................................... 25
Starting the Gateway Program ...................................................................................... 26
Starting the EntraPass Workstation .............................................................................. 27
Accessing Information on the Server Workstation Connection Status ............................. 28
Modifying your Work Area Properties ........................................................................... 28
Retrieving Hidden Windows on the Desktop .................................................................. 28
Express Setup ............................................................................................................29
System Stand‐Alone Utilities ......................................................................................29
EntraPass Toolbars ....................................................................................................30
Basic Functions .........................................................................................................32
Finding Components .................................................................................................... 33
viii

Using the Extended Selection Box ................................................................................. 34

Selecting Components .................................................................................................. 34
Selecting a Specific Folder .......................................................................................... 35
Selecting a Specific Site or Gateway ........................................................................... 35
Printing a List or a Report ............................................................................................. 35
Displaying Components Links ........................................................................................ 36
Floating Windows ......................................................................................................... 37
System Tree View ......................................................................................................... 37
Calling the System Tree View from a Dialog ................................................................ 37
Using the Three‐Dot Button ....................................................................................... 39
Using the Extended Selection Box ............................................................................... 40
Using the Comment Field as Notepad ............................................................................ 40
System Devices ......................................................................................... 41
The Devices Toolbar .................................................................................................. 41
Comment Field ............................................................................................................. 41
Application Configuration .......................................................................................... 44
Configuring an Application ........................................................................................... 44
Defining General Parameters ...................................................................................... 44
Defining Security Parameters ..................................................................................... 45
Defining Workspaces ................................................................................................. 46
Defining Message Controls ......................................................................................... 47
Defining Alarm Controls ............................................................................................. 48
Defining Email Report Options ................................................................................... 49
Configuring a Gateway Application ............................................................................... 49
Configuring General Parameters for a Gateway ........................................................... 49
Configuring an Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface (CardGateway) .............................................. 49
Creating Server Databases Manually ........................................................................... 51
Configuring the Mirror Database and Redundant Server ................................................ 52
Configuring the SmartLink Application .......................................................................... 53
Configuring the EntraPass Video Vault Application ........................................................ 55
EntraPass Gateways Configuration ............................................................................. 58
Configuring a Multi‐site Gateway .................................................................................. 59
Sites Configuration .................................................................................................. 61
Setting up Communication Timing ................................................................................. 62
Configuring a Direct RS‐232 Connection Type ................................................................ 62
Configuring an IP Device Connection Type (Multi‐site Gateway Only) ............................. 62
Configuring an Ethernet Polling Connection Type .......................................................... 64
Configuring a Dial‐Up (RS‐232) Modem Connection Type ............................................... 64
Controllers Configuration .......................................................................................... 66
KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller ........................................................................... 66
Main Features ........................................................................................................... 66
Configuring General Parameters for Kantech Controllers ............................................... 67
Configuring the KT‐100 Controller ................................................................................. 70
Configuring the KT‐200 Controller ................................................................................. 71
Defining KT‐200 Expansion Devices ............................................................................. 71
Defining KT‐200 Auxiliary Devices ............................................................................... 71
Programming KT‐2252 Elevator Controllers ................................................................... 72
Programming REB‐8 Elevator Controllers ....................................................................... 73
Defining REB‐8 Relays ................................................................................................ 73
Configuring the KT‐300 Controller ................................................................................. 74
Configuring the KT‐300 Combus Modules ...................................................................... 74
 ix

Configuring the KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller .................................................. 75

Configuring the KT‐400 Expansion Modules ................................................................ 76
Configuring the Status Relay Activations (Multi‐site Gateway Only) ............................. 78
Defining Controller Options .......................................................................................... 78
Defining the KT‐400 Controller Local Areas ................................................................... 79
Defining the KT‐400 Elevator Floor Associations ............................................................ 80
Associating Pattern with Door and Floor Numbers ...................................................... 80
Controller Event Buffer Overflow Message ................................................................... 80
Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration .................................................80
Defining General Parameters for the KTES .................................................................... 81
Defining the Kantech Telephone Entry System parameters ............................................ 82
Defining the Language and Welcome Message Parameters ............................................ 83
Special Characters ..................................................................................................... 84
Defining the Options Parameters .................................................................................. 84
Defining the Status Relay Parameters ........................................................................... 85
Defining the Pager Options .......................................................................................... 86
Configuring Tenant Administration Level Parameters .................................................... 88
Doors Configuration ..................................................................................................88
Defining General Parameters for a Door ....................................................................... 88
Defining Door Keypad Options ...................................................................................... 90
For KT‐100 and KT‐300 Controllers ............................................................................. 90
For KT‐400 Controllers ............................................................................................... 90
Defining Door Contact Options ..................................................................................... 91
Defining REX (Request to Exit) Options ......................................................................... 92
Card Multi‐Swipe ......................................................................................................... 93
Double/Triple swipe actions ...................................................................................... 93
Defining Interlock Options (Mantrap) ........................................................................... 94
Defining Elevator Doors ............................................................................................... 94
Configuring Door Events (Multi‐site Gateway Only) ....................................................... 95
Defining Door Options for Controllers and the KTES (Multi‐site Gateway Only) .............. 96
Configuring External Alarm System Interfaces (Multi‐site Gateway Only) ....................... 97
Relay Configuration ...................................................................................................98
Defining Relays ............................................................................................................ 98
Input Configuration ...................................................................................................99
Defining Input ............................................................................................................. 99
Defining Relays and Inputs ..........................................................................................101
Defining Tamper and Trouble ......................................................................................101
Defining an Input for an Elevator Door ........................................................................102
Enabling Remote Event Reporting (Multi‐site Gateway Only) ........................................102
Output Device Configuration .................................................................................... 102
Defining General Options for an Output .......................................................................102
Associating Events with Auxiliary Outputs ....................................................................103
Integrated Panel Configuration ................................................................................. 103
Minimum Requirements to View and Use the Integration Buttons ............................. 103
The Integration process is divided in three sections: ................................................. 104
Integrated Component Configuration ........................................................................ 105
Definitions .............................................................................................. 107
Schedules Definition ................................................................................................ 107
Defining a Schedule ....................................................................................................107
To Create a 2‐day Continuous Interval ...................................................................... 108
Extended Schedule .................................................................................................. 109
x

Floors Definition ..................................................................................................... 109

Graphics Definition ................................................................................................. 109
Defining Components of a Graphic .............................................................................. 110
Designing the Background for the Graphic Window ..................................................... 112
Assigning System Components to Graphic Icons .......................................................... 113
Printing System Components and Graphics .................................................................. 113
Holiday Definition ................................................................................................... 114
Task Builder Definition ............................................................................................ 115
Minimum Requirements ............................................................................................. 115
Task Builder Dialogs Description ................................................................................. 115
Adding an Email to a Task ........................................................................................ 118
Inserting a Pager Command in a Task ........................................................................ 119
Inserting Serial Device for Messages ......................................................................... 119
Inserting Serial Device for Commands ....................................................................... 120
Inserting a File ......................................................................................................... 120
Executing a File ....................................................................................................... 120
Executing Parameters .............................................................................................. 120
Entering a Network Tag ............................................................................................ 120
Entering Commands ................................................................................................. 120
Task Building Examples ............................................................................................... 120
Building a Task with a Message Value Variable .......................................................... 121
Building a Task with a Trigger Value Variable ............................................................ 121
Building a Task with a User Information Variable ...................................................... 122
Video Integration .................................................................................... 125
The Video Toolbar .................................................................................................. 125
Video Server Configuration ...................................................................................... 126
Defining the Video Server Communication Settings ..................................................... 127
Enhancing the Security of Video Servers ..................................................................... 129
Remote Video Connection .......................................................................................... 130
Defining the EntraPass Video Vault ............................................................................. 130
Camera Definition .................................................................................................. 131
Defining a Camera ...................................................................................................... 132
Associating a Camera with an Icon .............................................................................. 132
Defining Presets and Patterns ..................................................................................... 133
Defining Events Recorded by a Camera ....................................................................... 133
To Select Camera Events and Schedules .................................................................... 133
Video Views Definition ............................................................................................ 134
Defining General Parameters for a Video View ............................................................ 134
Video Views Creation and Modification .................................................................... 136
Modifying a Video View .............................................................................................. 137
Video Triggers ........................................................................................................ 138
Defining Video Triggers .............................................................................................. 138
Recording Parameters ............................................................................................. 139
Setting Up Recording Parameters ................................................................................ 139
Setting Up Stop Recording Trigger Parameters ............................................................ 140
Video Event List ...................................................................................................... 140
Using the Video Event List .......................................................................................... 141
Finding Video Events .................................................................................................. 141
Playing Video Segments .............................................................................................. 143
Linking Video Clips with Key Frames ............................................................................ 144
 xi

Exporting Video Files ..................................................................................................144

Protecting a Video with a Password .............................................................................145
Video Playback ........................................................................................................ 145
Viewing a Video Playback ............................................................................................145
Current Recording ................................................................................................... 146
Viewing the Current Recordings ..................................................................................146
Video Desktop ......................................................................................................... 147
Displaying a Video View ..............................................................................................147
Exported Video Viewing ........................................................................................... 148
EntraPass Video Vault Browsing ............................................................................... 148
Viewing Video Segments Archived in the EntraPass Video Vault ....................................148
Operations .............................................................................................. 149
The Operation Toolbar ................................................................................................149
The Operation Dialogs .................................................................................................149
The Operations Contextual Menu ................................................................................149
The Component Status Dialog ......................................................................................150
Manual Operations on Gateway ................................................................................ 151
Selecting a Gateway ....................................................................................................151
Performing a Hard Reset .............................................................................................151
Reloading Gateway Data .............................................................................................151
Manual Operations on Sites ..................................................................................... 152
Performing Manual Operations on a Site .....................................................................153
Communication Status Messages Available in the List ............................................... 153
Manual Operations on Controllers ............................................................................ 154
Selecting a Controller .................................................................................................155
Performing a Controller Soft Reset ..............................................................................155
Performing a Controller Hard Reset .............................................................................155
Reloading a Controller Manually ..................................................................................155
Manually Reloading a Firmware Controller ............................................................... 156
Manually Unlocking a Reader Keypad ....................................................................... 156
Resetting Cards In and Cards Out Counters or all Controller local areas ..................... 156
Calculating Number of Cards In and Cards Out .............................................................156
Resetting Cards In and Cards Out Counters or all Controller local areas ..................... 156
Manual Operations on Doors .................................................................................... 157
Selecting a Door or a Door Group ................................................................................158
Locking a Door Manually .............................................................................................158
Unlocking a Door Manually .........................................................................................158
Unlocking a Door Temporarily .....................................................................................158
Resetting a Door Schedule ..........................................................................................159
Enabling a Door Reader ...............................................................................................159
Disabling a Door Reader ..............................................................................................159
Manual Operations on Elevator Doors ....................................................................... 159
Selecting an Elevator Door ..........................................................................................160
Locking Floors from Elevator Doors .............................................................................161
Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors ..........................................................................161
Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors Temporarily .......................................................161
Resetting an Elevator Door Schedule ...........................................................................161
Enabling an Elevator Floor ..........................................................................................162
Disabling an Elevator Floor ..........................................................................................162
Manual Operations on Relays ................................................................................... 162
xii

Selecting Relays ......................................................................................................... 162

Deactivating a Relay Manually .................................................................................... 163
Activating a Relay Manually ....................................................................................... 163
Activating a Relay Temporarily ................................................................................... 163
Resetting a Relay Schedule ......................................................................................... 163
Manual Operations on Inputs .................................................................................. 164
Performing Manual Operations on Inputs .................................................................... 164
Returning an Input to Its Normal State Manually ......................................................... 164
Stopping Monitoring an Input ..................................................................................... 165
Stopping Input Supervision (Shunt) Temporarily .......................................................... 165
Manual Operations on View Roll Call ........................................................................ 165
Manual Operations on Integrated Panels .................................................................. 165
Users ...................................................................................................... 167
The Users Toolbar ................................................................................................... 167
Cards Definition ...................................................................................................... 167
Issuing a New Card ..................................................................................................... 167
Issuing a New Card in Enhanced User Management Environment ................................. 168
Quick Access to Door List per Card .............................................................................. 170
Creating New Cards Using the “Save As” Feature ......................................................... 170
Issuing Cards Using the “Batch Load” Feature .............................................................. 171
Viewing and Verifying PINs ......................................................................................... 171
Viewing Cards Assigned the Same PIN ....................................................................... 171
Card Handling ......................................................................................................... 171
Editing a Card ............................................................................................................ 171
Finding a Card ............................................................................................................ 172
Deleting a Card .......................................................................................................... 172
Customizing Card Information Fields ........................................................................... 172
Cardholder Access Levels Assignation ....................................................................... 173
Assigning an Access Level to a Cardholder ................................................................... 173
Card Options Definition .............................................................................................. 173
Adding Comments to a Card ....................................................................................... 174
Limiting Card Usage ................................................................................................... 174
Assigning Pictures and Signatures ............................................................................... 175
Assigning a Picture from a File ................................................................................. 175
Assigning a Picture Using a Video Camera ................................................................. 175
Importing a signature from a file ................................................................................ 176
Adding a Signature from a Signature Capture Device ................................................... 176
Working with Photos and Signatures ........................................................................... 176
Extracting Part of an Image ...................................................................................... 177
Editing a Picture/Signature ...................................................................................... 177
Printing Badges .......................................................................................................... 177
Selecting a Badge Printer ......................................................................................... 178
Previewing and Printing Badges ................................................................................ 178
Badges Designing .................................................................................................... 178
Creating a Badge Template ......................................................................................... 179
To Specify Properties for a Badge Layout .................................................................. 179
To Edit a Badge Layout ............................................................................................. 179
To Modify the Number of Card Sides ........................................................................ 179
To Modify the Background Color .............................................................................. 179
To Add Objects to a Badge Layout ............................................................................ 180
To Incorporate Card Information Fields .................................................................... 181
 xiii

To Align Objects in the Template Layout .................................................................. 181

To Modify Card Fields Properties ............................................................................. 182
To Modify Picture Properties ................................................................................... 182
To Add Static Text Objects ....................................................................................... 183
To Add Bar Codes .................................................................................................... 183
To Set Up Barcode Properties .................................................................................. 183
To Add the Current Date .......................................................................................... 184
To Add an Image ..................................................................................................... 184
To Place Other Design Objects ................................................................................. 185
To Place a Rectangle ................................................................................................ 186
Validating Card Access ................................................................................................186
Card Printing ........................................................................................................... 187
Last Transactions Display ......................................................................................... 188
Viewing the Last Transaction .......................................................................................189
Card Access Groups Definition .................................................................................. 190
Access Levels Definition ........................................................................................... 190
Visitor Cards Definition ............................................................................................ 190
Creating a Visitor Card When Creating a New Card .......................................................191
Creating a Visitor Card Using the Card Template ..........................................................191
Card Type Definition ................................................................................................ 191
Creating a New Card Type ...........................................................................................191
Day Passes Definition .............................................................................................. 191
Creating a Day Pass .....................................................................................................192
Creating a New Day Pass Using the “Save As” Feature ..................................................192
Batch Operations on Cards ....................................................................................... 192
Performing Operations on a Group of Cards .................................................................192
CSV Files Import and Export ..................................................................................... 194
Using a Predefined Pattern .........................................................................................194
Creating a New Import/Export Pattern .........................................................................194
Exporting Cards ..........................................................................................................195
Importing Cards ..........................................................................................................196
Correcting Import/Export Errors ..................................................................................196
Tenants List ............................................................................................................ 197
Creating a New Tenants List ........................................................................................197
Adding New Tenants to the List ...................................................................................197
Importing a Tenant List ...............................................................................................199
Exporting a Tenant List ...............................................................................................200
Groups ................................................................................................... 203
The Groups Toolbar ................................................................................................. 203
Controller Group Creation ........................................................................................ 203
Door Group Creation ................................................................................................ 203
Relay Group Creation ............................................................................................... 204
Input Group Creation ............................................................................................... 204
Access Level Groups Grouping .................................................................................. 204
Floor Group Creation ............................................................................................... 204
Component Group Creation ...................................................................................... 205
System Status ......................................................................................... 207
The Status Toolbar .................................................................................................. 207
xiv

Connection List ....................................................................................................... 207

Viewing the System Connection List ............................................................................ 207
Text Status ............................................................................................................. 208
Displaying a Component Status ................................................................................... 209
Numerical Status .................................................................................................... 209
Graphic Status ........................................................................................................ 209
Viewing a Controller Status ........................................................................................ 210
Video Server Status ................................................................................................. 211
Viewing Video Server Status ....................................................................................... 211
Enabling/Disabling Video Archiving ............................................................................. 211
Database Status ...................................................................................................... 211
Server State ........................................................................................................... 213
System ................................................................................................... 215
The System Toolbar ................................................................................................ 215
Operators Definition ............................................................................................... 215
Creating or Editing an Operator .................................................................................. 216
Concurrent Logins .................................................................................................... 218
Security Level Definition ......................................................................................... 218
Creating/Modifying an Operator Security Level ........................................................... 219
Defining Login Options for an Operator ....................................................................... 219
Hiding Card Information ............................................................................................. 221
Assigning Video Custom Buttons ................................................................................. 221
Workspace Definition .............................................................................................. 221
Workspace Filtering ................................................................................................... 222
Selecting EntraPass Applications ................................................................................. 222
Defining Gateways and Sites ....................................................................................... 222
Defining Schedules ..................................................................................................... 222
Defining Controllers ................................................................................................... 223
Defining Doors ........................................................................................................... 223
Defining Relays .......................................................................................................... 223
Defining Inputs .......................................................................................................... 223
Defining Access Levels ................................................................................................ 223
Defining Card Types ................................................................................................... 224
Defining Card Access Group ........................................................................................ 224
Defining Reports ........................................................................................................ 224
Defining Graphics ....................................................................................................... 225
Defining Workspaces .................................................................................................. 225
Specifying Security Level ............................................................................................ 225
Defining Video Servers ............................................................................................... 225
Defining Cameras ....................................................................................................... 226
Defining Video Views .................................................................................................. 226
Defining Tasks ............................................................................................................ 226
Defining Panels .......................................................................................................... 226
Defining Panel Components ........................................................................................ 227
Defining Events .......................................................................................................... 227
Event Parameters Definition .................................................................................... 227
Defining Events Parameters ........................................................................................ 228
Creating Associations ................................................................................................. 230
Viewing Default Parameters ....................................................................................... 230
Deleting and Restoring Associations ........................................................................... 230
 xv

Printing Event Parameters ...........................................................................................231

Instructions Definition ............................................................................................. 232
Defining an Instruction ...............................................................................................232
Defining a SmartLink Task with Task Builder ................................................................232
Message Filters Definition ........................................................................................ 232
Defining Event for a Message Filter .............................................................................232
Database Structure Definition .................................................................................. 234
Viewing the Database Components ..............................................................................234
EntraPass Desktops ................................................................................. 235
The Desktops Toolbar .............................................................................................. 235
Work Area Customizing ............................................................................................ 235
Creating a Temporary Workspace ................................................................................235
Changing the Display Properties ..................................................................................236
Specific Desktop Customizing ................................................................................... 237
Customizing a Desktop for a “Full Access” Operator .....................................................237
Customizing a Desktop for a “Read‐Only” Operator ......................................................237
Transferring a Customized Desktop .............................................................................238
Desktops Colors ..........................................................................................................238
Message List Desktop .............................................................................................. 238
Viewing and Sorting System Events .............................................................................239
Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops ....................................................239
Performing Tasks on System Messages ........................................................................240
Add, Modify or Delete Tagged Events ..........................................................................242
Picture Desktop ....................................................................................................... 242
Modifying Pictures Display Options .............................................................................242
Filtered Messages Desktop ....................................................................................... 243
Configuring a Filtered Messages Desktop .....................................................................243
Custom Report Desktop ........................................................................................... 243
Configuring a Custom Reports Desktop ........................................................................244
To Create and Edit Custom Reports from a Desktop .................................................. 244
To Display Custom Report State in Real‐time ............................................................ 244
Comment Entry and Display ........................................................................................244
Playing archived video recordings from a Desktop Message list ....................................245
Alarms Desktop ....................................................................................................... 245
Defining an Alarms Desktop ........................................................................................245
Viewing System Alarm Messages .................................................................................246
Displaying Alarm Desktops Automatically ....................................................................247
Acknowledging Alarms/Events .....................................................................................248
Automatic Acknowledgement .................................................................................. 249
To Acknowledge an Alarm Message .......................................................................... 249
To Acknowledge Alarms from the Alarms Desktop .................................................... 249
Mandatory Alarm Comment ..................................................................................... 250
Instruction Desktop ................................................................................................. 250
Viewing an Instruction About an Alarm Message ..........................................................250
Graphic Desktop ...................................................................................................... 250
Viewing Graphics in the Graphic Desktop .....................................................................250
Video Desktop ......................................................................................................... 252
Defining a Video desktop ............................................................................................252
Using the Video desktop .............................................................................................252
Video Server Status ................................................................................................. 253
xvi

Viewing the video server full status ............................................................................ 254

Reports .................................................................................................. 257
The Report Toolbar ................................................................................................. 257
Quick Report Definition ........................................................................................... 257
Defining a Quick Report .............................................................................................. 257
Custom Reports Definition ...................................................................................... 259
Defining a Default “All Events” Report ........................................................................ 260
Defining a Custom Report ........................................................................................... 261
Defining Components for a Historical Report ............................................................ 261
Defining Card Options for a Custom Report ............................................................... 262
Defining a Card Use Report ......................................................................................... 262
Defining Automatic Report Schedules ......................................................................... 263
Specifying Additional Options for an Automatic Report ............................................. 264
Defining a Report Output Format ................................................................................ 265
Requesting Reports .................................................................................................... 267
Requesting an Event Report ........................................................................................ 267
Emailed Reports ..................................................................................................... 268
Defining a Report to Email .......................................................................................... 268
Send Reports to Workstations Using SmartLink ......................................................... 268
In/Out Reports Definition ........................................................................................ 269
Defining In/Out Reports ............................................................................................. 269
In/Out Reports Request ........................................................................................... 270
Requesting a In/Out Report Manually ......................................................................... 270
Operations on In/Out .............................................................................................. 270
Adding a Transaction in the In/Out Database .............................................................. 270
Roll Call Reports ..................................................................................................... 272
Functionalities ........................................................................................................... 272
Roll Call Report generation ......................................................................................... 273
Example of a Roll Call Report ................................................................................... 273
Report State ........................................................................................................... 273
Archive Viewing ...................................................................................................... 274
Displaying a Report .................................................................................................... 274
Previewing Reports .................................................................................................... 274
Previewing In/Out Reports ......................................................................................... 275
EntraPass Options ................................................................................... 277
The Options Toolbar ............................................................................................... 277
Default Display Format Selection ............................................................................. 277
Defining a Card Display Format ................................................................................... 277
Connection Password Modification .......................................................................... 279
Changing the Connection Password ............................................................................. 279
System Language Selection ...................................................................................... 279
Changing the System Language ................................................................................... 279
Printers Selection and Configuration ........................................................................ 280
Selecting and Setting Up a Log Printer ........................................................................ 280
Selecting and Setting Up a Report Printer ................................................................... 280
Selecting and Setting Up a Badge Printer .................................................................... 281
System Date & Time Modification ............................................................................ 281
Multimedia Devices Configuration ........................................................................... 281
 xvii

Selecting an Alarm Sound ............................................................................................281

Defining Video Options ...............................................................................................282
Setting Up the Signature Capture Device .....................................................................282
System Parameters Configuration ............................................................................. 283
Server Parameters ......................................................................................................283
Server Logs ............................................................................................................. 283
Disk Space ............................................................................................................... 283
Redundant Server .................................................................................................... 283
Logout and Idle ....................................................................................................... 284
Schedule ................................................................................................................. 284
Diagnostic ............................................................................................................... 285
Icon Status .............................................................................................................. 286
Service Login Information ........................................................................................ 286
Firmware Parameters ..................................................................................................286
KT‐100 .................................................................................................................... 286
KT‐300 .................................................................................................................... 286
KT‐400 .................................................................................................................... 286
KTES ....................................................................................................................... 287
Kantech IP Link ........................................................................................................ 287
KT‐401 .................................................................................................................... 287
Image Parameters .......................................................................................................287
Picture and Badging ................................................................................................. 288
Graphic ................................................................................................................... 288
Report Parameters ......................................................................................................289
CSV ......................................................................................................................... 289
Disk Space ............................................................................................................... 289
User Name Format .................................................................................................. 289
Video Parameters .......................................................................................................290
Parameters ............................................................................................................. 290
Snap ....................................................................................................................... 291
Intellex ................................................................................................................... 291
HDVR ...................................................................................................................... 291
TVR ......................................................................................................................... 291
Time Parameters ........................................................................................................292
Credentials Parameters ...............................................................................................292
Card ........................................................................................................................ 292
Workstation and Server ..............................................................................................293
Toolbar Buttons ...................................................................................................... 293
Integration .............................................................................................................. 293
Dealer Information .................................................................................................. 293
Kap Reminder .............................................................................................................293
Pop‐up Message ...................................................................................................... 293
Email ...................................................................................................................... 294
Backup Scheduler .................................................................................................... 294
Configuring the Backup when the EntraPass Server is Running as a Service ...................295
Scheduling Automatic Backups of the System Database ................................................295
Custom Messages .................................................................................................... 296
Setting up Custom Messages .......................................................................................296
System Registration ................................................................................................. 297
Checking Server and Workstation Databases .............................................................. 297
Server Database .........................................................................................................297
Workstation Database .................................................................................................297
xviii

The EntraPass Server .............................................................................. 299

Server Launch ......................................................................................................... 299
Server Connection list ............................................................................................. 300
Viewing Applications Connected to the Server ............................................................ 300
Backups ................................................................................................................. 300
The Backup Toolbar .................................................................................................... 300
Creating Backups of Type D, A, and T .......................................................................... 301
Restoring Data (D, A and T) ........................................................................................ 302
Viewing the System Logs ......................................................................................... 302
Viewing System Error Logs .......................................................................................... 302
Server Utilities ....................................................................................................... 303
System Utilities ....................................................................................... 305
Database Utility ...................................................................................................... 306
Running the Database Utility ...................................................................................... 306
Verifying Database Integrity ..................................................................................... 306
Updating Database Fields ......................................................................................... 306
Verifying Database Index ......................................................................................... 307
Verifying Database Links .......................................................................................... 307
Verifying Database Hierarchy ................................................................................... 307
verifying Database Archive Files ............................................................................... 307
Verifying In/Out Files ............................................................................................... 307
Verifying Video Event Files ....................................................................................... 308
Swapping Descriptions ............................................................................................. 308
Cleaning the Database ............................................................................................. 308
Rebuilding Card Last Transaction Files ...................................................................... 308
EntraPass Video Vault ............................................................................................. 308
Installing the EntraPass Video Vault ............................................................................ 309
Launching the EntraPass Video Vault .......................................................................... 309
Managing Archived Video Segments ............................................................................ 309
Vocabulary Editor ................................................................................................... 312
Installing the Vocabulary Editor .................................................................................. 312
Translating the System Language ................................................................................ 312
Integrating the Custom Language in EntraPass ............................................................ 314
Distributing the New System Vocabulary ..................................................................... 314
Updating the System Vocabulary ................................................................................ 315
Upgrading the System Vocabulary ............................................................................... 315
Express Setup Program ............................................................................................ 316
Configuring a Multi‐site Gateway Site Using Express Setup .......................................... 316
Configuring a Controller Using Express Setup .............................................................. 320
Configuring a KTES Using Express Setup ...................................................................... 320
Defining Relays ........................................................................................................ 321
Defining Inputs ........................................................................................................ 321
Defining Auxiliary Outputs (LED and Buzzer) ............................................................. 321
Quick Report Viewer ............................................................................................... 322
PING Diagnostic ...................................................................................................... 323
Workstation ........................................................................................................... 323
Migration Utility ..................................................................................................... 324
Migrating EntraPass Special Edition to Corporate Edition ............................................. 324
Migrating EntraPass Special Edition Database to Corporate Database ........................ 324
 xix

The Gateway Interface ............................................................................................. 324

Starting the Gateway ..................................................................................................324
Reloading the Gateway ...............................................................................................325
MS/SQL Interface .................................................................................................... 325
Installing the MS/SQL Interface ...................................................................................326
Configuring the CardGateway ......................................................................................326
Starting the CardGateway ...........................................................................................326
The SmartLink Interface ........................................................................................... 328
Configuring the SmartLink Application .........................................................................329
Starting the SmartLink Application ........................................................................... 329
Network Consumption ............................................................................................. 329
EntraPass Online Help .............................................................................................. 331
Getting the Online Help ..............................................................................................331
Animated Icons ....................................................................................... 335
Controllers .............................................................................................................. 335
Doors ..................................................................................................................... 337
Relays .................................................................................................................... 341
Inputs ..................................................................................................................... 343
Sites and Gateways .................................................................................................. 346
Controller Site: ........................................................................................................ 346
Gateway: ................................................................................................................ 347
Gateway (Gateway Software Interface): ................................................................... 348
EntraPass Application .............................................................................................. 349
Others .................................................................................................................... 349
Index .......................................................................................................................................... 351
xx
Introduction 1

Introduction
Welcome to EntraPass, a powerful multi‐user access control system that provides all the features
required in the most demanding applications.
What is EntraPass? EntraPass is a comprehensive, menu‐driven access control software package. Among
the many features EntraPass offers, you will find:
• A new database engine (Sybase)
• Remote communication capability
• SmartLink interface with paging systems, HVAC systems, email and more
• Redundancy server for fail‐safe operation (optional)
• Connection to the Kantech IP Link
• KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300 and KT‐400 compatibility (Note)
NOTE: You can connect a loop of KT‐200 controllers on the RS‐485 of the KT‐400 if not mixed with other
controllers (Kantech KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400).
• Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES)
• Third party hardware integration
• Express setup
• Local anti‐passback, interaction between door controllers, and DayPass for temporary visitors
• Elevator control
• Integrated badging capability
• Interactive floor plans
• Configurable desktops by operator
• CardGateway (optional)
• Multiple reader technology
• External alarm system interfacing
• In/Out reporting, Email reports capability
• Visual diagnostics
• Video Integration with American Dynamics family of Intellex® Digital Video Management System (DVMS)
• Support of 40 TVR II
• Support of 40 NVR
• Live video display, recorded video playback, local event logging and saving
• Video archiving via EntraPass Video Vault
• Vocabulary editor
• Intrusion Integration
• Windows 7 Pro 64‐bit supported
What is Access Control? Access control consists of a set of components (door readers, exit detectors,
motion detectors, etc.) that are professionally installed and electronically controlled. System
workstations are used to receive event messages, acknowledge alarms, modify the system database, etc.
2 Introduction

A supporting advantage of access control is that all system events are carefully archived and can be
easily retrieved for inspection purposes.

EntraPass Main Features

Kantech Advantage Program (KAP): KAP provides 12 months of free upgrades and online training for
end users. For further details, refer to the Application Note, New Optional Kantech Advantage Program,
DN1874.
SmartLink. EntraPass enables organizations to interface to most intelligent devices such as CCTV
multiplexers, alphanumeric pager systems, automated emails, HVAC systems, LCD panels, video matrix
switchers, etc., using an RS‐232 or network connection between one of the EntraPass SmartLink
workstation and remote EntraPass WebStations. Advanced system integration can be accomplished by
using the bi‐directional SmartLink to communicate with software applications such as In/Out systems,
Badging systems, Human Resource Management systems, Student Registration systems, etc., through
TCP/IP, an RS‐232 port or with DLLs. This allows complete and real‐time data exchanges between
systems, eliminating redundant data entry.
Mirror Database and Redundant Server. The Mirror Database and Redundant Server component
provides an alternative duplication mechanism in case of failures and errors of the Primary Server. The
mirror database creates a real‐time copy of the system database on the Redundant Server. In the event
of a failure from the primary server, the mirror database launches the Redundancy Server which
supports all the features and functionality of the primary server, except the CardGateway program. Once
the primary server returns online, all archives are merged and the entire database is copied or merged
from the Redundancy Server.
Kantech IP Link. EntraPass is compatible with the Kantech IP Link that provides a secure ethernet
connection that serves as a polling device that will control the excess bandwidth by communicating to
the Multi‐site Gateways only when necessary. The Kantech IP Link’s main function is to relay information
between the controllers and the gateway.
KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300 and KT‐400 Controllers. EntraPass is compatible with Kantech’s KT‐100, KT‐200,
KT‐300 and KT‐400 controllers. This has an added benefit when upgrading existing sites that require
more flexibility and improved user interfaces. It also allows installers to select the controller that best
suits their customers’ needs and budget.
KT‐400. The KT‐400 controller is a four‐door ethernet encrypted controller that is used as a door
controller and as a IP communication device for a remote site loop.
Expansion Modules for the KT‐400. The KT‐400 controller allows connection of expansion modules in
order to add outputs, like relays and open drain outputs, and inputs. Mixing up input and output
expansion modules gives the ability to connect up to 256 inputs and 256 outputs per KT‐400 Controller.
• KT‐MOD‐REL8: This expansion module is an 8‐relay expansion module used as general relays or elevator
control outputs. The module supports daisy chaining which can add up to 32 KT‐MOD‐REL8 modules for a
total of 256 external relays per KT‐400 controller.
• KT‐MOD‐INP16: This expansion module is an input module that adds up to 16 zones to the KT‐400
controller. The module supports daisy chaining; you can interconnect up to 15 KT‐MOD‐INP16 modules
Introduction 3

for a total of 240 external inputs per KT‐400. Adding the 16 onboard inputs of the KT‐400 gives a total of
256 inputs per KT‐400.
• KT‐MOD‐OUT16: This expansion module is an open drain to 12 VDC 16 output module. It can be used for
elevator access control (may require additional hardware). The module supports daisy chaining; you can
interconnect up to 16 KT‐MOD‐OUT16 modules for a total of 256 external outputs per KT‐400.
Kantech Telephone Entry System. The Kantech Telephone Entry System enables users to grant access to
the building, to their visitors, via their own land telephone or cellular telephone. This telephone line can
also serve, via an integrated modem, as a programming link or a monitoring link. The KTES is designed to
be a stand‐alone unit as well as a part of a complete access control system such as EntraPass from
Kantech or any access control system. It can communicate with EntraPass through a Multi‐site Gateway
for programming and monitoring. The KTES installation can also include Kantech controllers (KT‐100, KT‐
300 and KT‐400) as well as any controller that supports a Wiegand interface port. Also, in order to ease
the process of importing and exporting tenant lists, an automated procedure has been implemented to
guide you through the various steps. For details concerning the installation and the local programming
of the KTES, refer to the KTES Installation Manual, DN1769 and KTES Programming Manual, DN1770.
Express Setup. The Express Setup program enables installers to automatically define and configure the
most standard system components. This saves installation time and prevents setup errors. With Express
Setup, the system is fully functional and ready to test the hardware and wiring before the installer
makes the customized changes necessary for a particular site.
EntraPass WebStation. The EntraPass WebStation is a tool that allows for card management from a
remote location to be used with the regular EntraPass product. In addition, it allows manual operations,
door, relay, input, historical reports (.PDF, CSV, XLS, TXT formats) and web views.The interface is ideal to
provide card management to Security personnel, secretaries and managers without the need to deploy a
full EntraPass workstation. The concurrent logins option will provide access to a pre‐determined number
of users according to the options registered in EntraPass. For details concerning the installation and the
usage of the EntraPass WebStation, refer to the Installation Manual, DN1864 and User Manual, DN1709.
Elevator Control Capability. EntraPass allows installers to program up to 64 floors per elevator cab using
expansion devices such as KT‐PC4216, KT‐PC4204 (16 floors maximum) with the KT‐300 or such as KT‐
MOD‐OUT16, KT‐MOD‐INP16 or KT‐MOD‐REL8 with the KT‐400. This indispensable feature in a multi‐
tenant building allows facility managers to restrict specific floor access to authorized cardholders.
Integrated Badging. The Integrated Badging feature was added to EntraPass to allow users to design
and print badges. Pictures and signatures can be imported or, with the necessary devices, captured and
incorporated into cards for printing badges.
Interactive Floor Plans. EntraPass can import and display high‐resolution graphics created on CAD‐type
systems (converted to .jpg or .bmp), allowing you to design a graphic‐based system that operators can
use with minimal training. Interactive icons can be added to floor plans to display component status and
offer full manual operation of the component in real‐time.
Configurable Desktops by Operator. With EntraPass, each Operator can be assigned up to 8
configurable desktops. These desktops display selected windows featuring message events, user photos,
filtered events, high‐resolution graphics and videos, and alarm instructions. Desktops can contain any
combination of windows.
4 Introduction

Interfacing with External Alarm Panels. KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400 controllers allow users to arm,
disarm, and postpone the arming of an external alarm panel . This allows EntraPass to easily integrate
with an external alarm system.
In/Out Feature. The In/Out feature is a low‐cost alternative to high‐priced dedicated In/Out systems. It
enables operators to print or download time sheets in a CSV format to a payroll system.
Visual Diagnostics. EntraPass offers on‐screen real‐time visual representation of the system devices,
with conditions updated in real‐time, including high resolution floor plans that can be imported and
displayed on screen. Interactive system icons can be added to the graphic to display component status in
real‐time. Manual operations may be performed from the real‐time system graphic.
Enhanced Video Integration. EntraPass adds real‐time monitoring capability as a response to the
growing importance of video in access control systems. Integration with American Dynamics’ Intellex®
digital video management system through the powerful Intellex Application Programming Interface (API)
provides real‐time video monitoring as well as video playback. Video can be linked to real‐time video
monitoring as well as video playback. Video can be linked to access events and recorded from one to
sixteen cameras from different Intellex units simultaneously. Presets, sequences, dome control and 1x1,
2x2, 3x3, and 4x4 views are available through the EntraPass software. All cameras can be called up
directly from a floor plan simply by double‐clicking on the camera or dome icon. Operators can configure
viewing parameters for digital video applications through an EntraPass user interface.
EntraPass Video Vault. EntraPass Video Vault enables all video clips from an Intellex alarm or an
EntraPass video alarm to be automatically stored as Audio Video Interlaced format (.AVI) files or Kantech
Video Intellex (.KVI), Kantech Video Archive (.KVA) and American Dynamics’ Network Client’s video
format (.IMG) which can be password protected. Each EntraPass Video Vault may be connected to as
many Intellex units as defined within the EntraPass software. Video may be saved to up to 24 pre‐
programmed hard drive locations. A .bmp image may be associated automatically with each video clip,
and a thumbnail image may be created on the first frame of the video clip.
Vocabulary Editor. Simple and easy program used to translate the software in the language of your
choice. By default, EntraPass is available in English, French, Spanish, German and Italian. It can also be
translated in up to 99 languages, by using this feature.
Intrusion Integration. Addition of a manual operation on the intrusion components. A full access of the
Panel Virtual Keypad attached to a KT‐400 is now provided. A pass‐through mechanism on the KT‐400
links the Panel Manager of the Gateway directly with the panel’s DLL. An auto‐detection function has
been added to fetch the data directly from the hardware panel in order to optimize the provisioning
process. A new event parameter type has also been added to handle most of the Intrusion generic
events.

EntraPass Manual and Help

Using the Reference Manual
The Reference Manual is designed for EntraPass system installers, administrators and users. You may
refer to the hard copy of the manual (User Manual) or to the on‐line version in pdf format.
Introduction 5

Getting Help
Our window‐level Help will provide you with immediate and context‐related Help. Press [F1] on your
keyboard to display the Help related to the active window or select Help > Contents from the EntraPass
menu bar. For immediate help, use the Help button, found in all the system windows. You may also use
the right‐click option; it may either display a shortcut menu or the help file of the active window.
6 Introduction

Technical Support
If you cannot find the answer to your question in this manual or in the Help files, we recommend you
contact your system installer. Your installer is familiar with your system configuration and should be able
to answer any of your questions. Should you need additional information, refer to the following table for
the Technical Support Help Desk in your area.

Country/Region Phone Numbers Support Hours Email

North America Toll Free +888 222 1560 (GMT -05:00)

Direct: +450 444 2030

US and Canada 8:00 to 20:00 [email protected]
Fax: +450 444 2029

Latin America (GMT -03:00)

Direct: +5411 4711 8711

Argentina 9:00 to 18:00 [email protected]
Fax: +5411 4711 8201

Asia (GMT +08:00)

Asia Pacific 8:30 to 18:00 [email protected]

Europe Toll Free +800 CALL TYCO / +800 2255 8926 (GMT +01:00)

Bahrain +800 04127

France +33 04 72 79 14 83

Greece +00 800 31 22 94 53

Russia +8 10 800 2052 1031

Spain +900 10 19 45 8:00 to 18:00 [email protected]

Turkey +00 800 31 92 30 07

United Arab Emirates +800 0 31 0 7123

+44 08701 ADT SUP / 44 08701 238 787

United Kingdom Direct: +31 475 352 722
Fax: +31 475 352 725
Introduction 7

System Architecture
8 Introduction
Software Installation 9

Software Installation
Before any installation takes place, make sure that the computers on which the software will be installed
meet the necessary requirements.
For information concerning hardware equipment installed with the software, refer to the
documentation supplied with the hardware.
This chapter contains information related to the EntraPass software. You will find:
• System requirements
• Software installation and upgrading
Depending on the system configuration, there are different system hardware requirements for the
installation of the EntraPass software.

Recommended Operating Systems

Minimum System Requirements

Make sure that the computer on which you are installing the software meets the following minimum
requirements:
• Dual Core processor
• 4GB RAM
• AGP or PCI Express 8X graphics card with 64 MB memory and DirectX 9.0 support
• 10/100 Base‐T network adaptor

EntraPass WebStation Server

• Operating systems: Windows XP Pro, Server 2003, Server 2008, Vista and version 7 32 and 64‐bit
• Latest Windows Service Packs and High Priority updates must be installed
• Processor: Pentium IV at 1.8GHz
10 Software Installation

• Minimum hard disk space: 10 GB

• 1 GB RAM
• Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) version 5.1 or higher with the latest security updates
• Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 with the latest security updates
• Adobe Flash Player 9.0 must be installed on the client’s PC when accessing the web pages.
For more information on installing and configuring the EntraPass WebStation, please refer to the
EntraPass WebStation User Manual, DN1709 and Installation Manual, DN1864.

Operating System Compatibility

• Windows XP Pro in 32‐bit version
• Server 2003/2008 Standard/Enterprise
• Vista Pro and Windows 7 Pro (all in 32 and 64‐bit version)
• All operating systems should have their latest Service Packs and Updates.

Virtual Environment Supported

• VMware Workstation Version 7

Additional Requirements
For several applications, you can use the following devices:
• A video capture card—to capture user images for card identification
• A sound card—to use warning sounds when an alarm is reported
• A badge printer— to print badges (Badging)
• A signature capture device— to capture signatures (Badging)
• A log printer—(dot‐matrix or laser) to print events (messages and alarms)
• A Report printer—(laser) to print reports

Installation Kit
The EntraPass installation package contains EntraPass software CD‐ROM (and USB flash drive) as well as
the User Manual DN1946. It also contains the CBLK‐10 kit which includes 30 m (100 ft) RS‐232 cable with
RJ‐12 connectors, the DB9F to RJ‐12 (740‐1023) adaptor and the DB9M to DB25F (740‐1041) adaptor. Your
installation CD‐ROM or USB flash drive allows you to install the basic components of your EntraPass:
• 1 Server and 1 server workstation
• 1 Multi‐Site Gateway application
• 2 additional workstations
• 1 WebStation license (must be activated for usage)
• SmartLink
The installation USB drive also includes advanced system components. They require an additional license:

• 1 or 6 additional workstation applications (up to 20 + 1)

• 40 Multi‐Site gateways
• Redundant Server & Mirror Database
Software Installation 11

• Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface
• EntraPass Video Vault
• EntraPass WebStation (1 or 3 license packages with a maximum of 3+1 concurrent licenses).
NOTE: Additional options can only be installed after the EntraPass Server has been registered. They
require an additional license.

InstallShield Wizard
The InstallShield Wizard will guide you through the various installation scenarios. Table 2‐1 lists the
various installation scenarios.

Procedure Page
1‐ Installing EntraPass (New Installation) 11
2‐ Adding System Components 18
3‐ Upgrading EntraPass 21
4‐ Updating EntraPass 22
5‐ Removing EntraPass 23

Installing EntraPass (New Installation)

The system will be up and running in three steps. Installers need to:
1 Install the software using the System Installation Code located in the CD‐ROM pocket.
2 Register the system using the Registration Confirmation Code provided by Kantech Customer Assistance.
3 Install the first components that are part of the installation kit (three workstation applications and 1
Gateway; the first workstation application is automatically installed during the installation of the
EntraPass Server).
NOTE: The software is fully functional even before it is registered. However, an unregistered system is
restricted to ten cards. Moreover, there is an automatic logout after 1 hour of idle time, that is, when
there is no action on the keyboard. After an automatic logout, operators need to enter a 20‐character
password; it is displayed in the lower part of the screen, in a yellow box.

Customizable Contact Information

The information displayed in the About window is customizable prior to software installation.
12 Software Installation

• Open the file EntraPassCustom.ini located in the CustomConfig directory:

• Modify the parameters accordingly (refer to the picture below for the location of each parameter):

[Custom]
LOGINNAME=
PASSWORD=
WEBSITE= your‐text (see #1)
TECHSUPPORTWEBSITE= your‐text (see #2)
EMAIL= your‐text (see #3)
CUSTOMERTITLE= your‐text (see #4)
CUSTOMERNOTICE= your‐text (see #5)
MASTERLOGO=
DETAILSLOGO= your‐image‐file (see #6)
PROGRAMLOGO=
WATERMARKLOGO=
KTESTKANTECHLOGO=
Software Installation 13

KTESPRODUCTIMAGE= Image #5, Reference 2

Customizable Background
The background watermark image can be customized prior to software installation.

• Open the file EntraPassCustom.ini located in the CustomConfig directory:

14 Software Installation

• Modify the WATERMARKLOGO parameter by adding your image file name (do not forget to put the image
file into the same directory):

[Custom]
LOGINNAME=
PASSWORD=
WEBSITE=
TECHSUPPORTWEBSITE=
EMAIL=
CUSTOMERTITLE=
CUSTOMERNOTICE=
MASTERLOGO=
DETAILSLOGO=
PROGRAMLOGO=
WATERMARKLOGO= your‐image‐file
KTESTKANTECHLOGO=

System Installation
1 Before you begin the installation, make sure that no EntraPass application is running.
2 Insert the software CD‐ROM into the CD‐ROM drive (or the USB flash drive in a USB port). The
installation program should start automatically if your computer is configured to autorun. If the
installation program does not start automatically, click Start > Run, then enter D:\Setup.exe (where D: is
the CD‐ROM drive) in the displayed field.
3 Before you go any further, you will be prompted to Choose setup language. English is selected by default.
NOTE: The setup (InstallShield) language cannot be changed later on if you need to perform an
EntraPass update or install system components with a different language. If you must change the
setup language, you have to remove and re‐install the software.
NOTE: The system and database language depends on the language you select when installing the
software. For example, if you select “English”, it will be the system default language at start up. The
system and database language can be changed from the EntraPass Server and EntraPass Workstation.
4 Click OK. The Welcome screen will be displayed.
• All the installation windows look the same as the Welcome window.
• You will notice the software version you are about to install is located at the top left.
• The middle section of the window contains the instructions you will follow throughout the
installation process. The instructions will be updated automatically when you click Next.
• Back and Next buttons are available at the bottom of the screen to allow navigating back and forth
within the installation screens if you wish to verify or modify a parameter you previously setup.
• You can Cancel the installation at any time.
5 Click Next to continue the installation. The Setup Start window will be displayed.
Software Installation 15

6 Select the operation(s) you wish to perform. The first set of options are for new installs and the last
option is for updates. During the first installation, you will only be able to select one of the install
options. We suggest that you install the first option in the list.
• Install Server, Database and Workstation: This option will install the EntraPass Corporate Edition
system. It will be grayed out if the application is already installed on the machine.
• Install Additional Workstation: This option is selected when you are installing an additional
workstation. It will be grayed out if a server or a workstation is already installed on the machine.
• Install EntraPass System Components: This option allows installing EntraPass optional or additional
system components such as Gateways, WebStations, SmartLink, Video Vault, Oracle/MS‐SQL
Interface and Mirror Database and Redundant Server, etc. The option will be grayed out if the
component has already been installed on the computer.
• Install EntraPass System Tools: This option allows installing EntraPass System Utilities (Vocabulary
Editor, Report Viewer, Video Viewer, SmartLink Network Interface, etc.). An option is greyed out if
the utility has already been installed on the machine.
• Update Installed Applications: This option will be grayed out if the system has not been installed
previously. To update your EntraPass system, see "Updating EntraPass" on page 21.
7 Click Next. The Serial Number window will be displayed.
8 Enter the serial number for the EntraPass Corporate Server or Software. The information is located in the
CD‐ROM pocket. Make sure to enter the correct digits. The Next button is only enabled if the serial
number is valid.
9 Click Next. The system displays the software End‐User License Agreement.
10 Select I accept... if you understand and agree with the conditions described in the end‐user license
agreement or click I do not accept... to cancel the installation.
NOTE: You will not be able to complete the installation if you refuse the terms of the license
agreement. The Next button will remain grayed out until you select I accept...
11 Click Next. The Customer Information screen will be displayed.
12 Enter the User Name and the Company Name.
13 Select the user type: Anyone who will use this computer or Only the person currently logged in and
registered in the system.
14 Click Next. The Choose Destination Location window will be displayed.
15 You can keep the selected directory and click Next, or select another one.
• If you want to change the directory where to install the application, click Change. The Choose Folder
dialog will pop up where you can select the new installation directory.
• Type in the destination directory where you want to install EntraPass or double‐click the directory
structure all the way down to the destination directory. Then, click Ok. The path will be indicated in
the Choose Destination Location window.
16 Click Next. The Ready to Install the Program window will be displayed.
17 If you need to review the parameters you’ve setup, click Back. If everything is ready for the installation,
click Next. The installation will begin.
16 Software Installation

18 During the installation process, you will be prompted to

Select the primary and secondary languages. This will
define the language used to build the database and the
languages used to run EntraPass.
19 Click OK. The installation will continue.
20 During the installation process, you will be prompted to
Install:
• the Intellex API,
• If the Intellex API is required, click Yes (Note) and follow the instructions.
• the EntraPass WebStation,
• If the WebStation is required or is already installed, click Yes and follow the instructions (Note).
• If the WebStation is not required, click No.
NOTE: The update process of the WebStation will automatically creates a backup of the existing
WebStation.The EntraPass WebStation backup folder will be located in the following directory:
• C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\EntraPassWebStation\Backup\YYYY-M-DD_H-MM\EntraPassWebStation
21 Once the options are completed, the system will prompt you to consult the Read Me file. You can also
select to install the applications as Windows services. Applications that run as Windows services will
automatically restart after a system shut down even if accidental.
22 Click Next. The system will verify if there are any other applications or utilities you can install. If this is
the case, the following message will popup on screen:
• If you want to install other applications, click Yes and start
over at number 4.
NOTE: If the application you want to install requires a serial
number, you must call the Kantech Technical Support Desk to
register the system before you can go any further: see "System
Registration" on page 16.
• If the installation is completed and you do not wish to install other applications, click No. The
InstallShield Wizard Complete window will popup:
23 You can select to restart your computer at this time or do it later.
24 Remove the CD‐ROM from the CD‐ROM drive (or the USB flash drive).
25 Click Finish to complete the installation.
NOTE: You must restart the computer after the installation.
26 Your next step will be to contact Kantech Technical Support desk to get your registration key number for
additional systems components. Follow instructions in the next section of this manual.

System Registration
It is recommended to register the system as soon as possible so that users can install additional options
and use the access system with no restrictions. In fact, though the system is functional even before the
system registration, it is limited to only 10 cards. Moreover, when the system is not yet registered,
Software Installation 17

operators are logged out after one hour of idle time; then they have to enter the randomly‐generated
20‐character password each time they are logged out.

Registering the System

1 Click the Server icon on the computer desktop. You may also start the EntraPass Server from the
Windows® Start menu (Start > EntraPass Corporate Edition > Server > Server)
2 Click Login / Logout button. The Operator Login window appears.

3 Enter Kantech in the User name field (not case sensitive). Enter the temporary 20‐character password
displayed at the bottom of the Operator login window (the temporary password appears on new
installations only and is highlighted in yellow). The System registration window appears.
18 Software Installation

4 Click the Temporary password in use (...) yellow button to register the system. This button is visible on
new installations only. The System Registration window appears.
NOTE: There are two ways of registering a new system; register online at www.kantech.com or contact
your local
NOTE: technical support to get the registration confirmation code.
5 Go to www.kantech.com and click on the Member Center.
NOTE: If you are not a member yet, submit your request and your membership confirmation should be
received by email within 1‐2 business days.
6 Click on Kantech Registration.
7 Enter the System Serial Number and follow the instructions online.
8 Return to the EntraPass System Registration screen and enter the Registration Confirmation Code, then
click OK. The OK button is only enabled when the registration code is valid.
NOTE: If you exit the Server main window without registering the system, the Change Authentication
Password window is displayed. It is no longer displayed when the system has been registered.

Adding System Components

Once the Server has been registered, you may install additional system components. These include
EntraPass applications and other utilities such as the EntraPass Video Vault application. Before you
install system components, make sure that the designated computer meets the minimum requirements.
You do not need to call Kantech Technical Support to install the first two workstation applications and
the first gateway application. These are part of the installation package.
1 In the Server main window, click on the Connection toolbar (or Workstation application > Options
toolbar), then click on System Registration. The System registration window appears.
NOTE: The EntraPass server is supplied with three workstation applications and one Multi‐site
Gateway application. One workstation application is automatically installed when the server is
installed. It is used for configuration purposes. It does not appear in the lower pane because it is
automatically installed and registered. Use the installation CD‐ROM and the Installation codes to
install the four additional workstation applications. Make sure that the computer on which they will be
installed meets the minimum requirements.
2 Click the Print button to print the Installation codes, so that you can take the codes where you are
installing the workstation or gateway applications. To avoid errors, do not copy the codes on a piece of
paper.
NOTE: When you install an advanced option (for example an additional gateway), you can configure its
sites using the Express Setup program.
3 From the System registration window, select the component you want to install. Then select the Click
here to install component button (left‐hand pane). The Component Registration (Name of component)
window appears.
Software Installation 19

4 Enter the Option Serial Number (located on the Option Certificate).

NOTE: There are two ways of registered a new component; register online at www.kantech.com or
contact your local Kantech technical support to get the registration confirmation code.
5 Go to www.kantech.com and click on the Member Center.
NOTE: If you are not a member yet, submit your request and your membership confirmation should be
received by email within 1‐2 business days.
6 Click on Kantech Registration.
7 Enter the System Serial Number and follow the instructions online.
8 Return to the EntraPass Component Registration screen and enter the Registration Confirmation Code,
then click OK. The OK button is only enabled when both codes are valid.
NOTE: After entering the Registration Confirmation Code, the system generates an Installation Code in
the System registration screen. Blue flags identify components that have been created, but not yet
activated. Green flags indicate components that have been activated. The installation code is required
when you are ready to install the component with the EntraPass CD‐ROM.

9 Repeat steps 3 to 8 for each system component.

NOTE: You need to establish communication between the EntraPass Server and the computer where the
new component/option is installed (if applicable). Perform this step only if you have installed the
component/option on a computer other than where the EntraPass Workstation application has been
installed.

System Components Edition

EntraPass enable users to assign custom names to applications for easy identification in system events.
You can also modify components names in their definition menu (Devices > EntraPass Applications).
20 Software Installation

Assigning a Descriptive Name to an Application

1 From the Registration window, select an application, then
click the Edit button. The Edit a component window
appears.
2 Enter a descriptive name for the selected EntraPass
application in the Description fields. It is recommended to
enter two names, one in the primary language and the
second in the secondary language if EntraPass runs in two
languages.
3 Check one or more appropriate option(s):
• Workstation locked: check this option if this application
will be installed on a computer and be used only for
receiving system events.
• Locked for authentication: check this option if you want the computer where you have installed the
EntraPass application not to send its authentication data to the server.
• Use specific password for authentication: check this option if you want to assign a specific password
to this workstation. If you select this option, enter the password in the Authentication password
field.
NOTE: The Application type field displays the type of the selected EntraPass application. For instance,
it will display “Multi‐site Gateway” if the selected application is a Multi‐site Gateway application. This
identification is also displayed in the EntraPass application definition window (Devices > Defining an
EntraPass application).

Communication with the EntraPass Server

After an EntraPass application has been installed on a computer, communication with the EntraPass
Server must be established between the two computers. The following steps will assist you in
configuring and establishing the first communication between the workstation application and the
EntraPass Server using the proper protocol.
NOTE: Before you proceed, make sure that the Server is online. If it is not, launch it.

Establishing Communication with the Server

1 From the Windows® Start menu, select All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > EntraPass
application > Register to Server. You may also start the EntraPass application; the system automatically
launches the registration program when an application attempts to connect to the Server before it is
registered.
NOTE: The Registration window also appears when you launch an application before the EntraPass
Server is online. When this happens, simply start the EntraPass Server.
2 Click to select the communication protocol that is used between the EntraPass Server and the EntraPass
application.
Software Installation 21

• NetBEUI: The NetBEUI protocol (NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface) uses the computer name to
communicate with devices. Enter the name of the computer where the EntraPass Server software is
installed (case sensitive). The name of the current computer is displayed in the status bar. You may
use the Scan button to browse and to display existing computer names.
• TCP/IP: Enter the TCP/IP address of the computer where the EntraPass Server program is installed.
The EntraPass Server TCP/IP address appears in the Server status bar.
• Domain Name: Enter the computer name or the workgroup from which the EntraPass Server is a
member.
• Local: Enter Local when registering a component on the same computer as the EntraPass Server
software is installed. This option will take the address from the Server software.
3 Check the Provide local TCP/IP address button if this EntraPass workstation connects to the EntraPass
server using a VPN (Virtual Private Network) connection. Type the IP address used by the VPN
application. This address is provided by the VPN application and is usually accessible by clicking on the
minimized VPN icon found in the system tray.
4 You may enter an Authentication Password if you want operators to use a specific password when they
register EntraPass workstations to the EntraPass Server.

Upgrading EntraPass
1 Before you begin the installation, make sure that no EntraPass application is running.
2 Insert the software CD‐ROM into the CD‐ROM drive. The installation program should start automatically
if your computer is configured to autorun. If the installation program does not start automatically, click
Start > Run, then enter D:\Setup.exe (where D: is the CD‐ROM drive) in the displayed field.
NOTE: A database backup will be automatically performed during the upgrade process.
3 Enter the Upgrade Serial Number (located on the Upgrade Certificate).
NOTE: There are two ways of upgrading the system; register online at www.kantech.com or contact
your local Kantech technical support to get the Registration confirmation code.
4 Go to www.kantech.com and click on the Member Center.
NOTE: If you are not a member yet, submit your request and your membership confirmation should be
received by email within 1‐2 business days.
5 Click on Kantech Registration.
6 Enter the System Serial Number and follow the instructions online.
7 Return to the System Upgrade screen and enter the Registration Confirmation Code, then click OK. The
OK button is only enabled when both codes are valid.
8 The next steps are the same as updating EntraPass. Go to “Updating EntraPass” on page 22.

Updating EntraPass
When you update your software, the system automatically detects the components that are installed
and updates them. It is highly recommended to update your system when the system is at its minimum
use (Friday night, for example.)
22 Software Installation

Before Updating EntraPass

1 Perform a complete backup of your system database. For more information on how to perform a backup,
see "Backup Scheduler" on page 294.
2 If you have a Mirror Database and Redundant Server component installed, you MUST shutdown the
Redundant Server FIRST.
3 Shutdown the EntraPass Server and all other EntraPass applications. No applications, services or service
controls should be running when you perform a system update.
NOTE: The update must be performed on all the applications. Once the update is complete, DO NOT
START THE Mirror Database and Redundant Server yet.
4 Verify the system database (see "Database Utility" on page 306) to make sure that no errors are
detected.
5 Once you have verified the database and no errors are present, start the EntraPass Server. Once the
Server is up‐and‐running, start the Mirror Database and Redundant Server. It is essential to start the
Server before starting the Mirror Database and Redundant Server.
6 Once all applications have been updated, we strongly recommend that you reload the gateways to
ensure that all data will be refreshed and sent to controllers (Operations > Gateway reload).
7 You may also use the View connected List menu item to verify the status of all the system gateways and
EntraPass applications. For details, see "Backup Scheduler" on page 294.

Updating EntraPass
1 Insert the software installation CD‐ROM into the CD‐ROM drive (or the USB flash drive in a USB port).
The installation program should start automatically if your computer is configured to autorun. If the
installation program does not start automatically, click Start > Run, then enter d:\Setup.exe (where d: is
the CD‐ROM or USB flash drive) in the displayed field. The system displays the installation setup window.
2 Click Next. The Welcome window will be displayed.
3 Click Next. The Setup Start window will be displayed.
4 Select Update Installed Applications and click Next. The Previous Software window will be displayed,
listing all the software that are currently installed on your machine.
5 Click Next to continue. The update will start and all programs currently installed on your machine will be
updated.
6 Click Next. The system will verify if there are any other applications or utilities you can install. If this is
the case, a message will popup on screen:
• If you want to install other applications, click Yes and start over at number 2.
NOTE: If the application you want to install requires a serial number, you must call the Kantech
Technical Support Help Desk to register the system before you can go any further: See "System
Registration" on page 16.
• If the installation is completed, click No. The InstallShield Wizard Complete window will popup:
7 You can choose to restart your computer at this time or do it later.
8 Remove the CD‐ROM from the CD‐ROM drive (or the USB flash drive).
Software Installation 23

9 Click Finish to complete the installation.

NOTE: After the update, you must restart the computer in the order prescribed at the beginning of this
chapter, see "Before Updating EntraPass" on page 22.

Removing EntraPass
If you need to remove the EntraPass software from the computer, you will use the Add/Remove Programs
option in the Control Panel.
1 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2 When the Control Panel is opened, click Add/Remove Programs to open the dialog.
3 Select the program you want to delete from the list and click Remove. The Uninstall program dialog will
display on the screen.
4 Select the application you want to uninstall. If you want to uninstall EntraPass completely, check the
Uninstall all applications box.
5 Click Next.
6 Before you go any further, the system will prompt you to confirm.
• Click Yes if you want to continue the uninstall process.
• Click No if you want to cancel the uninstall process.
7 When the uninstall process is completed, the Maintenance Complete dialog will display.
8 Click Finish to exit the wizard.
9 Restart your computer.
24 Software Installation
Getting Started 25

Getting Started
This chapter introduces operators to the EntraPass system graphical user interface and basic functions.
To start an EntraPass session, you have to launch the EntraPass Server, the Gateway and the EntraPass
Workstation. The server is a dedicated computer on a network that manages the access control system
database. It is used to receive and dispatch information from the gateways. Gateways receive
information from sites and transmit it to the server. EntraPass Workstations enable operators to access
and program the system database and components.
NOTE: The Mirror Database and Redundant Server component may be enabled to monitor the activity
of the Primary Server and to serve as an alternative if the Primary Server fails.Take note that even
though the MS‐SQL/ORACLE interface can’t connect to the Redundant Server, all events will be
buffered until the connection to the Primary Server is restored.
NOTE: All authorized system operators must have a unique and confidential login name and password
that should be assigned by the system installer/administrator. It is very important to restrict access to
the EntraPass workstations to authorized personnel only.

Session Start and End

1 From the Windows® Start menu, click Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > Server /
Workstation, where the EntraPass application may be a Workstation only application, a Gateway
application, or any system stand‐alone utility. You may also start the program from the EntraPass
shortcut icon on your desktop.
2 On startup, the application attempts communication with the Server. The display language depends on
the settings of the operator who was previously logged on the EntraPass. English is the software default
language.
NOTE: You have to start the EntraPass server first. If you start an EntraPass workstation before starting
the server, you are prompted to register your application to the server even when the application has
already been registered. If the application has been registered, you just have to start the server.

Starting the EntraPass Server

The EntraPass Server is used for:
• Displaying all the applications connected to the server, the system event and system error logs
• Registering new connections (workstation applications, gateway applications, client applications
such as SmartLink, Video Vault, Report Viewer, etc.)
• Performing backups (Data, Archives, In/Out databases)
• Restoring data (data, archive, In/Out databases)
• Verifying database integrity
• Changing the database language
1 Start the Server (from Windows® Start menu or from the desktop).
2 The server startup window displays a progress bar as well as the information related to the server startup
process. When the process is completed, the login screen will display on screen.
26 Getting Started

3 Click the Login/Logout button to open the Operator login screen.

4 From the EntraPass Operator login, enter your User name and Password. The default User name is
kantech. It is not case sensitive. The default Password is kantech, in lower case; it is case sensitive.
NOTE: To allow an operator to login to the server, the System Administrator must select the option
“Allow login on server”, during the “Operator security level” definition (System > Security Level). For
more information, see "Security Level Definition" on page 218.
NOTE: The system keeps the last five user names, allowing operators to select their user name from the
drop‐down list.To delete a user name from the list, simply select it, then press Delete on the keyboard.
By default, the Display Login List parameter is disabled. You must enable it in the EntraPass Application
dialog.
5 Once you have entered the correct login information, the EntraPass Server main window appears with
the toolbars activated. Select the desired toolbar to perform an operation or to display system
information.
NOTE: The status bar indicates the communication status: Green: Communication is OK, Red:
Communication problems.
6 Point the cursor to the status flag (colored rectangle) to enable a hint describing the displayed
information: the first two colored rectangles indicate the server database open state and the database
locked.
• If the first status flag is red, this indicates that the system database is not open. This could be due to
a backup or a database verification in progress. If it is purple, this indicates that the database is
locked because a backup is being restored or the Mirror database is copying data.
• If the second status flag is red, this indicates that the database is unavailable. This happens when the
server is processing data or updating the database.
• A green rectangle indicates that the database is available.

Starting the Gateway Program

The gateway program may be installed on the same computer as the server or the EntraPass workstation
application, but it is recommended to install it on a dedicated computer.
1 Start the gateway (from Windows® Start menu or from the desktop). You do not need to enter a
password or a user name. The EntraPass Corporate Edition main window appears.
2 You may right click anywhere in the Gateway window to display a submenu:
• Minimize minimizes the Gateway window
• Send to tray sends the window to the status (tray) bar
3 Pay attention to the progress bars; they indicate:
• Configuration data received from the server: this indicates configuration data such as card
modifications are being sent to the gateway from the server.
• Data requested by workstation: this is requested data such as a status request.
• Messages sent to server: these messages originating from a controller are sent to the server.
4 You may select the System menu item to login, to logout, or to perform a gateway reload.
Getting Started 27

5 You may select the Gateway menu item if you want to choose a gateway. The number of gateways that
are communicating with the server is displayed on status bar in the Gateway main window.
NOTE: The status flags show the communication status. The first status flag indicates the status of the
communication with the server. If red, this indicates that the server is not communicating with the
Gateway. This can occur when the server is offline (you may then start the server). The system date
and time, the number of gateways and the server IP address appear also on the status bar.
NOTE: The progress bars are not status bars. You do not need to wait until they fill up.

Starting the EntraPass Workstation

An EntraPass workstation is a computer where the EntraPass monitoring application has been installed.
It enables operators to access and program the system database and components.
Make sure that the server is online when you start the EntraPass workstation software.
On startup, the workstation application attempts communication with the Server. The display language
depends on the settings of the operator who was previously logged on the system. English is the
software default language.
NOTE: Start the EntraPass server first. If you start an application before starting the server, you are
prompted to register your application to the server even when the application has already been
registered. If the application has been registered, you just start the server.
1 Start EntraPass workstation (from Windows® Start menu or from the EntraPass desktop icon).
2 The EntraPass Workstation main window will display on screen.
NOTE: When the server is off‐line, the first status flag on the left (colored rectangles of the status bar)
turns red; the Login/Logout button is disabled. If this happens, launch the server; the EntraPass
workstation will resume its operation.
3 Click the Login/logout button on the toolbar to access the Operator login dialog.
4 Enter your User name and Password. The password is case sensitive. The default User name is kantech. It
is not case sensitive. The default Password is kantech, in lower case; it is case sensitive.
NOTE: If you cannot login properly, check if the Caps Lock key on your keyboard is activated. When
proper login data have been entered, the system menu, toolbar and status bar are enabled. Also, the
server must be running if you want to be able to log in the system.
NOTE: By default, operators are not allowed to login on more than one EntraPass workstation at a
time. If required, an operator can have concurrent logins, See Chapter 11 ‘Creating or Editing an
Operator’ on page 216. However, an operator may login on the EntraPass Server and EntraPass
workstation at the same time.
28 Getting Started

Accessing Information on the Server Workstation Connection Status

1 Click any tab to access the system toolbar or select a menu item to access the system menu. In the lower
part of the window, color‐coded flags indicate the communication status: Green, communication is OK;
Red: communication problems; Blue: a report is pending.
2 Move the cursor over the colored rectangles to show details about the network status, the network
database status and the workstation application report status.
3 Move the cursor over the displayed numeric values to show details. It will indicate, in order, the system
date and time, the operator’s name, items in the Alarms desktop, alarms to be acknowledged, etc.
4 Double‐click (or single click, depending on your system settings) any number in the status bar to display
the Status information window.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Login/logout button when you exit EntraPass programs. This
ensures that the system databases are shutdown properly.

Modifying your Work Area Properties

1 Right click anywhere in the main window to display the Properties window. It allows you to customize the
window buttons as well as the background color.
2 To modify the size of the toolbar buttons, select one of the following:
• Small buttons: small buttons are displayed below menu items
• Large buttons with images: components icons are displayed on large buttons
• Large buttons without images: no icons are displayed
3 In the Miscellaneous section, make the appropriate choice:
• Display menu: only the menu bar appears. No icons are displayed. Right‐click the work area to
modify the properties.
• Display toolbar: the menu bar and the toolbar are displayed.
4 Select a background color for the work space.

Retrieving Hidden Windows on the Desktop

EntraPass allows you to work with multiple windows opened in the Desktop area. When a window is
minimized or sent to the background, it completely disappears from the screen. A command in the
workstation contextual menu can help you retrieve the dialogs.
• If the window was minimized, the command in the menu will bring it at the front of the screen where you
will be able to maximize it.
• If the window was sent to the background, the command in the menu will bring it to the foreground.
This command applies for desktop screens, configuration screens, operation screens, status screens,
database screens and report screens.
Getting Started 29

1 Right‐click the background area of the workstation window. A contextual menu will popup.

2 In the example above, the Status screen was sent to the background. Clicking the Status screen
command in the menu will bring it back to the foreground.

Express Setup
Express Setup allows you to configure system components such as sites and controllers, as well as
devices associated with these components such as doors and inputs. This utility reduces programming to
a minimum, allowing the installer to test the installation and system components. You may use it to
configure a site or to define controllers associated with a site. When used to configure a site, it allows
installers to associate this site to a gateway. It also allows installers to configure the site rapidly, giving
minimum configuration information about the controllers connected to it.
You may launch Express Setup from Windows® menu: Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition >
Server > Express Setup or by clicking the Express Setup icon from a number of EntraPass workstations’
windows. When used to configure a controller, it allows operators to assign default values to a controller
and to its associated devices (input, relays and output). In this case, it is launched from a system
message box or from a controller definition menu.
NOTE: You have to login to the server when you launch Express Setup. In fact, as the program allows
you to modify the system devices configuration, it is essential to authenticate yourself before
proceeding with any modification.
For details on Express Setup, see "Express Setup Program" on page 316.

System Stand‐Alone Utilities

EntraPass includes a number of stand‐alone utilities that allow operators to perform a variety of tasks
including verifying the system database or changing the system language. The following is a list of
EntraPass stand‐alone utilities:
• Database Utility: This program is intended to re‐index archived files, update database fields, verify
archived files, verify the database integrity, verify the database index, verify the database links and verify
the database hierarchy. This utility is run while the server is shutdown.
30 Getting Started

• Express Setup: Program used to configure all the components related to a gateway including the type of
readers used, type of connection, number of sites, number of controllers in a site, etc.
• KT‐Finder: Program used to configure locally or remotely Kantech IP devices such as the Kantech IP Link,
the KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller and the KT‐NCC Network Communications Controller (Note).
NOTE: The KT‐NCC Network Communications Controller is only available with EntraPass Global Edition.
• PING Diagnostic: Program used to diagnose network related problems.
• System Report Viewer: Program used by the operator to view reports without having to start a
Workstation. When this utility is installed, operators can view reports sent by other workstations using
the EntraPass email feature.
• Vocabulary Editor: Simple and easy program used to translate the software in the language of your
choice.
• Workstation (Configuration Program): Program, similar to a standard workstation, used by the system
administrator to configure the system logical and physical components.
• Migration Utility: Program used to transfer information relating to software and database for the
upgrade from Special Edition to Corporate Edition or Corporate to Global Edition.

These utilities may be launched from the Windows® Start menu of any computer where EntraPass Server
or EntraPass workstations are installed. For details on EntraPass stand‐alone utilities, see "System
Utilities" on page 305.

EntraPass Toolbars
EntraPass dialogs display most of the following buttons. They are an easy way to access the system
functions. Generally, a “hint” is displayed when you move the cursor over an icon.

You may access the toolbar from any EntraPass dialog window. Icons vary according to the window that
is open. Most of the icons are similar to icons you are familiar with and that are used in the computer
industry.

Icon Description
The New icon is used to insert new information in the system data‐
base. This may be adding a site, a schedule, a controller, etc.

The Save icon saves all the information you have entered since the
last save. Information is saved directly in the system.

The Save As icon allows operators to save all of the information of an

existing component under a new name without affecting the original
component. When using this option while issuing a card, it allows
you to create a new card or save under a new card number without
having to modify the information of the original card.
Getting Started 31

Icon Description
The Delete icon is used to delete the currently selected record. As a
security against accidental deletion, a warning is displayed prompt‐
ing you for confirmation.
When a component is erased, all links with other items are erased as
well. However, the records (archives) are kept in the database after
an item is erased.

The Print icon: depending on which menu you are working in, the
Print button can be used to print reports, card lists, event parame‐
ters, etc.

The Parent icon allows operators to display their search in a hierar‐

chy or to divide searches by gateways, site and controller (according
to the menu). This button becomes useful when the system database
increases in size; you can find a specific item by selecting its parent
items.

The Link icon enables operators to see all instances of an item in

other menus. For more information, see "Displaying Components
Links" on page 36.

The Find icon allows operators to find a specific item or component

in the system database by using a specific character string.
For more information, see "Finding Components" on page 33.

The Express Setup icon allows installers and system administrators

to configure system devices by assigning default settings.

The System Tree View icon displays the components list in a hier‐
archy format. The components displayed in this window can be
selected or unselected.

The Close icon is used to close a menu or a sub‐menu. If you forget to

save your information before closing a menu, the system displays a
window prompting you to confirm the “save” operation before clos‐
ing the menu.

The Cancel icon is used to cancel all modifications that were made
since the last time a valid save was performed. The system will
prompt you to confirm the operation.

Use the Help icon to view the help content on a specific subject.
32 Getting Started

Icon Description
The OK icon is used to save and accept the modifications, additions
or deletions made to a record in the database of the system.

The Select all icon is used to select all the items or components dis‐
played in a list.

The Unselect all icon is used to unselect all the items or components
that were previously selected in a list of choices.

In several system windows, operators have access to graphic and ani‐

mation buttons. These buttons are particularly useful when you want
to display the status of a component before performing an operation
on that component.
The Enable graphic icon is used for example in the Status menu and
in the Operations menu. When enabled, this button displays the
image related to the selected component (i.e.: door) and displays
also the associated components (i.e.: reader). To display components
in real‐time, this button must be used with the Enable animation
button.

The Enable animation icon: when enabled, this icon automatically

enables the Enable graphic icon. This activates the current compo‐
nent (i.e.: door) and displays its status in real‐time. For example, if
you wish to lock a door which was previously unlocked, the reader's
image (also visible) will be modified; the green dot will change to
red.

Right‐click Right‐click allows operators to enable a shortcut menu from which

they can choose a specific command depending on the active menu.

Basic Functions
Following are the basic system operations:
• Find components
• Use the extended selection box
• Select components, a specific folder, a site or a gateway
• Print lists or reports
• View links between components
• Calling the system tree view
Getting Started 33

Finding Components
The Find Components function allows operators to find a specific item or component in the system
database by using a specific character string.
There are two types of Find Components dialogs: One that can be accessed from any EntraPass window
toolbar; One that will be accessed through all the dialogs that pertain to users (Cards, Visitor Cards and
Daypasses).
1 In both cases, you must click the binoculars button in the toolbar to open the Find component dialog.

• The window on the left is used to find components and the window on the right is used to find cards.

Icons Description
Will search the database for components or cards.

Will search the database for the picture that corresponds to the card you
selected in the list.

Will open a menu where you can select which card index you want to
search on (card number, cardholder name, card information fields, etc.).

2 To start a search, enter a keyword and click the binoculars on the right. To reduce the search results,
check one of the boxes:
• Start with: Results will list all components that start with the one you have just entered, in
alphabetical order, and will include the rest of the list of components available in the database.
• Begins with: Results will list only components with name that start with the text you specified.
34 Getting Started

• Contains: Results will list all components that contain the text you specify.

3 If you want to view the picture that corresponds to the card selected in the list, click the binocular with a
plus sign button.
4 To cancel a search in progress, click the Cancel button.
5 Click OK. The selected component in the list will be displayed in the dialog where you initiated the
search.

Using the Extended Selection Box

An extended selection box allows you to view all components of a drop‐down list by right‐clicking on the
list. This option is available where a drop‐down list exists for components such as applications,
controllers, and doors. If the option is available, a hint box is displayed when the cursor is placed over
the drop‐down list.
• Available Filters types in the extended selection box are:
• Contains
• Starts with
• Ends with
• Exact words
• Selected
• You can also enter specific words in the Text filter field to locate a specific item.
• You can choose to Suppress the address in the search results.
• You can also set the number of Columns for search result display.

Selecting Components
The Component selection function allows operators to select one or more system components. The
method employed may be context sensitive.
Getting Started 35

1 From the active window, click the Select Components button. It opens a secondary window from which
you may select appropriate options.
2 You may need to check options that are displayed or use the Select All button (left) to select all the
displayed options. You may also select Single to view components that are not grouped or select Group
to view the existing groups.
3 From the displayed list, select the component/group you want to display. You may check the View option
to display the components associated with the selected components.
4 Where available, use the Select all button to select all the components, or use the Clear all button to
remove the check marks from the selected components. Click Cancel to return to the previous window
without any selections or changes.
5 Set the required number of columns in the Extended Selection box window to display all components as
required. A Text Filter may be employed to limit the listing.
6 Click OK to apply selections and return to previous window.

Selecting a Specific Folder

You may need to browse through the network or hard drive to locate a specific folder for backups, for
example.
1 From the active window, click the Select button (it is identified by “...”). It opens a secondary window
from which you may select a specific folder.
2 To change the destination folder, browse the Drives drop‐down list (lower part of the window). You may
click the Refresh drive list to make sure that the displayed list is up‐to‐date.
3 Once you locate the folder you are searching, click OK to go back to the active window.

Selecting a Specific Site or Gateway

EntraPass offers you the ability to associate a specific component with a specific gateway/site. For
example, you can define a specific holiday for a specific site or gateway.
1 From an active window, click the New icon. The system displays the Select Gateway/Site window.
2 Double‐click a Site/Gateway from the displayed list, then click OK.
3 Assign a meaningful name to the component being defined.
4 Follow the steps to complete the task.

Printing a List or a Report

Operators may need the Print function to:
• Print a list of cards
• Print event parameters
• Print event‐relay association
• Setup a report for printing

1 From any EntraPass window, click the Print icon.

2 Select the components you wish to include in your list. You can use the Select all button (if available) to
include all the displayed components in the list.
36 Getting Started

3 When you select the Print empty fields and/or the Print component reference option (if available), the
list will include the titles of the fields even if they are empty.
4 When you have finished selecting the fields, you can preview your list before you actually print it. When
you preview the list, you can:
• Define the printer setup
• Print a hardcopy of your report or list
• Save the report or list for later use with the Quick Viewer program or load an existing report. For
more information on this program, see "Quick Report Viewer" on page 322.
5 If you want to modify the settings, close, modify and print your list.
6 You can use the Font button to select a specific font and font size for your list.
7 To select or modify a font selection:
• Select the font type from the Font menu. A preview of your selection will be displayed in the Sample
box.
• Choose the formatting attribute from the Font Style menu (regular, italic, bold or bold italic).
• Enter the font size from the Size menu (10 or 11 is a default). The smaller the font, the more items
appear on your list.
8 You can also select a color from the Color menu (black is a default). The changes appear automatically in
the sample box. Click on OK when you are done. Use the Preview button from the Print window to
preview your output before printing.
NOTE: If there is no printer configured for the computer, an error message appears.

Displaying Components Links

The View links function allows you to view all instances of an item within other menus. Therefore, it is
possible to see all links an item has with other items.
NOTE: You can use the View links button before you delete a component from the database in order to
see which menus will be affected by the deletion. You can also print the links of a selected component.
1 From any menu window, select a component and click the Link button. All the components that are
associated with the selected component are displayed.
2 The icons that are located on the left side of the components indicate the component type. For example,
if you select the Always valid schedule (in the Schedule definition menu) and click the Link button, the
system will display a list of all the menus in which this schedule is used.
NOTE: In the highlighted example, the Always valid schedule is used as the REX (Request to EXit)
schedule in the Door definition menu.You can right‐click an item to select a category. For example, if
you right‐click and select Access levels, only the access levels in which this schedule is defined are
displayed.
3 To view the links of the selected door with other components of the system, select the door, then click
the Link button again:
4 All system components that are associated with the selected door appear. In this example, the “door” is
used in the Administrator access level; users granted this access level are allowed access to the selected
door.
5 Click the Print button to print the information displayed on the screen.
Getting Started 37

Floating Windows
The floating window button can be used to move the window outside the workstation screen. This
button is located at the left of the Minimize button for windows that support the floating window
function.

It is not possible to go back when the window is floating. It should be closed and then reopened. No
information on the window’s position is kept by the system.

System Tree View

The System Tree View button displays the components list in a hierarchy format. The components
displayed in this window can be selected or unselected. You can access the System Tree View in various
ways:

Calling the System Tree View from a Dialog

When applicable, the System Tree View button is available like in the Quick Report Request dialog.
38 Getting Started

1 From the Reports toolbar > Quick Report Request dialog. Click on the System Tree View button.

2 From the System Tree View, you can double‐click to select or unselect a component. The changes are
automatically updated on the corresponding tab.
3 Click back on the System Tree View button to close it.
Getting Started 39

Using the Three‐Dot Button

On a given data field, select the three‐dot (•••) button:
40 Getting Started

Using the Extended Selection Box

1 From the System toolbar > Workspace > EntraPass Application tab, right‐click to load the Extended
Selection Box:

2 Click on the System Tree View button, you can double‐click to select or unselect a component. The
changes are automatically updated in the Extended Selection Box.
3 Click back on the System Tree View button to close it.

Using the Comment Field as Notepad

The Comment field, that you can find in the Card and the Devices menu windows, can be edited directly
but also as a Notepad window.
For example, in the Card window double‐click anywhere in the blank as shown above. Edit the text in the
Notepad window and close it. The text is then displayed in the Comment field. Click the Save button.
System Devices 41

System Devices
The Devices Toolbar
After the installation of the system hardware and software, you have to configure the system devices.
The Devices toolbar, located at the top of the Workstation window will allow you to access all the
devices dialogs (EntraPass applications, Gateways, SmartLink, Redundant Server and Database and
Video Vault) and the physical components (controllers, KTES, relays, doors, third party hardware, etc.).
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Express Setup program to save configuration time and to prevent
setup errors. In addition, using Express Setup allows you to test the hardware and wiring immediately
after the installation.
You run the Express Setup program when you are configuring gateways, sites or controllers for the first
time. You may run the Express set up utility by clicking its icon in EntraPass windows. You may also
launch the Express Setup program from the Windows® Start menu or from the System Registration
window or from a system prompt, when, for instance, you are adding a controller to your system. For
detailed information about using the Express Setup program, see "Express Setup Program" on page 568.
NOTE: If you are using the V ideo Integration feature, EntraPass enables you to assign all system
components into a video view; the same way you assign them to system interactive floor plans
(graphics). To do this, you simply select the video view where you want the system component
(Application, site, gateway, controller, etc.) to appear. V ideo views are defined in the Video menu
(Video tab > Video views).

Comment Field
A comment field is available for the following components:
• EntraPass application
• Gateway
• Site
• Controller
• Door
• Relay
• Input
• Output

The comment field can be modified or deleted at all time. Its length is unlimited. Here is an example from the
42 System Devices

Devices/Door menu:

Use a double click in the field to enable the edit mode.

System Devices 43

Comments can also be visualized from the Operation window using a right click on a component:

Comments can also be visualized through the Messages List or a graphic (right‐click on a component and select
View parent/controller). The following window is displayed:

Move the mouse pointer over the controller to display the associated comment.
44 System Devices

Application Configuration
The minimum configuration of an EntraPass software package includes a server, a workstation
application (EntraPass monitoring application) and a gateway application. The gateway application can
be integrated with the EntraPass workstation on the same computer. The software package comprises a
number of applications including:
• A workstation application
• A server application,
• One Multi‐site Gateway application,
• And a number of utilities such as the Vocabulary editor, the Express Database utility, etc.

It is recommended to install the EntraPass server on a dedicated computer for system stability. The
Application dialog allows operators to configure computers where EntraPass is installed. This includes
configuring computers where you have installed: the EntraPass Workstation software, the Gateways, the
Mirror Database and Redundant Server programs, as well as computers where you have installed the
SmartLink Interface, if applicable. To configure the Application, you have to define:
• General parameters applicable to all computers where EntraPass is installed
• Security parameters (applicable to all EntraPass applications)
• Filters (to define which gateways and EntraPass applications will send messages to the Workstation
application being configured).
• Message/alarm controls.

Configuring an Application
1 From the EntraPass main window, select the Devices tab, then click the Application icon. The Application
main window appears.
NOTE: Items displayed in the Application window vary depending on the selected EntraPass
application. For example, if the selected application in a workstation‐type application, tabs such as
Workstation, Gateway and Site, etc., are displayed. If the selected application is a Redundant server,
the Redundant server tab appears.
2 From the Application drop‐down list, select the application you want to configure. This list displays all
applications that have been installed and registered. The Application type drop‐down list displays the
type of the selected item. It may display Workstation, Gateway, Mirror Database and Redundant Server,
etc.
3 Assign a name to the selected application. If you are running the software in two languages, for example
in English and French, you may assign a name in English and in French.
4 Click the Save button to activate the new application.

Defining General Parameters

The General tab allows you to specify the system behavior when the operator is inactive, that is when
there is no action on the keyboard (idle time).
System Devices 45

1 For added security, specify the system behavior when the operator is inactive. This feature provides
additional security to prevent access to the system by an unauthorized person. The default delay is 20
min. You may keep the default delay or change it.
• Select the Application update type:
NOTE: The Auto‐Updater Service monitors the installed versions of the EntraPass Server, the Gateway,
the Smartlink and the Workstations and verify that they are all the same. Otherwise, it will update the
applications so they will be in the same version as the server.
NOTE: For each step during the updating process, a message will be displayed in the Desktop Message
List.
• Manual: The update is started manually.
• Automatic: The update is started automatically as soon as requested.
• Queued: In this mode, the update is done only one application at the time.
• Prompt to download: If an update is available and the workstation is connected, a message is
displayed to prompt the operator asking to update the application. If the workstation is not
connected, the software will proceed with the update with the same parameters as for the
Queued option. If the operator refuse the update, he will be a prompt for the same update
every hour.
• Select the Send to tray on idle if you want the applications to be minimized when there is no action
on the keyboard. If you do this, you have to specify the period after which the application will be
minimized if there is no action on the keyboard: in the Send to tray on idle, enter the delay after
which the applications will be minimized and sent to the task bar.
• Select the Automatic Logout on idle option if you want the application to logout when there is no
action on the keyboard. If you do this, you have to specify the period after which the application will
be minimized: in the Automatic logout on idle enter the delay after which the Operator will be
automatically logged out, (the option has to be checked).
2 If the Video feature is enabled, the Video view field appears. If this is the case, select the Video view in
which you want the defined component to appear. For details on defining video views, see "Video Views
Definition" on page 237.
3 From the Graphic list, you may select the graphic to which the application is assigned, if applicable. For
details on defining graphics, see "Graphics Definition" on page 211.

Defining Security Parameters

This section applies to all EntraPass applications: EntraPass Workstations, Gateways, SmartLink (if
installed), Mirror Database and Redundant Server, etc.
1 From the Application window, select a workstation and move to the Parameters tab.
2 Make the appropriate choices:
• Disable application: if selected, the operator will not be able to start the application. This field must
be used with caution.
• Disable authentication to server: When this option is checked, it is no longer possible to register the
application to the server.
• Encryption: select this option if all incoming or outgoing messages for this application should be
encrypted.
46 System Devices

• Auto disable authentication: if selected, the system will automatically disable authentication when
the application has authenticated itself for the first time.
• Allow auto‐connection: if selected, the EntraPass workstation will automatically attempt to connect
itself to the server following a communication failure.
• Display Login List: if checked, this option tells the system to save the five last login names to make
them available for selection when opening new sessions. This option offers a fast way to open a
session since an operator has only to select a user name and enter a password. You may however
leave this field to its default setting (unchecked) for increased security; this will oblige operators to
enter both a valid user name and password before accessing EntraPass.
• Must be login to close application: checking this option will oblige operators to login before they exit
an EntraPass program.
• Suspend messages: if this option is selected, all incoming messages for this application will be
suspended. Use this option for an EntraPass workstation that is used only to configure components
or when messages are not required.
• Operator must login to view events: checking this option will oblige the operator to login at least
once with a valid username and password before system event messages can be viewed.
• Display description in title bar: check this box to display the application description in the window
titlebar (top).
• Display description in taskbar: check this box to display the application description in the window
taskbar (bottom).
• Disable video: check this option to hide the video view options from this EntraPass workstation user
interface. If this option is checked, the Video Events List, Video Playback and Video desktop options
are disabled in the system. Operators with appropriate user permissions will be able to configure the
Video option but will not be able to view live or recorded video segments.
• Notify when remote sites must be updated: check this option to tell the system to send a notification
before updating remote sites. When this option is enabled, operators will receive a notification
before updating site communicating via a modem. If this option is selected, operators will receive a
notification each time data related to sites (such as schedules, controllers, etc.) are modified. They
will have the choice of updating remote sites (Yes), refusing the change (No) or clicking Details so
that they can select specific sites to be updated.

Defining Workspaces
The Workspace tab allows you to select which workspace configuration and event parameters will be
applied on a specific workstation therefore making EntraPass geographically relevant. This feature
provides the ability to define workstation behavior.
• Apply workstation workspace and event parameters: When checked this will enable the workstation
workspace definition for event messages display.
• When logged out: will apply the selected workspace rules when the no one is logged on the
workstation.
• When logged in: will apply the selected workspace rules when an operator is logged in, overriding
the operator’s workspace definition.
• When shutdown: will apply the selected workspace rules when the workstation is shutdown.
System Devices 47

• Apply operator workspace to filter messages: when operator logs on, the workstation will apply the
operator workspace rules.
• The Process when both workspaces are selected section lists the options available when both Apply
workstation workspace and event parameters and Apply operator workspace to filter messages boxes are
checked.
• Workstation workspace AND Operator workspace: events will be filtered according to the EntraPass
workstation workspace configuration, and filtered again according to the workspace configuration of
the operator who is currently logged on the EntraPass workstation.
• Workstation workspace OR Operator workspace: will select the workspace that has a higher level in
the hierarchy.
• Operator workspace ONLY: Operator workspace will have priority over the workstation workspace.

Defining Message Controls

1 Click the Messages tab to define how messages should be processed when the EntraPass workstation is
connected (or not) to the server.
NOTE: Messages desktops are configured in the Desktop definition menu. For details, See Chapter 12
‘EntraPass Desktops’ on page 419.
2 In the Message control section:
• Specify the number of messages that will be kept on the server when the EntraPass workstation is
off‐line, that is, when it is not connected to the server. The server buffers a maximum of 10,000
messages per EntraPass workstation (default: 500).
• Specify the number of messages that will be kept on the workstation. There is a maximum of
100,000 messages per EntraPass workstation. By default, it keeps 5,000 messages.
NOTE: The EntraPass workstation will always keep newer events. To view older events, you have to
request a historical report. For details on requesting reports, See Chapter 13 ‘Reports’ on page 461.
3 Specify if the Server should keep newest or oldest messages when its buffer reaches the defined
maximum number:
• Keep older messages: The Server will keep the oldest messages and archive the newest messages
when the EntraPass workstation is off‐line and when the Server buffer is full.
• Keep newer messages: The Server will keep the newest messages and archive the oldest messages
when the EntraPass workstation is off‐line and when its buffer is full. Messages are processed on a
first in ‐ first out basis.
4 In the Clear Message Desktops section, specify when messages should be cleared:
• On logout (on a regular logout by an operator)
• On workstation shutdown (when the EntraPass workstation is completely shutdown)
5 In the Picture information section, select the field content that will be displayed below the cardholder
picture. The Show cardholder information with picture drop‐down list contains 10 definable fields (User
information 1, User information 2, etc.).
NOTE: By default, the field displays “User information #1” to “User information #10”. These labels may
be customized. For more information on renaming card information labels, see "Customizing Card
Information Fields" on page 293.
48 System Devices

6 In the Status icon refresh delay section, specify the time interval at which the application refreshes the
condition reported by the status icon visible in the status bar. Refresh delays range from 0.01 to 5.00
min. in increments of 0.01 sec.
7 You can define the Maximum number of records that can be retrieved from archived files and displayed
on screen for the Historical Report Desktop. The maximum is 200,000.

Defining Alarm Controls

1 Click the Alarms tab to define how alarms should be processed when the EntraPass workstation is
connected (or not) to the server.
NOTE: Alarms desktops are configured in the Desktop definition menu. For details, See Chapter 12
‘EntraPass Desktops’ on page 419.
2 In the Alarm control section:
• Specify the number of alarms that will be kept on server when the EntraPass workstation is off‐line,
that is, when it is not connected to the EntraPass Server. The EntraPass Server buffers a maximum of
100,000 alarms per EntraPass workstation (default: 500).
• Specify the number of alarms that will be kept on workstation. There is a maximum of 100,000
alarms per EntraPass workstation. By default, it keeps 5,000 alarms.
NOTE: The EntraPass workstation will always keep newer events. To view older events, you have to
request a historical report. For details on requesting reports, See Chapter 13 ‘Reports’ on page 461.
3 Specify if the server should keep newest or oldest alarms when its buffer reaches the defined maximum
number:
• Keep older alarms: The EntraPass Server will keep the oldest alarms and archive the newest alarms
when the EntraPass workstation is off‐line and when the Server buffer is full.
• Keep newer alarms: The EntraPass Server keep the newest alarms and archive the oldest alarms
when the EntraPass workstation is off‐line and when its buffer is full. Alarms are processed on a first
in ‐ first out basis.
4 In the Clear Alarms Desktops section, specify when alarms should be cleared:
• On logout (on a regular logout by an operator)
• On workstation shutdown (when the EntraPass workstation is completely shutdown)
5 You may define the acknowledgement parameters. Checking Display alarm message box will send an
acknowledgement message box even if the operator is working in another application. When this option
is enabled, you have to enter the delay during which the acknowledgement message box will be
suspended. At the end of the delay, an alarm message box will be displayed again requiring an
acknowledgement from the operator.
6 You can check the Disable auto display of video views option to prevent video views from being
automatically displayed by this workstation. In fact, video views defined as alarms and associated with
components are automatically displayed when the component goes in alarm.
7 You may check the option Send message on acknowledge time‐out to generate an “acknowledge time‐
out” event when the operator fails to acknowledge an event during the time‐out delay specified in the
Acknowledge time‐out delay field. The message will be sent to the Message desktop and the Alarms
desktop. For more information on EntraPass desktops, See Chapter 12 ‘EntraPass Desktops’ on page 419.
System Devices 49

Defining Email Report Options

EntraPass and the EntraPass WebStation offer users the ability to send reports using email capabilities.
This function can also be used with SMTP servers asking for a user authentication.
NOTE: SSL secured connections are not supported.
1 From the Application main window, select the Email reports tab.
2 In the Email server (SMTP or Exchange server) field, enter the IP address of the Email server that will be
used for sending emails.
3 In the Email Port field, enter the number of the port that will be used for sending emails (usually 25).
4 Enter a valid Email address in the Email sender field. This email address will be used for authenticating
the email server.
5 Authentication: These options can be used to configure the authentication method.
• No authentication: No authentication will be applied.
• SMTP authentication: An authentication, sent on the SMTP port, must be validated before the
message is released.
• POP3 authentication: An authentication, sent on the POP3 port, must be validated before the
message is released.
6 User name: Enter a user name for the authentication process.
7 Password: Enter the password for the user name.
8 E‐mail server (POP3): Enter the POP3 server address for a POP3 authentication.
9 E‐mail port (POP3): Enter the POP3 port number for a POP3 authentication.
10 Send to: Recipient’s address for the message to be sent.
11 Test button: Send a test message with the selected parameters. According to the test results, different
error or success messages could be displayed.

Configuring a Gateway Application

The EntraPass Gateway converts the information received from a controller or a site and transmits the
converted data to the server that in turns transmits it to the appropriate application. It also converts the
information received from the EntraPass workstation and transmits it to controllers. The gateway
interfaces the sites and the application. The gateway application allows you to monitor the controller
sites connected to the gateway. You may add up to 40 Multi‐site Gateways.

Configuring General Parameters for a Gateway

1 From the Application drop‐down list, select the gateway application you want to configure. When the
selected application is a gateway type, the Application type field in the General tab displays “Gateway”.
2 For details on defining the system behavior on idle, see "Application Configuration" on page 44.
3 To define security parameters for the gateway application, see "Defining Security Parameters" on page
45.

Configuring an Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface (CardGateway)

The Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface creates a real‐time mirror copy of the EntraPass card databases (Card
table, Card group table, Card type table and Badge table) in MS‐SQL or Oracle database. In addition, it
50 System Devices

allows operators to interact with the system card database from their MS‐SQL or Oracle programs.
Operators can add, modify and delete cards, or obtain card‐related information from the EntraPass card
database. The card information is updated in all the databases, whatever the program used to modify or
to update the database; MS‐SQL Interface ensures that the modifications are conveyed to the server and
then sent to the workstations.
NOTE: The Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface requires an additional license.
Make sure that the MS‐SQL or Oracle client software is installed on the same computer as the Oracle/
MS‐SQL Interface. It is not recommended to install the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface on a computer where
EntraPass is installed. Installing the two applications on the same computer may cause problems during
data exchange between EntraPass and the Oracle or MS‐SQL Server. To configure the Oracle/MS‐SQL
database Interface you have to define:
• General parameters (applicable to the Oracle/MS‐SQL Database Interface), including the application
security parameters
• Database parameters, including the database access rights
1 From the Application drop‐down list, select Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface.
2 Define the application on which you have installed the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface. For more details, see
"Application Configuration" on page 44.
3 Select the Parameters tab to define security parameters for the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface. For details, see
"Defining Security Parameters" on page 45.
4 Select the ORACLE/MS‐SQL Interface tab to indicate how the EntraPass software will communicate with
the client database and to define the database access rights.
5 From the Database type drop‐down list, select the database server: Oracle 8.0 server, Oracle 7.3 server
or SQL server. Be sure to select the correct server version since the database configuration is different
from one version to another.
NOTE: If the wrong version is selected, the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface will not communicate and will not
be able to connect to the server.
6 Enter the database Server name.
7 Type the name of the requested Oracle or SQL Database Name.
8 If you are using an Oracle server, type the name of the Oracle data file which points to the data you wish
to access
NOTE: Oracle and SQL servers may be configured to contain more than one database. Accessing an SQL
database requires pointing to its name while accessing an Oracle database requires pointing to its
name and specific data file. Refer to your network administrator for access parameters to the
database specific to your application.
9 Check the Use administrator Access for Initialization option, if applicable. Checking this option enables
you to enter a valid Administrator username and password.
NOTE: It is important to check this box. If you do not, you must manually create the database, the
username and password in the database server.
10 Enter the Administrator user name and Administrator password. The program will automatically create
the database, username and password in the server database
System Devices 51

11 In the Database access area, enter a username and password which will be used by the CardGateway to
connect to the Oracle/SQL database.
NOTE: The database access procedure does not allow the CardGateway to create or modify an existing
user profile on an Oracle/SQL server.
12 Check the Keep deleted records option if you want to keep the record of a card, even when the card is
deleted from the EntraPass database. The record will be kept in the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface database.
NOTE: If you do not select this option, deleted records will be physically and permanently erased from
the Oracle/MS‐SQL database.
NOTE: When EntraPass creates the card database automatically in the SQL or Oracle Server, it allows a
maximum of 50MB for the card database. If you want to increase the size of the database, you must
create the database manually. For more information, see the next section. Creating Server Databases
Manually.
13 Click the Service tab to define login information when the Oracle/MS/SQL interface runs as a service and
a report needs to be printed.
• The Login to EntraPass service application box must be checked to activate this option.
• Enter the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface Domain name and Login name.
• Type in the Password and Password confirmation.

Creating Server Databases Manually

In order to integrate the database with EntraPass, you have to create the database that will be used and
then create the Kantech operator in the database. If your system is using an MS‐SQL server, proceed as
follows:
Creating an Operator Manually in the ORACLE/MS‐SQL Server
The first step in integrating ORACLE/MS‐SQL with EntraPass is to create the database that will be used.
1 Right‐click the Database folder and select New Database.
2 Enter the database name in the Database name field.
3 Click OK once you have entered the name of the database.
Creating a KANTECH Operator for an MS‐SQL Server
You have to create an operator that the Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface will use to login the MS‐SQL server.
1 Right‐click Logins and select New Login.
2 Enter kantech (lower case) in the Name field.
3 Make sure that the SQL Server Authentication option is checked.
4 Enter kantech (in lower case) as the password in the Password field.
5 Click the Database Access tab.
6 Check the name of the database created in step 2. When you select this option, the bottom part of the
window displays “Database Roles ‐ Permit in database role”.
7 In order to be able to modify the database, check the Public and db_owner options and click OK to save
and exit. You will be prompted to confirm the password.
8 Enter kantech (lower case) and click OK to exit.
52 System Devices

Creating a KANTECH Operator for an Oracle Server

1 Login the ORACLE server as the administrator. Default name “kantech” may be used.
2 Create a database. Default database name “KanCard” may be used.
3 Create a login profile. Default username and password “kantech” may be used.
4 Assign the kantech operator the permission “Owner”.
NOTE: If any defaults are changed, there must be a consistent Database name, User name and
Password between the Database and EntraPass software.

Configuring the Mirror Database and Redundant Server

The Mirror Database monitors the communication between itself and the Primary Server. The Mirror
Database is a real‐time copy of the system database and Windows system registry entries, except the
Oracle/MS‐SQL card database.

When communication between the Mirror Database and the Primary Server fails, the Mirror Database
automatically initiates the delay after which the Redundant Server is automatically started to replace
the Primary Server. The Mirror Database and Redundant Server program cannot run on the same
computer as the EntraPass software server. The Mirror Database and Redundant Server should be
installed on a dedicated computer.
NOTE: You can operate the system with more than one Mirror Database and Redundant Server. The
Mirror Database and Redundant Server feature requires an additional license.
To configure the Mirror database and Redundant Server workstation, you have to define:
• General parameters applicable to the Mirror Database and Redundant Server, including security
parameters
• Redundant Server parameters
• Security parameters
1 From the Application drop‐down list, select the Mirror Database and Redundant Server application.
2 To define parameters in the General tab, See "Defining General Parameters" on page 44.
3 Select the Parameters tab to define security parameters for the Mirror Database and Redundant Server.
For details, see "Defining Security Parameters" on page 45.
4 Move to the Redundant Server tab to define communication parameters for the Mirror Database and
Redundant Server.
5 Select the protocol that is used to communicate with the computer where the Mirror Database is
installed: None, TCP/IP (network server), NetBEUI (computer name) or Automatic.
NOTE: When you select TCP/IP, the Redundant server address field is enabled to allow you to enter the
TCP/IP address of the computer hosting the Mirror Database and Redundant Server. The field can also
be edited when you select NetBeui.
NOTE: If Automatic is checked, the IP address of the computer hosting the Mirror Database and
Redundant Server will be sent to the server for broadcast to all workstations on the network. This
option is particularly useful if you don’t know the IP address or if the computer is set to a dynamic IP
address or if the computer is connected to a DHCP server.
System Devices 53

6 Enter the Redundant server IP address.

7 Select the course of action the redundancy server must take in cases of Startup with no server
communication.
8 Specify the options for starting the Redundant Server when the main server shuts down: this may be
automatically on a normal shutdown (when an operator shuts down the EntraPass server) or on an
abnormal shutdown. The Mirror Database will start the Redundant Server when the delay indicated in
the Wait before start server field has expired.
NOTE: If you do not check the Start server automatically option, the Redundant Server will not start
when the primary server is closed under normal conditions (i.e. operator shutdown). Therefore, it will
be necessary to start it manually.
9 Specify the system’s course of action when the server returns to normal (On server restore): enter the
delay after which the Redundant Server will be stopped when the primary server returns to its normal
functioning. During this time, the Redundant Server will continue to prevail (maximum allowed: 59
min:59 secs).
10 Move to the Restore Parameters tab to define the redundant server’s course of action when the main
server comes back up after a shut down.
• To automate the restore process from the redundant server, check the Automatic process on restore
box. The rest of the options become enabled.
• Check the appropriate boxes depending on the features you have installed, and the restore process
you want to activate:
• Restore: Will transfer the whole database that contains all the transactions from the
redundancy server to the main server and overwrite any data created on the main server.
• Merge: Will only transfer data from the redundancy server when the transactions cannot be
found on the main server.
NOTE: You can select Restore or Merge.
NOTE: When using the Merge feature, data will not be transferred in cases where, for example, a card
has been modified on the redundant server and the main server simultaneously while the main server
was disconnected.
11 Click the Service tab to define login information when the Mirror Database and Redundant Server run as
a service and a report needs to be printed.
• The Login to EntraPass service application box must be checked to activate this option.
• Enter the Mirror database and Redundancy Server Domain name and Login name.
• Type in the Password and Password confirmation.

Configuring the SmartLink Application

The SmarkLink application allows operators to interface the EntraPass access control software with any
intelligent device such as video matrix switchers, paging systems, email application, etc., using an RS‐
232 connection between one of the EntraPass workstations and the external device. Integration with
other systems can also be accomplished through software DLLs. SmartLink can be used to connect to
another computer to exchange information and update it automatically in real‐time. It also enables
54 System Devices

EntraPass to receive and send messages, reports or commands, and to communicate with client
applications.
NOTE: The SmartLink feature requires no additional license.
EntraPass allows you to configure the SmartLink communication mode. For more information on
SmartLink and how it works, see your SmartLink Reference Manual, DN1327.
1 From Application drop‐down list, select the system SmartLink application.
2 Define the workstation on which you have installed the SmartLink interface. For more details, see
"Defining General Parameters" on page 44.
3 Configure the SmartLink workstation security parameters. For more details, see "Defining Security
Parameters" on page 45.
4 Configure the SmartLink workstation messages. For more details, see "Defining Message Controls" on
page 47.
5 Configure the SmartLink workstation email reports. For more details, see "Defining Email Report
Options" on page 49.
6 Click the SmartLink tab to view and setup the SmartLink connection parameters.
7 From the Mode enabled drop‐down list in the SmartLink serial connection section and the SmartLInk
network connection section, select the appropriate mode of transmission:
• Messages only: SmartLink will only receive messages.
• Commands only: SmartLink will only execute commands (tasks).
• Messages and commands: SmartLink will receive messages and execute commands.
NOTE: When you start the SmartLink application, the connection options for the serial port and
network modes are retrieved from the EntraPass Server. If the network connection mode of the
SmartLink is other than “none”, the SmartLink application will be started to allow a client application
to connect to the SmartLink application, either to execute commands or to receive messages sent
through the network or both process simultaneously.
8 Check the Bypass event parameter preset option if you want to ignore all default settings of the Event
Parameter definition menu (System > Event Parameters). By default, all events are programmed to be
sent to all workstations (including the SmartLink workstation). Check this option to avoid receiving
unnecessary tasks and events that are not intended for the SmartLink application.
NOTE: You will have to “manually” create associations of events and tasks in the Event Parameter
definition menu. For example, you could select the event “Door forced open” and send only a specific
task to the SmartLink application that would send an email.
9 In the SmarLink tasks section, you may define Startup or Default tasks. The task you assign will be
processed automatically when the SmartLink application is started. For details on defining SmartLink
tasks, see "Task Builder Dialogs Description" on page 225.
10 Click the SmartLink email tab to view and setup the SmartLink connection parameters.
11 In the Email server (SMTP or Exchange server) field, enter the IP address of the Email server that will be
used for sending emails.
12 In the Email Port field, enter the number of the port that will be used for sending emails (usually 25).
13 Enter a valid Email address in the Email sender field. This email address will be used for authenticating
the email server.
System Devices 55

14 Authentication: These options can be used to configure the authentication method.

• No authentication: No authentication will be applied.
• SMTP authentication: An authentication, sent on the SMTP port, must be validated before the
message is released.
• POP3 authentication: An authentication, sent on the POP3 port, must be validated before the
message is released.
15 User name: Enter a user name for the authentication process.
16 Password: Enter the password for the user name.
17 E‐mail server (POP3): Enter the POP3 server address for a POP3 authentication.
18 E‐mail port (POP3): Enter the POP3 port number for a POP3 authentication.
19 Send to: Recipient’s address for the message to be sent.
20 Test button: Send a test message with the selected parameters. According to the test results, different
error or success messages could be displayed.
NOTE: The email port value is set to 25 by default. You may leave it as is or change this value to
another available port on the network (between 0 and 65,535). For information about setting of the
email server, contact the network administrator.
21 Click the SmartLink WebStation tab to define the WebStation parameters.
22 Enter the Connection timeout on idle (mm:ss): When the connection timeout has been reached, the
operator must log back in to continue. All changes, after the last save, are lost. The default connection
timeout is 5:00 min. The time range value is 00:30 to 20:00 min.
NOTE: If you have updated the EntraPass system, the connection timeout has not been modified
automatically, it will remain as it was. Make sure to check its value.
23 Click the Service tab to define login information when the SmartLink server runs as a service and a report
needs to be printed.
• The Login to EntraPass service application box must be checked to activate this option.
• Enter the SmartLink Domain name and Login name.
• Type in the Password and Password confirmation.

Configuring the EntraPass Video Vault Application

The EntraPass Video Vault application addresses the need for better video data archiving. This
application retrieves video segments from the Video Servers connected to EntraPass and saves these
video segments for future reference. In fact, video segments can be kept on the video server for a
limited period of time. This period depends on the video server disk capacity and settings. In order to
take full advantage of the Video Integration capability, EntraPass users who are running a video
monitoring software need EntraPass Video Vault to manage their video archive database.

After installing and registering the EntraPass Video Vault application, you must define its environment
among other applications. For details about registering EntraPass Video Vault, see "Adding System
Components" on page 43. For details about using EntraPass Video Vault, see "EntraPass Video Vault" on
page 555.
56 System Devices

1 From the Application drop‐down list, select EntraPass Video Vault.

2 To define General parameters for the EntraPass Video Vault application, see "Defining General
Parameters" on page 44.
3 To define security parameters for the EntraPass Video Vault application, see "Defining Security
Parameters" on page 45.
4 Select Folder tab to specify the video file location and name structure. The settings defined in this
window will be reflected in the way the video files will be displayed in the Browse Video Vault window
(Video tab > Browse Video Vault).
• Destination drive(s): specify the list of drives where video segments will be archived. Video
segments will be saved according to the disk space available on the drive and according to order of
the selected drives.
NOTE: Destination drives that are displayed for selection correspond to the mapped network drives on
your computer. They differ from a computer to another.
NOTE: By default, drives are listed alphabetically. You may decide to change this order according to the
space available on each disk. The up/down green arrows allows you to change the sequence of drives
to use for archiving. displayed for selection correspond to the mapped network drives on your
computer. They differ from a computer to another.
• Minimum free disk space (MB): Enter the minimum free disk space allowed before the system sends
a message that there is no more disk space in the EntraPass Video Vault and archiving will stop. The
value can be up to 99,999 MB.
• Disk free space threshold (MB): Enter the maximum threshold space allowed before the system
sends a message that the EntraPass Video Vault has reached its disk free space threshold but will
continue archiving until it has reached the minimum free disk space. The value can be up to 99,999
MB.
• Date field separator: You can define the date field separator that will appear in the archived video
directory.
• Destination folder: select the folder that will be used to archive video data. If you do not specify a
target folder, no video segment will be archived. By default, video segments will be archived in
C:\KantechVideoArchive folder.
• Sub‐folder structure: Each combo box contains the criteria that will be used to create a sub‐directory
where to archive video data. For example, selecting Video Server Name will create a sub‐directory
for each video server where all corresponding video segments will be stored. If you go down further
and select Day‐yyyy‐mm‐dd, another sub‐directory will be created under Video Server Name to store
video segments daily. You can go down to 5 levels of sub‐directories.
5 Select File tab to define the file naming convention.
• Filename structure: Check the boxes that correspond to the information you wish to include in the
file name.
• Separators: You can define a field separator for the filename as well as data and time.
6 Select the Process tab to tell the system how archived video segments will be processed.
• Default Video file format for your video archives: You can archive video segments using the KVI, KVA,
AVI, IMG or PS formats.
System Devices 57

• KVI stands for Kantech Video Intellex format. The KVI file contains thumbnail and video context
information and places a watermark on embedded.img. It must be viewed with the Intellex Video
Player that uses the American Dynamics API. You must make sure that the API has been installed
on the client’s computer.
• KVA stands for Kantech Video AVI format. The KVA file contains thumbnail and video context
information with no watermark on the embedded .avi. Video files can be viewed using Windows
Media Player or any other AVI player on the market.
• AVI stands for Audio Video Interlaced format. AVI video files are viewed using Windows Media
Player.
• IMG is the Intellex native format. Video data are stored in Intellex format (.img) and can be
viewed using the Intellex Video Player.
• PS: HDVR native compressed video format.
NOTE: KVI and KVA formats enable users to protect video files with a password and to specify key
frames for any selected video event. Key frames offer a fast way for retrieving video segments based
on a still image (bmp) representing the whole video sequence.
• Simultaneous video segment transfers: Select the number of simultaneous downloads. You cannot
retrieve more than one video segment from one video server at a time. However, it is possible to
retrieve more than one segment from more than one video server simultaneously. The minimum
value is 1; the maximum is 8.
NOTE: A high number of retrievals requires more network bandwidth. As the flow of video data
requires a great amount of network bandwidth, contact the Network administrator for these settings.
• Video segment duration limit: Specify the minimum and maximum duration of the video segment to
be archived. The maximum duration is 59 min:59 secs. Moving the cursor over the editable field will
activate a hint indicating the minimum and maximum duration. This feature can prove useful if you
want to restrict the number of archived video segments. For example, the restriction can be based
on the size of the record. For example, you can tell the system to ignore all video recordings with a
duration of less than 10 seconds.
• Default password for KVI and KVA file formats: For increased security, check the box if you want to
protect the archived video segments by a password. The KVI and KVA formats add the benefit of
protecting your archived data with a password. Make sure to enter identical information in the
Password and Password Confirmation fields. Operators with appropriate permission for viewing
archived video segments will be required to enter a valid password before viewing the video
segment.
• Kantech server polling frequency (m:ss) Using the slide bar to specify how often the EntraPass Video
Vault will poll the EntraPass server.
NOTE: Keep in mind that network traffic will be affected by the polling frequency between the
EntraPass Server, Workstations, Gateways and V ideo servers. Faster polling means higher network
bandwidth use.
7 Click the Significant Frame tab to define the key images that will be used as thumbnails to preview video
segments in the directories.
• You must select a setup type:
58 System Devices

• Significant Frame: The most representative still image of the video segment. This key image
serves as a summary for the video segment. It can be used as a thumbnail, for example, when
searching for a specific video segment.
• Significant Frame on Sequence: This feature is used only with dome cameras where a pattern
has been set for the camera to follow and the most representative still image of the video
segment must be defined within that pattern.
• Significant Frame on Preset: This feature is used only with dome cameras where preset positions
have been defined. The most representative image of the video segment can be set taking in
consideration the time needed by a camera to move from the first frame to the next preset
position.
• You can select one of the Default Key Frame types for each significant frame setup type:
• No image: there will be no thumbnail for this video segment.
• First frame: The video segment will be represented by a still image of the pre‐alarm recording.
This automatically enables the Delay for Significant Frame (ss:cc) parameter, which is the delay
calculated after the first frame to select the thumbnail image that will represent the video
segment. Moving the cursor over the editable field will display the min./max. time range
admissible.
• Event Frame: the video segment will be represented by the image that was captured when the
alarm occurred.
8 Click the Service tab to define login information when the EntraPass Video Vault server runs as a service
and a report needs to be printed.
• The Login to EntraPass service application box must be checked to activate this option.
• Enter the EntraPass Video Vault Domain name and Login name.
• Type in the Password and Password confirmation.

EntraPass Gateways Configuration

EntraPass Gateways convert the information received from a controller or a site and transmit the
converted data to the server. Gateways also convert the information received from the server and
transmit it to controllers. The gateways may be installed on a dedicated computer, or integrated with
another EntraPass workstation.

The following table shows Multi‐site Gateway features:

Capacities Multi‐site Gateway

Number of Gateways 41
Local sites 32 sites with serial and USB
On-line remote sites 512 sites with Kantech IP Link* and KT‐400
Dial up modems at host site 32 per gateway
Remote dial up sites 512 per gateway
System Devices 59

Capacities Multi‐site Gateway

Controllers per gateway 17,408 total (32 KT per site)
Readers/keypads per gateway 34,816
Events for timer on/off 34

* System requirements may differ according to the size of the sites and the number of events generated
per day.

Configuring a Multi‐site Gateway

1 From the Devices definition tab, click the Gateway icon.
2 From the Gateway drop‐down list, select the gateway to be configured.
3 Under the General tab:
• Select a Graphic and Video view to which the Gateway is assigned, if applicable.The video view
feature will only be activated If the video feature is enabled in EntraPass.
• If your Multi‐site Gateway connects to the first controller of a remote site via modem, click the Host
Modem Definition button to configure the modem communication options.
• Click on the New button to add a modem to the modem selection list.
• Configure the modem as per the example entries shown in the previous window and click OK to
return to the Device definition window.
NOTE: For reliability and configuration consistency, Kantech currently supports the US Robotics
Sportster external modem only. Moreover, the Modem connection type should be set to Receive and
transmit while the Modem settings should not be changed. If you are uncertain about modem setup
parameters, consult your network administrator for the settings which apply to your particular
hardware configuration.
4 Under the Multi‐Site Gateway tab, set the IP address and the Domain name for the gateway. A Multi‐site
Gateway is configured to manage KT‐100, KT‐200 or KT‐300 related events.
5 Under the KT‐100/KT‐200/KT‐300 Events tab, set the LED Timer on and Timer off for each event. A Multi‐
site Gateway is configured to manage KT‐100, KT‐200 or KT‐300 related events.
6 Under the KT‐400 Events tab, set the LED Pulse on and Pulse off for each event. A Multi‐site Gateway is
configured to manage KT‐400 related events.
7 Under the KTES Events tab, set the LED Pulse on and Pulse off for each event.
NOTE: EntraPass may support up to 41 Multi‐site Gateways.
The following table lists all the events available in a Multi‐site Gateway:

Access granted Arming request denied Time‐out on waiting for a second card

Access denied Postpone granted Access denied ‐ Waiting for a second

card
60 System Devices

Time‐out on access granted Postpone denied Access denied ‐ Reader locked

Waiting for keypad (Note 1) Door opened Exit delay

Time‐out on keypad Door forced open Entry delay

Bad code on keypad Pre‐alarm door opened too long Access granted by tenant (Note 3)

Valid floor selection Door open too long Access denied by tenant (Note 3)

Invalid floor selection Door alarm on relock Auxiliary relay activated by tenant
(Note 3)

Time‐out on floor selection Door unlocked Postal lock request granted (Note 3)

Request to exit granted Reader disabled Postal lock request denied (Note 3)

Request to exit denied Door armed

Arming request granted Waiting for a second card (Note 2)

NOTE 1: The activation period for the event Waiting for keypad is defined under the Keypad delays tab
in Step 8, on page 99).
NOTE 2: The activation period for the event Waiting for a second card is defined in “Configuring the
KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller” on page 75 for KT‐400.
NOTE 3: These events are for the KTES only.
8 Under the Keypad delays tab, define keypad options.
• In the Keypad delays section, enter the Inter‐Digit Delay time (m:ss). It represents the maximum
delay permitted between each selection of a keypad key by a user.
• Enter the Time‐out on keypad delay time (m:ss). It is set in seconds. It represents the maximum time
allowed for users to begin entering their personal identification number at a keypad.
NOTE: The maximum time allowed for both the inter‐digit and time‐out on keypad delays is 2 minutes
and 7 seconds, and for KT‐400 this is 4 minutes and 15 seconds.
• In the Delays (Not applicable to KT‐200) section, using the up/down arrows, determine the number
of Invalid attempts before keypad disabled. Users have a maximum of 255 invalid attempts before
the keypad is disabled.
• Enter the Keypad disabled duration delay (h:mm). The maximum duration allowed is 4 hours and 15
minutes. When the counter reaches the maximum, the keypad will be disabled for all cards. It is
disabled for the delay specified in the Keypad disabled duration field.
• Enter the Reset attempt counter delay (m:ss). When the delay specified in the Reset attempt
counter field is expired, the system will set the attempt counter to zero. The maximum delay is 4
minutes and 15 seconds. If the value entered is greater than the maximum allowed, then the system
will use the previous correct value.
System Devices 61

Sites Configuration
A site is composed of controllers attached to the same communication port or connection. The system
can manage up to 32 local sites per Multi‐site Gateway. EntraPass also allows users to add up to 512
remote dial up sites per Multi‐site Gateway. Multi‐site Gateway sites are composed of KT‐100, KT‐
200,KT‐300 and KT‐400 controllers.
Items displayed in the EntraPass Site window vary depending on the selected connection type. For
example, if the selected connection type is an RS‐232, an RS‐232 tab will be displayed to configure the
corresponding serial port and baud rate. If the connection type is dial‐up, three extra tabs will be
displayed for modem configuration.
Six types of connections are available: Direct (RS‐232 and USB), Secure IP (KT‐400), Secure IP (KTES),
Secure IP (IP Link), Ethernet (polling) and Dial‐Up (RS‐232) modem. Check the following table for the
connection type versus the gateway.

Multi‐site
Global Gateway KT‐NCC
Connection Type Gateway
(Note 2) (Note 2)
(Note 1)
Direct (RS‐232 or USB) Yes Yes Yes

Ethernet (polling) Yes Yes Yes

Secure IP (KT‐400) Yes No

Secure IP (KTES) Yes

Secure IP (IP Link) Yes

Dial‐up (RS‐232) modem Yes

NOTE 1: The Multi‐site Gateway is available in all EntraPass Editions. Even though, it is not referred as
a Multi‐site Gateway, the EntraPass Special Edition includes an imbedded Multi‐site Gateway.
NOTE 2: The KT‐NCC and the Global Gateway are only available with EntraPass Global Edition.
1 From the Devices window, click the Site icon.
2 Select the Gateway where the site will be configured.
3 If you are defining a new Site, assign a name to the new site and click the Save icon. The bullet next to
the Site name will turn green.
4 Under the General tab:
• In the Hardware definition and KTES section, specify the number of controllers for the site. There
may be up to 32 controllers per site. If the number specified is greater than the maximum allowed,
the system will set the value to 32.
NOTE: When the connection type is Secure IP (KTES), the number of KTES is automatically limited to a
single KTES per site.
62 System Devices

• In the Daylight saving time options section, check the Use Windows daylight saving time setting box
to automatically switch to daylight saving time according to Windows standard settings. Leave
unchecked if you want to do it manually.
• If you are communicating with a remote site by modem, enter the time difference between gateway
location and EntraPass server location in the Time adjustment based on Gateway timezone (h) field.
This setting will allow events from the remote site to be displayed at local gateway time on EntraPass
workstations located in different timezones.
• Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable.The video view will
only be activated If the video feature is enabled in EntraPass.
• Use the scroll list to select the Connection type between the computer and the gateway. This will
determine which tabs will be displayed for configuration.

Setting up Communication Timing

Caution: Do not use the Communication timing option. If you need to set up the communication delay
and polling frequency, call Kantech Technical Support Help Desk. Inappropriate use of this option may
cause serious problems to the system. The Communication timings window shows the actual default
settings. They must be preserved unless advised otherwise by Kantech.

Configuring a Direct RS‐232 Connection Type

This type of connection can be configured in EntraPass Corporate Edition for Multi‐site Gateways to
communicate via a RS‐232 gateway.
1 When selecting the Direct RS‐232 connection type option in the General tab, a RS‐232 tab will become
available.
• Select the Communication Port COM.
• Select the Controller’s loop baud rate. The default rate is 19200 baud.

Configuring an IP Device Connection Type (Multi‐site Gateway Only)

This type of connection can be configured in a Multi‐site Gateway with EntraPass Corporate Edition to
communicate via a Kantech IP Link, a KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller or a KTES.
NOTE 1: For additional information on configuring the Kantech IP Link, please refer to the Kantech IP
Link Installation Manual, DN1670.
NOTE 2: For hardware information on the KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller, please refer to the KT‐
400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller Installation Manual, DN1726.
NOTE 3: If you choose Secure (IP KT‐400) as a connection type, the master controller must be a KT‐400.
NOTE 4: For the KTES, the only controller in the loop must be a KTES. For hardware information on the
KTES, please refer to the KTES Installation Manual, DN1769.
System Devices 63

1 When you specify Secure IP (IP Link), Secure IP (KT‐400) or Secure IP (KTES) from the Connection type
drop‐down list in the General tab, you will be able to access three extra tabs: IP Device IP configuration,
IP Device Automated Connection and IP Device Parameters.
• MAC address: Complete the device MAC address. The first 6 characters in the MAC address (00‐50‐F9)
cannot be modified.
• Check the Online box.
• Obtain IP address automatically: Check this option when configuring the device with a
Reserved DHCP IP address.
• Use the following IP Address: Check this option when you want to assign a static IP address to the
device. When selected the next three parameters will become available.
• IP Address: The static IP address should be provided by the System Administrator.
• Subnet Mask: This address should be provided by the System Administrator.
• Gateway (Router): This address should be provided by the System Administrator.
• DNS server address: This address should be provided by the System Administrator (for Kantech
IP Link and KT‐400 only).
• Protocol: Used to specify the communication protocol, UDP or TCP.
• Port:
• For TCP: Should be 18802 for the host site. Not required for the remote site.
• For UDP: Port 18810 is automatically assigned to the device by default. It should not be
modified unless the IP device is at a remote location, like in a WAN.
NOTE: Port 18802 should be used with KT‐400, KTES and IPLink.
• The EntraPass Special Edition / Multi‐site Gateway IP address will be used.
• IP address: You will enter the gateway computer IP address.
• Domain name: If you don’t have the gateway IP address, you can enter the domain name provided by
the System Administrator (for Kantech IP Link, KTES and KT‐400 only).
NOTE: You must select to either enter the IP address or the domain name. You cannot enter both at the
same time (for Kantech IP Link, KTES and KT‐400 only).
• Test DNS: Once you have entered the domain name, click on the Test DNS button. This should display
the corresponding IP address (for Kantech IP Link, KTES and KT‐400 only).
2 Move to the IP Device Automated Connection tab if you are in a WAN environment.
• The Broadcast configuration box must be checked at all times.
• Private IP Address (LAN): Will assign the IP address automatically.
• Public IP Address (WAN): This IP address should have been provided by your internet provider.
This corresponds to the IP of the remote site.
• Domain Name (WAN): This information should be provided by the System Administrator. This
corresponds to the IP of the remote site.
• Enable KT‐Finder diagnostic for IP device: Check this box if you want to use the KT‐Finder as a
configuration and troubleshooting tool.
3 Move to the IP Device Parameters tab to configure security and communication parameters.
• Encryption key: You will enter a 16‐Digit hexadecimal code to secure your site.
64 System Devices

• Controller’s loop baud rate: Enter the controller’s loop baud rate.
NOTE: For a KT‐200, the maximum baud rate is 19200.
• In the Delays section:
• Heartbeat frequency (mm:ss): Enter the frequency to which you want the IP device to send a
signal to the gateway to indicate it is online (00:15 to 10:00).
• Fail to report after (mm:ss): Enter the delay before acknowledging communication failure (01:30
to 59:59).
• Fail‐soft delay on gateway communication failure (mm:ss): Enter the delay before the IP device will
consider communication with a controller has been lost and the controller is in fail‐soft mode.
• Retry Count: Enter the number of times the IP device will try to communicate with a controller
within the delay setup in the previous parameter before acknowledging communication failure (1 to
15).
• Maximum wait on send command (s.cc): When applicable, enter the maximum delay period that the
gateway will allow for the IP device to acknowledge reception of a command from an EntraPass
workstation (1.00 to 9.99).

Configuring an Ethernet Polling Connection Type

This type of connection can be configured in EntraPass Corporate Edition for Multi‐site Gateways to
communicate with the gateway via the network (Lantronix).
1 When selecting the Ethernet (Polling) option in the General tab, an IP device tab will become available.
• Enter the terminal server IP address and Port number.
• Select the communication protocol:
• TCP if the site communicates with the gateway through a terminal server using TCP protocol. In
this case, you have to configure the terminal server. To do this, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions or refer to the Terminal server documentation.
• UDP (User Datagram Protocol), uses the IP protocol to send datagrams from one Internet
application to another. It is called “connectionless” because the sender and the receiver are not
required to connect before the transmission of data. Check this option if the site you are
configuring uses this protocol.

Configuring a Dial‐Up (RS‐232) Modem Connection Type

If you specified Dial‐up (RS‐232) modem from the Connection type drop‐down list in the General tab, you
will be able to access three extra tabs: Modem options, Modem schedule parameters and
Miscellaneous.
NOTE: The Dial‐up option is only available when selecting a Multi‐site Gateway.
1 Select the Modem Options tab to set outgoing call behavior to site modem.
NOTE: The Remote Baud rate should not be changed. If you are uncertain about modem setup
parameters, consult your network administrator for the settings which apply to your particular
hardware configuration.
• Enter the Code to access an outside line (if applicable).
System Devices 65

• Enter the Remote phone number.

NOTE: For reliability and configuration consistency, Kantech currently supports the US Robotics
Sportster external modem only.
NOTE: The Modem init settings can not be changed.
• Select the Phone line type: Tone or Pulse.
• Set the Number of rings before answer that will define the number of rings before the modem picks
up the call. This option is valid whenever ring schedules are not in effect.
• Set the Answer on first ring schedule option to configure the time interval during which site modem
will be allowed to answer on one ring.
• Set the Number of retries. This will set the number of calls the modem will attempt to make before
giving up.
2 Move to the Modem Schedule parameters tab to set time intervals during which the gateway or site
connects to remote sites or gateways (through modem calls) in order to perform specific tasks.
• Click on the Retrieve site events browse button to bring up the schedule selection window. Select
the schedule that best corresponds to the time requirements set out for this task. For more
information on defining schedules, see "Schedules Definition" on page 186
• Repeat this step for If data is modified since last, Report events under priority call type and Report
events automatically.
• Define the delay before the system will Fail to report after (mm:ss).
NOTE: To schedule the reporting of events under priority call types, first define Priority call types for
items such as doors, inputs and controllers.
3 Click the Miscellaneous tab to configure how modems handle site incoming and outgoing calls.
• Check the Use a callback connection option to force the gateway modem to hang up after initial
connection to the remote site modem and to stand by for an acknowledgement call from the remote
modem. You may also want to customize the Fail to callback delay. Default is set to 1:30 (1 min 30
secs.).
• This option only applies to the KTES. Check the Enable multiple KTES line sharing option to change
the Identification delay (ss) between each KTES. The time range value is between 00 and 20
seconds.
• Select the Primary host modem in the drop down list. If available, select a backup modem in the
Secondary host modem. This setting is useful when the primary modem is busy or fails to take the
call.
• Check After reception stay online for if you wish to limit in‐call time to a predetermined amount of
time which can be set to anywhere between 00.03.00 and 23.59.59.
• Check the Call immediately when slave controller communication failure to be alerted in the event
that a slave controller fails to send data to the master controller (the one carrying the modem).
66 System Devices

• Check the Call immediately when buffer 70% full to force download of a site controller’s event buffer
as soon as it reaches 70% capacity.
NOTE: Do not click the Remote modem delays button. All values are factory‐set for optimum
performances with the supported US Robotics modems. Settings SHOULD NOT be edited unless
recommended by Kantech.

Controllers Configuration
Controllers provide audiovisual feedback on the access decision. Typically, a red/green light (LED)
indicator on the reader informs the cardholder that the door is unlocked or that access has been denied.
A local door alarm can be installed to provide an audible warning if the door is forced open or remains
open after an access.
The controller definition tells the system how a controller is being used and what devices are associated
with it: (doors, input zones, relays and output devices). Controllers may be defined during a gateway or
site configuration; or in the controller definition menu, by selecting either the controller icon (Devices >
Controller) or by using Express Setup program. EntraPass supports four types of controllers: KT‐100, KT‐
200, KT‐300 and KT‐400. These provide the ability to activate local functions associated with a controller.
The number of devices associated with a controller varies according to the controller type. The following
table summarizes the basic components associated with each type of Kantech controller:

Input Auxiliary
Type Door(s) Relays
Zones Outputs
KT‐100 1 4 4 2

KT‐200 2 2 16 4

KT‐300 2 2 8 4

KT‐400 4 4 16 16

KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller

The KT‐400 is a Four‐Door Ethernet‐ready encrypted controller providing a secure solution for any
company looking for the highest security available. It integrates into existing EntraPass v4.01 and higher
systems and with other Kantech controllers or can be the basis of new security installations.

Main Features
• Up to 256 inputs (16 onboard with high security double end‐of‐line resistor configuration)
• Up to 256 outputs
• Four Onboard form C relays
• 16 reader output on board
• Onboard 128‐bit AES encryption ensures a high degree of network security
• Removable terminal blocks
System Devices 67

• On Board Ethernet port ensures quick network connectivity, no external Ethernet device required
• Automatic Port Detection
• For readers, locks and other devices, built‐in battery backed power supply ensures continuous operation
and saves installation time and money by eliminating the need for an external power source
• Can act as an IP Master controller on a RS‐485 network
• Compatible with Kantech controllers KT‐100, KT‐300 & (KT‐200 on a separate loop)
• Dedicated Tamper Input
• External lock device power option
• Four configurable output per reader
• Built‐in WEB page configuration
• Multiple Configuration Options (IP, RS‐485 & RS‐232)
• Low network bandwidth consumption
• Visual Status Indicators (LEDs)
• More supervision and monitoring
• Controller local area with anti‐passback
• 100,000 Card per controller and 20,000 stored events in stand‐alone mode
• Activation time on temporary action & events

Configuring General Parameters for Kantech Controllers

1 From the Controller definition window, select the gateway associated with the controller site.
2 From the Site drop‐down list, select the site where the controller is located.
3 From the Controller drop‐down list, select the controller you want to define. Once selected, the language
section is enabled. You may rename the selected controller.
• Assign a meaningful name to the controller in the language section (English and French in our
example), then click the Save icon. Once you save, the Controller type drop‐down list becomes
disabled.
NOTE: If you selected a KT‐200, move your cursor exactly above that
number, a hint will popup to indicate the dip switch settings for that
specific KT‐200 controller.
• The system prompts you to use the Express Setup program. Click Yes to
continue. If you select No you will have to manually configure these
devices in their respective definition menus (doors, relays, inputs and
auxiliary outputs).
NOTE: EntraPass offers you the ability to install two types of readers on the same controller (primary
and secondary). This feature is only available with KT‐100 and KT‐300.For KT‐400, 8 different reader
types can be loaded (this feature is supported with firmware 1.06 and later).
NOTE: On a given controller, all reader types must be the same (W iegand or ABA).
• After configuring components associated with the controller, select the reader and keypad installed
on your controller from the Reader and Keypad type drop‐down lists. Check Table 1 for the reader
types and Table 2 the keypad types versus the controller type.
68 System Devices

Table 1: Reader Types

Reader Types KT‐100 KT‐200 KT‐300 KT‐400

ABA with Type CNPID Cards Yes Yes Yes

BC-201 - CF100 Yes Yes Yes

BC-201 Barcode with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes

CARDKEY Yes Yes Yes

CASI-RUSCO 26/28-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes

CHECKPOINT Sielox Format Yes Yes Yes

CHUBB Yes Yes Yes

DORADO ABA clock and data Yes Yes Yes

DORADO ABA Wiegand Yes Yes Yes

DORADO EMPI 26-Bit Yes Yes Yes

DORADO EMPI 34-Bit Yes Yes Yes

FIPS 201 75-bit no expiry date Yes

FIPS 201 75-bit with expiry date Yes

H10302, 37-Bit Yes Yes Yes Yes

HID CORPORATE 1000 Generic Yes Yes Yes Yes

HID iClass 37-Bit No Party Yes

HID KSF (Kantech Secure Format) Yes Yes Yes Yes

HUGHES 36-Bit - CF104 Yes Yes Yes

INDALA old 27-Bit Format Yes Yes Yes

INTERCON Yes Yes Yes

ioProx Dual Driver (26-Bit and XSF) Yes Yes Yes Yes

ioProx Kantech 26-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes Yes

ioProx Kantech XSF Format Yes Yes Yes Yes

ioProx UK 31-Bit Wiegand Yes

KRONOS Card with Bar Code Reader Yes Yes Yes

Mifare 32-Bit CSN Yes Yes Yes Yes

System Devices 69

Reader Types KT‐100 KT‐200 KT‐300 KT‐400

Mifare 34-Bit AID 517A Yes Yes Yes

Mirage 135 Yes Yes Yes

NCS Yes Yes Yes

Northern 32-Bit with NR1 Reader Yes Yes Yes

Northern 34-Bit with Hughes Reader Yes Yes Yes

Paramount Farm 32-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 1 - CF101 Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 1 with 10-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 1 with 16-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 1 with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 2 ABA with 10-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 2 ABA with 16-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 2 ABA with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 2KP ABA with 10-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 2KP ABA with 16-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 2KP ABA with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes

Polaris 32/35/37 CHRS - CF103 Yes Yes Yes

RBH 50-Bit Card Driver Yes

SCHLAGE 1030 and 1040 Card Format Yes Yes Yes

Sensor 26-Bit Wiegand Standard Yes Yes Yes Yes

Sensor 34-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes Yes

SFT-R50 26-Bit Yes Yes Yes

Shadow PROX Yes Yes Yes Yes

Siteguard Format Yes Yes Yes

Wiegand 26/28-Bit - CF102 Yes Yes Yes

WLS Wireless 26-Bit Yes Yes Yes

WLS Wireless Shadow Prox and HID Yes Yes Yes

70 System Devices

Table 2: Keypad Types

Keypad Types KT‐100 KT‐200 KT‐300 KT‐400

KP-1003H Yes Yes Yes

KP-500, KP-2000, KP-2500, KP-3000 Yes Yes Yes

ioProx with Integrated Keypad (8-Bit Burst) Yes Yes Yes Yes

POL-2KP - 5-Digit Integrated Keypad Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: The New reader driver icon allows you to install a custom driver for a specific controller.
Moreover, using this button allows you to add the driver in the Reader+ Driver table, making it
available the next time you want to configure a new controller.
• Use the Disable controller polling when you need to put the controller in disable mode. In disable
mode, the controller will never be polled and all status requests from this specific controller will
send a message that this controller is disabled.
NOTE: This option can be used when a controller is removed temporarily but must not be deleted
(when under repair, for example). It also allows Operators to easily setup the software before the
physical installation is completed.
• Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable.The video view will
only be activated If the video feature is enabled in EntraPass.
4 To define the schedules applicable to the new controller, you must move to the Supervision Schedule
tab.
• Select the applicable Schedules for the new controller:
• When a KT‐100 or KT‐300 is selected: only the Power supervision schedule list is displayed.
• When a KT‐200 or KT‐400 is selected, the Power supervision schedule and the Tamper switch
supervision schedule lists are available.
5 Click the Save icon.

Configuring the KT‐100 Controller

Once the general parameters are defined, the Controller type tab is displayed.
1 Select the KT‐100 tab from the Controller window.
2 Enter the controller serial number in the Serial number field. Usually, the number is found on the
controller label. The field is defined to accept only numeric characters, except for the first character
which may be an a or A. If a lower case character is entered, the system converts it to a capital letter.
3 Enter the Wait for second access card delay. The maximum time allowed is 2 minutes and 7 seconds. This
feature is useful for secured areas where two cards are required to access a secured door. If the value
entered is greater than the maximum allowed, the system will use the existing value.
4 In the Keypad escape key drop‐down list, choose a keypad escape key if applicable. This feature is
associated with PIN numbers. When a user enters a wrong number, he/she may press the escape key and
re‐enter the PIN, without incrementing the number of attempts.
System Devices 71

5 In the EOL resistor (5.6K) drop‐down list, select the resistor type used with your system. By default, this
choice is set to None. This feature is used as a supervision device for all inputs. In fact, if this feature is
enabled and if an input is disconnected, an alarm message is generated and sent to the Alarm message
desktop (or other desktop configured to receive such events).
NOTE: For details on defining controller options for KT‐100 controllers, see "Defining Controller
Options" on page 78.

Configuring the KT‐200 Controller

Each KT‐200 can monitor, in real‐time, the state of 16 input points such as magnetic contacts, motion
detectors, temperature sensors, etc. The door contact (supervising door state) and the REX (warning the
system that a user is exiting) are connected to such inputs.

The KT‐200 is equipped with two relays. These relays can be activated according to schedules, reported
events or a combination of different logical conditions. The system is expandable to 16 relays using REB‐
8 relay expansion board modules. REB‐8 may be used as relays or as elevator controllers. KT‐2252 are
only used as elevator controllers.
NOTE: Please note that the KT‐2252 elevator controllers are no longer available.

Defining KT‐200 Expansion Devices

KT‐2252 elevators offer a low voltage interface for up to 32 floors. Up to 4 KT‐2252 can be connected to
one KT‐200 controller for a maximum of 64 floors per cab. One KT‐2252 can be shared between 2 cabs,
serving a maximum of 16 floors each (one common service switch for both cabs). When users present
their cards to the elevator cab reader, the KT‐200 verifies which floors can be accessed by this
cardholder and sends a list of floors to be enabled to the KT‐2252 interface. The KT‐2252 closes the
electronic interrupters corresponding to the related floors.

Defining KT‐200 Auxiliary Devices

1 From the Controller definition window, select the KT‐200 tab.
2 In the Auxiliary devices section, select the type of devices used with KT‐200 controller.
• Check the REB‐8 relay option if REB‐8 expansion boards are used as relays. Only 16 relays can be
defined. If two REB‐8 are added, the last two relays (the 17th and 18th relays) can be used to
perform different actions. You have to specify the additional actions for the two relays in the Extra
relay drop‐down list.
• Check the KT‐2252 elevator controller and REB‐8 relay option if KT‐2252 are used as elevator
controllers and REB‐8 are used as relays on the same door controller. A maximum of four KT‐2252
can be connected to the controller.
• Check the REB‐8 Elevator Controller option if REB‐8 are used for elevator control. Up to four REB‐8
can be used for elevator control.
NOTE: When an elevator controller option is checked, an Elevator tab appears beside the KT‐200 tab.
The following section explains how to program elevator controls using REB‐8 and KT‐2252 elevator
controllers.
72 System Devices

Programming KT‐2252 Elevator Controllers

The Elevator tab allows you to specify which auxiliary devices are used with the KT‐200 for elevator
control and how they are used. Depending on the expansion board installed and on the option checked,
the Elevator window displays the REB‐8 Installed or KT‐2252 Installed section.
1 From the Controller definition window, select the KT‐200 tab.
2 In the Auxiliary devices section, select KT‐2252 elevator controller, or KT‐2252 elevator controller and
REB‐8 relay. The Elevator tab appears.
3 To configure elevator controllers, select the Elevator tab. When KT‐2252 elevator controllers are used,
the Elevator mode section is enabled.
4 In the Elevator mode section, check the appropriate number of floors. This indicates how the floors are
controlled with the KT‐2252.
• Select 16 Floors if there is one KT‐2252 for two cabs sharing the same floors.
• Select 32 Floors if there is one KT‐2252 per cab.
NOTE: The Inputs column refers to the KT‐2252 terminals. When floors have been defined (in the Floor
menu), the Floors column contains the floors that are associated with the inputs.
5 In the KT‐2252 installed section, specify the number of KT‐2252 installed. The options are cumulative. If
for example the KT‐2252 #3 option is checked, KT‐2252 #1 & 2 have to be checked as well. The following
table summarizes how KT‐2252 elevator controllers are used:

Number of Cabs Number of Floors Number of KT‐2252

1 8 1

1 16 1

1 32 1

1 64 2

2 8 1

2 16 1

2 32 2

2 64 4

6 In the Floors column, select the floors associated with KT‐2252 controller terminals.
NOTE: The Inputs column refers to the KT‐2252 terminals. When floors have been defined (in the Floor
menu), the Floors column contains the floors associated with the inputs.
System Devices 73

Programming REB‐8 Elevator Controllers

REB‐8 relay expansion boards may be used as a cost‐efficient alternative for elevator control. With a
REB‐8 expansion board added to a KT‐200, the software may control up to two elevator cabs per
controller.
1 In the KT‐200 definition window, select the REB‐8 elevator controller option. When the option is
selected, an Elevator tab appears beside the KT‐200 tab. The REB‐8 definition section is only active when
REB‐8 are used as relays.
2 Select the Elevator tab to configure the REB‐8 elevator controllers. Up to four REB‐8 elevator controllers
are supported.
3 Specify the number of REB‐8 that are installed on the controller. The selection is cumulative. For
example, if four REB‐8 are installed, the first three checkboxes have to be checked also. The following
table summarizes how REB‐8 are assigned to floors and to elevator cabs.

Number of REB‐8 Number of Floors Number of Cabs

1 1 to 8 Cab 1

2 9 to 16 Cab 1

3 1 to 8 Cab 2

4 9 to 16 Cab 2

NOTE: The Inputs column refers to the REB‐8 terminals. When floors have been defined (in the Floor
menu), the Floors column contains the floors that are associated with the inputs.
4 In the Floors column, select the floors associated with REB‐8 controller terminals. For details on floor
definition and door group definition, see "Doors Configuration" on page 88.
NOTE: There is no floor confirmation when an REB‐8 is used as an elevator controller.

Defining REB‐8 Relays

When REB‐8 are used as relays, you need to specify how many relays are installed on the KT‐200. The
controller can handle a maximum of 16 accessible relays and already provides 2 on‐board relays.
1 Under the KT‐200 tab, select the REB‐8 relay option if REB‐8 are used as relays.
2 If they are used with the KT‐2252 elevator controller, select the KT‐2252 elevator controller and REB‐8
relay option. In either case, the REB‐8 definition section is enabled.
3 In the REB‐8 Definition section, select the appropriate option: No REB‐8, One REB‐8 or Two REB‐8.
4 If two REB‐8 are added (for a total of 18 relays), the last two relays can be used to perform different
actions: select the use for the extra relays from the Extra relay drop‐down list.
5 Select the Status relay tab to program a relay or group of relays that will be activated when an event
occurs.
NOTE: For details on defining controller options for KT‐200 controllers, see "Defining Controller
Options" on page 78.
74 System Devices

Configuring the KT‐300 Controller

The KT‐300 constantly supervises battery condition and reports “Low battery / No battery condition”
status to the system. It also supervises locking devices for short and open circuits to detect lock failures.

KT‐300 controllers support Combus modules. The Combus is a 4‐conductor cable bus to which several
expansion modules are connected in parallel to add inputs, outputs, relays and an LCD time and date
display.
1 From the Site menu, click the Controller icon, then select the KT‐300 tab.
2 Enter the controller serial number in the Serial number field. Usually, the number is found on the
controller label. The field is defined to accept only numeric characters, except for the first character. It
may be an a or A. If a lower case character is entered, the system converts it to upper case.
3 Enter the Wait for second access card delay. The maximum time allowed is two minutes and seven
seconds. If the value entered is greater than the maximum allowed, the system will use the existing
value. This feature is useful when access to a place is controlled by two cards.
4 In the Keypad escape key drop down list, choose a keypad escape key if applicable. This feature is
associated with PINs. When a user enters a wrong number, he/she may press the escape key and re‐enter
the PIN, without incrementing the number of attempts.
5 In the EOL resistor (5.6K) drop‐down list, select the resistor type. By default, the Single resistor option is
selected. If you hear a long buzz, verify the number of resistors installed on your system.

Configuring the KT‐300 Combus Modules

Five combus modules can be connected to a KT‐300:
• KT‐PC4108 (8‐zone input expansion module). This module has a tamper contact input.
• KT‐PC4116 (16‐zone input expansion module). This module has a tamper contact input.
• KT‐PC4204 (4‐relay/power supply expansion module). It has a tamper contact input and also includes
a built‐in 12VDC, 1A power supply for field devices.
• KT‐PC4216 (16‐zone output expansion module). It can be used for elevator control, although
additional hardware may be required.
• KT‐LCD3 (Kantech 32‐character liquid crystal display). The LCD is green (normal status), red (power
failure) and yellow (trouble).
1 If a Combus module is installed to the KT‐300 controller, click the Combus module configuration button.
Undefined Combus terminals are identified by red flags/bullets. Once a module has been defined, it is
identified by a green flag.
2 To define a module, select one, then click the Define button (lower part of the window). The Enter
Combus module serial number message box appears.
3 Enter the module’s serial number, then click OK.
NOTE: To obtain this number, you have to activate the Tamper switch or to press any key on the
keyboard. The Combus serial number is displayed in the Desktop Message.
4 Assign names to the modules in the language fields.
System Devices 75

5 Check the options related to the module you want to configure (if these are displayed in the window).
NOTE: Usage options of a module vary according to the selected Combus module. For example,
installing the KT3‐LCD and checking the options Combus low power and Display date and time will allow
the KT‐300 to report Combus low power conditions and to display the date and time.
The following table summarizes the options associated with each module:

Combus
Options Additional options
type
KT3‐LCD Combus low power, display date and No additional options
time

KT‐PC4108 Tamper alarm, Combus low power 8‐input module

KT‐PC4116 Tamper alarm, Combus low power 16‐input module

KT‐PC4204 Tamper alarm, Combus low power, Low Used as relays (1‐4)
battery, Power failure, lower auxiliary
power

KT‐PC4216 Tamper alarm, Combus low power Used as outputs

6 Check the Combus low power option so that the KT‐300 will report any Combus low power condition
7 Check Display date and time option so that LCD can display the date and time.
8 When you have finished configuring the Combus module, click the OK button to go back to the Status
relay tab.
9 Associate a Local activation relay for Power failure, Combus failure and Combus low power (Multi‐site
Gateway only). If you want to assign a specific relay, you may click the three‐dot button and select a
specific relay or group of relays.
NOTE: To configure local activation relay, you must configure relays (Devices > Relays), and then select
specific relays for local activation.
10 Under Priority call type, assign the call type option that best suits failure event reporting (Multi‐site
Gateway only). To access the Priority call type feature, the site connection type must be set to Modem.
NOTE: For details on defining controller options for KT‐300 controllers, see "Defining Controller
Options" on page 78.
NOTE: For more information, see "Sites Configuration" on page 61.

Configuring the KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller

The KT‐400 constantly supervises ac power and battery condition and reports “AC Power Failure”,
“Normal Battery”, “Low Battery”, “Battery Critical”, “No Battery”, or “Battery Brown Out”, status to the
76 System Devices

EntraPass system. Power outputs are supervised and electronically protected against short‐circuits and surges.
Locking devices are also supervised for short and open circuits.
NOTE: For hardware information on the KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller, please refer to the KT‐400
Ethernet Four‐Door Controller Installation Manual, DN1726.
1 From the Devices > Controller menu, click on the General tab and select the Reader type(s).
2 Select the Keypad type (if applicable).
3 Click on the KT‐400 tab. Enter the controller serial number in the Serial number field. The number is
found on the controller label next to the reset button. The field is defined to accept only numeric
characters, except for the first character. It may be an a or A. If a lower case character is entered, the
system converts it to upper case.
4 Enter the Wait for second access card delay. The maximum time allowed is 4 minutes and 15 seconds. If
the value entered is greater than the maximum allowed, the system will use the existing value. This
feature is useful when access to a place is controlled by two cards.
5 In the Keypad escape key drop down list, choose a keypad escape key if applicable. This feature is
associated with PINs. When a user enters a wrong number, he/she may press the escape key and re‐enter
the PIN, without incrementing the number of attempts.
6 In the EOL Resistor (5.6 K) drop‐down list, select the resistor type. By default, the Single resistor option is
selected. If you hear a long buzz from the installed reader/keypad, verify the number of resistors
installed on your system.

Configuring the KT‐400 Expansion Modules

The KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller support expansion modules through its SPI expansion port.
The SPI port is a 6‐conductor cable bus to which several expansion modules are daisy‐chained to add
inputs, outputs and relays.
Warning: The KT‐400 SPI port maximum current draw is 500 mA, when the 12V AUX terminals are not
used. External power supply (12 VDC, 2 Amps) for the expansion module is required when the total
current draw exceeds 500mA on the SPI Port. For additional hardware details, please refer to the KT‐
400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller Installation Manual, DN1726.
Three expansion module types are available:
• KT‐MOD‐INP16: The KT‐MOD‐INP16 is an input module that adds 240 zones to the KT‐400 controller. Up
to 15 input modules (16 input modules if used for elevator configuration) can be connected to a KT‐400
for a total of 240 external inputs. Adding the 16 onboard inputs of the KT‐400 gives a total of 256 inputs
per KT‐400. For further details, check the KT‐MOD‐INP16 KT‐400 Expansion Module 16‐Zone Input with
SPI Cable, Install Sheet, DN1776.
• KT‐MOD‐OUT16: The KT‐MOD‐OUT16 is a 16‐output module. It can be used for elevator access control
with additional hardware. Up to 16 output modules can be connected to a KT‐400 for a total of 256
outputs. For further details, check the KT‐MOD‐OUT16 KT‐400 Expansion Module 16‐Output with SPI
Cable, Install Sheet, DN1781.
• KT‐MOD‐REL8: The KT‐MOD‐REL8 is an 8‐relay outputs expansion module used as general relays or
elevator control outputs. Up to 32 relay modules can be connected to a KT‐400 for a total of 256 relays.
For further details, check the KT‐MOD‐REL8 KT‐400 Expansion Module 8‐Relay Output with SPI Cable,
Install Sheet, DN1786.
System Devices 77

The following table summarizes the options associated with each module:

Expansion Module Options

KT‐MOD‐INP16 Controller inputs (up to 256) and/or elevator inputs (up to 64
per elevator door)

KT‐MOD‐OUT16 Outputs relays (up to 256) and/or elevator outputs (up to 64

per elevator door)

KT‐MOD‐REL8 (Note) Relays (up to 256) and/or elevator outputs (up to 64 per ele‐
vator door)

NOTE: There are already 4 relays available on the KT‐400. Make sure to check the relay number
assignments to prevent redundancy unless it has been planned on purpose.
NOTE: The 9‐16 relay configuration is set by default.
1 If an expansion module(s) is(are) connected to a KT‐400, click the Expansion module configuration
button. The Expansion modules setup appears.

If you want to then go to

configure an input module KT‐MOD‐INP16 Step 2.

configure an output module KT‐MOD‐OUT16 Step 5.

configure an output module KT‐MOD‐REL8 Step 6.

modify an existing expansion module configuration Step 7.

2 To add a KT‐MOD‐INP16, select the Input Module tab and then click on Add. If there is more than one
input modules listed, make sure that you select the correct one before changing the input assignments.
Assign names to the modules in the language fields and choose the options.
3 Select the DEOL: Double end‐of‐line resistor JP4 On checkbox to define a KT‐MOD‐INP16 module in
DEOL.
NOTE: The entire expansion board is used to provide 8 inputs with DEOL. These 8 inputs are added of
the next group of 8 inputs. For example, if inputs #33‐40 are linked to a DEOL module, inputs #33‐40
and #41‐48 will not be available for other modules.
NOTE: Controller inputs 1‐16 are reserved to the inputs on the KT‐400.
78 System Devices

4 Selection of the inputs numbers can be done in two ways: using the drop‐down menu or the Extended
selection box. Right‐click on the inputs menu selection to view the Extended selection box, See "Using
the Extended Selection Box" on page 65.
NOTE: This is an exclusive condition. You cannot select the same item in the Inputs drop‐down menu
and in the Elevator inputs drop‐down menu because it will be a duplicate, and the system does not
accept any duplicate. For example, Inputs # 17‐24 cannot be selected twice. Another way to let you
understand this concept, is that in the Elevator inputs menu the same item will not be available for
the same door. The same concept applies for the Elevator outputs menu.
5 To add a KT‐MOD‐OUT16, select the Output Module tab and then click on Add. When you click on the
Add button, a menu appears and lets you select which output module you want to add. Assign names to
the modules in the language fields and choose the options.
6 To add a KT‐MOD‐REL8, select the Output Module tab and then click on Add. When you click on the Add
button, a menu appears and lets you select which output module you want to add. Assign names to the
modules in the language fields and choose the options.
Warning: There are already 4 relays available on the KT‐400. Make sure to check the relay number
assignments to prevent redundancy unless it has been planned on purpose.
7 From the Summary tab, you can modify all the modules. Make sure to highlight the module you want to
modify in the left column before doing any modifications on the right side.
8 When you have finished configuring the expansion modules, click the OK button to go back to the KT‐400
configuration window.
NOTE: For more information, see "Sites Configuration" on page 61.

Configuring the Status Relay Activations (Multi‐site Gateway Only)

1 Select the Status relay tab to program a relay or group of relays that will be activated when an event
occurs.

Defining Controller Options

The Option tab enables operators to configure such features as:
• Anti‐passback (for synchronizing entry/exit readers)
• Duress function (for defining a panic button)
• Card count options (for specifying cards in an area), etc.
NOTE: The anti‐passback option works with entry/exit readers. It allows security administrators to
keep track of the number of monitored cardholders in an area. It is local to each controller defined by
corresponding entry/exit readers. A relay can be activated when the counter reaches the number of
cards defined to be inside the area; the relay is disabled when the number of cards in the area goes
below the specified number.
1 In the Controller window, click the Option tab to define anti‐passback options, duress options and card
count options.
2 Determine the Duress options. When a duress option is selected, you have to assign a duress key, that is
a silent panic key.
System Devices 79

• Duress on access granted: this option enables the duress key when access is granted.
• Duress on access denied: this option enables the duress key, even when access is denied.
3 Select a duress key from the Keypad duress key drop‐down list.
NOTE: For added security, you may select the two options. The anti‐passback programming is only
available on a Multi‐site Gateway.
4 From the Anti‐passback options (Multi‐site Gateway only), select the anti‐passback option from the Type
drop‐down list: when an anti‐passback option is enabled, a card cannot be used on an exit door unless it
has been used on a corresponding entry door.
• None: the anti‐passback option is disabled.
• Soft anti‐passback: this option allows a cardholder to use an entry (or exit) reader more than once
without using the corresponding exit (or entry) reader. Only an “Access granted ‐ Passback bad
location” event is sent to the Message desktop.
• Hard anti‐passback: a card used at an entry reader will not be able to access the same entry reader
again until it has used the corresponding exit reader. Only an “Access denied ‐ Passback bad
location” event is sent to the Message desktop.
• Controller local area: this selection enables the Controller local area tab. This option is only
functional with the KT‐400; the Controller Local Area tab will only appear with a KT‐400.
5 In the Forgive schedule section, click the three‐dot button to set a schedule for resetting the anti‐
passback option on all other cards.
NOTE: The Forgive Schedule section is enabled only when Soft anti‐passback or Hard anti‐passback
item is selected.
6 In the Miscellaneous section, indicate options for Enable fail‐soft delay (10‐255 s). During a fail‐soft
mode, the controller operates in stand‐alone mode, following a communication failure.
7 Enter the 32‐bit card family code (optional). You can locate this hexadecimal code on the access card.
8 In the Card count options, use the up or down controls to set the maximum card number. The maximum
card number allowed is 2,147,483,647. The system keeps track of the number of monitored cards that
are in the monitored area and activates a relay when the count is reached. When users exit the area, the
counter decrements and the relay will eventually reset when the count is smaller than the value defined.
9 You may configure the system to Activate a single relay or a group of relays when the maximum count is
reached. Click the three‐dot button to select the relay or relay group that will be activated when the
number is reached.
NOTE: The Activate relay section is enabled only when Soft anti‐passback or Hard anti‐passback item is
selected.

Defining the KT‐400 Controller Local Areas

NOTE: The controller local area option is only available with a KT‐400 controller on a Multi‐site
Gateway (see previous section for the procedure to enable the Controller local area tab).
1 In the Controller window, click the Controller local area tab to define up to 4 local areas.
2 Assign a name for both languages for the 1st controller local area.
3 Select the Forgive schedule from the drop‐down menu.
80 System Devices

4 Enter the maximum number of cards allowed in the Cards threshold field.
5 Check the Deny access on area full box to prevent more users to enter the area after the cards threshold
has been reached.
6 Click on the three‐dot to select the relay or the relay group to activate when the cards threshold has
been reached.
7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each controller local area.

Defining the KT‐400 Elevator Floor Associations

NOTE: The Elevator tab displays only when expansion modules have been defined as inputs or outputs
for elevators under the KT‐400 tab, See Chapter 4 ‘Configuring the KT‐400 Expansion Modules’ on
page 76.

Associating Pattern with Door and Floor Numbers

For KT‐400 controller only, it is possible to choose up to four patterns to define door and floor numbers
that will be associated with each pattern. By default, pattern 1 specifies all door numbers.
1 In the Controller window, click the elevator tab to define the floor associations.
2 In the Elevator tab, click Pattern #2, and then select the appropriate Door number check box(es).
3 From the Floors drop‐down menu, select the appropriate item or floor number to associate with the
door number and the pattern number.
4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each pattern.
5 Click Save.

Controller Event Buffer Overflow Message

When a controller is disconnected from the server, the controller buffer starts collecting the controller’s
events. When the buffer is full, it transfers the oldest events in a secondary buffer (50 to 100 bytes) that
always contain 50 events. When the communication is restored, the system then starts sending
messages to the Desktop Message List (shown below) to indicate that the buffer is full and that events
are being deleted from the buffer.
• The controller will delete messages in FIFO order (First In, First Out). The oldest message will therefore
be deleted first.
• When the controller is reconnected to the server, the controller events will be sent to the Message list all
at once, in the following order: events in the controller’s secondary event buffer; a single Event Buffer
Overflow will display, followed by the list of events generated while the controller was disconnected
from the server.
• In the Message List above, the highlighted error message “Event buffer overflow” is the 50th oldest
controller event sent to the Message List.

Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration

The Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) is a telephone entry system that is suited for small and large
applications with a separate access control system, or in applications that require telephone entry
access only. This system provides visitor access control for a variety of applications: apartment
System Devices 81

buildings, gated communities, condominiums, office buildings, factories, and industrial sites. Visitors
use the KTES to communicate directly with a tenant and are easily identified by voice communication.
The tenant can grant or deny the visitor access directly from a telephone land line or a cellular phone.

Designed as a stand‐alone unit, the system controls one door, auxiliary relay, and supports postal lock
access. For larger commercial installations, the KTES integrates with EntraPass through a Multi‐site
Gateway and KT‐controllers to provide a complete access control solution. The entire programming of
the system can be done directly on the keypad or remotely from a PC via a modem, Ethernet connection
or RS‐485 interface.

The system reports all events directly to EntraPass, where you can obtain a detailed event log.
Additionally, programmed alarms can be reported to a pager and/or to the EntraPass system via an
integrated modem. For more information on the KTES, please refer to the KTES Installation Manual,
DN1769 and the KTES Programming Manual, DN1770.
NOTE: For reliability and configuration consistency, Kantech currently supports the US Robotics
Sportster external modem only. Even if other type of modem are available, we strongly recommend
using the officially supported external US Robotics.)

Defining General Parameters for the KTES

1 In the Devices toolbar, select the KTES icon.
NOTE: You must select a Multi‐site Gateway when configuring a KTES.
NOTE: As shown in the above picture, using the KTES Setup Wizard will help you setup the Kantech
Telephone Entry System (KTES) in a few quick easy steps. See "System Utilities" on page 549 for more
details.
2 In the KTES window, select the appropriate Gateway to view the controller sites for a specific gateway,
then select a site (from the Site drop‐down list) and the KTES you want to define. New items are
identified with a red button. The button turns green once the item has been defined and saved.
NOTE: see "Sites Configuration" on page 61 for more information on site configuration.
3 From the General tab, specify the visitor call settings:
• Talk time: This is the maximum talk duration in seconds for a normal call between a visitor and a tenant
(10 secs to 59 min:59 secs). Default value is 40 secs.
• Extended talk time: This is the maximum talk duration in seconds for a extended call between a visitor
and a tenant (10 secs to 59 min:59 secs). Default value is 60 secs.
• Talk time remaining warning: The system sends a warning ring (a beep sound), a certain number of
seconds (depending on the value entered) to indicate the end of the allowed talking period (1 sec to 59
min:59 secs). Default value is 10 secs.
• Number of rings before answer: This is the maximum number of rings allowed for a tenant to answer
(4 to 16). Default value is 5.
• Extended number of rings before answer: This is the maximum number of rings allowed, for a tenant
with the extended option, to answer (4 to 16). Default value is 10.
4 Specify the Postal Lock options:
82 System Devices

• Postal lock contact: This is the input corresponding to the door postal lock (0 to 4). Select an input and
click OK:
NOTE: see "Input Configuration" on page 99 for more information.
• Postal lock Schedule: This is the schedule inside which the input, corresponding to the postal lock,
generates a valid postal lock request when that input is in alarm.
NOTE: See Schedules Definition on page 186 for more information about schedule definition.
5 Disable KTES polling option: Select this checkbox when you need to put the KTES in disable mode. In
disable mode, the KTES will never be polled and all status requests from this specific. Default value is
selected.
6 Specify the Tenants list options:
• Tenants list capacity: By default, the capacity is 250 tenants unless you have registered for 500, 1000
or 3000 tenants total.
NOTE: Remember that you are limited by the options purchased with the software. If you have
registered many KTES options for additional capacity, make sure to assign it to the correct KTES site.
• Tenants list: Select a tenants list. Default value is empty.
NOTE: See Tenants List on page 365 for more information about Tenants list definition.
• Use all tenants from list: Check this box to include all the tenants from the list. Otherwise, leave the
check box empty and click the Customize button. Select the check boxes for tenants to be included
and/or displayed on the LCD. Default value is selected.
• Use the Print button to send a printout of the tenants list to a printer of your choice. Sort by name or
by code and preview before printing.
• Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable.

Defining the Kantech Telephone Entry System parameters

1 From the KTES window, select the Kantech Telephone Entry System tab.
2 Specify the General options:
• Serial number: The serial number is unique to each KTES. It is used for communication between the
KTES and the EntraPass software. Default value is 00000000.
• Enable fail‐soft delay: Enter the delay before EntraPass enters fail‐soft mode and consider
communication with the KTES lost. Values range from 10 secs to 4 min:15 secs. Default value is 45 secs.
• EOL resistor: This parameter defines the input termination as: None for no end‐of‐line resistor (dry
contact), Single for single end‐of‐line resistor (5.6K) or Double for double end‐of‐line resistor (2 * 5.6K).
Default value is None.
3 Specify the Regional configuration parameters:
• Line Type: Set this parameter to select the telephone line type used by the system. Possible values are
Tone or Pulse. Default value is Tone.
NOTE: For New Zealand, pulse dialing cannot be used.
System Devices 83

• Telephone line regional setting: The Telephone line regional setting must be set
to specify which telephone line country code should be used by the KTES. Default
value is USA/Canada (0). Click the drop down list to display the available countries:
• Time base: Main time base comes from the AC power input (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for
best accuracies over large operating temperatures. Time base will be automatically
switched to internal Xtal in case of AC power failure. Time base can be forced to
internal Xtal when DC power only or unstable AC source is used. Default value is
60Hz.
• Line monitoring: The telephone line is monitored when busy or disconnected,
when this option is selected. Default value is selected.
NOTE: In order to comply with New Zealand Telepermit requirements, line sensing
must be turned on.
4 Specify the Tenant response setting:
• Keypad key for access granted by tenant: This telephone key can be used by a tenant to grant access to
a visitor. Default value is 9.
• Keypad key for access denied by tenant: This telephone key can be used by a tenant to deny access to a
visitor. Default value is *.
• Keypad key for auxiliary relay activated by tenant: This telephone key can be used to grant access to a
visitor that is using a secondary entrance. Default value is empty.
5 Specify the Wiegand interface options:
• Reader type: This is the Wiegand Interface output format to be sent to the KTES. Default value is
Kantech XSF.
• Reader’s Driver download: Click on the button to open the selection window and select a driver
to download:
• Wiegand integration with an access controller: Selecting this option indicates that the KTES is
connected to an access controller. Otherwise it is operating in Standalone mode.
• Card holder used for postal activated: This is the card number used by the KTES to generate a Wiegand
code when the postal lock is activated. Default value is empty.

Defining the Language and Welcome Message Parameters

1 From the KTES window, select the Languages and Welcome messages tab.
2 Specify the Enabled languages: Select the languages available in the KTES LCD Display. Default values are
unselected.
3 Specify the Custom language: Select the custom language available in the KTES LCD Display, chosen by
the customer (in addition to the enabled languages). Use the + button to add other languages. Default
value is None.
NOTE: See Vocabulary Editor on page 560 for more information about Custom language definition.
4 Specify the Default KTES language: Select the default language used by the KTES. Default value is None.
5 Define the Welcome Messages:
• Enter the message to be displayed on the KTES LCD for each enabled language. Default value is
empty. Use the button next to the Display delay text box to center the message text.
84 System Devices

• Enter the displaying delay in seconds (0 sec to 4 min:15 secs). Default value is 2 secs.
• Repeat both steps for the second message.
6 Click the Save button.

Special Characters
By combining the commands listed in the following table, you can display the KTES current hour and
date according to different formats. For example:
• The complete current date in the international format: &yyy/&o/&d = 2007/01/18
• The complete current date in the american format: &o/&d/&y = 01/18/07
• The complete current hour in 24 hours format: &h:&m:&s = 14:50:55
• The complete current hour in am/pm format: &h:&m:&s&a = 02:50:55pm
• The current day in 3 letters format: &ww = mon
• The current day in 10 letters format: &wwwwwwwww = wednesday
• The current month in 3 letters format: &oo = jan
• The current month in 9 letters format: &Oooooooo = January
• The complete current date in letters and digits format: &ww &oo &d &yyy = thu jan 18 2007

Display Format
Hour displayed in 24 hours format &h
Hour displayed in 12 hours format &h&a
Minutes &m
Seconds &s
Ten of years &y
Year &yyy
Month &o
Date &d
Day of the week &ww to &wwwwwwwww
Current month in text format &oo to &ooooooooo

Defining the Options Parameters

1 From the KTES window, select the Options tab.
2 Specify the LCD setting:
• Hide PIN number: Select this check box to hide the tenant’s PIN numbers on the LCD. Default value is
unselected.
System Devices 85

• Backlight delay: The Backlight Delay is the maximum delay of inactivity before the LCD backlight turns
low (0 sec to 4 min:15 secs). Default value is 20 secs.
• Next character delay: The Next Character Delay is the maximum delay allowed between each key
press before considering a next character entrance when entering a text string at the keypad (0 sec to
4 min:15 secs). Default value is 2 secs.
• Find user timeout delay: After pressing the Find option key, the Find user timeout delay is the
maximum delay allowed between each key press before cancelling a find sequence (5 sec to 4 min:15
secs) Default value is 15 secs.
• Programming PIN timeout delay: The Programming PIN timeout delay is the maximum delay allowed
to enter a complete valid PIN number before entering in system programming mode (5 sec to 4 min:15
secs). Default value is 20 secs.
• Programming mode timeout delay: The Programming mode timeout delay is the maximum delay
allowed between each key press before exiting from the programming mode and returning to the
welcome messages (5 secs to 9h:59 min). Default value is 60 secs.
3 Specify the Duress options. A Duress alarm is used by employees or tenants to signal for help:
• Duress on access granted: Allows a tenant to trigger a duress alarm after a valid PIN entry. Default
value is unselected.
• Duress on access denied: Allows a tenant to trigger a duress alarm after an invalid PIN entry. Default
value is unselected.
• Keypad duress key: Set this parameter to configure the symbol that will activate the duress functions. A
Duress alarm is used by employees or tenants to signal for help(0 to 9, # and *). Default value is 9.
4 Specify the Supervision Schedule options:
• Power supervision schedule: To define the schedule applicable to KTES power monitoring. Select a
schedule from the list and click OK. Default value is empty.
• Tamper switch supervision schedule: To define the schedule applicable to KTES tamper switch
monitoring. Select a schedule from the list and click OK. Default value is empty.
5 Click the Save button.
NOTE: See Schedules Definition on page 186 for more information about schedule definition.

Defining the Status Relay Parameters

1 From the KTES window, select the Status relay tab.
NOTE: See Relay Configuration on page 98 for more information about relay configuration.
2 Specify the Relay activation parameters:
• Power failure: This is the relay that can be activated when a KTES AC power failure occurs. Default
value is none.
• Battery trouble: Relay that will be activated if the 12 volts standby battery is disconnected or comes
low (under 11.5 volts DC). Default value is none.
• Tamper in alarm: This is the relay that can be activated when a KTES tamper switch event occurs.
Default value is none.
• Buffer 70% full: Relay that will be activated if the event buffer for the EntraPass software has reach a
70% capacity. Default value is none.
86 System Devices

• Lock power trouble: This parameter defines the relay to be activated in the event of a door lock
problem, locking device disconnected or shorted to ground. Default value is none.
• Other troubles: Relay that will be activated when any other trouble on the KTES occurs. Default value
is none.
• Heater kit activated: Relay that will be activated when cabinet inside temperature falls below +5oC.
Default value is none.
• Postal lock: Relay that will be activated with an entry request from the front door postal lock. Default
value is none.
3 Specify the Pager call type:
For each event you can configure a pager call type. You can select No call (the relay activation for that
event will not be sent to the pager), Immediate call (the relay activation for that event will be sent
immediately to the pager) or Schedule call (the relay activation for that event will be sent to the pager
according to the pager call schedule). Default value is No call. See "If you are assigning or defining
schedules, make sure that you are selecting the proper category for this schedule. For example, if you are
assigning or defining a system schedule (for workstation, operators, event parameters, video triggers)
this schedule will be available for selecting components of this category. If you are selecting a schedule
for physical components such as controllers, doors, inputs, their schedules will be grouped by gateway if
you are using a Global Gateway and by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway by site if you are using a
Multi‐site Gateway. If you have defined two sites in your system, there will be two separate groups of
schedules for each site. You can define up to 99 schedules for each site." on page 186.
NOTE: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function must be enabled. See
"Defining the Pager Options" on page 86

Defining the Pager Options

1 From the KTES window, select the Pager tab.
NOTE: For New Zealand: This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom
“111” Emergency Service.
2 Specify the Pager Reporting options:
• Pager phone number: The pager phone number to which events will be reported (24 characters
maximum). Default value is empty.
• Pager call schedule: The schedule number from which the KTES can communicate programmed events,
alarms and troubles to the pager. Select a schedule from the list and click OK.
NOTE: See Schedules Definition on page 186 for more information about schedule definition.
• Unit ID: The Unit ID identifies the KTES that sent the pager code(0001 to 9999). Default value is 0001.
• Restore code: The Restore code is the pager code corresponding to the general event that triggered a
zone restore condition (0 to 999). Default value is 0.
• Alarm code: The Alarm code is the pager code corresponding to the general event that triggered a
zone alarm condition (0 to 999). Default value is 1.
• Tamper code: The pager code corresponding to the general event that triggered a zone tamper
condition (0 to 999). Default value is 2.
System Devices 87

• Trouble code: The pager code corresponding to the general event that triggered a zone trouble
condition (0 to 999). Default value is 3.
• Field separator: The Field separator is the character to be used as a field separator or delimiter (*,
# or ,). Default value is *.
• Field ending: The Field ending is used to indicate that the call is completed. Remember that you can
enter any signs for the ending parameter (*, # or ,). Default value is #.
3 Specify the General event pager codes:
• Tamper in alarm: The pager code that corresponds to a tamper switch problem (0 to 999). Default
value is 100.
• Power failure: The pager code that indicates an AC power failure on the KTES (0 to 999). Default
value is 101.
• Battery trouble: The pager code that indicates a low battery problem on the KTES (0 to 999). Default
value is 102.
• Buffer 70% full: The pager code sent to indicate that the event buffer for the EntraPass software has
reach a 70% capacity (0 to 999). Default value is 103.
• Other troubles: The pager code that corresponds to any other system event that can occur (0 to
999). Default value is 104.
• Door forced open: The pager code that corresponds to a forced open door (0 to 999). Default value is
120.
• Door open too long: The pager code that corresponds to a door opened for too long (0 to 999).
Default value is 121.
• Door alarm on relock: The pager code that corresponds to a door left opened (0 to 999). Default
value is 122.
• Lock trouble: The pager code that corresponds to a problem with the door locking device supervision
(0 to 999). Default value is 123.
• Keypad disabled: The pager code that corresponds to a keypad disabled condition (when the option is
enabled (0 to 999). Default value is 124.
• Duress alarm: The pager code that corresponds to a duress alarm. A Duress alarm is used by
employees or tenants to signal for help (0 to 999). Default value is 125.
• Access granted: The pager code that corresponds to a granted access. An access granted code is sent
when the tenant was granted access using his PIN (0 to 999). Default value is 140.
• Invalid access schedule: The pager code that corresponds to a denied access. An access denied code
is sent when the tenant was denied access using his PIN (0 to 999). Default value is 141.
• Access granted by tenant: The pager code that corresponds to an allowed access by a tenant to a
visitor (0 to 999). Default value is 142.
• Auxiliary relay activated by tenant: The pager code that corresponds to an allowed access by a tenant
to a visitor at an alternate entrance, different from the main entrance usually used by the tenants or
visitors, for example (0 to 999). Default value is 143.
• Access denied by tenant: The pager code that corresponds to a denied access by a tenant to a visitor
(0 to 999). Default value is 144.
• Tenant traced: The pager code that corresponds to a granted access for a traced tenant (0 to 999).
Default value is 145.
88 System Devices

• Disabled tenant: The pager code that corresponds to an access attempt from a tenant with an
invalid status (0 to 999). Default value is 146.
• Other access denied: The pager code that corresponds to an access attempt from a tenant outside
of his assigned schedule (0 to 999). Default value is 147.

Configuring Tenant Administration Level Parameters

1 From the KTES window, select the Tenant administration level tab.
2 Specify the access parameters rights: Use the scroll boxes to set the administration level for the four
different tenant types (Full access, Read only or No access).

Doors Configuration
This menu is used to define the door parameters on which readers and/or keypads are installed. A door
can be an elevator door, a In/Out door, an entry door for anti‐passback, an exit door for anti‐passback or
an access door. It depends on how the settings are programmed. The controlled door may be secured at
all times or only during defined schedules. The common locking devices used are electric door strikes
and electromagnetic locks. A door may be equipped with one or two readers; one reader on each side.
For doors equipped with two readers, the outer reader has to be defined as an entry reader and the
inner reader as an exit reader.

Defining General Parameters for a Door

NOTE: When you are using the KT‐300 system, you are working with h:mm:ss and the range value can
be from 00:00:01 to 9:06:07. Each time you are using a KT‐400 system, you are working with hh:mm:ss
and the range value can be from 00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT‐100, KT‐200 and KT‐300; or to
18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for a KT‐400. So, please take this difference into consideration.
1 In the Devices toolbar, select the Door icon.
NOTE: The Local areas options are only available for a KT‐400 controller on a Multi‐site Gateway with
the Controller local area property enabled (See "Defining the KT‐400 Controller Local Areas" on page
79 for more information).
NOTE: The Miscellaneous, In/Out, and Door Anti‐Passback options are not available for a KTES door.
2 In the Door window, select the appropriate Gateway to view the controller sites for a specific gateway,
then select a site (from the Site drop‐down list) and the controller associated with the door you want to
define.
3 From the Door drop‐down list, select the door you want to modify or define. New items are identified
with a red button. The button turns green once the item has been defined and saved.
4 From the General tab, specify the Door lock mode: Depending on the lock device used, the locked state
will energized or de‐energized to lock. Default value is Fail‐secure.
• Fail‐secure: The strike is locked when power is removed (door locks, door strikes).
• Fail‐safe: The lock output is energized to lock the door (electro magnetic locks).
5 If the door is for a KTES then go to Step 13.
System Devices 89

6 Check the Elevator cab option if the door is to be used for elevator control. When this option is checked,
the Elevator tab is displayed to define the unlocking schedules. Default value is unchecked.
7 Specify the In/Out type from the drop‐down list (default is None):
• None: The reader is considered as an access reader. An access reader generates only “Access
granted/Access denied” events.
• Entry: An entry door is an entry point. In order for the system to record an entry, the door must be
opened after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).
• Exit: An exit door is an exit point. In order for the system to record an exit, the door must be opened
after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).
8 If the Controller Local Areas are enabled then go to Step 11.
9 Specify the Door Anti‐Passback type (default is Access):
• Access: The reader is considered as an access reader. Anti‐Passback options are not used with access
doors. An access reader generates only “Access granted/Access denied” events.
• Entry: An entry door is an entry point. In order for the system to record an entry, the door must be
opened after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).
• Exit: An exit door is an exit point. In order for the system to record an exit, the door must be opened
after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).
10 Go to Step 13.
NOTE: None, Soft anti‐passback and Hard anti‐passback are used only with the KT‐400 and Controller
Local Areas.
11 Specify the Door Anti‐Passback type (default is Access):
• None: the anti‐passback option is disabled.
• Soft anti‐passback: If the destination area is under Deny Access on Local Area Full, access is denied.
When a user is passing his access card to a local area, for example, the system will allow him to
access another local area even if the user was not in the Local area before. The system will generate
the event: “Access granted ‐ Passback bad location“.
• Hard anti‐passback: If the destination area is under Deny Access on Local Area Full, access is denied.
A card used at an entry reader will not be able to access the same entry reader again until it has used
the corresponding exit reader. The system will generate the event: “Access denied ‐ Passback bad
location“.
12 Specify the Local area before and Local area after. These items are enabled and can be specified only for
Controller Local Area.
13 Specify the Door access delay:
• Unlock time (hh:mm:ss): The time during which the door is unlocked on a valid card read or a valid
request to exit event (when the REX is defined to unlock the door). The time range value can be from
00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT‐100, KT‐200 and KT‐300; or to 18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for a
KT‐400. If this is an elevator door and a push button (input) is used to enable floor selection, this is
the time during which a floor selection will be allowed. Usually, a longer period should be defined to
allow the user to select floors. Default value is 10s. For more information, see "Defining an Input for
an Elevator Door" on page 102.
• Open time (hh:mm:ss): The time during which a door can remain opened following a permitted
access or a valid request to exit request. This applies only to a door defined with a door contact
90 System Devices

input. The time range value can be from 00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT‐100, KT‐200 and KT‐
300; or to 18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for a KT‐400. After this delay has expired, the system will
generate the event “door open too long” and the door piezo will sound to warn the cardholder. You
can use the Pre‐alarm on door open too long (Door window, Contact tab) to sound the door piezo
when half of this delay has expired. It will continue to sound until the door is closed. Default value is
30s.
14 The Extended door access delay (hh:mm:ss) feature allows to keep the door open for an extended period
in order to allow people with disabilities to pass through without triggering an alarm. If you want to use
this option, specify the delays in the Unlock time (default is 40s) and Open time (default is 2 min) fields.
The time range value, for both delays, can be from 00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT‐100, KT‐200 and
KT‐300; or to 18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for a KT‐400.
15 Unlock Schedule will allow the system to unlock the door for a predetermine period of time that you will
select.
16 Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable. The video view will only
be activated if the video feature is enabled in EntraPass.
NOTE: EntraPass offers the ability to program an extended door access delay and to specify specific
unlock and open time delays reserved for people with disabilities. In addition to setting this special
access delay, the user’s access card must be programmed with this feature. Only available with KT‐
100, KT‐300 and KT‐400.

Defining Door Keypad Options

For KT‐100 and KT‐300 Controllers

Doors can be defined with relay activation when the * or # keys are pressed on the keypad. This option
is only available for KT‐100 (with firmware version 1.04 and higher) and KT‐300 (with firmware version
1.16 and higher) controllers.

For KT‐400 Controllers

Doors can be defined with relay or relay group activation by pressing any specified key on the keypad.
NOTE: The Keypad tab is enabled only if you have selected a Keypad type while defining the controller
associated with the door being defined, see "Select the Keypad type (if applicable)." on page 76. There
are 4 keys. The first 2 keys: # and * are fixed keys and they are similar and play the same role as in the
KT‐300 system. The 2 other keys: Key 3 and key 4 are variable according to the client’s needs.
1 From the Door window, select the Keypad tab.
2 Specify how access to the door is controlled (default is Reader only):
• Reader only: Select this option if access is granted using a reader. A reader only installation is the
most common application.
• Reader or keypad: Select this option if access is granted using a reader or a keypad only. A keypad
only installation is generally considered less secure than a reader only installation, because a user
System Devices 91

may “lend” its PIN to another person but cannot prevent further use (in comparison to getting a card
back).
NOTE: This option can be enabled on a reader with an integrated keypad if you want, for instance, to
use the keypad only.
• Reader and keypad: Select this option if both a reader and a keypad are used to permit access to this
door. The keypad will only be used when the “keypad schedule” is valid. Adding a keypad to a reader
significantly increases the level of security. PIN code requirement can be limited by a schedule for
use only outside business hours, for example, rather than during high traffic hours.
3 From the Card and PIN schedule menu, select a schedule during which cardholders will have to enter
their PIN after a valid card read. The time allowed between a valid card read and entering the PIN at the
keypad is set in the Gateway definition menu (Time‐out on keypad option).
4 Check the Enable duress function on keypad option, if desired. Default value is unselected.
5 Select the Keypad relay activation key(s):
• For KT‐100 and KT‐300 Controllers: For doors defined with keypad or reader and keypad, you can
program the star key (*) or pound key (#) to activate a relay. When this feature is enabled, users can
activate a relay simply by pressing the appropriate key.
• For KT‐400 Controllers: For doors defined with keypad or reader and keypad, you can program *, # or
any key to activate a relay or a relay group. When this feature is enabled, users can activate a relay or
a relay group simply by pressing the appropriate key.

Defining Door Contact Options

In most applications, the low cost door contact is the only supervisory element that protects the
investment made to control access to the door. The door lock and card reader (or keypad) provide
security and prevent unauthorized entry only when the door is closed and locked. A simple door contact
allows the ability to monitor several door conditions such as: door forced open, door open too long,
interlock options (mantrap), etc.
1 In the Door window, select the Contact tab.
2 Select the door contact from the Door contact list.
3 In Shunt Door Schedule, select a schedule.
NOTE: This feature allows associating a schedule to a door contact in order to bypass the events /
alarms related to the door contact supervision. If no schedule is selected, the system will continue to
work as usual. If a valid schedule is selected, the system will hide following conditions in the events
monitoring desktop:
• Door Forced open
• Door forced open restored
• Door open too long (unless otherwise indicated)
• Pre‐Alarm door open too long
• Door left open
92 System Devices

4 Check Enable door open too long notification to continue to receive the Door open too long event and
the Pre‐Alarm door open too long in the desktop. If there is no schedule selected, this checkbox is not
available for selection (greyed out).
NOTE: For KT‐200 Controllers, Input 1 (door contact) and 2 (request to exit device) are ideally reserved
for Door 1 of the controller whereas Input 9 (door contact) and 10 (request to exit device) are ideally
reserved for Door 2 of the same controller. The input that is used for the door contact or REX contact
SHOULD NOT have a “monitoring” schedule defined in the “Input Definition” menu.
5 Check the door reading options:
• Door open reading—If selected, this option allows the system to read cards while the door is open.
However the system will not unlock the door if it was locked. If selected, the event “Access granted”
is generated. Otherwise, the event “Access granted ‐ Door open” is generated. Default is checked.
• Door unlocked reading—If selected, this option allows the system to read cards while the door is
unlocked manually by the operator or by a valid unlock schedule. If selected, the event “Access
granted ‐ Door unlocked” will be generated on access. To ignore all access events while the door is
unlocked, leave this option unselected. Default is checked.
• Unlock on access door opened— If selected, this option allows the system to unlock access on door
opened at any time. Default is unchecked.
• Pre‐alarm door opened too long—If selected, this option allows the system to generate the event
“pre‐alarm door open too long” and sound the door piezo when half of the delay defined in the
Open time field is expired. It will continue to sound until the door is closed. Default is unchecked.
NOTE: If the door is a KT400 and if the value entered is higher or equal than the open time and if the
checkbox is selected, a pop up will appear explaining that the delay value is incorrect. Value range can
be between 00:00:01 and 18:12:15 and must be lower than the door open time.
6 Select the appropriate Relock on access option. You may choose to relock an access On door opening or
On door closing. Default value is On door opening.

Defining REX (Request to Exit) Options

A signal from the REX indicates that someone wants to exit through a controlled door. Devices such as
motion detectors, push buttons can provide the REX signal. EntraPass enables users to configure doors
with unlock time reset each time the primary or secondary REX is triggered. This option is only available
for KT‐100 (with firmware version 1.04) and KT‐300 (with firmware version 1.16) controllers.
1 From the door window, select the REX tab, then check the appropriate Relock on Rex options (default is
On door closing):
• On door opening, if you want the door device to re‐lock following a valid access
• On door closing, if you want the door device to re‐lock when it closes.
2 For the Primary and Secondary REX options (the Secondary REX options does not apply to KTES), make
the appropriate choices:
• Assign the REX contact: the input to which a “request to exit” detector can be connected. This input
must be local; it has to be one of the inputs on the controller operating the door.
• Select a Rex schedule: when this schedule becomes valid, the controller will detect request to exit
signals originating for the exit contact. This option applies only to a door defined with a REX contact.
System Devices 93

• Unlock on REX: the door will be unlocked if a valid request to exit is permitted by the controller. This
option may be useful on exit doors such as interior doors, shipping doors or other push doors
through which people carrying packages may pass. The system will permit the exit and generates the
“request to exit granted” event rather than “door forced open” event.
• Resettable REX function: the unlock time is restarted on a valid request to exit. Open and unlock
times are defined in the door definition (Devices > Door > General). Select this option for high traffic
area doors such as manufacturing doors where many users may need to exit at short intervals (for
example after a work shift) to prevent unwanted door open too long or door forced open events.
NOTE: It is recommended to choose either Unlock on REX or Resettable Rex function, not the two options
at the same time. If you choose these two options, the door may remain unlocked for long periods of
time. Moreover, these features should not be used if a door contact has not been defined.

Card Multi‐Swipe
This feature allows using double and triple card swipe actions with the new KT400 firmware (KT‐400: 1.08; KT‐400
V1: 1.11).
1 Select the Multi‐swipe tab.
2 Enable Multi‐swipe: Check to enable the multi‐swipe function. Deselecting will disable the multi‐swipe
function but keep the parameters entered previously for future use.
3 Schedule: The schedule applies to both the double swipe and triple swipe actions and will need to be valid
when the person swipes the card a second time or a third time for the corresponding action to occur.
4 Delay: There is a maximum delay of 3 seconds between two card swipes to be considered by EntraPass as a
double or triple swipe. A beeping sound will be heard two times for the double swipe and three times for the
triple swipe. A long beep indicates a denied entry.
5 Relay: Select a relay to be triggered.
6 Relock on access on double/triple swipe: Relock on access on double swipe or triple swipe checkbox controls
are used to lock the door before executing the double or triple swipe action.
NOTE: By default the system set the unlock time for the door to 10 seconds and the open time to 30
seconds. If the door is kept open for more the 15 seconds after a valid swipe, a pre alarm door open
too long (see the Contact tab) will be triggered and the buzzer on the reader will start to beep.
NOTE: The pre alarm door open too long delay will override the default setting for the Open time. For
example, an unlock time of 10 seconds and an open time of 2:00 minutes. If the pre alarm door open
too long option is selected with a time delay of 00:00:20, 20 seconds before the end of the open time,
the system will trigger a pre alarm door open too long alarm and the buzzer will start to beep on the
reader.
NOTE: This feature is only available on KT‐400 with firmware higher then 1.08.

Double/Triple swipe actions

• Activate relay: A relay or relay group can be selected.
• Deactivate relay: A relay or relay group can be selected.
• Lock door: Relock on access on double/triple swipe will be automatically checked and disabled
94 System Devices

• Request to arm granted ‐ Alarm interface: Equivalent to an arm door manual operation including panel
partitions arming functionality.
• Temporarily activate relay: A relay or relay group can be selected. A delay can be entered. (between
00:00:01 and 18:12:15).
• Temporarily unlock door: Relock on access on double/triple swipe will be automatically checked and
disabled. A delay can be entered (between 00:00:01 and 18:12:15).
• Toggle door lock: Relock on access on double/triple swipe will be automatically checked and disabled.
• Toggle relay: A relay or relay group can be selected.
• Unlock door: Relock on access on double/triple swipe will be automatically checked and disabled.

Defining Interlock Options (Mantrap)

You may define interlock options (mantrap) between two doors to synchronize the time when these two
doors are open/closed. The interlock options are also called the mantrap. This ensures that once the
cardholder has accessed the first door, that door is closed and locked before the cardholder is granted
access to the second door. The two doors have to be controlled by the same controller.
NOTE: The Interlock options do not apply to a KTES door.
1 In the Door window, select the Miscellaneous tab.
2 From the Door drop‐down list, select the first door for which you want to define interlock options
(mantrap).
3 From the Interlock contact list, select the first input for the interlock options (mantrap). The selected
input has to be the door contact of the second door.
4 Return to the Door drop‐down list to select the second door for which the interlock options (mantrap)
are being defined; then select the interlock contact for this second door. It has to be the door contact of
the first door.
5 Select the Interlock schedule: the two doors must have the same interlock schedule. This is the schedule
according to which the interlock is checked by the controller before access is granted to users.
NOTE: The interlock options (mantrap) are not available on doors controlled by a KT‐100.
6 Check the Unlock door by schedule after first man in option to unlock the door automatically when a first
access card is granted. Default is unchecked.
7 The Suspend report delay on door relock (hh:mm:ss) indicates the time during which the selected inputs
will not be monitored when the door unlocks. It is not possible to shunt a door contact since the system
will automatically shunt it. Values range from 00:00:01 to 18:12:15. Default is 15 secs.
8 In the Shunt inputs scrolling pane, select inputs that will not be monitored when the door unlocks.
Selected inputs or input group will remain unmonitored for the delay defined in the Shunt delay field.
NOTE: The Shunt input items vary depending on the KT‐300 or KT‐400 system used.

Defining Elevator Doors

During a door definition, it is possible to specify whether it is a “regular door” or an Elevator cab (Door
window, General tab). When a door is defined as an Elevator cab, an Elevator tab is displayed in the Door
definition window. This tab is used to define the automatic unlock schedules for specific floor groups.
System Devices 95

1 From the Door definition window, select the Elevator tab.

2 From the Unlock schedule #1 list, select the applicable unlock schedule. By default, you may select the
Always valid schedule. You may also create a new schedule (Definition menu, Schedules).
3 From the Floor group #1 list, select the appropriate floor group associated with the Unlock schedule #1.
Only floors that have a valid schedule in the Floor group definition will be unlocked or available for
selection when the Unlock schedule #1 becomes valid.
4 From the Unlock schedule #2 list, select the schedule applicable to the second group of floors.
5 From the Floor group #2 list, select the appropriate floor group. Only floors that have a valid schedule in
the Floor group definition will be “unlocked” or available for selection when the Unlock schedule #2
becomes valid.
Important Notes:
• The Unlock schedule defined during a door definition (Door menu, General tab) will OVERRIDE these
schedules even if they are valid.
• Only one Unlock schedule can be valid at a time. For example if the first schedule (Unlock schedule
#1) is valid from 6h00 to 9h00 and the second schedule (Unlock Schedule #2) is valid from 7h00 to
9h00, then Unlock schedule #2 will NEVER be valid since Unlock schedule #1 is already valid.
• Do not overlap schedules. For example, if the first schedule is valid from 8h00 am to 17h00 and the
second schedule is valid from 16h00 to 21h00, the gap (between 16h00 and 17h00) can result in
erratic operation of the elevator control system.
• Only floors that have a valid schedule in the Floor Group definition will be “unlocked” or available for
selection when the unlock schedules become valid.
NOTE: For more information on how to program elevator control using REB‐8 relays, see "Defining KT‐
200 Expansion Devices" on page 71.

Configuring Door Events (Multi‐site Gateway Only)

1 In the Door window, select the Door events tab. This is to define the relays (or relay groups) that are to
be activated on specified events. However, when you are using a controller other than KT‐400, this tab is
used to define relays only.
2 Select the relay that will be activated locally for each event.
3 Pager call type (applies to KTES only): You can select Do not call (the relay activation for that event will
not be sent to the pager), Call immediately (the relay activation for that event will be sent immediately
to the pager) or Call when scheduled (the relay activation for that event will be sent to the pager
according to the pager call schedule). See "If you are assigning or defining schedules, make sure that you
are selecting the proper category for this schedule. For example, if you are assigning or defining a system
schedule (for workstation, operators, event parameters, video triggers) this schedule will be available for
selecting components of this category. If you are selecting a schedule for physical components such as
controllers, doors, inputs, their schedules will be grouped by gateway if you are using a Global Gateway
and by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway. If you have
defined two sites in your system, there will be two separate groups of schedules for each site. You can
define up to 99 schedules for each site." on page 186. Default value is Do not call.
NOTE: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function must be enabled. See
"Defining the Pager Options" on page 86.
96 System Devices

4 Once all door event features have been set, select the Access events tab to define relays (or relay groups
if you are using KT‐400) that are to be activated on miscellaneous events.
NOTE: EntraPass offers you the ability to define a relay that will be activated if the Extended delay
feature is used. The card used must be defined with this feature. Only KT‐100, KT‐300, KT‐400 and KTES
can be configured with the Extended door access delay feature.
5 Select the relay that will be activated locally or the relay group (if you are using KT‐400) for each event.
6 Pager call type (applies to KTES only): You can select Do not call (the relay activation for that event will
not be sent to the pager), Call immediately (the relay activation for that event will be sent immediately
to the pager) or Call when scheduled (the relay activation for that event will be sent to the pager
according to the pager call schedule). See "If you are assigning or defining schedules, make sure that you
are selecting the proper category for this schedule. For example, if you are assigning or defining a system
schedule (for workstation, operators, event parameters, video triggers) this schedule will be available for
selecting components of this category. If you are selecting a schedule for physical components such as
controllers, doors, inputs, their schedules will be grouped by gateway if you are using a Global Gateway
and by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway. If you have
defined two sites in your system, there will be two separate groups of schedules for each site. You can
define up to 99 schedules for each site." on page 186. Default value is Do not call.
NOTE: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function must be enabled. See
"Defining the Pager Options" on page 86

Defining Door Options for Controllers and the KTES (Multi‐site Gateway Only)
The following tab only appears when KT‐100, KT‐300, KT‐400 controllers and the KTES have been
configured in a Multi‐site Gateway.
1 Select the Options and alarm system tab (or Options for a KTES).
• Supervised door lock device: This feature is used in specific applications such as bank vaults to
compensate for the slow motor locks. Adding this delay avoids false door forced open alarms if a
user is opening the door before it has been completely secured at the end of unlocking delay. Check
this option if you want to enable it in EntraPass. Default is unchecked.
• Motor lock delay (does not apply to KTES): Enter the time period (hh:mm:ss) after which the door
will be considered locked. Values range from 0s to 18 h:12 min:15 secs. The default value is 0:00 for
inactive. For example, if this delay is set to 5 seconds and unlocking delay is 20 seconds after access
granted; the lock output will d deactivate after 15 seconds and no door forced open alarm will be
generated if the door is opened during the last 5 seconds.
• If a second card read is required, select a schedule from the Second card schedule required (two‐
man rule) list (does not apply to KTES).
• Relay to follow lock output (Only available for KT‐400 and KTES): The relay follows the lock output
status.
• Enable duress function on keypad (KTES only): Set this parameter to enable the duress function on the
door controller keypad. A duress alarm is used by employees or tenants to signal for help. Duress
System Devices 97

function must be previously enabled to operate. Default is unchecked. See "Defining the Options
Parameters" on page 84 for more information.
NOTE: When KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400 are installed in a Multi‐site Gateway, the system offers the
ability to interface an external alarm system.

Configuring External Alarm System Interfaces (Multi‐site Gateway Only)

The following option is only available when KT‐100, KT‐300 or KT‐400 controllers have been configured in
a Multi‐site Gateway. KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400 controllers offer the ability to interface with any
external alarm system. When you add these Kantech controllers to an existing alarm system, cardholders
can arm/disarm an existing system, simply by presenting a valid card on an entry/exit door. Adding a
keypad will increase the system security since cardholders will be required to enter a PIN in addition to
presenting a card (does not apply to a KTES door). There are two ways of arming/disarming or
postponing an external alarm system:
• On a valid card read and with the trigger of an arming input
• On a valid arming code entered and with the trigger of an arming input
There may be a combination of the options. For example, an alarm system will be disarmed with a
correct access code during a valid predefined schedule and after a valid card read.
1 Click the External alarm system options button located under the Options and Alarm System tab in the
Door dialog. The Alarm system options dialog will display on screen.
2 Under the Arming request tab, select the Arming request input. This is the input that is activated on an
external alarm arming request.
3 Once you have selected an arming request input, you have to Enable arming request schedule during
which the request will be valid.
4 If applicable, select an Arming access level.
• The Group option allows you to select all access levels.
• The Single option allows you to select a specific level.
• If the level you want does not appear in the list, you may right‐click in the Arming access level field to
create a specific level to arm the external alarm system.
5 To increase the security of your alarm system:
• Wait for access granted to arm will force the user to present a valid card before pressing the selected
Keypad button option.
• Relock door on request to arm will be used in conjunction with the Wait for access granted to arm to
override the schedule.
• Relock door on arming after exit delay will relock the door and arm the system after the pre‐
configure exit delay is over.
• Prevent arming request on input status will prevent arming the system if an input is in alarm.
6 Specify the Exit delay and Entry delay (hh:mm:ss). The Entry delay is the time during which the alarm
system is bypassed after an access granted event. The Exit delay is the period before which the system is
armed. The maximum values are 18:12:15 for both the exit and entry delays. When the KT‐300 system is
used, the maximum values are 9:06:07. Usually the entry delay is shorter than the exit delay.
7 Select the input that will indicate the External alarm system panel status. When the selected input status
is “normal”, this indicates that the external alarm panel is armed.
98 System Devices

8 Select the Input tab to define input devices that will be supervised or shunted (no supervision) when the
alarm system is armed. The input description column contains all the inputs that are defined in the
system.
• Using the checkboxes, select the appropriate input where you want an external alarm system to
supervise them. Also select the appropriate item for which you want to suspend supervision (on
entry, on exit, or when the alarm system is disarmed).
9 Select the Disarming request tab to select the Input to postpone arming.
10 Select the applicable schedule from the Enable postpone arming schedule.
11 You may check the Wait for access granted to postpone box. If this option is checked, the alarm system
will be postponed only after a valid card read and the cardholder will then press the selected Keypad
button to postpone the external alarm system.
12 Select the Postpone or disarm access level from the list.
13 Select the Relay tab to define a relay (Partition and Relays for the KT‐400 to define a group of relays) and
input status for the external alarm relays.
NOTE: When you select an Alarm relay, you may specify its Activation type. It may be activated
permanently or temporarily.

Relay Configuration
The output control relays provided on each KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300, KT‐400 and KTES can be used to
activate alarms or other devices such as lighting control, ventilation, and air conditioning. These relays
can be activated according to schedules, events reported by the system. They can also be activated to
indicate the status of an alarm system or a combination of different logic conditions.

Defining Relays
1 From the Devices definition tab, select the Relay icon.
2 Select the Gateway, the Site and the Controller from the displayed drop‐down lists, then select the relay
for which you want to define settings.
3 Specify the Operating mode for the relay:
• Normal: the relay is normally de‐energized (deactivated) until it is energized (activated) by an
operator, an event or any other system schedule.
• Reverse: the relay is normally energized (activated or resting) until it is de‐energized (deactivated) by
an operator, an event or any other system function.
4 Specify the Automatic activation schedule: when this schedule is valid, the relay will be triggered
(activated or deactivated) according to the specified activation mode.
5 Specify the Disable relay action: when this schedule is valid, the relay will be deactivated (or activated)
according to the predefined operating mode.
6 Set the Temporary activation timer to indicate the delay during which the relay will be temporarily
triggered following a temporary activation.
NOTE: When the timer is set to zero, the default activation delay is set to five seconds. Maximum time
allowed: 9:06:07 (9 hours, 6 minutes and 7 seconds). When you are using the KT‐400, the maximum
time allowed is 18:12:15 (18 hours, 12 minutes and 15 seconds).
System Devices 99

7 Select a Graphic and Video view associated with the relay, if applicable.

Input Configuration
Door controllers can monitor the state of input points such as: door contacts, interlocks, alarm points,
motion detectors, temperature sensors, any REX and other devices with dry contacts. KT‐100 monitors
the state of 4 input points, KT‐200 monitors the state of 16 input points, and KT‐300 monitors the state
of 8 on‐board input points, with a maximum capacity of 16.
• For KT‐200 only. Inputs are normally closed or normally open dry contacts connected in series with one
resistor. If the dry contact is connected in series with the green resistor, the input number will be odd. If
the dry contact is connected in series with the red resistor, the input number will be even.
• Inputs 1 (door contact) and 2 (request to exit device) are ideally reserved for Door 1 of the controller
whereas Input 9 (door contact) and 10 (request to exit device) are ideally reserved for Door 2 of the same
controller. The input that is used for the door contact or REX contact SHOULD NOT have a “monitoring”
schedule defined in the “Input Definition” menu.
• For KT‐100 Controllers. Input 1 is reserved for door contact while input 2 is reserved for a request to exit
device.
• For KT‐300 Controllers. Input 1 should be reserved for contact on door 1 while input 2 should be used for
request to exit device for door 1 of the controller. Input 3 should be reserved for contact on door 2 while
input 4 should be used for request to exit device for door 2 of the controller.
• For KT‐400 Controllers. Input 1 should be reserved for contact on door 1 while input 2 should be used for
request to exit device for door 1 (REX Door #1) of the controller. Input 5 should be reserved for contact
on door 2 while input 6 should be used for request to exit device for door 2 of the controller. Input 9
should be reserved for contact on door 3 while input 10 should be used for request to exit device for
door 3 of the controller. Input 13 should be reserved for contact on door 4 while input 6 should be used
for request to exit device for door 4 of the controller.

Defining Input
You may define inputs from the Input button of the Devices toolbar. You can also define inputs using the
Express Setup when defining a controller (see "Express Setup Program" on page 568).
1 From the Devices toolbar, select the Input icon.
2 Select a specific gateway (from the Gateway drop‐down list), a site (from the Site drop‐down list), a
controller (from the Controller drop‐down list).
3 From the Input drop‐down list, select the input you want to define.
4 Assign a Monitoring schedule to the selected input: this is the schedule during which the system will
supervise the condition of the input. When the schedule is valid, a change in input condition generates
either an “Input in alarm” or “Input restore” event.
NOTE: The input that is used for the door contact, REX contact or interlock contact SHOULD NOT have a
monitoring schedule.
5 Specify the Normal condition for the input: it may be Closed or Opened.
NOTE: When using single or double EOL resistors, set input Normal Condition to Closed.
100 System Devices

6 Specify the Notify abnormal condition for the input: it may be Alarm or Activate.
NOTE: When configuring event parameters with Input in alarm or Input activated as the selected
event, only the inputs corresponding to these criteria are displayed. See "Event Parameters Definition"
on page 423 for more information.
7 By default, EntraPass will not select the Suspend status update when not monitored. This is to keep data
traffic at a minimum. However, this option can be enabled if necessary.
8 Specify the Input response time. This delay corresponds to a period within which an input must remain in
the same state before a transition is recognized. This delay is expressed in minutes (mm:ss:cc). Values
range from 10 secs to 10 min:55 secs:35 cc for both the alarm response and alarm restore times.
• Alarm response time (mm:ss:cc): The delay before the system generates the input and alarm event.
Default is 50 cc.
• Restore response time (mm:ss:cc): The delay before the system generates the input restore events
(Multi‐site Gateways only). Default is 50 cc.
NOTE: Specifying the input response time allows bouncing time when the contact changes state, and
helps to generate only one event for each transition if this time is longer than the bouncing time. For
example, a 01:00:00 delay requires that a condition remains stable for at least one minute before it is
reported.
9 Specify the Telephone Entry System options (applies to KTES only).
NOTE: To access the modem call type feature, the site connection type must be set to Modem. For
more information, see "Sites Configuration" on page 61. The modem call type feature is supported by
Multi‐site Gateways only.
• Pager call type: You can select Do not call (the relay activation for that event will not be sent to the
pager), Call immediately (the relay activation for that event will be sent immediately to the pager) or
Call when scheduled (the relay activation for that event will be sent to the pager according to the
pager call schedule). See "If you are assigning or defining schedules, make sure that you are selecting
the proper category for this schedule. For example, if you are assigning or defining a system schedule
(for workstation, operators, event parameters, video triggers) this schedule will be available for
selecting components of this category. If you are selecting a schedule for physical components such
as controllers, doors, inputs, their schedules will be grouped by gateway if you are using a Global
Gateway and by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway by site if you are using a Multi‐site
Gateway. If you have defined two sites in your system, there will be two separate groups of
schedules for each site. You can define up to 99 schedules for each site." on page 186. Default value
is Do not call.
• Under modem call type, assign the call type option that best suits event reporting. Default value is
Do not call
• Input pager ID: Enter the pager code corresponding to the selected input. Possible values are 201,
202, 203 and 204.
NOTE: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function must be enabled. See
"Defining the Pager Options" on page 86
System Devices 101

10 For KT‐400 and KTES only, check Override default EOL (56K), and then, in the drop‐down menu, select the
appropriate item. Default is unchecked.
11 Select a Graphic and Video view associated with the input, if applicable.

Defining Relays and Inputs

1 Select the Relay and input tab to define which relay(s) or input(s) will be activated or shunted when this
input is enabled.
2 From the Activate relay list, select a relay or a relay group that will be triggered when this input is
enabled.
3 Activate relay temporarily will activate the relay according to the Temporary activation parameters
defined in the Relay dialog. Default is unchecked.
4 In the Temporary Shunt Timer (h:mm:ss) field, specify the period during which an input is not monitored.
Setting the timer to 0:00:00 will instruct the relay to follow the input state. The maximum value for the
Shunt delay (hh:mm:ss) is 18:12:15 when you are using the KT‐400 or the KTES. Default is 0s.
NOTE: For the system to process properly the reset delay on a temporary shunt, the Temporary Shunt
Timer option must be set in the definition of the input that will reset the delay. For example, if Input 1
will temporary shunt Input 2, the Temporary Shunt Timer must be specified also in the definition of
Input 2.
5 From the Shunt input list, select the input that will not be monitored when the input being defined is
enabled.
6 If applicable check Shunt input temporarily and Reset delay for shunt temporarily options. Default is
unchecked for both.
7 Delay before unshunt: Values range from 1 sec to 18 h:12min:15 secs.
NOTE: When the input is restored or returns to normal condition, the shunted input will also return to
normal condition. The event “Input shunted by input” will be generated by the system. When the input
returns to normal condition, the event “Input unshunted by input” will be generated.

Defining Tamper and Trouble

1 Select the Tamper and trouble tab to associate a relay or a group of relays to activate in case of an input
in trouble or in tamper. This tab is visible for a zone in DEOL (double end‐of‐line) only.
2 From the Activate relay list (Tamper alarm), select a relay or a relay group that will be triggered when this
input is in tamper.
3 Activate relay temporarily will activate the relay according to the Temporary activation parameters
defined in the Relay dialog. Default is unchecked.
4 From the Activate relay list (Input in trouble), select a relay or a relay group that will be triggered when
this input is in trouble.
5 Activate relay temporarily will activate the relay according to the Temporary activation parameters
defined in the Relay dialog. Default is unchecked.
102 System Devices

Defining an Input for an Elevator Door

When the input being defined or edited is used for elevator control, an Elevator tab is displayed in the
Input definition window. You may associate an input to a push button. It can then be used by a guard or
by a receptionist to temporarily enable the floors defined in the Floor group activation section.
1 In the Input definition window, select the Elevator tab.
NOTE: Only the floors marked with an “X” in the state column in the Floor group menu will be available
for selection. The system will temporarily enable floor selection according to the delay defined in the
Unlock time of the Door menu. A valid schedule has to be selected (Enable schedule list) for this
feature to be activated. It may be necessary to define a door as an elevator cab to access this tab.
2 In the Select cab for floor group activation section, select the cab associated with the input.
3 Select the Floor group associated with the selected cab, that will be enabled when the input is triggered.
4 Select a schedule according to which the defined input will carry out this command.

Enabling Remote Event Reporting (Multi‐site Gateway Only)

1 Select the Input event tab.
2 From the Local activation relay list, select a relay or a relay group that will be triggered when this input is
in alarm (activated).
NOTE: The relay group is only available when you are using KT‐400.
3 Under modem call type, assign the call type option that best suits event reporting. Default value is Do
not call.
NOTE: To access the modem call type feature, the site connection type must be set to Modem. For
more information, see "Sites Configuration" on page 61. The modem call type feature is supported by
Multi‐site Gateways only.

Output Device Configuration

Outputs usually control the reader LED and buzzer. There are four outputs available per KT‐200, KT‐300
(2 per door), but there are 16 outputs for KT‐400 controllers (4 per door). A KT‐100 supervises the state
of two outputs. Electrical outputs are configured as open‐collector. They provide an open circuit when
deactivated (not connected to ground) and are switched to ground when activated. You may configure
Output devices from a controller definition menu or from a gateway window.

Defining General Options for an Output

1 From the Devices configuration window, select the Output icon.
NOTE: The Miscellaneous section is hidden in the case of using the KT‐400 system because the items
are already defined in the Gateway/KT‐400 events.
2 Select the physical components related to the output: gateway, site, controller for the output.
3 From the Output drop‐down list, select the output you are modifying.
4 Specify the Operating mode for the output device (default is Normal):
System Devices 103

• Normal—The output is switched to ground when it is activated.

• Inverse—The output is an open circuit (not grounded) when it is activated.
5 In the Selected doors section, select which door will affect the output you are configuring:
• First door—Only the first door port will follow the state programmed for these events.
• Second door—Only the second door port will follow the state programmed for these events.
NOTE: This option is not available with KT‐100 and KTES.
6 Set the Activation period (m:ss) delay. It defines the activation time in seconds during which the output
remains active when it is programmed for a temporary activation. An e will leave the output activated
indefinitely, regardless of the activation type. Values range from 1 sec to 4 min:15 secs. Default is 5 secs.
NOTE: This option is not available when you are using the KT‐400 or the KTES.
NOTE: If you are using the V ideo Integration feature, EntraPass enables you to assign all system
components into a video view, the same way you assign them to a system interactive floor plan
(graphic). To do this, you simply select the video view where you want the system component
(Workstation, site, gateway, controller, etc.) to appear.

Associating Events with Auxiliary Outputs

System events can trigger auxiliary outputs. You can define how each event will trigger the output.
1 Select the Definition tab to associate a door event with an auxiliary output.
2 In the Options column, associate an event with an output state. Default is None.
• Steady timed—The output given this option will not flash, it will remain activated for the specified
activation period and will return to normal state when the activation period is over.
• Flash timed—The output will flash and remain activated for the specified activation period and will
return to its normal state when the activation period is over.
• Steady—The output given this option will not flash, it will remain activated until it returns to normal
condition.
• Flash—The output will flash and remain activated until its condition returns to normal.
NOTE: The on‐off delays for the outputs are pre‐defined during the gateway definition. For details, see
"EntraPass Gateways Configuration" on page 58. Events for timer on/off vary depending on the type of
the selected gateway.

Integrated Panel Configuration

Minimum Requirements to View and Use the Integration Buttons
• The Integration DLL must have been loaded at the EntraPass Server. If the toolbar doesn’t display the
two buttons, See Chapter 14 ‘Integration’ on page 552.
• The third party hardware must be connected on the serial port of the Multi‐site Gateway or the serial
port of a pass‐through KT‐400 controller.
• The third party hardware must be powered up.
104 System Devices

The Integration process is divided in three sections:

• From the Devices toolbar > Integrated Panel — The connection type, the panel model, the
communication port, the virtual keypad(s) and the partition(s) are defined.
• From the Devices toolbar > Integrated Component — The component type(s) are defined.
• From the Operations toolbar > Integrated Panel — See Chapter 7 ‘Manual Operations on Integrated
Panels’ on page 295.
• The device is configured through its Virtual Keypad.
• The partition can be:
• Arm away
• Arm stay
• Arm no entry delay
• Arm with code
• Disarm partition
1 From the Devices toolbar, select the Integrated Panel icon.
2 Click on the New icon and assign a name for both languages.
3 By default, the Gateway is a Multi‐site Gateway. Select a Panel from the drop‐down list.
4 Select a Connection type.
5 Select a Panel model.
6 If the Video feature is enabled, the Video view field appears. If this is the case, select the Video view in
which you want the defined component to appear. For details on defining video views, see "Video Views
Definition" on page 237.
7 From the Graphic list, you may select the graphic to which the application is assigned, if applicable. For
details on defining graphics, see "Graphics Definition" on page 211.
8 Click on the Details button to display the Panel Configuration dialog. A different dialog is displayed
according to the connection type:
9 If you have previously selected KT‐400 serial selection (DSC MaxSys or Powerseries) for the connection
type, you must now select the controller for pass‐through.
10 If you have previously selected KT‐400 serial selection (DSC MaxSys or Powerseries) for the connection
type, you must now select the Intrusion model.
11 If you have previously selected KT‐400 or Gateway serial selection (DSC MaxSys or Powerseries) for the
connection type, you must now select a Digit count (for the access code), a Master access code and the
Default user access code through the three‐dots button.
If you have previously selected Gateway IP (Honeywell Galaxy) for the connection type, you must now enter
the Ethernet IP address and select the three (3) IP ports that are used to communicate with the Galaxy panel.
Enter the remote PIN number (the displayed value is the default value from the Galaxy panel).
NOTE: When selecting the Access managed by user, a tab named Intrusion will become available in the
Users toolbar > Card.
12 Select the Panel Component tab.
System Devices 105

• Auto‐detection: The partition and zone labels are automatically detected from the panel.
NOTE: This feature depends on the type of intrusion panel. The device has to be first created in
EntraPass for the DLL to be downloaded into the corresponding gateway or KT‐400. Once downloaded,
the auto‐detection becomes active.
13 Define the Zone, Partition and User parameters.
• These parameters have the following maximum values:

Parameter PC1616 PC1832 PC1864

Zones 32 32 64
Partitions 2 4 8
Users 48 72 95

14 Select the RS‐232 tab.

15 Select the Communication port COM and the Baud rate from the drop‐down lists.
16 Click Save.

Integrated Component Configuration

The Integrated Component dialog can handle any type of panel components (partition, zone...etc) under
any type of panel (intrusion, temperature control,...etc).
1 From the Devices toolbar, select the Integrated Component icon.
2 Select the Component from the drop‐down list.
NOTE: You can use the dropdown list in the toolbar to sort the displayed components by type.
3 Select the Component type.
4 If the Video feature is enabled, the Video view field appears. If this is the case, select the Video view in
which you want the defined component to appear. For details on defining video views, see "Video Views
Definition" on page 237.
5 From the Graphic list, you may select the graphic to which the application is assigned, if applicable. For
details on defining graphics, see "Graphics Definition" on page 211.
6 Click on the Details button to display the DSC Power Series ‐ User configuration dialog:
NOTE: The Details button is available only for a User component type.
7 Enter the User access code (used for user component types). This code is a PIN number used for arming
or disarming a partition.
8 Click Save.
9 See "Manual Operations on Integrated Panels" on page 295 to complete the configuration.
106 System Devices
Definitions 107

Definitions
Schedules Definition
A schedule indicates when the system will execute certain operations such as automatically unlocking
doors, permitting access to employees, running automatic reports, monitoring inputs, etc. It also
determines when events are to be acknowledged or when to activate relays controlling different
functions (lighting, heat, etc.). You can use the same schedule in different menus, but it is recommended
to create a different schedule for each application, because it is much easier to modify a particular
schedule without affecting other applications.

Each schedule is composed of four intervals. Each interval has a starting and ending time. Each of these
intervals can be individually selected for the seven days of the week, and for 4 holidays. EntraPass gives
you the possibility of programming 99 schedules per gateway and an unlimited number of system
schedules. To do so, you must activate the Upgrade to advanced schedule capability option in the
System parameters dialog (Options toolbar > System parameters > Server).
NOTE: For more information, please See "System Parameters Configuration" on page 283.
EntraPass supports two groups of schedules:
• System schedules: System schedules for global functions such as event parameters, operators login
schedules and video triggers. These are not loaded in controllers.
• Corporate site schedules: These are defined per site. You can define 99 schedules per corporate site for
such purposes as: power supervision (controllers), unlock schedule (doors), Rex schedule (doors),
activation mode (relay), monitoring schedule (input).

If you are assigning or defining schedules, make sure that you are selecting the proper category for this
schedule. For example, if you are assigning or defining a system schedule (for workstation, operators,
event parameters, video triggers) this schedule will be available for selecting components of this
category. If you are selecting a schedule for physical components such as controllers, doors, inputs, their
schedules will be grouped by site if you are using a Multi‐site Gateway. If you have defined two sites in
your system, there will be two separate groups of schedules for each site. You can define up to 99
schedules for each site.

Defining a Schedule
1 From the EntraPass main window, click the Definition tab. Then click the Schedule button.
NOTE: If you have checked the Upgrade to advanced schedule capability option (System parameter >
Server > Schedule tab), the Gateway/Site drop‐down list appears for selection. From the Gateway/site
drop‐down list, select a Site or a System schedule (applicable to system components such as event
parameters, video triggers, operator login).
2 From the Schedule drop down list, select the schedule you want to modify or select the schedule
applicable to the category selected in previous step, or click the New icon to create a new one.
108 Definitions

3 Assign a name (or modify an existing one) to the schedule. It is recommended to choose a meaningful
name.
4 You can click the Holiday icon in the toolbar to view the list of holiday that are defined in the system.

NOTE: EntraPass supports four types of holidays.

5 Specify the Start time: this is the scheduled time when the interval becomes valid. It will become invalid
when the end time has been reached.
6 Specify the End time: this is the scheduled time when the interval is no longer valid.
NOTE: Start and end times are in 24‐hour time format; this gives a range from 00:00 to 24:00. For any
interval, the end time must be greater than the start time.
7 Check the Days of the week during which this schedule interval will be valid. To do this, click in the
checkbox below each day.
8 Check the holiday type (Hol1, Hol2, etc.) column checkbox if you have defined four holidays in the
Holiday definition menu and you want this interval to be valid during a holiday. You can also click on the
+ sign to display a calendar for the next 12 months showing holidays in one of the three colors identified
in the legend.
NOTE: The legend is different from the one used to define holidays. See "Holiday Definition" on page
114 for more information.

To Create a 2‐day Continuous Interval

To create an interval from Monday 20:00 (8:00 PM) to Tuesday 08:00 AM, the schedule must be divided
into two intervals:
Definitions 109

1 First define an interval for Monday from 20:00 to 24:00;

2 Define a second interval for Tuesday from 00:00 to 08:00. The system considers these two intervals as
one continuous interval.

Extended Schedule
This feature (for EntraPass and WebStation 5.01) allows increasing the number of schedule intervals to
20.
NOTE: Schedules with 20 intervals in stand‐alone mode can be used with KT‐400 and KT‐400 V1
controllers only.
See "Schedule" on page 284 for more information.

Floors Definition
The Floor dialog is used to create or edit elevator floors. Once the floors are created, they are grouped
and associated with a schedule that will define when access is permitted.
1 In the Definition tab, click the Floor button.
2 In the Site drop‐down list, select the gateway/site for which you are defining floors. This allows you to
minimize the list of components defined in the system.
3 Select a floor or click the New icon to create a new floor group.
4 Assign a meaningful name to the floor, then click the Close button. The system prompts you to save.

Graphics Definition
A graphic corresponds to the secured area of the system where components (EntraPass applications,
controllers, inputs, relays, etc.) are located on a site. With graphics, operators can easily view the exact
location of a component installed on a site, or the status of components and devices such as doors,
contacts, motion detectors, controllers, panels assigned to the graphic. Operators can perform manual
operations directly from the displayed component (for example, locking/unlocking a door). Operators
can execute tasks with or without confirmation. You can create as many graphics as you need. Each
110 Definitions

graphic can display up to 250 components including using live video as a background. You may also
import graphics or maps from other programs in the following formats (BMP, EMF, WMF, JPEG, GIF, PCX,
PNG, TIF or PCD).
NOTE: EntraPass offers users four sample floor plans. You can customize them to suit your system
needs. The sample floor plans are located at: C:\Program
Files\Kantech\Server_CE\Generaldata\Demobmp folder.

Defining Components of a Graphic

1 In the Definition tab, click the Graphics icon.
2 From the Graphic drop‐down list, select the graphic you want to modify, or click the New icon to create a
new one.
3 Assign a name to the graphic (or modify the existing name).
NOTE: When you select an existing graphic, or when you create a new one, all the components that are
assigned in your graphic are displayed in the left‐hand pane. The right‐hand part of the window
displays the graphic itself.
4 From the Graphic Definition window, Click here to create, edit or modify a graphic to bring up the Assign
Components window.
NOTE: If the video feature is enabled in your system, video components are added to the Graphics
menu. These video components can be accessed from the graphic layout. The icon can be positioned on
a graphic layout and its status can be retrieved by clicking on the video icon. In addition to standard
options, the following status option will be available for the video component: V ideo Server Online /
Offline, V ideo Server Parameters (Related to a specific vendor) and Camera status.
5 Click on the Options menu to display a pull down menu of drawing
options. A check mark appears next to an option that is activated. Show
hints provides the component’s name (component's address and name)
when you point your mouse cursor over that graphic.
• Draw transparently will place a transparent icon on top of a
background picture for a blended effect.
• Draw frame draws a frame around the component. Frame color
indicates the current frame color and allows you to change the color.
• Auto display video view lets you add a video view.
• Select Edit background picture to edit the background of the
selected graphic. From this window you can modify the graphic's
frame and background color and add annotations.
Definitions 111

• Select Add live video as background to have live video as background.

• Select Add Web page as background to have a Web page as background. Enter the URL address of
the site and press Enter on the keyboard, or click Test. The Login and Password are not required
unless the Web page you want to access requires it. Click Test to see that the page is loading
properly. Then, click Save.‘

• Select Clear background in order to clear the background picture of the graphic only leaving the
assigned components. You can use this option when you want to insert a new graphic and leave the
same components.
112 Definitions

Designing the Background for the Graphic Window

1 Double‐click anywhere in the background of the Assign components window to bring up the Design
background picture dialog.
2 Use this window to import a graphic that was created with another application or create your own
background using the drawing toolbar buttons.
• To import an existing graphic, click the diskette icon, then drag and drop the diskette in the
work area. Once you have positioned the component, and released the mouse button, the
Image properties dialog will pop up on the screen. The system displays the Open window.
Locate the graphic you want to import and click Open. The graphic will be placed in the graphic area
of the dialog.
• To import a custom icon into the background graphic, click the Custom images button in the
toolbar. The Select an image window pops up on the screen. Select an icon, then click OK to
close the window and import the image in your design.
• To insert shapes and text in the background image, select a
rectangle, a circle, an ellipse, etc. in the toolbar, and drag and
drop it in your background.
• To modify a shape you’ve just placed in the burgeoned window, right‐click it to open the Properties
dialog. and make the appropriate modifications (color, position, etc.).
• You can setup the system to display the Properties dialog as you drop the shape into the design
window. To do so, select the Show properties on Drop from the Options menu.
• To retrieve shapes that were previously saved to a disk, select the Load annotations option in the
Image menu. When you add shapes to a graphic, you have the option of saving them as annotation
on a separate file in order to retrieve them later.
• To save annotations on a separate file from your graphic, select the Save annotations option in the
Image menu. You will be able to retrieve them for later use.
• To clear the shapes, select Clear annotation in the Image menu. If you save the graphic with the
shapes, the shape become permanent.
• Use the View menu to define how the graphic will be displayed.
NOTE: Sizing handles (square handles that are displayed along the sides of the object that surrounds
the selected object) indicate the object is selected.
Definitions 113

Assigning System Components to Graphic Icons

1 From the Assign Components window toolbar, click and drag the selected component to the desired
position. To drag an object across a window, select the object with your mouse and drag, while keeping
the button pressed down, to the desired location in the graphic.

2 Once you have positioned the component, and released the mouse button, the Assign From dialog will
pop up on the screen.
3 Select the system component you want to assign to the icon on the screen.
4 Click OK to go back to the previous window.
NOTE: If you do not assign the icon to a component, the icon will not be saved in the graphic. Only
components that were not selected in the graphic will be available for selection.

Printing System Components and Graphics

1 From the Definition tab, click the Graphic button and select a graphic from the drop‐down list.
2 Click on the Print icon from the Graphic dialog toolbar.
• Select the graphics to be printed using the checkboxes. You can also use the Select all or the Clear all
buttons.
• Select Print empty fields to include the titles of the fields even if they are empty.
• Select Print component references to print the component reference numbers.
• Use the Font button to display the standard Windows Font dialog and modify the font attributes
accordingly.
114 Definitions

• Click on the Preview button to display a general view of the printing layout.

3 Click on Print to send the graphic to the printer.

Holiday Definition
1 A holiday is treated differently than other days. It is recommended to program holidays at the
beginning of the year; this helps to modify floating holidays for the current year (Easter,
Thanksgiving, etc.). A holiday may be identified by a specific type (Hol 1, 2, 3, 4). The same day may
be defined as a holiday at one site, but as a regular day in another site. From the Definition tab,
select the Holiday button. The Holiday window appears.
2 To create a new holiday, select the New icon.
3 To create a global holiday, proceed with the holiday definition. If you want to define a holiday for a
specific gateway/site, select the gateway/site from the drop‐down list.
4 Assign a name to the holiday.
5 From the Date pull‐down menu, select a the holiday date from the calendar.
6 Check the Recurring option if this is the case for the holiday you are defining.
NOTE: If the holiday is not a recurring holiday, you will have to reprogram it for the following year. You
can program holidays years in advance; but it is recommended to review holidays on a yearly basis.
Definitions 115

7 In the Holiday type section, select the type of the holiday you are defining. This gives you flexibility when
defining a holiday. For example, you may decide that a given day is a holiday for a certain group of users,
but it is a regular day for another group.
8 Click on the + Holiday list button to display a calendar for the next 12 months showing holidays in one of
the three colors identified in the legend.
NOTE: The legend is different from the one used to define schedules. See "Schedules Definition" on
page 107 for more information.

Task Builder Definition

Minimum Requirements
The Task Builder and Event Trigger buttons will only display if the SmartLink component has been
installed on a workstation and registered with the EntraPass server.

Task Builder Dialogs Description

1 From the Definition toolbar, select the Task Builder icon.

The Task Builder menu allows you to create SmartLink tasks. When you have a SmartLink application
installed, the Task insertion menu for SmartLink button is enabled. It allows operators to send built‐in
task commands to the SmartLink.
NOTE: A new command has been added to SmartLink (BATCHMODIFY) allowing batch modifications to
a group of cards. It is now possible to change parameters for a group of cards of the same type. Only
the data fields indicated in the command will be modified. For more information on task commands,
refer to your SmartLink Reference Manual DN1327.
116 Definitions

1 Click on the Task insertion menu for SmartLink button and a menu will be displayed, or
use the icons corresponding to the most common insertions.

NOTE: When creating SmartLink tasks, only commands that are written in the primary language are
considered as valid commands. For more information on task commands, refer to your SmartLink
Reference Manual, DN1327.

The following table describes the options you will find in the menu.

Parameter Description
Date Insert a date in the task. Options are: Year, Month, Day, YYYY/MM/
DD or MM/DD/YYYY
Time Insert a time in the task. Options are: Hour, Minute, Second,
HH:MM:SS or HH:MM.
Event Insert event description in the task. You can select to display event
name Text or Number.
Location Insert the location where the task must take place. Options are:
EntraPass Application, Gateway or Site.
Information #1 to 4 Insert event information. Options in the database are: Index
Number, Index Text, Component ID and Component Text.
User Information Insert card information in the task. Options are: Card Number, Card
User Name, Card Information #1 to #10 or Comment.
Numerical Value Insert a number in the task.
Character String Insert a string of characters (free text) in the task.
Definitions 117

Parameter Description
Add Delay Insert a delay in 1/10 secs in the task.
Carriage Return Insert a carriage return in the task.
Trim Right Will delete the last character to the right of the task.
Email To insert and email in the task that will be sent automatically when
the event occurs.
Modem To insert a message in the task that will be sent automatically
through a pager when the event occurs.
Serial Device for Messages Select the Serial Com Port and Baud rate to send the message.
Serial Device for Select the Serial Com Port and Baud rate to send the command.
Commands
File File opens the Select a filename dialog that allows you to locate a
file (or create a new one) where all event information entered in
the task will be logged when an event occurs.
Close will close the file.
Commit to disk will save the file to disk. This command will not
close the file.
Execute File opens the Select a filename dialog that allows you to locate the
executable that will be used with the task command.
Parameters open the Enter Character Strings dialog allowing you to
type a string of characters that will be added to the task command.
Action allows you to define how you want to launch the task
(Launch Hidden, Launch Normal, Launch Minimized, Launch
Maximized or Terminate process).
Network Insert a Network Tag.
Command Insert a Command Tag.
Modify Language You can modify the command language to English or French.
Save SmartLink Mode Insert in the SmartLink command to interrupt and place current
SmartLink mode in the background (for example sending and
email). This command must always be used with Restore Previous
SmartLink Mode.
Restore Previous Insert in the SmartLink command to restore the previous SmartLink
SmartLink Mode mode. This command must always be used with Save SmartLink
Mode.
118 Definitions

Adding an Email to a Task

1 Once you have selected an existing task or created a new one, click the Mailbox icon. The Email Task
Builder dialog will display on screen.

2 Enter the your email address in the From... field.

3 Enter the email address(es) where the message should be sent in the To... field. Each address should be
separated by a semi‐colon (;).
4 If you wish to send a copy of this email to other people, enter their name in the CC... field.
5 Enter the Subject.
6 If you want to attach a file to the email, enter the entire path to the file in the Attachment field. Each file
must be separated by a semi‐colon (;).
7 Enter the message in the text area.
NOTE: Variables can be added to the email subject and body.
Definitions 119

8 Click OK to attach the email to the SmartLink task. The message will appear in the window.

Inserting a Pager Command in a Task

When building a task using SmartLink, EntraPass allows you to insert a command that will send a
message to a paging system.
1 Click the Modem icon. The Modem task parameters dialog will display on screen.
2 The Modem serial port parameter should already be setup.
3 Enter Dial information such as the pager Phone number.
4 Check the Pager options and enter the Message that will display on the pager (if the receiving pager has
the option to display) and the Delay before message (seconds) will be sent to the pager. The time range
value is 00:00 and 09:59 min.
5 Click OK. The phone number and message will appear in the window

Inserting Serial Device for Messages

1 Click the Serial device for messages icon. The Serial com port dialog will display on screen.
2 Select the Port Number and the Baud rate.
3 Click OK.
120 Definitions

Inserting Serial Device for Commands

1 Click the Serial device for commands icon. The Serial com port dialog will display on screen.
2 Select the Port Number and the Baud rate.
3 Click OK.

Inserting a File
1 Click the File (Open) icon. The Select a file name dialog will display on screen.
2 Enter the file name or browse to find the file.
3 Click OK.

Executing a File
1 Click the Execute (File) icon. The Select a file name dialog will display on screen.
2 Enter the file name or browse to find the file.
3 Click OK.

Executing Parameters
1 Click the Execute (Parameters) icon. The Enter character string dialog will display on screen.

Entering a Network Tag

1 Click the Network icon. The Enter network tag dialog will display on screen.
2 Enter the network tag. The range value is 0 to 999,999.
3 Click OK.

Entering Commands
1 Click the Command icon. The SmartLink Task Builder dialog will display on screen.
2 Select a component type from the Component type list.
3 Select a command from the Command list.
NOTE: The toggle command is only available with specific component types such as Door, Input and
Relay.
4 Select a variable from the Variables list. There are three categories of variable that can be linked to a
component type and a command.
• Message Value
• Trigger
• Card Information 1 to 10

Task Building Examples

The following procedures will involve each of the three variables that can be linked to a component type
and a command.
Definitions 121

Building a Task with a Message Value Variable

1 From the Definition toolbar, select the Task Builder icon.
2 Click on New and enter Decrement Card Usage Count as the task name.
3 Click on the Command button.
4 From the SmartLink Task Builder window, select Card from the Component type drop‐down list.
5 Select Decrement count usage from the Command list.
6 Select Message Value from the Variable list. The task displays at the bottom of the dialog. Click OK.

7 The SmartLink task now displays in the text field.

8 Click Save and close the Task Builder dialog.
9 From the Definition toolbar, select the Event Trigger icon.
10 Click on New and enter Decrement Card Usage as the event trigger name.
11 In the Trigger source section, select Door from the component type list.
12 Click on the three‐dot to select the component.
NOTE: You c an also select a group of components or all the components as a trigger source.
13 In the Trigger destination section, click on the three‐dot to select the SmartLink.
14 Click on the three‐dot to select Decrement Card Usage Count as the task.
15 From the Events tab, select events.
16 Click on Save and Close.

Building a Task with a Trigger Value Variable

1 From the Definition toolbar, select the Task Builder icon.
2 Click on New and enter Trigger value as the task name.
3 Click on the Command button.
4 From the SmartLink Task Builder window, select Relay from the Component type drop‐down list.
5 Select Toggle relay activation from the Command list.
122 Definitions

6 Select Trigger variable #1 from the Variable list. The task displays at the bottom of the dialog. Click OK.

7 The SmartLink task now displays in the text field.

8 Click Save and close the Task Builder dialog.
9 From the Definition toolbar, select the Event Trigger icon.
10 Click on New and enter Trigger value as the event trigger name.
11 In the Trigger source section, select Door from the component type list.
12 Click on the three‐dot to select the component.
NOTE: You can also select a group of components or all the components as a trigger source.
13 Click on the three‐dot to select Always valid as the Trigger schedule.
14 Check the Use extended filter option.
15 In the Trigger destination section, click on the three‐dot to select the SmartLink.
16 Click on the three‐dot to select Trigger value as the task.
17 Check the Use task variable option.
18 From the Events tab, select the Access granted event.
19 Click on Save.
20 Click on the Variable tab.
21 Select Relay for both as the variable type.
22 Click on the Extended filter tab.
23 Select Card as the Filter type, then select the component filter and both variables.
24 Repeat Step 23 for as many cards as required.
25 Click on Save and Close.

Building a Task with a User Information Variable

1 From the Definition toolbar, select the Task Builder icon.
2 Click on New and enter Toggle Relay via User Information as the task name.
3 Click on the Command button.
4 From the SmartLink Task Builder window, select Relay from the Component type drop‐down list.
5 Select Toggle relay activation from the Command list.
Definitions 123

6 Select User Information 1 from the Variable list. The task displays at the bottom of the dialog. Click OK.

7 The SmartLink task now displays in the text field.

8 Click Save and close the Task Builder dialog.
9 From the Definition toolbar, select the Event Trigger icon.
10 Click on New and enter User Information as the event trigger name.
11 In the Trigger source section, select Door from the component type list.
NOTE: You can also select a group of components or all the components as a trigger source.
12 Click on the three‐dot to select the component.
13 Click on the three‐dot to select Always valid as the Trigger schedule.
14 In the Trigger destination section, click on the three‐dot to select the SmartLink.
15 Click on the three‐dot to select Toggle Relay via User Information as the task.
16 From the Events tab, select the Access granted event.
NOTE: Make sure the User Information is entered correctly. Check below for an example from the Users
toolbar > Card Dialog > General tab. Number 1505 is the RELAYID of the relay that will toggle when
the task is performed.
17 Click on Save and Close.
124 Definitions
Video Integration 125

Video Integration
The Video Toolbar
EntraPass offers real‐time monitoring capability as a response to the growing importance of video in
access control systems. The Video feature allows operators to define Video parameters and use video
features from EntraPass user interfaces.

• Video servers for use in EntraPass (identifying the video source and specifying cameras connected to it)
• Video views for Video monitoring using EntraPass desktops
• Video recording triggers
• Recording parameters
• Video event list
• Playback
• Current recording
• Exported video
• EntraPass Video Vault, etc.
NOTE: Installing and using the video feature may take a great amount of your company network
bandwidth (LAN or WAN). The network administrator may control the use of the network bandwidth
for video data transfer.
126 Video Integration

The following diagram shows how the video feature is integrated in EntraPass. The EntraPass Video Vault
utility can be installed on the same computer as any other EntraPass application or on a dedicated
computer.

Video Server Configuration

A video server is connected to EntraPass through a specific IP address. The video server captures, stores
and distributes video data to the EntraPass desktops for monitoring and surveillance purposes. Video
data can then be accessed by any EntraPass workstation (with appropriate permission) through the
network. In order to use the video feature in EntraPass, the video server must be identified to EntraPass.
To do this, you have to:
• Define the video server communication settings
• Specify video parameters including the number of cameras connected to the server
• Set communication delays
• Define parameters for use with EntraPass Video Vault, etc.
NOTE: Panasonic and American Dynamics video integrations are not compatible with W indows Server
2003 and 2008 operating systems.
Video Integration 127

Defining the Video Server Communication Settings

1 From the EntraPass main window, click the Video tab, then click the Video server icon in the Video
window toolbar. The Video server window appears with the General tab enabled.
2 From the Video server drop‐down list, select the Video server you want to configure (or click the New
icon to create a new one), then assign it a descriptive name in the language section. It is recommended
to supply a name in the two languages if you are running the application in two languages.
3 From the Video Server type drop‐down list, select the DVR type for the Video server you are configuring.

NOTE: The current version of the software integrates with American Dynamics Intellex and HDVR.
EntraPass supports HDVR‐2U, HDVR‐4U, all versions of Intellex: DVMS8000 (Up to 8 cameras) and
DVMS16000 (Up to 16 cameras), Intellex IP (up to 16 network video streams), Intellex Ultra (16
channels) and Intellex LT. This later version limits the number of cameras to 4, 8 or 16 depending on
the selected Intellex LT (LT‐4, LT‐8 or LT‐16). EntraPass also supports the following models:
• AD‐TVR‐04: AD TVR 04 video channels (models ADTVR04050 and ADTVR04100).
• AD‐TVR‐08: AD TVR 08 video channels (models ADTVR08100 and ADTVR08200).
• AD‐TVR‐16: AD TVR 16 video channels (models ADTVR16050, ADTVR16100, ADTVR16200 and
ADTVR16400).
• AD‐TVR‐VS: AD TVR‐VS 4 video inputs.
• AD‐NVR: Allows users viewing, managing and controlling the video being recorded on the AD‐NVR
through the EntraPass software:
• Can support up to 128 IP cameras
• Up to 400 Mb/sec image streaming
• Base model includes minimal video analytic and can be upgraded to a full analytic package
• One pre‐configured video playback button
• Connect to EntraPass through an IP connection. No other interface needed.
128 Video Integration

• Video with live and playback views on the same screen:

4 Check the On‐line option to tell EntraPass that the video server is on‐line.
NOTE: The On‐line option must be unchecked when the server is off‐line for long periods such as
maintenance reasons, for example. Otherwise, EntraPass will continue polling the video server; this
may cause the system to hang.
5 In the IP address field, specify the static IP address of the Video server. Make sure that the Video server
is set to a static IP address. For specific information about the video server IP address, contact your
network administrator.
6 Domain name: Video server domain address.
7 Specify the port information for Video (Intellex only), Communication (Intellex, HDVR and TVR II) and
Event (Intellex only). Make sure that these are the same used by the DVR (Digital Video Recorder).
NOTE: The TCP port (Transmission Control Protocol) is used by the V ideo application to communicate
with EntraPass. Options displayed in the TCP port section depend on the device you are configuring.
For details about ports and their settings, contact your network administrator or the documentation
provided with the Digital Video Recorder (DVR) vendor.
8 Check the Bypass Ping for identification (Intellex only) option if you want to save on bandwidth
utilization. In fact if this option is not checked, the workstation will continually poll for server
identification.
Video Integration 129

9 Check the Specify video server login (Intellex only) option if you want users to enter their credentials
before accessing the Video server. If this option is checked the Login tab appears in the Video Server
window.
10 Check the Bypass DVR Messages option if you want to cancel all the messages coming from Intellex.
11 In the Video server parameters section:
• Enter the Number of cameras. The number of cameras connected to the video server (or use the up/
down arrows) or click the Import camera details button to get this information from the video server.
Using the Import camera details button offers a fast way to define cameras connected to the video
server. In fact, when you click this button, EntraPass will connect to the Video server and get the
number and default names for cameras connected to the DVR.
• Specify the Polling frequency (mm:ss). The polling frequency refers to the delay between two polls
from the Kantech Server to the Video Server. This operation is processed by the Kantech Video
Server Interface.
• Specify Polls before Communication failure. This refers to the number of unsuccessful polls before
the EntraPass Server declares the video server offline. For example, if you enter 4 in this field,
EntraPass will attempt to connect four times to the video server before it declares that the server is
down.
• Indicate the Time zone adjustment. Using the up/down arrows, specify the Time zone adjustment if
the EntraPass server and the DVR server are not in the same time zone. The time zone adjustment
refers to the time zone difference between the DVR server and the EntraPass server. Adjusting the
time zone enables workstations to retrieve events generated by the DVR server at the EntraPass
Server’s time.
• Check the Time for clock synchronization (Intellex only) box. The Time synchronization refers to the
time of the day when the video server will synchronize with the Kantech server for date and time.
This operation is processed by the Kantech Video Server Interface.
NOTE: The EntraPass server serves as the reference time source. The video server will process the time
according to the EntraPass Server’s time. For example, if the EntraPass Server’s time is 3:00 and that
of the video server is 2:00, the T imezone adjustment data will be ‐1 so that the video server can
display the correct information about an event that occurred at a specific time.

Enhancing the Security of Video Servers

1 If your Intellex video server is secured by Policy Manager, EntraPass operators must use a domain name,
a specific login and password to access the video server. In that case, you will check the Specify Video
server login box in the General tab.
NOTE: Login name and password are mandatory if a HDVR or a TVR II video server type is used
NOTE: For details about the video server security parameters, contact the network administrator.
2 If the Specify video server login option is checked, the Login tab is displayed.
3 Enter the login data in the displayed fields:
• Domain name: enter the domain name used by the Intellex Video server (not used for HDVR and TVR
II).
• Login name: enter the login name used for accessing the video server.
130 Video Integration

• Password: enter the password specific to the domain controller.

• Password confirmation: the password for confirmation must be identical to the password entered in
the previous field. If you get an error message, make sure that the Caps Lock key is not activated. For
a HDVR or a TVR II, it corresponds to the DVR server password.

Remote Video Connection

This function allows controlling server video from many occurrences of the RemoteVideoProcess.exe application,
on the server computer or any computer connected on the same network.

Once the Remote video connection option is registered, new parameters can be configured in the Video server
window.
• IP address
• Domain name (from which the RemoteVideoProcess.exe will be executed)
• Communication port (port opened by the RemoteVideoProcess.exe application to monitor incoming
requests from the EntraPass server)
NOTE: The RemoteVideoProcess.exe is not accessible from the redundant server
NOTE: The Video Viewer option, accessible from the EntraPass installation process, must be used for
the RemoteV ideoProcess function to work.
NOTE: Installation of the Remote Video Connection will add 128 new video servers.

Defining the EntraPass Video Vault

The EntraPass Video Vault parameters tab allows you to specify settings such as archiving schedule or
transfer frequency for EntraPass Video Vault if this application has been activated in EntraPass and has
been configured for use within the EntraPass applications.
• For details about installing EntraPass Video Vault, see "Adding System Components" on page 18.
• For details about configuring the EntraPass Video Vault application, see "Configuring the EntraPass Video
Vault Application" on page 55.
• For details about using EntraPass Video Vault, see "EntraPass Video Vault" on page 308.
1 From the Video server window, select the Video Vault parameters tab.
2 Enter information for the EntraPass Video Vault application:
• Video Vault application: the name of the EntraPass Video Vault application associated with the
selected video server.
• Archive schedule: the selected schedule indicates the period during which video segments will be
saved. When this schedule is valid, all video segments from user‐defined triggers, video server
triggers or manual triggers will be saved for archiving purposes.
3 Define the Video segment transfer parameters:
Video Integration 131

• Transfer interval (hh:mm): the interval specified in this field indicates the period during which videos
segments are retrieved from the video server. This feature restricts data retrieval and the availability
of the video server during a specified period of time.
NOTE: The server allows one video retrieval at a time. If, for instance, the specified period is 02:00 ‐‐>
04:00, video segments will be retrieved for two hours per day. If the specified period is 18:00 ‐‐> 06:00,
this indicates an interval of twelve hours starting from 6:00 PM to 6:00 AM.
• Notify on transfer failure (days): this number indicates the number of days allocated for the video
retrieval. If a video segment was not retrieved after the number of days specified in this field, the
video segment will be considered unrecoverable for archiving and EntraPass Video Vault will notify
the operator of the failure.
• File language: This option is applicable to KVI and KVA formats only. Users can choose between
English and French as the language that will be used to describe the archived data.
• Video file format: select the format for the video file that will be retrieved:
• Video Vault default: this is the format defined for the selected EntraPass Video Vault (Devices >
EntraPass Applications > (Select Video Vault application) > Video Vault Process tab).
• KVI (Kantech Intellex Video) Format: The KVI file contains thumbnail and video context
information and places a watermark on embedded .img. It must be viewed with the Intellex Video
Player that uses the American Dynamics API. You must make sure that the API has been installed
on the client’s computer.
• KVA (Kantech Video AVI) Format: The KVA file contains thumbnail and video context information
with no watermark on the embedded .AVI. Video files can be viewed using Windows Media
Player or any other AVI player on the market.
• AVI (Audio Video Interlaced) Format: This is the standard AVI format, with no watermark. Video
files can be viewed using Windows Media Player or any other AVI player on the market.
• IMG Intellex Format: This format places a watermark on the video. It must be viewed with the
Intellex Video Player using the American Dynamics API. You must make sure that the API has been
installed on the client‘s computer.
• PS Format: HDVR native compressed video format. Use eplayer to play.
4 For increased security, check the Use a password for KVI and KVA file formats option if you want to
protect the KVI and KVA archived video segments by a password. Make sure to enter identical
information in the Password and Password confirmation fields. Before viewing video segments archived
on the EntraPass Video Vault being defined, operators will have to enter this password. Archived video
files can be viewed from the Browse Video Vault window.

Camera Definition
EntraPass offers you the ability to assign names to cameras, presets, and patterns for easy identification
in the Video desktop and in all system video events.
The definition of a camera includes identifying its:
• Types (fixed or dome)
• Presets (for dome cameras)
• Patterns (for dome cameras)
132 Video Integration

The camera name is displayed when viewing live or recorded video events (Intellex only). The default
names are Camera1 through Camera n (where n is the last camera number).

Defining a Camera
1 From the Video window toolbar, click the Camera button. The Camera window appears.
2 Select the camera you want to define, then assign it a descriptive name in the enabled language fields. It
is recommended to assign a name both in the primary and secondary languages if the system is running
in two languages.
3 Select the Camera type from the drop‐down list.
• Fixed camera: no preset/pattern; operators cannot control a fixed camera.
• Dome: preset and pattern (Intellex only) available; selecting this option allows operators to control
the camera. If you select this option, assign descriptive names to the camera presets.
4 Check the Show camera option for the camera to be accessible for selection and display in the Video
view desktop. It is important to check this option if you want the camera to be enabled in EntraPass. Only
operators with appropriate permission will be able to view a camera with the Show camera option not
checked (Hidden/covert cameras). To assign permission to an operator: System > Operator definition >
Privileges.
NOTE: If you leave the Show camera box unchecked, the camera will not appear in the V ideo view
component window (Video view > Modify video view components) and will not therefore be assigned in
the V ideo desktop for view. This feature allows to hide a camera from all view. Operators who do not
have appropriate permission will not be able to view, search, export or carry any other operation on a
camera for which they do not have access permission. However, all links and references to this camera
will be kept. This feature is different from deleting a camera since links to a deleted camera are
deleted as well.
5 Check the Select specific events option if you want this camera to record specific events. By default all
camera events are displayed in the Video Events List. However, you can decide which events will be
recorded by a specific camera by checking this option. When you do this, the Event tab appears. You can
then select it and specific events will be recorded by the camera being defined. If this option is checked,
you have to select events that will be recorded by this camera.
6 Using the Up/down controls, adjust the number of presets and patterns for the selected camera if the
selected camera is a dome. When you do this, the Preset or Pattern tabs appear in the Camera window.
7 Select the view type you want to display when an alarm occurs.
• Video View: The video view selected will be displayed when an alarm occurs on this camera.
• Graphic View: The graphic view selected will be displayed when an alarm occurs on this camera.

Associating a Camera with an Icon

EntraPass offers you the ability to associate a specific icon with a camera for easy identification in the
Video desktop and system Graphic.
1 From the Camera window, select the camera you want to associate with an icon, then click or double‐
click the button next to the camera type drop‐down list. The Select an icon window opens.
2 Choose an appropriate icon to associate with the selected camera, then double‐click it to close the
window. When you do this, a camera is associated with an icon using the icon index.
Video Integration 133

• The Camera icon in the Camera window toolbar allows you to add custom icons to the list of
available icons. The list of icons is displayed when you click the Camera icon in the toolbar.

Defining Presets and Patterns

1 From the Video server window select the Preset (or Pattern) tab to assign custom names to your presets.
2 Select a table cell, then overwrite the default name. If you are running the system in two languages,
enter the name in both the primary and secondary language, then click Close to close the Preset (or
Pattern) window.
NOTE: If you select a preset or pattern and click the Default button, the assigned name is replaced by
the default name.

Defining Events Recorded by a Camera

If the Select specific events option is checked in the General tab, you have to:
• Select events that will be recorded by the camera being defined and that will be sent to the EntraPass
Server. This option is disabled when a camera is connected to an Intellex LT DVR.
• Select or define a schedule that will be used by the video server to report selected events to the
EntraPass Server. This schedule can be used as a filter to limit the message flow from the Video Server to
the EntraPass Server. For instance, choosing an Always valid schedule will send all the selected events to
the EntraPass server. Specifying a limited period of time will allow to send events that occurred during a
targeted period of time.

To Select Camera Events and Schedules

1 From the Camera window, select the Event tab. Typical camera events are displayed in the window. These
are specific to the selected DVR.
2 Select a schedule for camera event reporting. Only events that will be recorded during the specified
period of time will be sent to the EntraPass server. Right clicking the Event report schedule field enables
operators to create a new schedule or to select an existing one. To define a schedule, make sure that you
are selecting the proper category for this schedule. For example, if you are assigning or defining a system
schedule (for workstation, operators, event parameters, video triggers) this schedule will be available for
selecting components of this category. If you are selecting a schedule for physical components such as
controllers, doors, inputs, their schedules will be grouped If you have defined two sites in your system,
there will be two separate groups of schedules for each site. You can define up to 99 schedules for each
site.
3 Select camera events that you want to send to the EntraPass server. Specifying events to be sent to the
video server is a way of saving on controlling the flow of the video data, and hence of decreasing
bandwidth usage. The list of events is specific to the video server:
• Camera advanced motion alarm (Intellex only): the camera will send any event related to a motion
alarm.
• Camera alarm (Intellex only): the camera will send any event related to a change that occurred in
the target area.
• Camera light alarm (Intellex only):
134 Video Integration

• Camera motion alarm: the camera will send to the EntraPass server all video segment events
related to any movement that occurred in the target area.
• Camera override (Intellex only):
• Camera perimeter (Intellex only): the camera will send all video segment events related to an
object, that has crossed into or out of the target area, to the EntraPass server.
• Camera text alarm (Intellex only):
4 Select the Video Vault Comment tab if you want to add information regarding the camera being defined.
KVI and KVA file formats from this camera that will be saved in EntraPass Video Vault will be displayed
with the comment entered in this window.
5 Enter the comment you want to associate with the camera being defined, then save and close the
window.

Video Views Definition

Once the video server is defined and its cameras identified, operators can define video views that will be
displayed in the Video desktop for viewing and monitoring purposes. EntraPass operators will then call
previously configured presets and patterns.

EntraPass Devices (workstations, gateways, sites, controllers, etc.) can be associated with video views.
Later, the video view can be selected in the components definition in order to display the component in
the video view.

Defining General Parameters for a Video View

1 Select the Video view button from the Video toolbar. The Video View window appears with the General
tab enabled.
1 From the Video view drop‐down list, select a video view (or click the New icon to create one), then assign
it a name in the language section. If the system is running in two languages, you have to give a name in
each language.
2 From the Video server drop‐down list, select a video server type (Intellex, HDVR or TVR).
3 From the Default size on video drop‐down list, select an appropriate size for the image that will be
displayed: you may choose to select a smaller size if you have to display the Video window with another
window.
• Large: 1024x768
• Medium: 800x600
• Small: 640x480
• Tiny: 400x300
• Last used: displays the size that was previously displayed in the Video desktop.
4 From the Default size on graphic drop‐down list, select a size for the image that will be displayed on the
system graphics (Large, Medium, Small, Tiny, Last used).
Video Integration 135

5 Specify the Refresh rate percentage using the Up/down arrows.

NOTE: The Refresh Rate Percentage is related to the image compression/quality. The image quality
impacts the system performance: the higher the quality, the lower the compression and the lower the
system performance will be. If you set the Refresh Rate to high (> 80), the compression will be low. As
result, the application will use a larger network bandwidth. This may result in a slower process. The
following table shows the recommended options:

Quality Description Result

80 and Over Super quality Images are recorded at the highest image quality,
using the lowest level of compression. This setting
requires the highest amount of storage space and
network bandwidth.
50 Normal, Images are recorded at normal image quality. This
Default setting provides a balance between compression and
storage space requirements. The smaller, more subtle
changes between images are ignored.
40 Low quality Images are recorded at low image quality, using the
highest level of compression. This setting requires the
lowest amount of storage space and network
bandwidth.

6 Check the Re‐initialize video view delay (mm:ss) option if you want the system to refresh the displayed
image. If you check this box, the displayed image will be automatically updated when the specified delay
is elapsed. This feature is very useful if the defined camera view includes patterns or presets.
7 From the Video control section, make the appropriate choices:
• Show overlay Intellex and HDVR only): check this option if you want the camera identification
(camera name and server) to appear in the Video desktop.
• Show camera control: check this option for use with dome cameras. Selecting this option allows
operators to control a dome camera. It is not available with fixed cameras.
• Show metrics (Intellex only): this option enables the system to display the number of frames per
second (Fps) and the number of bits per seconds (Bps) for the selected camera. The information
appears in the upper section of the Video window (and in the Video desktop).
• Auto‐hide text (Intellex only): if this option is checked, the system will not display the information
related to a camera.
• Enable image zoom (Intellex only): check this option if you want to display the zoom value for the
selected camera.
8 Check the Enable video pattern box to alternate video images in the Video window. If you have defined a
2X2 view, then the video pattern will be composed of four images alternating in the video display
136 Video Integration

according to the delay specified in the Camera display delay field. If you do not check this option, the
video view will display all the cameras simultaneously.
NOTE: The Enable video pattern section is enabled once components have been assigned to the video
view.
9 Check Delay before launching sequence (m:ss) box to specify the transition delay before the images start
alternating in the Video window.
10 Specify the display delays for Cameras, Presets, Patterns and Graphics.
NOTE: These delays indicate the time interval during which a video or graphic appears in the V ideo
display before it is replaced by another. Refer to the following table for the minimum/default delays.
The maximum delay is 9:59 seconds.

Delay Minimum (sec.)

Delay before launching sequence 2 seconds
Camera display delay 3 seconds
Preset display delay 5 seconds
Pattern display delay 10 seconds
Graphic display delay 5 seconds

11 Select the Details tab to view data about the selected view: video servers, cameras, and when
applicable, camera presets and patterns.

Video Views Creation and Modification

Video presets and patterns enable users to perform automatic actions on domes. They are configured
for view in the desktop dedicated to Video viewing. They enable to optimize the time dedicated to video
viewing when displaying videos using pre‐programmed views.
EntraPass enables users to define a wide variety of views, depending on their needs:
• Single camera
• Multiple cameras
• Multiple graphics and cameras
• Server‐specific view: these are created by dragging a server into the display
• Multiple video servers: depending on their needs, EntraPass users can create views from multiple
video servers.
Video Integration 137

Modifying a Video View

1 From the Video view window, click the Modify Video view components button to edit or create content
for the Video view desktop.
2 From the left‐hand panes, select a camera, a camera preset, or a camera pattern, then drag it into a right‐
hand pane cell. A camera is identified by its name and corresponding icon. A preset is identified by the
camera name and the preset name.
NOTE: A specific camera can appear in more than one cell; in this case, the Enable video sequence
option must be enabled. A graphic can appear only in one cell.
NOTE: A Video view may only includes cameras of the same DVR type (HDVR, Intellex, TVR).
NOTE: The maximum number of TVR available is 40.
3 Select the camera layout you want by clicking on the corresponding button in the upper part of the right
pane to specify the number of images you want to display:
• Click 1 X 1 to display 1 image
• Click 2 X 2 to display 4 images
• Click 3 X 3 to display 9 images
• Click 4 X 4 to display 16 images.
NOTE: You can create a view by dragging a video server into the display. This view will contain all
cameras from this specific server.
NOTE: The number of images displayed influence the speed of the network bandwidth. For example, if
you are displaying 4X4 images, the network bandwidth will be slower than when you are displaying a
1X1 image.
138 Video Integration

4 Click the Test button to view the result of the selection. The displayed Video view appears in the Video
desktop for video monitoring and surveillance (Desktops > Desktop dedicated to video monitoring).

NOTE: To delete a camera from a cell, right‐click it, then select Delete from the shortcut menu.
5 Click the Close button (bottom left or the “X” top right) to close the Video test window.

Video Triggers
Video triggers are system events that start or stop recording. Any event related to the selected
component type can trigger recording including exception events originating from a video server. A
source component must be specified for each type of triggering event. For example, the “door”
component must be specified for the “Door forced” event message. There is no limit to the number of
definable video triggers.

Defining Video Triggers

The following information can be defined:
• A name in two languages
• The component type: type of component to be programmed for the trigger. Events are related to system
components: gateway, site, controller, etc.
Based on an event that occurred on the selected system component, the trigger will start or stop
recording.
NOTE: The list of parameters depends on the video server type connected to EntraPass. It can vary
depending on server feature availability and decisions on subsequent implementation. All EntraPass
events can be associated with the video trigger function.
Video Integration 139

1 From the Video toolbar, select the Video trigger button. The Video trigger window appears.
2 Click the new icon (or select an existing trigger if you want to modify one). Assign a descriptive name to
the trigger.
NOTE: An alert message appears when you attempt to save before selecting the component type as
well as the component for the trigger being defined.
3 From the Component type drop‐down list, select the component that will trigger the recording event. It
may be a door controller, for example.
4 As a trigger source you can select Single, group or All components from the component radio buttons.
5 Use the three‐dots button to select a component.
6 From the Trigger schedule select a schedule for the trigger to be valid. If necessary, you can define a
specific schedule for this trigger (Definition > Schedule). If there is no schedule selected for a trigger, the
trigger will be disabled.
7 From the Event category selection, choose between the EntraPass or Intrusion groups of events from the
dropdown list.
NOTE: This field is available only when an intrusion panel has been configured in the system.
8 Click on the Events tab and select events from the list.

Recording Parameters
The Recording Parameters menu enables users to define parameters that control video recording and to
associate recording parameters (such as video source, cameras, etc.) with a video trigger. For each
recording event, you must specify parameters such as the video server source, the camera, etc.

A recording can be stopped by a timer (maximum recording time) or by a trigger when a stop recording
trigger is used. A source component must be specified for each type of triggering event. For example,
the “door” component must be specified for the “Door forced” event message. The resulting action
(whether to start or stop recording) must also be specified.

EntraPass offers you the ability to associate multiple recording parameters with one trigger. In this case,
all recordings will be associated with the single event and it will be possible to save all record segments
as a single event recording.

Setting Up Recording Parameters

The Video record window lets you configure how EntraPass Video records videos. You must possess the
appropriate privileges to set up this feature. There is no limit to the number of definable recording
parameters. The following information can be defined:
• Name in two languages (for systems in two languages)
• Video source (server and camera)
• Preset and patterns
• Start recording trigger
• Pre‐alarm time
140 Video Integration

• Maximum total recording time, etc.

1 From the Video toolbar, click the Recording parameters icon. The Recording parameters window appears
with the General tab enabled.
2 Click the New icon to create new Recording parameters (or select one from the Recording parameters
drop‐down list) and assign a descriptive name to the Recording parameters.
3 From the Video server pop‐up window, select the video server that will be used for the Recording
parameters.
4 From the Camera drop‐down list, select the camera for this Recording parameters.
NOTE: If the selected camera is a dome, you can specify the Preset or Pattern name and number.
Defining these options allows you to direct the camera to a specific position for recording. However,
the pre‐alarm time feature may not work well with the preset/pattern option. In fact, the pre‐alarm
may be triggered when the camera is directed to a location different from the one where the video
recording event occurred.
5 From the Start recording trigger pop‐up window, select the Video trigger you want to associate with the
Recording parameters being defined. The Video trigger pop‐up window displays all video triggers defined
in the system.
6 In the Timings section, specify:
• Pre‐alarm time (m:ss): This option enables users to retrieve from the video server, segment that was
recorded before recording was triggered. For example, if a recording was triggered at 2:00 PM and if
the Pre‐alarm time is 1min. 0 seconds, the record segment will start at 1h 59.
• Maximum total recording time (m:ss): This options allows you to specify a maximum length for the
recording. This includes the pre‐alarm time but not the post‐alarm recording delay. The maximum
allowed is 5 minutes.

Setting Up Stop Recording Trigger Parameters

If you want to associate the defined recording parameters with a trigger for stopping recording, check
the Stop recording trigger option. If you do this, the Stop recording trigger tab appears in the Recording
parameters window.
1 From the Recording parameters window, select the Stop recording trigger tab.
• Post‐alarm recording delay (m:ss): this delay enables the system to end recording when an “end
recording delay” condition has been used. Moving the mouse pointer over the field shows the value
range allowed in the field.
• Trigger: select one (or more) trigger(s) that will stop recording.
NOTE: You can create new stop recording triggers by right‐clicking the triggers display area.

Video Event List

The Video Event List window displays all video segments recorded in the system and stored in the Video
server database as well as video segments archived in EntraPass Video Vault. These video segments can
originate from three sources:
• Video triggers
• Manual requests from operators
Video Integration 141

• Automatic recordings from video servers

NOTE: Operators must have access rights to the video server in order to perform operations on events
displayed in the V ideo Event list. For example, if an operator has not been assigned permission to use
a specific video server, he/she will not view events originating from this server. User permission are
assigned while defining the security level: System > Security level.

Using the Video Event List

The Video event list window displays all video events as well as their description. EntraPass operators
can:
• Search for a specific event associated with a video segment based on the date and time when the video
was recorded
• Play a video segment
• Export the video segment for future consultation
• Stream or copy video segments from EntraPass Video Vault
• Retry all aborted transfers: these are transfers of video segments that were tagged for archive but which
were not transferred to EntraPass Video Vault.

Finding Video Events

Under Video > Video event list, use the Search button to locate and view video segments. If the Search
button is not displayed on screen, click the Menu button to make it appear.
• The Video server tab allows you to search for a video segment on a specific video server.
• The Events tab allows you to filter events.
• The Options tab allows you to determine the size of the video you are looking for. Appropriate user
access rights are necessary for performing this task.
• The Archive state tab allows you to filter archived events according to their status.
1 From the Video Events List, click the Search button. The Find video event window appears.
NOTE: If the Menu and Legend buttons are not activated, the window will not show the legend nor the
buttons in the lower part.
2 From the Find video events window, select the Start date and time and the End date and time for the
video segments you are looking for.
NOTE: The Legends button allows you to display a status legend related to video events. The Play and
Copy from Video Vault buttons are enabled when the selected video events have already been archived
on EntraPass V ideo Vault.
3 Select the video server that you want to include in the search. You can select All video servers if you want
to search through all video servers defined in the system.
NOTE: If an event was registered by more than one video server, at least one of the servers must be
selected for the event to be included in the list.
4 Select the Events tab to filter events to be included in the report. If you select All events, all the specific
events will be checked.
142 Video Integration

5 Select the Options tab to filter video segments according to their duration.
6 Check the Video segment duration limit option, then enter the duration in the Greater than (mm:ss) and
Smaller than (mm:ss) fields. The value entered is in minutes and seconds. This feature allows you to
target video segments meeting specific duration criteria.
7 Select the Archive State tab to filter events according to the archive status.
8 Check the Archive State option if you want to specify which events will be included in the filter. If you
want to include all events, leave these options unchecked.
9 Click OK to go back to the Video event list window.
NOTE: The Play and Copy from Video Vault buttons are enabled when the selected video event has been
archived on EntraPass V ideo Vault. Archived events are identified by a green flag.
10 Do one of the following using the buttons described bellow:

Button Use description

Use this Search button to search for events associated with a video
segment. For details, see "Finding Video Events" on page 141.
Use the Play button to view a video event. When you click this but‐
ton, the Video desktop displays the video event. If only one camera
was used, which is most often the case, the system displays the
duration of the video event. If the video event was recorded by
more than one camera on a single server, the video server will use
the most optimal display layout. If the video event was registered by
more than one server, it is possible to select a specific video server.
For example, 2x2 for a maximum of 4 camera, 3x3 for a maximum of
9 camera and 4x4 for a maximum of 16 cameras. For events with
various length, events will be played based on the longer event.
Note that this feature shows limitations when used in systems not
configured for continuous recording as it will not display cameras
involved outside the selected time frame.
The Copy from Vault button allows operators to retrieve video seg‐
ments that have been archived on EntraPass Video Vault.
The Play from Vault button enables operators to view a video event
that has been archived on EntraPass Video Vault
The Retry aborted button enables operators to trigger any archiving
process that was suspended.
Use the Menu button to display the buttons in the lower part of the
window and the Legend button to display a legend about the status
of the displayed video recording events.
Video Integration 143

Button Use description

The KVI (Kantech Video Intellex), KVA (Kantech Video AVI), IMG, AVI
and PS formats are available for your Export needs. These formats
allow users to store all the data relative to a video event such as the
event icon or key frame, description, etc.
The Save button is enabled when an operator enters data in the
Comment field. It enables operators to save comments associated
with a video event.
The Cancel button is enabled when the Comment field is modified.
It enables operators to discard the comment and to go back to the
previous value.

Playing Video Segments

The Video Event List window is divided in two panes: the left‐hand pane displays all video events that
were retrieved according to the search criteria. The lower pane of the window displays the legend
explaining the status of each event. It also contains buttons that enable operators to perform operations
on video recordings. The right‐hand pane contains three tabs:
• The Details tab displays the text description of the video event such as the video server that recorded the
event, the operator who was logged on, etc.
• The Cameras tab shows cameras that are associated with a selected event.
• The Image tab contains the key frame for the video sequence. The key frame serves as preview of the
video sequence. It is from this pane that you can associate a video key frame and link it to the video
segment.
NOTE: V ideo recordings can be streamed from the left‐hand pane (Play button) or from the Camera
tab. You can also view camera recordings from the Message desktop. To do so, you have to select a
video recording event (identified by a camera icon in the Message desktop), right‐click it and select
Video recording > Play from the shortcut menu.
1 From the Video event list, select an event, then click the Play button. The video clip appears in the Video
Playback window.
2 You may select the Cameras tab to view information about the camera that captured the selected event.
• Start/End dates and times when the recording event occurred.
• Recording time (mm:ss): duration of the video segment. This duration is specified when defining
recording parameters (Video menu > Recording parameters).
• Video trigger, if any: the video trigger is defined in the Video trigger menu and then selected in the
Recording parameters definition.
NOTE: The status indicator next to the video server name indicates the current connection status of the
server.
3 You can:
144 Video Integration

• Click the Play button to view this video segment of the selected camera for the duration of the
recording. The video appears also in the Video desktop (Desktop menu)
• Click the Export button to export it for future use. For details, see "Exporting Video Files" on page
144.

Linking Video Clips with Key Frames

EntraPass users have the ability to save a still image that best represents a video sequence linking this
image to the whole video recording. This may be useful for example if one event was registered by more
than one camera and you want to associate the recording with a more explicit image. Viewing the video
event will enable users to identify the best image for this video event, to snap it, paste it and save it as
the best sequence for the video clip. It is also possible to retrieve a previously saved image and to link it
to a video segment, or to paste a previously snapped image.
1 From the Video event list, select an event, then click the Image tab (right pane).
2 From the image window, you can:
• Import image: click the Import button to retrieve a previously saved or exported image from a file.
• Paste image: click this button to paste a previously snapped image. The Paste image button is
enabled only when you have snapped (copied) an image while viewing it. You can first play a video
clip, snap it and then paste it.
• Clear: click the clear button to delete the displayed image from view.

Exporting Video Files

EntraPass exports video segments in four formats: KVI and KVA.
• KVI (Kantech Video Intellex format). Video data are stored in Intellex format (.img). A simple double‐click
allows you to view the file using VideoPlayerIntellex.exe.
• KVA (Kantech Video AVI format). Video data are stored in AVI format (.avi). A double click opens the
video file using VideoPlayerWindow.exe.
• AVI format
• IMG format
• PS format

EntraPass users have two options when exporting videos:

• From the Video event list (without previewing the video)
• From the video playback window: in this case, the video is previewed before it is exported.
1 From the video event list, select the video event you want to export.
2 Click the Export button. The Enter a video filename window opens.
3 Enter a file name in the File name field. By default, the file is assigned the Kantech KVI format.The file
will be saved among EntraPass program files:\Kantech\Server CE\Video.Later you can call this file simply
by double‐clicking it.
NOTE: Video files can be viewed in the Exported video window (Video tab > Exported video). The video
file is displayed with its name, date and time. Key frames (if any) associated with a video clip can also
be previewed in this window.
Video Integration 145

4 Click Save to close the Enter filename window. When you do this, the Description and password window
appear.

Protecting a Video with a Password

You can protect exported videos using a password. Users must enter this password to view exported
videos.
NOTE: The password protection is applicable to KVI and KVA video formats only.
1 Select the video you want to export, then click the Export button.
2 Enter a description for the video segment, in the Enter Video filename window, then click Save. The
Description and password window appears.
3 Check the Use password box if you want to add more security to this video segment. Users will have to
enter this password in order to view the saved video segment.
4 Enter a password and confirm the password in the displayed field.
5 Click OK to close the Description and password window. Click OK to close the system message confirming
the export.

Video Playback
The Video Playback feature offers the ability to view recorded video of up to 16 cameras simultaneously.
To do so, you have to specify the period of time for the playback. A maximum of one hour is allowed:
• Select cameras in the left‐hand pane
• Drag and drop them into the View playback area.

Viewing a Video Playback

1 From the Video playback window, specify the Start date and time and End date and time for the video
you want to view. The maximum allowed is 1 hour. Therefore you may stream video events that occurred
on the same date and for a maximum of one hour.
2 From the left‐hand pane, select a camera then drop it into the right pane. It plays for the time specified
in the start and end time. Use the controls in the lower part of the Playback window (right pane) to play,
fast forward, rewind or stop the video playback.
NOTE: If the requested video is not available, a message appears in the lower part of the window; the
Snap and Export buttons remain disabled. If a video is available, the message Requesting video is
displayed.
• Snap: copy the displayed image and save it in the \tmp\image folder and use it as a still image
representing the video sequence. Later, the snapped image will automatically appear in the View
exported video when browsing the exported videos. It is recommended to add a comment to the
snapped image; the comment will appears next to the image.
• Export: export the video clip for future usage
• Tag to archive: mark the video sequence so that it is queued for archive.
NOTE: You can drag the slider at the bottom of the right‐hand pane to increase or decrease the speed
of the video clip your are playing.
146 Video Integration

3 To save a specific video image, click the Snap button.

4 Accept the default name or enter a specific name for the video recording. The video recording is saved
in: Program files\Kantech\Server_CE\Tmp\Image. The video image can then be viewed using a Windows®
image viewer such as Paint. Simply, double‐click the video image to view it.
NOTE: For the TVR II, the video sequence can only be played forward. That is why the slider can be
moved to the right side only. Also, a new button has been added to jump 30 seconds before the
beginning of the current sequence.

Current Recording
The Current recording feature allows users to view the list of all on‐going recordings. The information
displayed depends on the source of the recording request:
• Started by a video trigger
• Started by an operator
• Started by an alarm on the video server

Viewing the Current Recordings

1 From the Video toolbar, click the Current recording button. The current recording window appears, it
shows all on‐going recordings.
The following table shows the information displayed in the Current recording window depending on the
source of the recording.

Initiated by Information
Video server alarm • Initiated by
• Event name
• Start date and time
Video trigger • Initiated by
• Video trigger
• Recording parameter
• Event
• Start date and time
• Remaining time for the recording
Operator • Initiated by
• Workstation
• Operator name
• Start date and time
• Remaining time for the recording
Video Integration 147

Video Desktop
The Video Desktop allows operators to display and monitor, in real‐time, video cameras configured and
connected to the network.

Displaying a Video View

1 From the EntraPass main window, select the Desktops tab, then select the desktop dedicated to Video.
The Video View window appears in the desktop.
NOTE: The V ideo desktop will be empty the first time you open it and “No video view selected” is
displayed.
2 Select video view from the drop‐down list at the bottom of the window. You can edit the view (Video
view > select a specific View > Modify Video view components button).
3 The buttons in the lower part of the window allow you to perform various tasks:

Buttons Description
Use these buttons to select a size for the displayed video.
Note: A bigger image requires more process power. Therefore, selecting a big‐
ger image may result in lower process power.
These buttons are configured in the Operator security level. They enable opera‐
tors to perform pre programmed tasks such as viewing video playback with a
fixed or variable delay, generating video events with fixed or custom parame‐
ters. For details on programing this buttons, see "Security Level Definition" on
page 218.
Use these buttons to Create and Edit video views.

Use this Show view selector button to display a mosaic view of all the cameras,
or one of the cameras defined in the system.
Help and Close buttons. These are EntraPass standard buttons.

4 Click the Show view selector button to display the View selector window. This small window allows you
to so select a specific view or to monitor a specific camera pattern. For instance, if you select a cell in the
View selector, the sequence is interrupted to display the selected cell.
NOTE: When you open the V ideo view selector while a camera is recording, the camera icon will blink
until the end of the recording.
148 Video Integration

5 From the displayed view, you can click a dome camera icon to display control buttons for this camera
(movement, zoom, focus). Available options depend on the Digital Video Management system connected
to your system. Please refer to your DVMS documentation for additional information.
NOTE: If your dome camera is set with pre programmed movement patterns, you can define a view
displaying a pattern composed of one or many of these patterns. For more details, see "V ideo V iews
Definition" on page 134.

Exported Video Viewing

EntraPass enables users to view all exported videos. This feature makes it possible to browse the list of
all exported videos and to preview a key frame of the exported videos sequence for all KVI and KVA
formats. Moreover, users can preview the exported video segment before viewing it.
1 From the Video toolbar, select the View exported video icon. The Video folder opens automatically, with
the list of all exported video sequences that have been exported.
2 Select a video sequence. The video thumbnail appears in the lower left part of the window. The directory
contains the Date and Time the video was taken, the video file format (Type) and the File Name. You can
then click the Preview button for details about the exported video.

EntraPass Video Vault Browsing

EntraPass Video Vault offers an easy way for preserving important video data for future reference. In
fact, video recordings have a limited life span depending on the video server settings and capability.
Moreover, since video recordings require a great amount of disk space, using an archive management
tool such as EntraPass Video Vault enables organizations to better manage and easily retrieve video
contents. The archiving activity is monitored from the EntraPass Video Vault user interface. The Browse
EntraPass Video Vault interface offers a Windows‐like navigation pane that enables operators (with
appropriate permission) to play video segments archived on EntraPass Video Vault.

Viewing Video Segments Archived in the EntraPass Video Vault

1 From the Video main window, select the Browse Video Vault button.
2 To view a specific segment, select a video segment, then click the Play from Video Vault button.
Operations 149

Operations
The Operation Toolbar
Under the Operation toolbar, operators will be able to perform manual operations on various system
components (gateway, site, controllers, third party hardware, etc.) such as manually resetting or
monitoring devices, disabling readers, etc. Manual operations are used to override schedules or process
special requests, when necessary. When you launch a manual operation on a component, it is possible
to view the status of the selected components in real‐time. You can also edit components by accessing
the component directly from the operation window.

The Operation Dialogs

All operation dialogs have a series of icons in their window. Series of icons will only appear in specific
operation dialogs. The five buttons described below appear in all operation dialogs.

Icon Description
Select All is used to select all the items or components displayed in the
list.
Unselect All is used to unselect all the items or components that were
previously selected in the list.
Enable Graphic displays the image related to the selected component
(i.e.: door) and will also display the associated components (i.e.: reader).
To display in real‐time, this button must be used with the Enable anima‐
tion button.
Enable Animation will automatically enable the Enable graphic button.
This will activate the current component (i.e.: door) and will display its
status in real‐time.
Help will open the On line help corresponding to the window you are
currently navigating.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

The Operations Contextual Menu

You will be able to access a contextual menu by right clicking within the list in any operation window.
The items in the popup menu correspond to the icons in the operation window toolbar. Three additional
options can be found in the popup menu, when you access it from the Gateway, or the Site operation
window.
• Full status: Opens a status window that contains the current information corresponding to the
component you selected in the list. For more details, “The Component Status Dialog” on page 150.
150 Operations

• Edit: Opens the window corresponding to the selected component to allow editing.
• Extended selection box: Opens the Extended selection box dialog that allows you to search for a specific
component.

The Component Status Dialog

A message window that contains the gateway and site messages can be accessed by right‐clicking within
the corresponding operations window under the Operation tab, and selecting Status in the contextual
menu.
In the example above, the information is listed for a Multi‐site Gateway. We have listed some of the
information that can appear in that window.

Parameter Description
Gateway status Indicates if the gateway is connected or not.
Number of sites Indicates the number of sites for this gateway.
Number of cards Indicates the number of cards processed by this controller
Number of processes Indicates the number of processes
Version Indicates the software and hardware version number.
Local Time Indicates the controller’s current local time.
Last startup Date the last system startup was performed.

NOTE: The information displayed in the status window corresponds to your configuration and will be
different whether you access it from a gateway or a site operations window.
Operations 151

Manual Operations on Gateway

Manual operations on the gateway feature allows operators to communicate with the gateways to
refresh and reload gateway data.

Icon Definition
Hard reset: will delete the existing gateway database and reload it with
new information.
Reset commands should be executed with caution. Before you carry out a
gateway reset operation, we recommend you contact our Technical Support.
For more information, see "Technical Support" on page 6.
Reload: will delete the content of the gateway database, restart the gateway
and reload the data from the system database.
Broadcast: will send a signal to the selected component manually.

Forced reload firmware: will force a reload of the selected firmware.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Selecting a Gateway
1 From the EntraPass workstation main window, select the Operations tab and click the Gateway button to
open the Gateway dialog where all the gateways connected to your system will be listed.
NOTE: Please See "Sites and Gateways" on page 346 for a definition of the icons in the Gateway
window.

Performing a Hard Reset

NOTE: Reset commands should be executed with caution. Before you carry out a controller reset
operation, we recommend you contact our Technical Support. For more information, see "Technical
Support" on page 6.
1 Select the gateway for which you want to perform a hard reset.
2 Click the Hard reset button. This command will erase the existing gateway database and reload it with
new information.

Reloading Gateway Data

EntraPass allows operators to reload data in order to refresh system parameters with new data from the
system database. When should you reload a gateway?
• After major changes in the system database such as new cards, new devices, modification of
component definition, definition of new schedules;
152 Operations

• When one or more controller(s) is malfunctioning (when it does not receive data for instance).
After a reload operation, the gateway reorganizes the data received and communicates the new data to
all the sites and controllers.
NOTE: Communication with controllers is suspended during a reload operation.
1 Select the gateway for which you want to reload the data.
2 Click the Reload data button. Gateway data will be updated.

Manual Operations on Sites

The manual operations on site feature is used to poll unassigned controllers. For example, when a
controller has been added in the system without a serial number, you can use this command to get the
controller serial number.

Icon Description
Connect to remote site: Click to connect to a remote site using a pre‐
configured dial‐up connection.
Disconnect remote site: Click to close the connection between this
EntraPass workstation and the remote site.
Force disconnect site: Force disconnect remote site immediately, even if
the system is reloading.
This option is only available in a Multi‐site Gateway.
Disable remaining time: Click to stay connected until clicked again. This
action disables preset connection remaining time. This action bypasses
any idle time.
Update remote site: After selecting site, click to connect and update
parameters.
Update all remote sites: Click to connect and update parameters on all
sites starting with the first site on the list.
Remove site from connect and wait list: Select a site then click to sus‐
pend connection after all sites had been set for update.
Reload IP Link firmware: will force a reload of the selected Kantech IP
Link firmware.

NOTE: For security reasons, the System Administrator may disable this
icon.
Broadcast IP Device: will send a signal to the selected Kantech IP Link
and also the KT‐400 IP Secure.
Operations 153

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Performing Manual Operations on a Site

1 From the Operation window, click on the Site icon to open the Site window, then select the gateway to
which the site is connected.
2 To poll a controller that is not assigned, click the Controller icon. A message is sent to an unassigned
controller, asking it to identify itself. When the controller receives the call from the site, it sends an
acknowledgement message in the Message desktop.
3 You may select the Message desktop to view the controller serial number.
NOTE: The % column shows the communication performance of a selected site. If the percentage is too
low (below 75% for instance), it may indicate that the site is not communicating efficiently.
Communication problems may stem from various reasons such as interferences, damaged cables, etc.

Communication Status Messages Available in the List

The messages in the list area of the dialog indicate the site communication status. In the following
example, you will see communication status messages for Multi‐site Gateways.
154 Operations

Multi‐site Gateways

Message Description
Site Communication OK All site controllers can communicate with the gate‐
way.
Site Communication Trouble At least one of the site controllers can’t communi‐
cate with the gateway.
Site Communication Failure Communication failed between the site control‐
lers and the gateway.
Site Communication Cannot be The gateway cannot open the communication
Opened port.

Manual Operations on Controllers

This dialog is used to reset or reload a controller: soft reset, hard reset, reload and reload controller
firmware.

Icon Definition
Soft reset: Will not affect the controller database. This command sends
new information to a controller to update its physical components
(relays, inputs, doors and outputs)
Hard reset: Will erase the existing controller database and reload it with
new information in the controller database
Reset commands should be executed with caution. Before you carry out
a controller reset operation, we recommend you contact our Technical
Support. For more information, see "Technical Support" on page 6.
Reload: will reload the controller database; if for example a controller
database is not reloaded correctly due to an erratic operation

Reload controller firmware: will reload the firmware of the controller

(KT‐100, KT‐300).
Unlock reader keypad: will unlock the reader keypad for KT‐100 control‐
lers.
Reset reader power: will reset the controller reader power. This opera‐
tion can only be performed on KT‐300.
Forgive: will reset to zero the cards‐in and cards‐out counters or card
counters from controller local area
Operations 155

Icon Definition
Anti‐passback cards list: displays the number of cards per local area,
obtain a card list in local area controllers, move cards (when you have a
KT‐400 system) and allows you to get position a a card. This feature is
used only for Multi‐site Gateway.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Selecting a Controller
1 From the Operations window, select the Controller icon to open the Controller window where you will be
able to reset the controller.
2 From the Gateway/Site pane, select a gateway or site. Controllers attached to this gateway/site appear in
the right‐hand pane.
• From the Controller list, select the controller where the operations will take place. It has to be
highlighted. To perform the operation on a group of controllers, select Controller Group (lower right‐
hand pane).
NOTE: If only one site or gateway is defined in the system, the Site Controller or Gateway list pane will
not appear on the Controller window.

Performing a Controller Soft Reset

A soft reset will refresh the data in the controller.
1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.
2 Click the Soft reset icon in the toolbar. This command will sends new information to the controller to
update its physical components (relays, inputs, doors and outputs, etc.)

Performing a Controller Hard Reset

A hard reset will delete the existing controller database and reload it with new information in the
controller database.
NOTE: Reset commands should be executed with caution. Before you carry out a controller reset
operation, we recommend you contact our Technical Support. For more information, see "Technical
Support" on page 6.
1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.
2 Click the Hard reset icon in the toolbar. This command will sends new information to the controller to
update its physical components (relays, inputs, doors and outputs, etc.)

Reloading a Controller Manually

EntraPass allows you to reload a controller database when, for example, a controller database is not
reloaded correctly due to an erratic operation.
156 Operations

1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.

2 Click the Reload icon in the toolbar. The controller’s database will be reloaded.

Manually Reloading a Firmware Controller

EntraPass allows you to reload a controller firmware database for KT‐100 and KT‐300. You will perform a
firmware reload after a system or firmware upgrade.
1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.
2 Click the Reload controller firmware icon in the toolbar.

Manually Unlocking a Reader Keypad

EntraPass allows you to unlock the reader keypad for KT‐100 controllers from a workstation.
1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.
2 Click the Unlock reader keypad icon in the toolbar.

Resetting Cards In and Cards Out Counters or all Controller local areas
This option allows to reset to zero for the cards in and cards out counter.
1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.
2 Click the Forgive icon in the toolbar. Card holders will not be considered inside or outside until the next
use of their card at an entry or exit reader.

Calculating Number of Cards In and Cards Out

If you have one or more controllers configured with anti‐passback, this function allows you to view a list
of cards that are considered inside (Cards in) or outside (Cards out) an area. To do so, the passback
option (either soft or hard synchronization) has to be enabled on the reader and the door has to be
defined as an entry or exit door.
1 In the Controller dialog, in the Gateway/Site section, select KT‐400‐IP. Then in the Controller section, the
list of appropriate controllers relative to the selection display.
2 Select desired controller or controller group.
3 Click the Get Card List icon in the toolbar. The system will display the number of cards in or cards out for
the selected controller or controller group.
NOTE: This operation is performed only on one controller at a time as it may be a lengthy
operation.The option is only available on a Multi‐site Gateway.
4 Right‐click the appropriate local area number, and then click Find card position.
In the Get card position dialog, click Start with, Begin with or Contains to filter the search criterion.
5 In the list, select the wanted card position, and then click Get position.

Resetting Cards In and Cards Out Counters or all Controller local areas
This option allows to reset to zero for the cards in and cards out counter.
1 In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.
2 Click the Forgive icon in the toolbar. Card holders will not be considered inside or outside until the next
use of their card at an entry or exit reader.
Operations 157

Manual Operations on Doors

This dialog allows an authorized operator to manually modify the state of a door or group of doors.
Operators can manually lock/unlock a door, temporary lock/unlock a door or group of doors, and
enable/disable readers on selected doors.

Icon Definition
Lock door or group of doors: will manually lock the selected door or
group of doors.
Unlock door or group of doors: The selected door or group of doors will
be manually unlocked and will remain unlock until the next valid change
of the unlocking schedule or an operator manually locks the door or
group of doors
Temporarily lock/unlock door or group of doors: Temporarily unlocks
a door or group of doors for a preset delay. Once the delay expires,
the door or group of doors re‐lock automatically.
Return to schedule: Will re‐apply the locking schedule for a door or a
group of doors.
Enable card reader: Will enable a previously disabled door reader.

Disable card reader: Will disable a door reader and user will not be able
to access that door, even if they have access rights.
Arm door (Multi‐site Gateway with KT‐400 only): Does a Request to arm
on the alarm panel.
Disarm door (Multi‐site Gateway with KT‐400 only): Does a Request to
disarm on the alarm panel.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.
There are various reasons why you would want to perform one of these operations; for example you may
need to “disable a reader” for a short period in order to deny access to the door, etc. This operation
allows an operator to lock a door that was previously unlocked by an operator or a schedule. When a
door is manually locked through the Operation menu, it remains locked until:
• The presentation of a valid card (will re‐lock after access), or
• The next valid change of the automatic unlocking schedule (for a door defined with an unlocking
schedule), or
• An operator manually unlocks the door.
158 Operations

Selecting a Door or a Door Group

1 From the Operations window, select the Door icon. The Door window appears.
2 Click the Enable animation icon to view a real‐time display of the door status.
• The left‐hand pane displays the list of all Sites/Gateways. You may select all or select one site/
gateway.
• The individual doors associated with the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed in the top
right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all doors in the system will be listed on the right.
You can select one, several or all doors.
NOTE: If only one site or gateway is defined in the system, the site or gateway list window will not
appear on the Controller window.
• Door groups associated to the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed at the bottom right
side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all door groups in the system will be listed at the bottom
right. You can select one or several or all groups.

Locking a Door Manually

1 In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2 Click the Lock‐door icon in the toolbar.

Unlocking a Door Manually

1 In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2 Click the Unlock‐door icon in the tool bar. The selected door(s) will be manually unlocked. The system will
prompt for operator confirmation. A door defined with an automatic unlocking schedule will remain
unlocked until:
• The next valid change of the unlocking schedule, or
• An operator manually locks the door.

Unlocking a Door Temporarily

EntraPass allows you to temporarily unlock a door for a preset delay. Once the delay expires, the door
re‐locks automatically. You can use this option in cases where you need to grant access to a user who
does not have a card or has forgotten his/her card.
NOTE: The maximum unlock time: 4:15 (255 seconds).
1 Click the Temporarily unlock icon. The Change delay on action dialog will popup.
2 Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK. The selected door will be temporarily unlocked by an
operator.
NOTE: If a door contact is installed, the door will re‐lock as soon the system sees a “door open‐door
closed” transition. There is no “Animation” for this type of operation.
Operations 159

Resetting a Door Schedule

EntraPass allows you to reset a door schedule after a manual operation has been performed on a
component.
1 In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2 Click the Return to Schedule button. This option will reset the schedule for the selected components.

Enabling a Door Reader

1 In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2 Click the Reader‐enable button. This option enables a previously disabled door reader.

Disabling a Door Reader

1 In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2 Click the Reader‐disabled button. This option disables a previously enabled reader. Disabling a reader
prohibits users from accessing the door, even if access rights have been granted.

Manual Operations on Elevator Doors

This dialog allows an authorized operator to manually lock, unlock or temporarily unlock elevator floors.
The window will also display, in real‐time, the status of the selected elevator door(s).
How Elevator Access Is authorized
• The cardholder pushes an “up/down” button, the elevator door opens,
• The cardholder presents its card at the reader (usually inside the cab),
• The system checks if the schedule assigned to this door is valid. If yes, the system checks which floor
group is associated to this door,
• Then the system verifies each floor of the floor group (in the floor group menu) and checks if the
schedule associated to each floor of the group is valid or not valid.
160 Operations

• Only floors that have a valid schedule will be available for selection by the user (the elevator panel will
enable the buttons corresponding to the floors).

Icon Definition
Lock elevator floor or group of elevator floors: will manually lock the selected elevator
floor or group of elevator floors.
Unlock elevator floor or group of elevator floors: The selected elevator floor or group
of elevator floors will be manually unlocked and will remain unlock until the next valid
change of the unlocking schedule or an operator manually locks the elevator floor or
group of elevator floors.
Temporarily lock/unlock elevator floor or group of elevator floors: Temporarily
unlocks an elevator floor or group of elevator floors for a preset delay. Once the
delay expires, the elevator floor or group of elevator floors re‐lock automatically.
Return to schedule: Will re‐apply the locking schedule for a door or a group of doors.

Enable card reader: will enable a previously disabled reader.

Disable card reader: will disable a reader and users will not be able to access any eleva‐
tor floor, even if they have access rights.
Enable elevator floor: will enable a previously disabled elevator floor or floor group.

Disable elevator floor: will disable an elevator floor or floor group and users will not be
able to access that elevator floor or floor group, even if they have access rights.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Selecting an Elevator Door

1 From the Operations menu, select the Elevator door icon.
2 Click the Enable animation icon to view a real‐time display of the elevator door status.
• The left‐hand pane displays the list of all Sites/Gateways. all Sites/Gateways. You may select all or
select one site/gateway.
• The individual elevator doors associated with the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed in
the top right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all elevator doors in the system will be
listed on the right. You can select one, several or all elevator doors.
• Elevator door groups associated to the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed at the bottom
right of the pane. If you select All on the left, all elevator door groups will be listed at the bottom
right. You can select one or several or all elevator door groups.
Operations 161

Locking Floors from Elevator Doors

1 Select an elevator door or a group of elevator doors.
2 Click the Lock icon in the toolbar. This command will manually lock the floor group that was previously
unlocked by an operator or a schedule.
NOTE: A door defined without an unlocking schedule will only be locked by a manual command. To lock
all floors that were previously unlocked, use the Unlock option in the Manual operation on doors menu.

Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors

1 Select an elevator door or a group of elevator doors.
2 Click the Unlock elevator floors icon in the toolbar to unlock a previously locked floor. This command will
only enable the elevator floors that are defined with an “X” in the “” column of the Floor group Definition
menu. If you do this, the system will prompt the you to select a floor group that should be unlocked
(available). Once the group is selected, the system will prompt the operator to confirm the operation.
NOTE: For a door defined with an “automatic unlocking schedule”, floors will remain available until the
next valid change of the unlocking schedule, or an operator manually locks the door.
NOTE: A door defined without an unlocking schedule will only be locked by a manual command. To lock
all floors that were previously unlocked, use the Unlock option in the Manual operation on doors
menu.
NOTE: When a manual unlocking operation is completed, only floors that are defined with an “X” in the
“” field of the Floor Group Definition menu will be available for selection. Also, when communication is
lost and the controllers are working in stand‐alone mode, only the floors marked with an “X” will be
available for selection and the access schedule will be ignored.

Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors Temporarily

EntraPass allows you to temporarily unlock a floor from an elevator door for a preset delay. Once the
delay expires, the elevator door re‐locks automatically. The maximum unlock time: 4:15 (255 seconds).
1 Click the Temporarily unlock icon. The Change delay on action dialog will popup.
2 Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK. The selected elevator floor will be temporarily unlocked by
an operator.
NOTE: This command will only temporarily enable the elevator floors that are defined with an “X” in
the “” column of the “Floor group Definition menu” (available for selection).
NOTE: There is no “Animation” for this type of operation. To temporarily unlock all floors, use the
“temporarily unlock door” option in the “manual operation on doors” menu.

Resetting an Elevator Door Schedule

EntraPass allows you to reset an elevator door schedule after a manual operation has been performed
on a component.
1 In the Elevator door dialog, select desired elevator door(s) or door group.
2 Click the Return to Schedule button. This option will reset the schedule for the selected components.
162 Operations

Enabling an Elevator Floor

1 In the Elevator floor dialog, select desired floor(s) or floor group.
2 Click the Enable elevator floor button. This option enables previously disabled elevator floors or floor
group.

Disabling an Elevator Floor

1 In the Elevator door dialog, select desired floor(s) or floor group.
2 Click the Disabled elevator floor button. This option disables a previously enabled elevator floor.
Disabling a floor prohibits users from accessing the floor, even if access rights have been granted.

Manual Operations on Relays

Use this menu to manually change the state of a relay or group of relays. You can activate/deactivate
and temporarily activate relays or group of relays manually. The window will also display, in real‐time,
the status of the selected relay(s).
This feature allows to manually turn off a relay; for example, when an input programmed to activate a
relay goes in alarm in unknown conditions.

Icon Definition
Deactivate relay: allows an operator to deactivate a relay which was pre‐
viously activated by an operator, event, schedule or input in alarm.
Activate relay: activate a relay which was previously deactivated by an
operator, event, schedule or input in alarm.
Temporarily activated relay: Temporarily activate a relay or group of
relays for a preset delay.
Return to schedule: Will re‐apply a schedule after a manual operation
was performed on a component.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Selecting Relays
1 From the Operation window, select the Relay icon.
2 Click the Enable animation icon to view a real‐time display of the relay status.
• The left‐hand pane displays the list of all Sites/Gateways. all Sites/Gateways. You may select All or
select one site/gateway.
• The individual relays associated with the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed in the top
right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all relays in the system will be listed on the right.
You can select one, several or all relays.
Operations 163

• Relay groups associated to the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed at the bottom right
side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all relay groups in the system will be listed at the
bottom right. You can select one or several or all groups.

Deactivating a Relay Manually

1 Select a relay or a group of relays.
2 Click the Deactivate Relay icon.
NOTE: If you manually deactivate a relay that is usually activated according to a schedule, it will
remain deactivated until its reactivation schedule becomes valid. This means that if a relay needs to be
activated according to a schedule and you deactivate it, remember to reactivate it again for the
remaining scheduled time, because one relay can be defined for various components of the system; its
activation or deactivation will relate to its configuration within these components.

Activating a Relay Manually

1 Select a relay or a group of relays.
2 Click the Activate Relay icon. The selected relay(s) will be activated. This operation allows an operator to
activate a relay which was previously deactivated by an operator, event, schedule or input in alarm.

Activating a Relay Temporarily

1 In the right‐hand pane, you may select a relay in the upper part of the window, All Relays in the lower
part of the window.
2 Click the Activate relay temporarily icon. The Change delay on action window will popup on screen.
3 Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK. The selected relay will be temporarily activated by an
operator.
NOTE: The selected relay(s) will be temporarily activated. This is useful for an operator who would like
to activate temporarily a relay which was previously deactivated by an operator, event, schedule or
input in alarm. The system displays a message box requesting that a temporary activation delay, is
entered. When this delay is over, the relay will be deactivated automatically.

Resetting a Relay Schedule

EntraPass allows you to reset a relay schedule after a manual operation has been performed on a
component.
1 In the Relay door dialog, select desired relay(s) or relay group.
2 Click the Return to Schedule button. This option will reset the schedule for the selected components.
164 Operations

Manual Operations on Inputs

This dialog allows you to bring an input back to its normal state, or to stop monitoring an input, or
monitor a specific input at all times, or to perform a temporary shunt on a selected input, if it had been
previously modified from its original state as setup in the Device menu.

Icon Definition
Input normal: returns an input to its normal state as setup in the Device
menu.
Input continuous supervision: will monitor the selected input at all
times.
Input with no supervision will terminate the input monitoring, regard‐
less of its schedule, and will start monitoring with the next pre‐defined
schedule.
Input no supervision temporarily (Shunt): will stop input monitoring
for a pre‐set period of time.

NOTE: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Performing Manual Operations on Inputs

1 From the Operation window, select the Input icon.
2 Click the Enable animation icon to view a real‐time display of the relay status.
• The left‐hand pane displays the list of all Sites/Gateways. all Sites/Gateways. You may select All or
select one site/gateway.one site/gateway.
• The individual input associated with the site/gateway site/gateway selected on the left are displayed
in the top right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all inputs in the system will be listed on
the right. You can select one, several or all inputs.
• Input groups associated to the site/gateway selected on the left are displayed at the bottom right
side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all input groups in the system will be listed at the
bottom right. You can select one or several or all input groups.

Returning an Input to Its Normal State Manually

This option is used in cases where an input status has been modified by an operator and you want to
return the input to its normal state. For example, if an input is assigned a monitoring schedule in its
definition and an operator has reversed the state of the input making it “not supervised”, it can be
returned to its normal state using this button.
1 Select an input or a group of inputs.
2 Click the Input normal icon. The selected input returns to its normal state as defined in the Device menu.
Operations 165

Stopping Monitoring an Input

You will use this option to terminate the input supervision, regardless of its schedule (if defined).
1 Select an input or a group of inputs.
2 Click the Input no supervision. The selected input will not be monitored.

Stopping Input Supervision (Shunt) Temporarily

You will use this option when you want the system to bypass a specific input, for a specific period of
time.
1 To temporarily shunt an input, select the input, then click the Temporarily shunt icon. The input will not
be monitored temporarily.
2 Click the Input no supervision temporarily. The Change delay on action dialog will popup.
3 Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK. An icon next to the input will indicate that it is temporarily
shunt. If an alarm occurs, or if the input is disconnected, no message will be sent to the desktop Message
list.

Manual Operations on View Roll Call

This feature is used to visualize the users entering a pre‐defined perimeter. When a user enters this
area, the corresponding data is displayed in the following dialog:

Manual Operations on Integrated Panels

1 From the Operations toolbar, select the Integrated Panel icon.
2 If required, select a specific component from the All components drop‐down menu.
3 Select a panel from the left column and then right‐click to view its contextual menu.
4 Select Full status to view the panel status details.
166 Operations

5 Select Virtual Keypad to view the virtual keypad.

6 Select a partition and right‐click to view its contextual menu.

7 Select Arm partition or Disarm partition as required.

Users 167

Users
The Users Toolbar
The Users toolbar allows you to easily manage the EntraPass cardholder database. The Users toolbar
icons start the following tasks:

• Define and issue cards as well as perform card‐related tasks (find, modify or delete existing cards),
• Design and print badges using the integrated badging feature. Pictures and signatures can be imported
or, with the necessary devices, captured and incorporated into cards for printing badges,
• Define and manage card access groups,
• Define access levels,
• Define visitor card templates,
• Define card types,
• Define and issue day passes,
• Modify groups of cards with batch operations,
• Import or export CSV files,
The integrated badging function in EntraPass allows users to create and print badges. It is also possible
to import or, with the appropriate utilities, to capture and integrate images and signatures on the card
in order to print badges.
• Define and modify the Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) tenants list.

Cards Definition
Cards are defined by the following properties: card number, card user name, card type, access level and
status (valid, invalid, pending, lost/stolen or expired). If you have enabled the Use card multiple format
option in the Card format dialog (see "Defining a Card Display Format" on page 277), you will be able to
change the card format for each card individually from the Card dialog. This option allows more
flexibility in assigning user cards for sites equipped with different reader technologies. In other words,
when creating a new card for a user, the operator will be able to select a card format directly in the Card
dialog, according to the reader type used in the area where the user will be accessing the building. If you
have enabled the Enhanced user management feature in the System parameters dialog (see "Credentials
Parameters" on page 292), card definition will be slightly different. In this type of environment,
EntraPass allows for the creation of a user card with no number assigned to it. In both cases, cards will be
defined by: card user name, card type, card access level and status (valid, invalid, pending, lost/stolen).
Cards records can be searched, sorted and deleted.

Issuing a New Card

1 From the Users toolbar, select the Card icon. The displayed Card window is used to enter/verify general
information on the cardholder.
NOTE: If you enabled the Enhanced User Management, move to the next section to see "Issuing a New
Card in Enhanced User Management Environment" on page 168.
168 Users

2 Click the New icon (first icon) in the toolbar. The Card number field is enabled.
3 Enter the number printed on the card (Card number field), then press Enter. If it is a new card, the Card
user name field is initialized with “New user”. If the card already exists, the system displays information
about the card.
4 Enter the cardholder’s name in the Card user name field. You can enter up to 50 characters.
5 Check the Copy to visitor card checkbox. When this option is checked, card information fields are copied
to the Visitor template database (the card number is not copied). This feature enables you to archive
profiles that are retrieved should you issue a temporary card.
6 Click on the Card type box to access the Card type menu. Select the card type for the new card. The card
type is used to group cardholders; it is useful for modifying an existing card group and creating reports,
etc. For more information on how to create/modify card types, see "Card Type Definition" on page 191.
7 Click on the Card filter box to access the Card filter menu. Select the card filter for the new card. The card
filter is used to bring more flexibility to the operators in regards to the cards’ treatment rights. For more
information on how to create/modify card filters, see "Card Filter Definition" on page 64.
NOTE: From the Card type window, you can right‐click the Card type field and choose New to create a
new card type, choose Select to pick an existing card type or you can choose Edit to edit an existing
card type.
NOTE: The system automatically displays the Creation date, the Modification date and the Modification
count information on the upper right‐hand side of the Card dialog.
8 Fill out the Card Information 1 to 10 fields. These are user definable fields. They are used to store
additional information regarding the cardholder. For example, you could use Card Information 1 to store
the employee number; Card Information 2, Department where the employee works; Card Information 3,
employee address, etc. Later, card information fields will be used to index reports, customize cardholder
lists, etc.
NOTE: These information fields are editable labels. To rename an information field label, double‐click
it, then enter the appropriate name in the displayed fields. You can enter up to 50 characters.
9 Click the Save icon.

Issuing a New Card in Enhanced User Management Environment

NOTE: See "Credentials Parameters" on page 292 for more details on how to enable the Enhanced User
Management environment.
1 From the Users toolbar, select the Card icon. The displayed Card window is used to enter/verify general
information on the cardholder.
2 Click the New icon (first icon) in the toolbar. The Card user name field is enabled to enter the
cardholder’s name. You can enter up to 50 characters.
3 Click Save.
4 Double‐click on the Card type field to open the Card type window. Select the card type for the new card.
The card type is used to group cardholders; it is useful for modifying an existing card group and creating
Users 169

reports, etc. For more information on how to create/modify card types, see "Card Type Definition" on
page 191.
NOTE: In the Card type field, you can right‐click the Card type field and choose New to create a new
card type, choose Select to select an existing card type or you can choose Edit to edit an existing card
type.
5 Click on the Card number tab, double‐click on Card #1 if you want to change the label.
6 Enter the Card number.
• If EntraPass was previously configured for Multiple Card Format, you can modify the card format by
right‐clicking the Card number field, See "Defining a Card Display Format" on page 277 to enable the
multiple card formats and select a new default card format for Card #1 to Card #5. The default card
format is HH:DDDDD (Hexadecimal and decimal 24 bits).
NOTE: The Access Level will apply to the user which means all 5 cards.
• When the Multiple Card Format is enabled: A list of all card formats will be displayed when you
right‐click in the card number field.
• When a card format has been defined by the system administrator, the card format has a check mark
next to its description.
170 Users

7 As an option, you can assign the Card number immediately. If you are using the EntraPass WebStation,
you can leave the field empty and assign the card number at a later time.
8 If your access rights allow it, you can decide to Display card number or not, then the user card number in
reports and message lists in the EntraPass workstations.
NOTE: The system automatically displays the Creation date, the Modification date and the Modification
count information on the upper right‐hand side of the Card dialog.

9 Check the Use expiration date option and select the corresponding date.
10 Check the Trace option if you want to monitor the use of a particular card. Selecting this option will
cause the “Card traced” event to be generated each time this card is presented to a card reader. For
example, you can request and generate a report containing the “card traced” event in order to verify user
actions.
11 Check the Stolen/Lost option, if the card has been stolen or lost. The card will not be functional
anymore.
12 Repeat Steps 5 to 11 for Card #2 to Card #5, if applicable. The selections can be different for the 5 cards.

Quick Access to Door List per Card

This feature allows to quickly and conveniently display the list of doors with an associated schedule for all access
levels of the selected user.
1 From the Users/Card menu, click the Door access list button:

The information is displayed over five columns:

1 Gateway/site icon
2 Gateway/site description
3 Door description
4 Schedule description
NOTE: This information can be exported to a CSV file for printing and report purposes.
The same information is also available from the View card information window by clicking the Door access list
button:

Creating New Cards Using the “Save As” Feature

The Save as feature allows you to create a new card based on an existing card, only making changes to
specific information. For example: changing only the user name and keeping all other card information.
1 Type required changes into specific fields in the Card window and click the Save as icon. This feature
allows you to create a new card under a new card number.
2 Enter the new card number in the New card number field.
3 Select the Keep/Delete original card options to specify if the original card should be kept or deleted
(usually kept), then click OK to save the new information. The Card window is displayed.
Users 171

Issuing Cards Using the “Batch Load” Feature

The Batch Load feature allows operators to issue cards by presenting cards to a door reader. The card
number is displayed on an “unknown card” or “access denied” event messages. During a Batch Load
operation, the operator can create new cards or modify existing ones.
1 From the Card window, click the Batch Load button.
2 From the Door drop‐down list, select the door that will be used to read the cards.
3 Check the following options:
• Refresh an access granted: if this option is checked, each time an access is granted the information
displayed will be refreshed with data relative to the card.
• Save on new card: if this option is checked, new cards will be saved in the card database on an
“unknown card” event message. If this box is not checked, the operator will have to save the card
manually each time a card is read.
NOTE: When this option is selected, the first card presented to the door reader will be saved only when
presenting a second card or by pressing the save icon.
• Find: allows operators to search for an existing card in order to create a new card based on the
existing card data.
NOTE: If an operator clicks the Close button without saving (when the Save button is still enabled), a
system prompt will ask to save the last information.

Viewing and Verifying PINs

EntraPass enables you to view and validate each configured cardholders’ PINs in the Card and Visitor
windows.

Viewing Cards Assigned the Same PIN

1 From the Card or Visitor window, click the List of PIN owners button.
2 Enter the PIN number you wish to validate and click OK. A list containing all operators that have a PIN
number will be displayed on the screen.
NOTE: If the system is set to PIN duplication (Options > System Parameters), and if the PIN is used by
more than one cardholders, the system displays a list of cardholders who are using the PIN. This
feature is useful when for example you want to display the list of cardholders who are using a given
PIN or if you are issuing new cards and you want to verify which PINs are already being used.

Card Handling
Editing a Card
• Enter the card number in the Card number field and press Enter. The system displays the card; you may
then modify the card as required.
• Browse the Card number field using the Up/down arrows and then select the card to be modified.
• Browse the Card user name field, using the Up/down arrows.
172 Users

Finding a Card
You can perform two types of card searches from the Card dialog toolbar:

Find the card information

Find archived card information

NOTE: For more information on how to search information in EntraPass, see "Finding Components" on
page 33.

Deleting a Card
The Delete feature allows an operator who has the proper access rights to remove a card from the
cardholder database. A card that has been deleted from the cardholder database must be re‐issued
again in order to use it again.
1 Locate the card you want to delete.
2 Click the Delete icon, then click Yes in the Warning message box.
NOTE: Although a deleted card is removed from the card database, it remains in the card history; all
events involving that card remain in the event messages database. An event report locating past
events that involved any deleted card can be performed.

Customizing Card Information Fields

You may rename Card information fields under the General tab according to your organization
requirements. These fields can contain any information. They can be used as edit boxes or drop‐down
lists.
1 In the Card definition dialog, select any card, then double‐click the Card information label under the
General tab. The system displays the Change labels window.
2 Select the field you want to modify on the left, and enter the name in the field on the right. If your
system operates in two languages, two fields will be available to enter the field name in both languages.
For example, if you want to rename Card Information 1 to Employee number, double‐click the Card
Information 1 label and enter the new name in the field(s) on the right.
3 Select the Edit field option if the information appears as an Edit field (one‐line information) or Drop‐
down list (as applicable); then click OK to save your modifications.
4 You need to repeat these steps for all the fields you want to modify.
NOTE: Check Mandatory field to ensure that this field is not left empty.
NOTE: An operator must have full access privileges to edit card information fields. An operator with
read only access may only view information in these fields.
Users 173

Cardholder Access Levels Assignation

An access level must be assigned to each card. Access levels determine where and when the card will be
valid. The access level allows the cardholder entry to selected locations during specified schedules. For
information on defining access levels, see "Access Levels Definition" on page 190.
NOTE: When you modify the access level assigned to a card, you also modify the user’s access
permission to the doors and schedules associated to that access level.
In order to assign an access level to a card, you have to:
• Create schedules that will correspond to the time the user has access to the desired doors,
• Assign the created schedule to the desired doors (in the Access level definition menu),
• Assign the access level to cards.

Assigning an Access Level to a Cardholder

1 From the Card definition window, select the Access level tab. The Access level window appears, it
displays the Gateway/Site column the Gateway/Site column and Access level drop down list.
2 Click the Card access group button (displayed on the left of the Site or Gateway list) to copy information
from a Card access group to a card. The Gateway/Site column The Gateway/Site column displays the sites
and gateways to which an access level will be associated.
3 From the Access level drop‐down list, select the access level that will determine the cardholder’s access
to the doors of the selected site. If you do not want this cardholder to have access to the door of this
site, leave this field to None.
NOTE: You have to create Access levels (Users > Access Level) to have them displayed in the Access Level
drop‐down list.

Card Options Definition

Use the Miscellaneous tab to specify and view card options.
1 Select a card number using the Up/down arrows. The Start date field indicates the card creation date.
You can change this information by selecting another date in the displayed calender. The start date must
be the same day or earlier than the current date; else, the Card state field (Miscellaneous section) will be
set to “Pending”.
2 Check the Use end date box if applicable. When this box is checked, the system displays a calender
allowing you to select the end date. When the end date is reached, the Card state field is set to “Expired”.
NOTE: When creating a card with a limited access time of 24 hours of less, for example a Day Pass, the
card will expire at midnight. This expiration may take up to one minute to register in the system.
3 Check the Delete when expired option (if applicable). This option can only be used with the Use end date
option. When selected, the card information will automatically be deleted on the expiry date (using the
end date specified), otherwise the Card state field will be modified to “Expired”.
NOTE: A deleted card is a card that is not active in the system database. Even if a card was deleted,
previous events generated by this card are still stored in the archive file.
174 Users

4 Check the Wait for keypad option to force users to enter a PIN on keypad to access all doors, then in the
Editable PIN field enter the PIN that users will be required to enter.
5 Editable PIN number: The operator can enter the number of digits needed by the reader/keypad to grant
access (See "Defining a Card Display Format" on page 277 for more information).
NOTE: Selecting the Wait for keypad will delay access to a door for this card until the correct PIN has
been entered on a keypad. This only affects doors defined with both reader and keypad in the Door
Definition menu (Devices > Doors). The keypad schedule must also be valid for this door. For more
information on defining a door, see "Doors Configuration" on page 88.
6 From the Card state drop‐down list, assign a state to the selected card. By default, a card is valid. The
following s are available:
• Valid: the card is functional,
• Invalid: the card is NOT functional,
• Lost/Stolen: the card is NOT functional,
• Pending: the card is not yet functional.
• Expired: the card has reached its expiry date,
NOTE: You cannot force a card state to Pending by selecting this state from the Card state drop‐down
list. To do so, you have to change the Start date.
7 Check the Disable passback option if you want the card to override the passback option when defined.
NOTE: If your are issuing a card for a cardholder with disabilities, check the Extended door access delay
option. To enable this option in the system, you have to define appropriate delays in the Door
definition. This option is also available when defining visitor cards.
8 Allow multiple‐swipe (KT‐400 only): Enable the multi‐swipe action (See "Card Multi‐Swipe" on page 93
for more information).

Adding Comments to a Card

1 From the Card window, select the Comment tab.
2 Enter a comment (if necessary) relative to this cardholder. The displayed field can be used to store
additional information in the database. Maximum allowed: up to 241 characters.
3 Click the Save button, then the Close button to exit.

Limiting Card Usage

EntraPass offers the ability to set card use count options so that you may limit the number of times a
card can be used.
1 From the Card window, select the Usage tab.
2 Check the Enable usage restriction option in order to enable the card use count feature.
Users 175

3 From the Card count value scrolling list, set the maximum number you want this card to be used. You
may enter the number in the field or use the Up/down arrows.
NOTE: Once you set the Card count value, the Card count options field is automatically incremented each
time the cardholder uses the card. After a certain number of uses, you may check the Reset to zero field
if you want the counter to be reset to zero when the maximum value is reached.

Assigning Pictures and Signatures

EntraPass offers the ability to associate photos and signatures with cardholders and to associate badge
templates with cards as well as to print badges. Photos and signatures can be retrieved from files, pasted
from the clipboard, or captured using an appropriate device. To capture video images, use any MCI and
TWAIN compliant device. For capturing signatures, signature pads such as Topaz, Penware TTI500 and
Penware TT3100 are recommended.

Assigning a Picture from a File

1 From the Card window, select the Picture tab.
NOTE: The V ideo capture option is enabled only when a video capturing device is installed.
2 Right‐click the picture area. A shortcut menu appears; choose the appropriate action:
• Get picture from file: This option allows you to select a previously saved picture:
1 From the Files of type drop‐down list, select the file type you are looking for or leave this field to All to
display all image files. Make sure that the Auto displayer option is selected to enable preview.
2 Select the directory where the image is stored. Select the image you are looking for, then click Open to
import it into the Card window.
NOTE: Files with the following extensions are supported: BMP, EMF, WMF, JPG, GIF, PNG, PCD, and TIF.
• Paste picture: this option allows you to paste a picture from the clipboard. To use this option, you
have to copy the picture, then paste it into the picture window.
NOTE: To delete the imported picture, right‐click the picture, then choose Clear picture from the
shortcut menu.

Assigning a Picture Using a Video Camera

The Video capture option is enabled only when the option Enable video capture is checked: Options >
Multimedia devices > Video capture tab.
NOTE: Before you can capture images using a video camera, all equipment needs to be properly
configured. For more information, consult your manufacturer’s device manual. If you have more than
one video driver, you will need to specify the video driver to be used (Options > Multimedia devices >
Video tab).
176 Users

1 Right‐click the picture area.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Video capture. This option is enabled only when the Video capture
capability has been enabled in the Options menu (Options > Multimedia devices > Video).
NOTE: Options may vary depending on the video capture program. If you have more than one video
driver, you will need to specify the video driver you are using. For more information on configuring
your video drivers, see "Multimedia Devices Configuration" on page 281.
3 Click the Freeze button when you are satisfied with the displayed image, then click the Capture button to
paste and save the displayed image.
4 To associate a badge layout with the defined card, select one from the Badge layout list. For information
on how to define a badge layout, see "Badges Designing" on page 178.
NOTE: The Print badge and Preview badge buttons are enabled only when a badge printer and badge
layout has been selected and the option Use badge printer checked: Options > Printer options > Badge
printer. If these buttons are enabled, you can preview and print the cardholder’s badge.

Importing a signature from a file

You can import a signature, just as you import other images such as logos or pictures into the card.
1 From the Card window, right‐click the signature area. A shortcut menu appears.
2 From the shortcut menu, make the appropriate choice:
• Get signature from file: allows you to select a previously saved signature,
• Paste signature: allows you to paste a signature that was previously copied to the clipboard. The
option is enabled when there is content in the clipboard.
NOTE: The Signature pad option is enabled only when the appropriate device is enabled in the Options
menu (Options > Multimedia devices > Signature).
3 Select the signature file, then click Open.

Adding a Signature from a Signature Capture Device

Use this option if a Signature Capture Device is installed and configured. The Signature pad option is
enabled only when the appropriate device is enabled in the Options menu (Options > Multimedia devices
> Signature).
1 From the Card window, right‐click the signature area. A shortcut menu appears.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Signature pad. The Signature window appears, allowing you to preview
the signature.
3 Click OK to paste the signature in the card window.

Working with Photos and Signatures

The EntraPass Integrated Badging feature allows users to extract part of an image or enhance images
that are incorporated into cards.
Users 177

Extracting Part of an Image

If you have incorporated a large image but you need only part of it, you can select and extract the part
that you want to assign to the card (picture, signature).
1 Right‐click the image you have just imported.
NOTE: The Extract option is enabled after you have started the selection mode. Similarly, the Undo
option is enabled only when an image has been pasted.
2 Select Start selection mode from the shortcut menu.
NOTE: You can increase the size of the selection rectangle by dragging its sides and corners to adjust to
the part of the image you want to extract. You can also move it by dragging it to the desired area of
the image.
3 Once you have selected the part you want to incorporate into the card, right‐click the image again. A
shortcut menu appears.
NOTE: To disable the current selection, right‐click the picture, then select Cancel selection mode. Select
Undo to discard the changes. The Undo option is enabled only when you have pasted an image.
4 From the shortcut menu, select Extract.

Editing a Picture/Signature
1 Right click the image you want to edit.
NOTE: The Barcode area allows you to assign a barcode to a badge for identification purposes. Select any item
from the drop‐down list to be used as the value of the barcode. Select Custom to enable the Value field and type a
specific barcode value. If you do not enter a custom barcode value, the Card number is used as the default value.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Edit (picture or signature).
3 Adjust the features of the image using the displayed options. The Reset all option enables you to go back
to the original image:
• Auto contrast: this feature gives better contrast by intensifying lights and shadows: it makes the
darks darker and the lights lighter. In general, this auto contrast feature gives a good result when a
simple contrast adjustment is needed to improve an image’s contrast.
• Sharpen: this feature provides more definition to blurry images by applying sharpening only when an
edge is found.
• Brightness: this feature allows you to add light to the image by sliding towards the positive values.
• Reset all: this feature allows you to undo all the changes and to restore the original image.
4 Click OK to close the Picture editing window.
5 From the Badge layout pull‐down menu, select a layout to associate with the card you have defined To
define a badge layout, see "Badges Designing" on page 178.

Printing Badges
You may print badges, visitor cards and daypasses from a Card or from all Badge preview windows. The
software is set up to let you print one single or double‐sided badges.
178 Users

Before you print, you have to select a badge printer. It may be any network printer, or a specific badge
printer.

Selecting a Badge Printer

1 From the EntraPass Workstation window, select the Options toolbar, then click the Printer Options
button.
2 From the Printer options window, select the Badge printer tab.
NOTE: You can print badges to any network printer. However, to print badges on appropriate cards, you
have to select a badge printer.
3 Check the Badge printer option to indicate to the system that a badge printer is selected. If the Badge
printer option is checked, the Print badge and Preview badge are displayed in windows where you can
print badges (Card, Visitor, and Daypass windows).
4 From the Select badge printer drop‐down list, select the printer dedicated to badging.
5 Adjust the margins:
• Origin offset, X axis: indicates the left margin.
• Y axis indicates the upper margin.

Previewing and Printing Badges

The Badge ‐ Preview and Print window allows you to preview a badge layout with card information (if the
badge layout is associated with a card) or with default values (if the template is not yet associated with
a particular card). The program permits you to print single or double sided badges.
1 From the Card, Visitor or Daypass window, click the Preview badge button.
NOTE: From the Badge design window, the preview option allows you to view a badge with default
values since there is no card associated with it.
2 From the Badge ‐ Preview and Print window, choose a printing option:
• Print front side: only the front side (preview in the left‐hand pane) is printed.
• Print back side: only the back side (preview in the right‐hand pane) is printed. This button is enabled
only when the badge is defined with two sides.
• Print both sides: the front and back side are printed. This button is enabled only when the badge is
defined with two sides.
NOTE: Important! In Order to print badges with barcodes, your printer has to be properly set. You have
to select the “black resin” option, otherwise, barcode readers may not detect the barcode. If you have
problems with barcode printing or reading, refer to your printer manufacturer’s manual.

Badges Designing
EntraPass contains a badge layout editor which enables users to create, save, edit or delete badge
templates that are later selected and associated with cards for badge printing. You can create and edit
badge templates, add colored or graphic backgrounds, logos, text, barcodes, and place photo or
signature holders.
Users 179

Creating a Badge Template

1 From the Users menu, select the Badge icon. The Badge window appears.
NOTE: The Badge window contains all the tools available in other EntraPass windows: new, save, copy,
delete, print, links, search (the Hierarchy button is disabled). However, it contains an additional 1‐2
button which allows to modify the number of sides assigned to a badge layout.
2 Click the New icon in the toolbar. The Badge properties window appears.

To Specify Properties for a Badge Layout

1 In the Badge properties window, indicate the number of sides for the badge, then select the desired size
for the badge layout, then click OK.
2 Indicate the number of sides for the badge, then select the desired size for the badge layout, then click
OK.
NOTE: Measures are expressed either in inches or millimeters (a hundredth of an inch or a tenth of a
millimeter). To change the unit of measure, check the appropriate radio button in the Units section.
3 Enter the name for the badge template in the language fields. You can enter up to 40 characters.
4 You may check Set as default card layout if you want this new design to be automatically used for all new
badges.
NOTE: Only one default layout is available. When you select one layout and check the option Select as
default card layout, the current default layout is replaced.
5 Click the Save icon to save the badge template.

To Edit a Badge Layout

The Badge design utility allows users to edit the badge layout, to add background color or graphics, to
modify the font, etc.
NOTE: Once a card layout is created, you cannot modify its size; you have to create a new layout.
However, you can modify the number of sides by clicking on the Sides icon in the Badge window
toolbar.

To Modify the Number of Card Sides

1 From the badge window, select the badge you want to edit.
2 From the Badge window toolbar, click the 1‐2 button.
3 Click the Save icon to save the new badge information.

To Modify the Background Color

1 From the Badge window, select the badge you want to modify.
2 Click the Click here to modify the card layout button (located in the lower part of the window) to open
the Badge design window.
NOTE: When you move the cursor over the Badge design objects, a hint explaining each object
appears.
180 Users

3 To modify the template background color, right‐click anywhere in the work area. The Properties shortcut
menu appears.
4 Select Properties. The Background properties window appears.
5 Select the appropriate options for the template:
• No background (default setting)
• Use color as background: this option will allow you to apply a background color to all the designs.
• Use image as background. This option allows you to incorporate an image that will be displayed as a
watermark in all the badges.
• Orientation: allows you to select a landscape (horizontal) or portrait (vertical) display.

To Add Objects to a Badge Layout

By a simple click and drop feature, the Badging utility permits you to incorporate objects into the badge
template:
• Card fields information,
• Barcodes,
• Text boxes,
• Current date,
• Previously saved images and logos (BMP, JPG, GIF, etc.),
• Border,
• Rectangle (including rounded rectangle, ellipse),
• Line, pointer,
NOTE: Objects are incorporated with their default settings. To modify an object’s properties, right‐click
the object, then select appropriate settings from the shortcut menu.
Users 181

To Incorporate Card Information Fields

1 To add card information fields to the badge template, click the Card fields icon. The Card fields submenu
appears.

2 To modify an object property before you drop it, go to Options in the Badge design window, then choose
Show properties on drop. If you do this, the Properties window will open every time you drop an item in
the template work area.
NOTE: To enable last and first name selection in the Card fields menu of the Badge design window, go
to the Options menu, then choose System parameters, select the User name format tab, check Parse user
name checkbox, then select the name (first or last name) that will be used for sorting cardholders’
names. For more information see "User Name Format" on page 289.
3 From the shortcut menu, select the card information field you want to add to the template layout, then
click in the template work area to incorporate that field you have selected.
NOTE: When you add a photo to a badge design template, the photo that appears is only a placeholder.
It indicates where the cardholder’s photo will be displayed. When a badge is assigned to a card, the
appropriate cardholder’s photo is displayed.

To Align Objects in the Template Layout

Grids assist you in aligning items in the badge layout template. It can be used as a visual aid to place
items on gridlines.
Three options are available to help you align your objects in the badge template:
182 Users

• Show gridlines: displays grid points to aid with object alignment.

• Align to grid: must be activated before you start building your template. As you “click and drop”
design objects in the template work area, they will be “snapped” to the nearest grid mark.
• Grid settings: allows you to specify the horizontal (Height) and vertical (Width) grid spacing (in
pixels).
NOTE: To disable the grid unselect Show gridline in the Align menu.

To Modify Card Fields Properties

Objects are incorporated in the template with their default settings (font, color, etc.). You can modify
the settings later. For example, you can modify the appearance of any text object, such as card field,
static text, date, etc.
1 From the Badge design template, right‐click the object you have inserted (in this example, Card
information fields).
2 From the shortcut menu, select Card fields properties.
NOTE: The Properties menu item depends on the selected item. For example, it will change to Image
properties or Current date properties, depending on the selected object.
3 From the Card fields properties window, you can modify all the text properties:
• Font (name, color, style (bold, italic, underline)),
• Background (transparent or solid with a color),
• Justification (horizontal, vertical),
• Orientation,
• Parameters (word wrap, for example).
NOTE: The Set as default checkbox allows you to apply all the characteristic to all text objects that will
be incorporated in the template.
NOTE: When Text Orientation is set to “Other” it is not possible to resize the field.

To Modify Picture Properties

This applies to any picture object such as photos, logos, and signatures.
1 From the Badge design work area, right‐click the image (picture, logo) or signature that you want to
modify.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Images properties.
3 You may select another image from file or modify the image properties:
• Stretch ratio: select this option if you want the image to be centered in the image holder space,
while keeping the proportion of the original image.
• Transparent mode: if you choose this option, there is no background color,
• Draw frame: select this option if you want a frame around the picture object,
• Frame color (enabled when a Frame option is selected): select this option if you want to apply a
specific color to the image frame. The Frame color drop‐down list enables you to select a custom
color from the frame.
Users 183

4 You may check the Set as default option if you want these properties to apply to all image objects you
add in the badge template.

To Add Static Text Objects

To add text objects to a badge, first click and drop a text box, then enter the text in the Text properties
window. It is also in the Text properties window that you modify the text appearance.
1 From the Badge design tool bar, click the text icon. To resize the text box, select it and use the two‐
headed arrow to drag the sizing handles to the desired position. This also allows you to change the height
and width of the text box.
2 To align the text box, see "To Align Objects in the Template Layout" on page 181.
3 To add text to the text box, right‐click the text box, then select Static text properties from the shortcut
menu.
4 Enter text in the Enter text field; then modify the text properties as desired. The Preview section shows
the result of the changes you apply to the text.

To Add Bar Codes

The Badging feature allows users to add bar codes to badges. By default, the barcode value is the card
number, if no other value is specified.
1 From the Badge design window, click the Barcode icon, then click in the Badge design work area.
2 To align the barcode, see "To Align Objects in the Template Layout" on page 181.

To Set Up Barcode Properties

1 From the Badge design window, right click the barcode to open the Barcode Properties window.

Supported Encoding Options:

Code 39 or Code 39-Modulo 43
POSTNET
Codabar
EAN 8 & EAN 13
UPC A
UPC E
Code 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 128
184 Users

2 From the Properties window, you can define settings for the barcode that you want to incorporate in the
Badge design.
NOTE: If it is necessary to set Barcode encoding option to Code 39‐Modulo 43, set Field Checksum to
true.

To Add the Current Date

You add the current date just as you add any other design item by selecting the item in the tool bar, then
by clicking in the Badge design work area.
1 From the Badge Design template, select the Current date icon, then click in the Badge design work area.
2 Right‐click the current date to display the shortcut menu.
3 To align the current date, see "To Align Objects in the Template Layout" on page 181.
4 Select Current date properties from the shortcut menu.
5 From the Current date properties window, you can:
• Select the date format (top of the window)
• Change the text properties: font, color, justification, orientation etc.

To Add an Image
Background images can be imported from any directory. Scanned images, photos taken with a digital
camera and artwork created in any illustration design program can be incorporated into the badge
design.
1 From the Badge design window, select the Picture icon.
NOTE: The Badging feature supports most available image formats: BMP, JPG, EMF, WMF, GIF, PNG,
PCD, and TIF.
2 Drop the Picture icon in the template work area. The Image properties window appears.
3 Click the Select image from file button. The Open window appears, allowing you to select an image.
Users 185

4 Browse to the desired image, then click Open. The picture appears in the template area.

NOTE: When you import an image, you have to resize it to its original size as illustrated on the
following image.
5 Using the sizing handles, adjust the image to the desired size, then move it to the right‐hand position;
you can use the grid to align it properly. For more information, see "To Align Objects in the Template
Layout" on page 181.
6 Right click the image to modify its properties. For details, see "To Modify Picture Properties" on page 182.

To Place Other Design Objects

The Badging feature lets you add borders, rectangles (regular, rounded, ellipse), lines and pointers, just
as you add any other design object, by a click in the toolbar, then a drop in the design work area.
1 From the Badge design window, select the object you want to add (next to the Diskette icon), then click
in the Badge design work area” The Border properties window opens.
2 To modify the border properties, select the border color, the border style, and the border width. You may
check the Set as default option, then click OK to exit.
186 Users

To Place a Rectangle
1 From the Badge design window, select the rectangle tool (next to the Border tool), then click in the work
area.

NOTE: This applies also to rectangles, rounded rectangles and ellipses.

2 From the Rectangle properties window, you may define the rectangle properties before importing it:
• Line color,
• Line style,
• Line width,
• Background (brush style and brush color).

Validating Card Access

The Validate card access feature lets you view access levels that are assigned to a particular cardholder.
1 From the Card window, select a card.
2 From the Card window toolbar, click the View and Validate Access button (the key icon in the toolbar).
3 Select a site from the Gateway and site list.
4 From the Select specific value section, select the date, time and the door on which the validation is
required. The system displays the access levels for the selected door as well as the schedules assigned to
the displayed access levels. The Access Level column displays the access levels associated with the
selected door. The Schedule column displays the schedule associated with the access level.
Users 187

• Red—Indicates that access to the selected door on the selected date and time is not allowed (not
authorized).
• Green—Indicates that access to the selected door on the selected date and time is allowed
(authorized).

Card Printing
Use the Print feature to print a specific range of all the cards that are stored in the database. You can
select various filters to customize the card list. You can preview your list so that you can modify or verify
the settings (fields) before printing. You can also use the Font button to set a different font and font size
for your report.
NOTE: Whatever your selections, the card user name and card number will always be displayed. By
default, only fields containing information will be printed. If no fields are selected, only cards
containing information will be printed. If you want to print empty fields, check the Print empty fields
option. If you want to print component references, check the Print component references option. If you
want to simply preview card reports there must be at least one printer installed on the computer.
1 From the Card dialog, click the Printer icon.
NOTE: By default, empty fields are not printed. To print empty fields, check the Print empty fields
option.
2 Select a sorting criteria from the Card Index drop‐down list. These are card information fields.
3 If you are printing a specific range, check the Specific range option. Select the field that will be used to
sort the card list. For example, if you select Card number, the cards in the list will be sorted according to
the card numbers in ascending order. This field can also be used to target a specific range of cards when
using the Lower/Upper boundaries fields.
• If you want to print a specific range, you have to specify a starting number in the Lower boundary
field. It has to be used with the Upper boundary field. You must use the “card index field”.
• If you have decided to print a specific range and if you have entered a Lower boundary value, enter
the last number or letter in the Upper boundary field. This field is used with the Lower boundary and
the Card Index field.
NOTE: Only cards that match ALL the selected filters will be printed. For example, if you specify six
filters, all the six criteria must be met. Cards that do not match all the six criteria will not be included
in the range.
4 Select the Filter option if you do not want the system to search through all the cards of the system.
Filters will restrict the search and facilitate the production of the desired card list.
• Start date between—The system will include cards with a “Start date” field which is within the
specified range (Miscellaneous tab).
• End date between—The system will include cards with a “Use end date” field which is within the
specified range (Miscellaneous tab).
• Card —Check the option and then select the desired state. The system will include cards that have
this card state selected in the Card window (Miscellaneous tab).
188 Users

• Card type—Check the option and then select the desired card type. The system will include cards
that have this card type selected in the Card window.
• Select the Exist trace for the system to include cards that have the “Card Trace” option in their
definition (Card window, Miscellaneous tab).
• Select the Exist comment option for the system to include cards that have information in the
Comment field in their definition (Card window, Comment tab).
• Select Exist PIN—The system will include cards that have a PIN.
• Select Exist delete when expired—The system will include cards that have information in the Delete
when expired field (Card window, Miscellaneous tab).
• Select Exist wait for keypad for the system to include cards that have information in the Wait for
keypad field (Card window, Miscellaneous tab).
5 You may also check the Print selected fields to include specific data. If you select this field, no other
fields below, the system will print the cards that match the filters you specified above with the card
number and user name only.
6 Click the Select door access filter button if you want to include cards associated to a door.
7 Select the Based on time option if you want to select cards according to the time or select Based on
schedule if you want to select cards according to a defined schedule.
NOTE: To extend the selection, right click within Select door for access filter window.
8 Check the appropriate field you want to print. The system will include the field content as it appears in
the card definition.
9 You may save the list as a .QRP file (Quick Report) to view later using the Quick Viewer option.
10 You can also use the “Font” button to use a different font and font size for your list. The changes will
appear automatically in the sample box. Use the Preview button from the print window to preview your
report.

Last Transactions Display

The View last transactions feature lets you view the most recent transactions for the selected cardholder.
For example, the window will display “Access denied” as the type of event, and will display the date and
time as well as the event message that was displayed in the Message desktop.
The system displays the 15 most recent transactions for each category:
• Access denied events (bad location, bad access level, bad card status, etc.),
• Access granted events,
• Database events (that have affected the database, such as: card definition modified, relay definition
modified, etc.),
• Other/Miscellaneous events (these include events that were generated by cardholders),
• In/Out events (entry, exit).
NOTE: To view more transactions for a specific category, see the “Card use report” option in the
Historical Report definition menu.
Users 189

Viewing the Last Transaction

1 From the card definition window, select the View last transaction icon.
• Type: Displays the event category.
• Date and time: Displays the date and the time stamp of the event message.
• Event message: Displays the event message that was sent to the server (and to the authorized
EntraPass workstation) when this event occurred. This is the same message as in the Message
desktop (Desktop menu).
• Details: Displays additional details directly related to the type of transaction. For example, for a
“card definition modified” event message, the Details column lists the EntraPass applications from
which the card was modified as well as the operator name.
• Refresh: This button can be used to refresh the window with new transactions as they happen. As
cardholders generate events, new information is available.
• Parent: To view the parent component of a selected component. For more information, see "Basic
Functions" on page 32.
• Print: Use this button to print an exact copy of the window. For more information, see "Basic
Functions" on page 32.
• Preview: The Preview button request the selection of a printer and then displays the Report
Preview dialog.
190 Users

Card Access Groups Definition

Pre‐programmed card access groups allow quick selection of access levels for various sites of the system.
This card access group can be recalled during card programming instead of re‐entering the access levels
for each site. It is only the card access group information that is associated with the card. Therefore, you
can modify the card access group information without modifying the card access information.
NOTE: When importing cards, the Card access group may be used to assign an access level to the cards.
1 From the Users toolbar, click the Card access group icon.
2 To modify an existing card access group, select it from the Card access group drop‐down list. To create a
new group, click on the New button and enter the group name in the language section. The Site column
displays the site associated with a card access group.
3 From the Access level drop‐down list, select the access level that will determine the access to the doors
of the selected site.

Access Levels Definition

Access levels determine where and when the card will be valid. Pre‐programmed card access groups
allow quick selection of access levels for various gateways. A total of 248 access levels can be
programmed per site. In order to assign an access level to a card, you have to:
• Create schedules that will correspond to the time the user has access to the desired doors
• Assign the created schedule to the desired doors (in the Access level definition menu)
• Assign the access level to a card.
NOTE: The default access level is Always valid, all doors: cardholders assigned this default access level
have access to all doors at any time. To restrict access to certain doors and at a certain time, you have
to create a specific access level.
1 From the Users toolbar, select the Access level icon. The Access level window appears.
2 Click on New, then assign a meaningful name to the access level you are creating.
NOTE: Components that are displayed in the Doors and Schedule or Floor group columns have to be
pre‐defined for selection. To define Doors: Devices > Door. To define Schedules: Definition > Schedule. To
define Floors groups: Groups > Floor group.
3 From the Doors list, select the doors to which the cardholder has access.
4 From the Schedule column, select the schedule during which the cardholder will have access to the
corresponding door.
5 From the Floor group column, select the floor group, if applicable.
6 Click the Comment tab to had comments to the current access level. You can double‐click in the blank
space to display the edition window.

Visitor Cards Definition

A visitor card is issued on a temporary basis. It serves as a template for entering user information. You
can create visitor cards in two ways:
Users 191

• Copying the card information field into the Visitor card database when a new card or a daypass is created
in the system,
• Creating a new visitor card.

Creating a Visitor Card When Creating a New Card

1 Select the Card icon from the Users toolbar. The Card window appears.
2 Check the Copy to visitor card option. The card information will be used later for creating new cards and
issuing day passes.

Creating a Visitor Card Using the Card Template

1 Select the Visitor icon from the Users toolbar.
2 Enter the required information.
NOTE: For more information on Day Passes and V isitor cards, see "Cards Definition" on page 167. The
Picture tab allows you to display the cardholders picture and signature as well as to preview and print
badges.

Card Type Definition

A card type is used to group cardholders and can later be used to modify an existing card group or to
create reports. It can also be used to restrict access to card information for a particular operator. For
example, you can restrict an operator’s ability to issue or view a specific card group. For instance, if a
card type is defined as “Administrators”, an operator who does not have the appropriate security level
will not be able to issue, view, modify, delete, or print this type of card.
NOTE: The system is preset with five card types: administrator, employee, security, maintenance and
visitor. A card type can be assigned to a card access group. This way, if a cardholder is issued a card
type associated with a card access group, the access information of the card access group will
automatically be transferred to the cardholder.

Creating a New Card Type

1 From the Users toolbar, click the Card type icon. The Card type window appears.
2 In the Card type window, click the New button in the toolbar and enter the necessary information in the
language section.
3 From the Card access group to assign list, select a card access group or create one. For details about card
access groups, see "Card Access Groups Definition" on page 190.
4 To assign a card type to a cardholder, see "Users" on page 233.

Day Passes Definition

A day pass is issued to visitors such as contractors, employees from different divisions, customers, etc.
This menu option offers an easy way to allow access to “visitors” for a single day. Even if the day pass
cardholder does not return the day pass card, the card will expire the same day at 24:00, and will no
192 Users

longer grant access. You can use profiles that were copied to the “Visitor definition” menu to create day
passes (use the “find visitor” button). You can also use an existing day pass to create a new one.

Creating a Day Pass

1 From the Users toolbar, select the Daypass icon. The Daypass window appears.
2 You can fill out the fields or browse the card databases to the desired card. For more information, see
"Users" on page 233.
3 Check the Copy to visitor card option if you want to save this day pass in the visitor database.
NOTE: For more information of visitor cards, see "Cards Definition" on page 167. The Picture tab allows
you to display the cardholders picture and signature as well as to preview and print badges.

Creating a New Day Pass Using the “Save As” Feature

The Save as feature allows you to create a new day pass based on an existing one, only making changes
to specific information and assigning it new card number. You may, for example, change only the user
name and keep all other card information.
1 From the Users toolbar, select the Daypass icon. The Daypass window appears.
2 To locate an existing card, click the binoculars and select the card you want to duplicate.
3 Type required changes into specific fields and click the Save as icon.
4 You will be prompted for a new card number.

Batch Operations on Cards

This menu is used to modify a specific card type group. For example, you could modify the “end date” of
all the cards assigned the “administrator” card type. Individual fields will appear only when the
appropriate check box is checked.

Performing Operations on a Group of Cards

1 From the Users toolbar, click the Batch operations icon.
2 Select a user group from the Card type drop‐down list. All cards having this card type will be modified.
3 Select a card filter to narrow the batch operation among the selected type of cards.
4 Select the appropriate option from the Operation with drop‐down list.
• No notification—The system will not notify nor request confirmation from the operator.
• Notification—The system will display a window displaying the process.
• Notification and confirmation—The system will display a window displaying the process and will
prompt operators to confirm the operation for each cardholder having the selected card type.
5 Check the option you want to modify for the selected type.
• Card —If a card state is selected, the system will assign this new card state to all the cardholders of
the selected card type.
• Card count value—If a card count value is selected, the system will assign this value to all the
cardholders of the selected card type.
• Trace—If trace is selected, the system will trace all cardholders of the selected card type.
Users 193

• Start date—If a start date is selected, the cards will be valid only from this start date. This new date
will be assigned to all cardholders having the selected card type.
• End date—If an end date is selected, the cards will be invalid after this end date. This new date will
be assigned to all cardholders having the selected card type.
• Delete when expired—If selected, the cards will be deleted when the end date specified in the Card
Definition menu is reached.
• Wait for keypad—If selected, all the cardholders of the specified card type will have to enter their
PIN at the keypad after a valid card read, in order to permit access to the door (if keypads are
defined).
• Card access group—If checked, two scroll lists become available to modify card access groups for the
selected Card type. The first scrolling list defines the action to perform on the selected card type.
The second scrolling list contains the card access groups (already defined in EntraPass) that will be
used to perform the action.
• Replace card access group (Replace): replaces the current access level with the one selected in
the scrolling list.
• Update card access group (Update): updates the current access level with the one selected in
the scrolling list except where sites were set to none in the current access level. No new access
levels will be added.
• Add new access level (Add): this option is used in situations when new sites are added and the
sites’ access levels must be added to the current access level list. All sites that are set to none in
the current access level list will be updated with the sites in the new access level list.
• Update add access level (Merge): merges the sites in both lists. The new sites have precedence
over the current ones.
Examples of batch operations on card access levels

Current Access Level New Access Level Replace Update Add Merge
Site Y1 Site X1 Site X1 Site X1 Site Y1 Site X1

Site Y2 Site X2 Site X2 Site X2 Site Y2 Site X2

Site Y3 None None Site Y3 Site Y3 Site Y3

None Site X4 Site X4 None Site X4 Site X4

• Card layout: If checked, the list of card layout templates will be listed.
• Card filter: Apply the selected card filter to all cardholders of the selected card type
6 Click the Execute button to start the process. The system will prompt you to accept the operation.
7 Click Yes if you want to continue. As soon as the process is initiated, a red indicator is displayed at the
bottom left of the dialog. The indicator will remain red until the end of the process.
194 Users

CSV Files Import and Export

The CSV Import/Export feature allows the ability to import or export card files that are saved in a CSV
(Comma Separated Value) format. Importing/exporting data between two applications allows the ability
for the two application to share data. CSV files can be edited in most applications (Excel, NotePad, etc.).
You will use the CSV Import/Export feature if:
• You are upgrading from EntraPass DOS or WinPass 64 and you want to retrieve the cards created in these
previous versions.
• Your company desires to import the card database information into the payroll system. Using the Import/
Export feature will save a considerable amount of time in setting up the card holder database.
• Your company has a new database: instead of having to reprogram all the information already available
in the card database, the system administrator could export the data contained in the card database
(names, departments, card numbers, etc.) into a CSV file that can be imported into the target database.
NOTE: The CSV Import/Export feature imposes a number of rules: each field contains a specific value
format that has to be respected. For example, the card state field will only accept the following values
(0=valid, 1=invalid, 2=stolen/lost).
To Import/Export card information, you may use Kantech pre‐defined patterns or you may create your
custom patterns.

Using a Predefined Pattern

Two patterns are available: the EntraPass (1,2,3) and the WinPass64 model. You may use the template
“as is” or you may edit it.
1 From the Users toolbar, select the Import/Export CSV file button.
2 From the Select operation drop‐down list, select either Import or Export.
3 In the Available Patterns pane, select the pattern you wish to use. This depends on the software you are
upgrading from.
4 Use the Edit pattern button if you want to edit the pattern.

Creating a New Import/Export Pattern

This menu lets you create your own import/export mask that will be used to import or export CSV files.
1 From the Users toolbar, select Import/Export CSV File icon. The system displays the Import / Export CSV
file window.
2 From the Import/Export CSV file window, click on New Pattern. The New pattern window displays a list
of all the fields that are available in the EntraPass card databases. They contain specific value formats
that have to be respected. For example, the card state field will only accept the following values (0=valid,
1=invalid, 2=stolen/lost).
3 Double‐clicking on the available fields or using the left and right hand buttons moves the field back and
forth. Once the fields are selected, you can use the red Up / down arrows to organize information (this
will indicate how information will be arranged in the CSV file).
NOTE: The card number must always be selected for every pattern including a specific card. For
example, if you select the field Card #3 ‐ Stolen/Lost, you must also select the field Card #3 ‐ Card
Number.
Users 195

4 Specify the Add code and Modification code. These codes are used by the system to identify, when
importing a file, which card has to be modified or added to the card database. Default add code is “+”
and default modification code is “+”.
5 Select the Delete code. This code is used by the system to identify, when importing a file, which card has
to be removed from the card database. Default delete code is “‐”. Field separators can be: tab, space,
comma, semicolon (;) and other.
6 Select the Field separator. This code will be used to separate the selected fields when importing or
exporting data. Usually a comma (,) is selected. Keep this in mind when adding users’ last names and first
names separated by a commas.
7 Select the Date format. The date will be exported or imported according to the specified format. The
most commonly used format is YYYY/MM/DD. Other date formats are:
• MM/DD/YYYY
• DD/MM/YYYY
• YY/MM/DD
• MM/DD/YY
• DD/MM/YY
NOTE: The Use DLL feature allows you to enable a program that will convert specific card numbers. You
may use the Remove DLL when you do not wish to enable the program that converts card numbers.
8 Click OK to exist the pattern window and to specify the new pattern name.
9 Enter the pattern name, then click OK. The system automatically returns to the Export/Import CSV file
window. The pattern you have just created is displayed in the Available patterns list.
10 If you want to add or remove fields from your pattern, double‐click the new pattern to edit and make the
necessary modifications. Now you can import or export your information using the new pattern you have
just created.

Exporting Cards
Your organization may need to export the card database data into another application. You may use a
predefined template or create a custom template.
1 From the Users toolbar, select the Import/Export CSV File button. The system displays the Import /
Export CSV file window.
2 From the Select operation drop‐down list, select Export.
3 From the Available patterns list (left‐hand pane), select the pattern you want to use when exporting
cards. If necessary, you may edit the pattern so that it matches the target application pattern, else, you
may create a new one. (For more information on how to create a pattern, see "Creating a New Import/
Export Pattern" on page 194).
4 For the Transaction file, click on the three‐dot, then select the folder in which EntraPass will save the
card database content. You can open the CSV file in Excel, NotePad, etc.
5 Once you have selected/created an export folder, click OK to return to the Import / Export CSV file
window.
196 Users

6 Click the Export button; it is enabled once the transaction file is selected. The system displays a window
allowing you to filter the cards you want to export.
NOTE: For cards to be included in your file, they must match all the selected filters, if one or more
filters are not matched, the card will not be included.
7 In the Export Card’s filter window, specify the cards you want to export. Once you have made all your
selections, click the Export button. The Import / Export CSV file window appears.
NOTE: The Transaction file field shows the target file name and location. By default, the export file is
saved in the specified folder (Exportdata, in this example). The status bar (lower part of the window),
shows the number of imported cards (1, in this example). The default name is YYYYMMDD.csv. You can
open the target file with NotePad for instance.

Importing Cards
1 From the Users toolbar, select the Import/Export CSV File icon. The Import / Export CSV file dialog will
display on screen.
2 In the Select Operation drop‐down list, select Import.
3 Click the Available patterns button to select the pattern that will be used to import the cards information
(for more information on how to create a pattern, see "Creating a New Import/Export Pattern" on page
194).
4 For the Transaction file, click on the three‐dot, browse your hard drive to the CSV file that contains the
data to import into the card database.
5 Once the file has been selected, click Open. You will return to the Import / export CSV file window.
6 If no errors are present (or once you have corrected errors), click Import to complete the operation.
NOTE: The system scans the file to be imported; then it displays the results using a color code. Each
entry is identified by a color flag. A yellow or red flag identifies an entry in error. Errors are frequently
caused by the patterns. You have to select another pattern or edit the pattern you are using so that the
pattern entries have to match the source file entries. There may be errors also even if the transaction
code is identified by a green flag.

Correcting Import/Export Errors

The CSV Import/Export feature imposes a number of rules: each field contains a specific value format
that has to be respected. For example, the card state field will only accept the following values (0=valid,
1=invalid, 2=stolen/lost). The pattern used has to match the pattern used by the source file. The present
section will assist you in correcting import/export errors.
1 Click the Import or Export button to start the transaction (the following example illustrates a case of
importing CSV data). The lower part of the window displays the number of cards in the list.
NOTE: Although entries in the Transaction code column are identified with a green flag, the Card
number column is empty. This indicates problems in the pattern conversion.
2 Click the Import button.
NOTE: The Error button is enabled because the system encountered problems during the import
transaction.
Users 197

3 You may click the Error button to display information about the error. The Process error window shows
that the pattern used is invalid.
4 Click the Close button to go back to the Import Export window.
5 In the Import/Export CSV window, double‐click the pattern you have used for the Import transaction
(Custom, in the example above).
6 From the Field separator drop‐down list, select Comma as the field separator, then click OK. Data in the
Card number field indicates that the import transaction will be successful.

Tenants List
The tenant is a resident in an apartment building or an employee in a company. The tenant can grant
access to a visitor. Tenants list can be created in EntraPass to be used with the KTES.

Creating a New Tenants List

1 From the Users toolbar, select the Tenants list button.
2 Edit the Tenants list name. Default value is New tenant list.
3 Select the Tenant ID length (1 to 5). Default value is 4.
4 Select the Tenant PIN length (4 to 6). Default value is 4.
5 Select the Wiegand display format on LCD. Possible values are:
• Hexadecimal 24 bits
• Hexadecimal and decimal 24 bits
• Hexadecimal 32 bits
• Hexadecimal and decimal 32 bits
• Decimal ABA 8 digits
• Decimal ABA 10 digits
Default value is Hexadecimal 32 bits

Adding New Tenants to the List

1 Select the General tab.
2 Click the Add (+)button. You can use the Legend button to display the actual status of each tenant.
3 Configure the tenant parameters:
• Tenant name: Enter the tenant’s name (20 characters maximum). Default value is New tenant.
• Tenant ID: Enter the tenant’s ID. The tenant’s ID is an identification code consisting in a 1 to 5‐digits
number a visitor can use to call a tenant. The number of digits available for an ID has already been
configured when the list was created. Default value is 0000.
• First phone number: Enter the first phone number. The first phone number is used when a visitor
select the tenant from the KTES directory. If no phone number is entered, the tenant cannot be called
by the KTES system and will not be displayed in the KTES directory either (15 digits maximum). Default
value is empty.
198 Users

• Second phone number: Enter a second phone number. The second phone number is used by the KTES
to contact the tenant when there is no answer to the first number (15 digits maximum). Default value is
empty.
• PIN: A Personal Identification Number (PIN) consists of a 4 to 6‐digits number configured for each
tenant. The number of digits available for a PIN has already been configured when the list was created.
Default value is 0000.
• Access schedule: Enter the access schedule. For security reasons, an Access Schedule should be
configured in order to link a schedule with the tenant access rights. A tenant can access the building
according to specific time, days and holidays defined in the system. Default value is Always valid. Refer
to see "Schedules Definition" on page 107 for more information on schedules definition.
• Tenant admin level: Select the administration level for the tenant (Installer, Owner, Maintenance or
Tenant). Default value is Tenant.
• Tenant language: Select the default language used by the KTES for the tenant (System, English,
French, Spanish, Custom). Default value is Default (for more information on the system language,
see "Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration" on page 80.
• Disabled Tenant: A Disabled Tenant status allows the activation of a relay and/or the generation of an
alarm. Default value is unselected (enabled).
• Trace: The trace option allows the activation of a relay and/or the generation of a traceability event.
Default value is unselected (not traced).
• Hide tenant: This option is used if you want the current tenant’s name to be displayed or hidden.
Default value is unselected (displayed).
• Extended door access delay: The extended delays correspond to the additional time lapse a door
should stay unlocked and could be kept opened (for instance, a handicapped person could need more
time to access to a building). Default value is unselected (no extended delay).
• Extended ring: The system can allow an extended number of rings in order to give more time for the
tenant to answer. Default value is unselected (no extended ring).
4 Select the Advanced options tab.
5 Set the Tenant validation date:
• Start date: The Start date is the date from which the tenant can access the system. Enter the date in
the field (mm/dd/yyyy) or click on the calendar button to select a date. Default value is empty.
• Use end date: The end date is the date at which the tenant cannot access the system anymore and its
status is no more valid. Select the checkbox to enable the end date. Default value is unselected (no
end date used). Enter the date in the field (mm/dd/yyyy) or click on the calendar button to select a
date. Default value is empty.
6 Set the Do not disturb option. This functionality is used to place the tenant in a “Do not Disturb” (DnD)
status if the selected schedule is active. You would check the Hide tenant check box if you would like the
tenant to remain hidden from the list or for search option while in the DnD status.
7 The Call second phone number option enables the use of a second phone number immediately
(bypassing the first number) when the schedule is active. If you would like to use the second phone
number only when the selected schedule is active, you would need to make sure the Call second phone
number only on schedule box is checked.
8 Set the Wiegand interface for access granted:
Users 199

• Tenant card number: A 64‐bit number associated to each tenant. This number is used by the tenant
to get access from the KTES.
• Card holder for access granted (not available in EntraPass KTES Edition): This card holder’s number
will be the first card number to be used by the tenant to get access from the KTES.

Importing a Tenant List

In order to ease the process of importing tenant lists, an automated procedure has been implemented to
guide you through the various steps.
Step 1: Click the Import button to run the Tenant Export/Import Wizard.
Step 2: Click the Next button and select a CSV format source file.
Step 3: Click the Next button and choose the field to be imported from the list at right. Use the left and
right “hand” buttons to add or remove data fields. A different field separator can also be selected
(default is Comma).

Step 4: Click the Next button and select the tenants to be imported.
Step 5: Click the Next button and then the Import button to complete the operation.
200 Users

Step 6: Click the Next button to see a summary of the imported data.

Exporting a Tenant List

As for the importation, an automated procedure has been implemented to guide you through the
various steps of exporting a tenant list.

Step 1: Click the Export button to run the Tenant Export/Import Wizard.
Step 2: Click the Next button and choose the field to be exported from the list at left. Use the left and
right “hand” buttons to add or remove data fields. A different field separator can also be selected
(default is Comma).

Step 3: Click the Next button and select the tenants to be exported.
Step 4: Click the Next button and select a CSV format destination file. Click the Export button.
Users 201

Step 5: Click the Next button to see a summary of the exported data.
202 Users
Groups 203

Groups
The Groups Toolbar
The groups toolbar is useful to create groups so that operators can perform modifications on a group of
components or other system functions.
NOTE: Each system component has to be defined before it can be included in a group.
You can create:
• Controller groups
• Door groups
• Relay groups
• Input groups,
• Access level groups
• Floor groups
• Component Groups

Controller Group Creation

The Controller group menu is used to group a number of controllers of the same site. The controller
group can later be used to perform s, for instance (i.e.: reload).
1 From the Groups window, select the Controller icon.
2 Select the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3 From the Gateway/Site drop‐down list, select the site or gateway from which you want to group
controllers.
4 To create a new group of controllers, click the New icon. To modify an existing group, select one from the
Controller group drop‐down list, then enter the necessary information in the language section.
5 From the list of controllers connected to the selected site, check the controllers that are to be assigned
to the group.
NOTE: For more information on controllers, see "Controllers Configuration" on page 66

Door Group Creation

The Door group menu is used to group doors of a specific site. The door group can later be used to carry
out manual operations such as unlocking a group of doors.
1 From the Groups window, select the Door icon.
2 Select the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3 From the Gateway/Site drop‐down list, select the site or gateway from which you want to group doors.
4 From the Door Group drop‐down list, select a door group you want to modify or click the New icon to
create a new group, then enter the necessary information.
5 From the Door list, select the doors that must be assigned to the group.
NOTE: For more information on doors, see "Doors Configuration" on page 88.
204 Groups

Relay Group Creation

The Relay group menu is used to group relays of a specific site. This relay group can later be used to
carry out manual operations such as temporarily activating relays.
1 From the Groups window, select the Relay icon.
2 Select the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3 From the Gateway/Site drop‐down list, select the site or gateway from which you want to group relays.
4 From the Relay group drop‐down list, select a relay group or click the New icon to create a new group;
then enter the necessary information in the language section.
5 From the Relay list, select the relays that must be assigned to the group.
NOTE: For more information on relays, see "Relay Configuration" on page 98.

Input Group Creation

The Input group menu is used to group inputs of a controller site. This input group can later be used to
carry out manual operations such as shunt on inputs.
1 From the Groups window, select the Input icon.
2 Select the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3 From the Gateway/Site drop‐down list, select the site for which you want to group inputs.
4 From the Inputs group drop‐down list, select an existing group to modify it, or click the New icon to
create a new group; then enter the necessary information in the language section.
5 From the Inputs list, select the inputs that must be assigned to the group.
NOTE: For more information on inputs, see "Input Configuration" on page 99.

Access Level Groups Grouping

The Access level group dialog is used to group access levels of the same site.
1 From the Group window, select the Access level group icon.
2 Select the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3 From the Gateway/Site drop‐down list, select the site or gateway from which you want to group access
levels.
4 Click the New button to create a new group access level, and assign a name in the English field.
5 Check the boxes that correspond to the access level group.

Floor Group Creation

This menu is used to group the floors that were created in the floor definition menu. Floor groups are
also used for various operations in the system such as: manual operations (unlocking schedules), access
levels, etc.
1 From the Groups tab, select the Floor/Elevator door icon.
2 Select the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system; then from the Gateway/
Site drop‐down list, select the site or gateway from which you want to group the floors.
Groups 205

3 From the Floor group drop‐down list, select an existing group if you want to modify it; or click the New
icon to create a new group. Then enter the name of the group in the language section.
4 From the list of defined floors that is displayed by the system, check the state column for the Floors you
want to include in the group. Only floors that have the state field selected will be enabled when:
• A manual unlock operation is done, or
• An “input” is programmed, for example, as a push button to enable floors for visitors (Devices >
Input definition menu > Elevator tab),
• Cardholders present their card to the card reader to enable floor selection when the controller is
operating in stand‐alone mode (due to communication failure). Only the floors marked with an “X”
are available for selection.
5 Only floors that have state selected will be enabled when:
• A manual unlocking operation is done, or
• An “input” is programmed, for example as a push button to enable floors for visitors (input definition
menu ‐ elevator tab),
• Cardholders present their card at the card reader to enable floor selection and the controller is
operating in “stand‐alone” (due to communication failure). Only the floors marked with an “X” will
be available for selection

Component Group Creation

Trigger groups are used to configure triggering elements from a group of sub‐components.
1 Under the Groups tab, click the Trigger group icon to open the Trigger group dialog.
2 From the Trigger group drop‐down list, select an existing group if you want to modify it; or click the New
icon to create a new group. Then, enter the name of the group in the language section.
3 From the Component dropdown, select a component. Check the boxes corresponding to the sub‐
components you want as part of the trigger group.
4 Click the Save icon.
206 Groups
System Status 207

System Status
The Status Toolbar
The Status toolbar allows system operators to view the status of various devices and components of the
access system:
• The Connection list button provides information regarding applications registered to the server (operator
name, local identification, etc.).
• The Text button allows operators to view, in text, the status of EntraPass applications, gateways, sites,
controllers (KT‐100, KT‐200, or KT‐300), doors, relays, inputs. The status displayed depends on the
controller installed.
• The Numerical button allows operators to view the statistical status of all components, by gateway. For
example, you can view the number of inputs in an alarm.
• The Graphic button allows operators to display the graphic status of a controller.
• The Database button provides information on the database structure. In addition, an operator can
perform configuration operations or manual commands from the database window.
• The Video Server button allows operators to display the statuses related to the EntraPass Video Vault
process.

Connection List
The Connection List displays details about a selected application, such as: operator name, last query
date, local identification number, etc. It is also used to verify if EntraPass applications are connected to
the server.

Viewing the System Connection List

1 In the Status window, select the Connection icon. The Connection list window appears.
A scrolling list contains all applications listed together or
individually. You can select All connections, or a specific
gateway and view the details of the connection for the
selected application(s).
2 Click the “+” sign to see detailed information about an
application.
• A Red circle indicates that the EntraPass application is
not connected to the server
• A Green circle indicates that the EntraPass application is
connected to the server.
• Protocol—Identifies the protocol (language) used to
communicate with the server. The protocol is used to
inform the system on how the information is shared
208 System Status

between computers. Local identification—Identifies the label of the application on the network. This
name is used by the server to identify your application.
• Network identification—Provides the IP address of the application on the network or NetBEUI name.
• Operator name—Displays the name of the operator currently logged on this application. The
operator name is used for many purposes, such as to identify who performed a modification to a
card, who acknowledged an alarm, etc. For information on modifying the operator name, see
"Operators Definition" on page 215.
• Last query date—Displays the time the application last polled the server. The server and application
exchange information on a regular basis.
• Connected date—Displays the date and time at which this application started its connection with the
server. This date will be used to generate an event and kept in archives.
• Transactions—Displays the number of requests performed by the application (number of exchanges
with the server), i.e. report queries, for example.
• Errors—Displays the amount of errors encountered by the application. This field will reset when the
application is shutdown.
• Messages/Alarms buffered (0/1)
• 0: the number of messages/alarms buffered for this application on the server when the
application is off‐line (not in communication). This number will reset to “0” when the
application connects to the server and messages are sent.
• 1: the number of messages/alarms that were sent to this application since the Server is
operational. If the Server is shutdown, this number will reset.
NOTE: The server holds a maximum of 100,000 messages and 100,000 alarms per workstation (default:
5,000) in the buffer. You can modify these settings through the Workstation Definition menu. You can
also specify if newer or older events should be buffered. Events will be buffered only when the
workstation is off‐line (not connected to the server); and when the fields “Apply operator parameters
for messages” and “Apply operator parameters for alarms” are not selected (for more information, see
"Application Configuration" on page 44).

Text Status
The Text status allows an operator to display the status of a selected component (and sub‐components)
as well as all the characteristics associated with this component in a text form. This menu option applies
to all the system devices: applications, gateways, sites, controllers, doors, relays and inputs. The text
window contains additional buttons/icons that assist operators in their tasks:
• The first seven buttons represent system devices (Workstation, Gateway, Site, Controller, Door, Input and
Output).
• Summary / Detailed list—The magnifying glass icon is used to display components that are not in normal
condition. It displays a summary list or a detailed list.
• Summary: shows the components that are not in normal condition
• Detail: shows all the components in any condition.
• Stop display—This button is used to stop the display when the information is taking too much time. It
cancels or interrupts the process.
• Refresh—Refreshes the status of the selected components.
System Status 209

• Print—Use this button to print the displayed status. You can preview your report before printing it.

Displaying a Component Status

1 From the Status tab, select the Text Status button. The Text window appears.
2 In the Text window, select the icon of the component for which you want to view the status. If you select
the Workstation icon, the system displays the list of the EntraPass Applications defined in the system.
3 You can check the EntraPass application you want to display the status or enter a few characters of the
component name (field at the top) for the system to searched in the database. For example, you can
enter “Sec” for Security Office. The system will highlight the first name containing the entered
characters. You may also click the Select all button to select all the EntraPass applications; or select
specific components by clicking in the checkboxes next to each component name. The Clear all button
removes the check marks from the selected components. Click Cancel to return to the previous window
without any selections or changes.
4 You may check the View sub‐components option (lower part of the window) to display detailed
information on the sub‐components linked to the selected component. For example, if you selected a
controller, all its components (doors, relays, inputs) with appropriate status will be displayed on the
window if this option was checked. For more focus in one window, filter doors, relays or inputs by site.
5 Click OK to return to the previous window and apply your selections.
NOTE: The Magnifying glass button is used to display components that are not in normal condition.
When it is in a “summary” position, only components that are not in normal condition will be
displayed; the “detailed” position, displays a full status of all components.

Numerical Status
This menu allows an operator to view the number of components in a “not normal” state for a selected
gateway.
1 In the Status tab, select the Numerical status button. The Numerical window appears.
2 From the Gateway drop‐down list, select the gateway for which you want to display the status. The
window displays the number of cards for that gateway, the number of inputs in alarm, the number of
relays manually activated, the number of doors forced open, etc. This can be very useful if you need to
find out how many cards are defined.

Graphic Status
This feature is used to display a graphical status of a door controller, including the status of all its
components (outputs, inputs, power supply status, communication status, etc.) represented by colored
shapes (circle, square, etc.).
• An ellipse shape represents the controller
• A circle represents a door
• A square represents a relay
• A rectangle represents an input. Rectangles may be horizontal (KT‐200 and KT‐300) or vertical (KT‐100).
210 System Status

Viewing a Controller Status

1 From the Gateway drop‐down list, select the gateway on which the controller to display is located. You
may select “All gateways” to display all the controllers in the list.
2 From the Controller drop‐down list, select the controller for which you want to display the status.
Example with a KT-200 Controller

Example with a KT-400 Controller

NOTE: The displayed graphic depends on the type of the controller selected.
System Status 211

3 To find out which items are represented by a colored shape, move the mouse over a colored shape. The
item highlighted on the right‐hand (in the list) identifies the component.
4 Select a controller from the Controller list drop‐down list (right side of the window), double‐click the
item on which status is required.
• Red—The component is “Supervised” and “in a trouble state”.
• Green—The component is “Supervised” and “in normal condition”.
• Yellow—The component is “Not Supervised” and “in a trouble state”.
• Gray—The component is “Not Supervised” and “in normal condition”.
• Blue—The relay is activated (by an event or an operator).
NOTE: If there’s more than one controller site per gateway, the numbers between parentheses (xx)
indicates the controller number and the following numbers (xx) indicate the component number.

Video Server Status

This feature is used to monitor video servers’ statuses related to the EntraPass Video Vault archiving
process. The Video Server option can be accessed from the Status tab. The Video Server window lists all
video servers and their statuses.

Viewing Video Server Status

1 Click the Video Server icon under the Status tab. The Video Server window will open and display all video
servers and their statuses.
• Enabled/Disabled video archiving
• Video Vault: Linked to the EntraPass Video Vault
• Schedule: Valid/Invalid archive schedule
• Date and Time: of the last transaction for this video server with the EntraPass Video Vault
• : Description of the last transaction for this video server with the EntraPass Video Vault.

Enabling/Disabling Video Archiving

NOTE: This option is only available when you install the EntraPass V ideo Vault
1 Right‐click the server for which you want to enable/disable the video archiving process.
• In the contextual menu, select Enable to activate the archiving process.
• In the contextual menu, select Disable to interrupt the archiving process.

Database Status
This window displays the status of the components within the database while browsing the database
structure. The system displays all applications (connected or not), the gateway, controller sites, etc.
You can also perform manual operations directly from the window and edit components in order to
modify their configuration.
1 From the Status window, select the Database icon. The Database window appears.
NOTE: The icon identifies the type of component.
212 System Status

2 In the Database window, select the application you want to view the database. The lower part of the
window displays the actual status of the selected component as well as its full name.
3 Select a component to modify its definition directly from the Database window. For example, if you have
selected a door, right‐click the door to display a shortcut menu.
4 Select a command in the cascading sub‐menu; select a menu option.

NOTE: The command list varies according to the selected component.

5 Make your modifications to return to the Database status window. The Right‐click shortcut menu offers
the following options:
• Full expand—This feature allows you to fully expand the tree status and view all components. Only
applications that are connected to the server will display a “+” sign.
• Full collapse—This feature allows you to fully collapse the tree status and hide all components of the
root component.
• Edit—When you select an assigned component (i.e.: input) and click edit, the system will edit the
definition window so you can modify its definition and when finished, return to the window you
edited the component from.
• Limited display / No limited display—When you click on a physical component, the bottom part of
the window displays its status.
• By selecting Limited display, the system will erase the previous status and display the status of the
next selected component.
NOTE: The icons on the left side components indicate the component type.
System Status 213

Server State
The Server state dialog allows users to view detailed information on the server such as system
information, system global memory, system process memory and system disk space.
214 System Status
System 215

System
The System Toolbar
Use the System toolbar to define parameters for systems operators, security levels, event parameters,
instructions, and message filters. This menu allows you also to view the EntraPass database structure.
You will define system parameters as follows:
• Operator: user name, login name, mandatory card type, password settings for EntraPass operators.
NOTE: Mandatory card type is an optional field. If that option is not selected, the operator will be
created regardless.
• Security level: use this menu to grant or deny access permission on system logical components (desktop
display, card fields, etc.) for an operator’s day to day operations.
• Workspace: use this menu to grant or deny operators access to view and configure the system physical
components (gateways, sites, relays, etc.).
• Event parameters: use this menu to define priority, color, schedule (display, printing schedule,
acknowledgement) as well as tasks for system events.
• Instruction: use this menu to create instructions for alarm messages.
• Message filter: Use this menu to direct event messages from a specific EntraPass application to another
EntraPass application and to define sort criteria for messages that are sent to the Filtered Message
desktop.
• Database structure: Use this menu to display EntraPass physical and logical components and to edit or
sort system components.

Operators Definition
Use the Operator menu to define system operators and to determine their security level and privileges.
An operator is responsible for issuing cards, carrying out manual operations on system components,
requesting reports, arming the system, etc. For security reasons, each operator accessing the system
database should have his/her profile defined to ensure that all the actions performed in the system will
be traceable. You need to create at least one operator account or modify the pre‐created accounts in
order for the operator to use and operate EntraPass and to receive event messages.

There are three default operators created in the system. These are associated with three levels of access
rights:
• Installer (login name and password are kantech): Full access to view, modify, delete, print components.
• Administrator (the login Kantech1 and the password kantech): Medium access with limited access to
system menus.
• Guard (login Kantech2 and password are kantech): Limited access to system menus.
NOTE: You can define operators using the default operators or you can create new operators. For
details about operators’ security levels, see "Security Level Definition" on page 218.
216 System

Creating or Editing an Operator

1 From the System tab, select the Operator icon to open the Operator window.
NOTE: The upper right‐hand corner shows the last EntraPass workstation where the operator logged on
and the last login date.
2 Enter the operator Name. The operator name is composed of a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters
(including spaces). This is the name that will be displayed in the desktop message lists and the reports.
3 Enter the operator’s email (optional).
4 Enter the operator Login name. This is a descriptive name composed of 6 to 20 alphanumeric characters
(including spaces).
NOTE: On login, operators must enter their login name followed by their password in order for the
system to validate their access. The login name is displayed in the events’ details when operator
events are generated (i.e. manual operation, login, logout, etc.).
5 In the Password field, enter the password that will be used to login with the login name. The password is
alphanumeric and consists of a maximum of twenty characters (minimum seven characters). The
password is not displayed nor printed, the system displays the password as asterisks.
NOTE: The password is case‐sensitive ‐ make sure that all operators are aware of this.
6 In the Password Confirmation field, enter the operator password again for confirmation using the proper
case. If this password is not identical to the one entered in the password field, an error message will
appear.
7 In the Language section, check the appropriate option for the display language for this operator. If you
change the display language, it will be effective only when the operator logs out and logs in again. When
an operator logs out and exits an application, the next operator who logs on the application will see the
startup window in the language of the last operator.
8 In the Privileges section:
• Select the Auto acknowledge option. If this option is selected, the Manual button is added to the
Alarms desktop (See Chapter 12 ‘EntraPass Desktops’ on page 235). The operator can decide to
manually or automatically acknowledge events. This is an operator privilege.
• Select the Override workstation workspace message option, if applicable. When this field is selected,
the basic workstation workspace configuration will be ignored and the operator will receive events
from all workstations and gateways.
• Check the Privileges option if you want this operator to view hidden cameras. For camera definition:
Video > Camera > Show camera option
• Automatic video display: this option tells the system to automatically display video clips on an alarm
event for the operator who is logged on. If the Alarm desktop is configured and open, the video is
automatically displayed. If the alarm desktop is not open, the system checks the video display
settings for this workstation (Devices > Messages 2 of 2, Disable autodisplay of video views, if this
System 217

option is not checked, the system checks the video view settings for this operator: Operator >
Automatic video display checkbox.
NOTE: The Override workstation workspace message option is a privilege granted to operators. It allows
them to receive all events regardless of which workstation they are logged into at the time. If this
option is selected and the Apply operator parameters for messages and Apply operator parameters for
alarms options of the Workstation definition are also selected, then the basic configuration will be
ignored and events will be filtered according to the security level of the operator who is currently
logged into the workstation.
• If required, check Allow login to WebStation from the operator. The WebStation component must
have been registered with the EntraPass Server in order to display the option.
• Check Use workspace as report filter for all requested custom and In/Out reports to be issued
according to the operator’s permissions as defined in his workspace.
9 Click on the Security tab to set operator access parameters.
10 From the Login Schedule pull‐down menu, select the schedule during which the operator will be allowed
to login into the system. You may want to create a specific schedule for an operator (Definition >
Schedule), and then assign the schedule to the operator.
NOTE: To allow an operator to login to different EntraPass applications or to the EntraPass Server
select the field Allow login on application and/or Allow login on server (System > Security Level >
Miscellaneous tab).
11 From the Security Level pull‐down menu, select a security level that will determine which components
an operator has access to. A security level consists of menus through which an operator can modify the
database, create components, view system components and events, etc.
NOTE: It is possible to define up to 250 custom security levels; EntraPass offers 3 built‐in security
levels (Installer, Administrator and Guard) on configuration. The default configuration for Installer
permits access to all system components. The Installer must program other security levels to limit
operator access to menu commands and/or options.
12 From the Workspace pull‐down menu, select a workspace that will determine which physical
components (desktop display, card fields, etc.) the operator will be able to access for day to day operations.
NOTE: EntraPass offers 1 built‐in Installer workspace when you install EntraPass for the first time.
13 Access the Security section to edit the security features of the currently displayed operator profile:
• Operator disabled: use this feature if you want to temporarily suspend or limit an operator access to
the system without using an expiry date. If you select an operator and then check this option, the
selected operator will not be able to run the application.
• Change password at next login: use this feature if you want an operator to change his/her password
at next login.
• Disable operator on bad password: use this feature to limit the number of retries on bad password.
For example, if you set this number to three (3), the operator will be disable after three errors when
entering his/her password.
• Days before password is reset: this feature allows to manage operators’ passwords. At the end of the
number of the days specified in this field, the operator will be prompted to change his/her password.
218 System

• Use expiration date: this feature allows you also to manage operators’ password. When this feature
is checked, you have to select an expiration date (Operator expiration date).
• Operator expiration date: used with the Use expiration date feature, the Operator expiration date
allows you to disable an operator’s access at a specified date.
• Concurrent Logins:
• For concurrent logins into an EntraPass application, select Enabled.
• For concurrent logins into an EntraPass application and through EntraPass WebStations, select
Enabled with concurrent logins from WebStations.
NOTE: The WebStation component must have been registered with the EntraPass Server in order to
display the option.

Concurrent Logins
The EntraPass application allows simultaneous or concurrent EntraPass WebStation logins to the same
EntraPass application. This should be planned in advance so when you are ready to install or update your
application, you have all the option certificates that are required. Check Table 1 for details.

Table 1: Concurrent Logins

Part Numbers Description Maximum concurrent
Logins (Connections)
EntraPass Corporate Edition
E‐COR‐WEB‐1 1 WebStation Connection 3
E‐COR‐WEB‐3 3 WebStation Connections
EntraPass Global Edition
E‐GLO‐WEB‐1 1 WebStation Connection 20
E‐GLO‐WEB‐3 3 WebStation Connections

NOTE: Changes to the currently displayed profile will take effect at the next login attempt.
14 Click on the Default value tab to select a mandatory card type (optional).
15 Check the Mandatory field option to enable it.
16 Click on three‐dot to select the card type.

Security Level Definition

Security level refers to the permissions granted to an operator to access EntraPass logical components
(desktops, card information, etc.), as well as to perform some actions on those components.
NOTE: You have to program the appropriate security levels if you want to limit operator access to
commands and/or options of the system menu.
It is possible to customize an operator security level; the system allows you to create up to 250 security
levels. Each operator has a separate login name, password and a corresponding security level. The
System 219

password is case‐sensitive. There are three operators and security levels already configured in
EntraPass. These are: Installer, Administrator and Guard.
• Installer:
• Login name and password: kantech
• Security level: By default, a user defined as Installer has full access to all the system menus. He/she
can read and edit system components and has unrestricted access to the system.
• Administrator:
• Login name: kantech1; password: kantech
• Security level: Administrator. By default, a user defined as Administrator has limited access to a
number of the system menus.
• Guard:
• Login name: kantech2; password: kantech
• Security level: Guard. By default, a user defined as Guard has limited access to the system menu.

Creating/Modifying an Operator Security Level

Assigning security levels is critical to the system. In fact, if a security level is given full access to a system
menu, operators who are assigned this security level will be able to modify system parameters. Make
sure that each operator is given the security level corresponding to his/her tasks.
Items in the Security Level window are presented in a root tree with all components available for
selection. This structure makes it possible to target specific components when granting security level for
manual operations. Each security level is identified by a color: full access (green), read‐only (yellow) and
no access (red). The security manager or an operator with appropriate permissions can easily change or
assign a component to a lower level security level by double clicking an item until it changes to the
desired color code.
NOTE: Operators will not be able to see items for which they have not been given access.
1 Under the System tab, select the Security level icon. The Security level window appears with the Menu
tab enabled.
2 From the drop‐down list, select the Security level you want to modify.
• To create a new security level, click the New button and enter the necessary information in the
language section.
3 Under the Menu tab, double‐click an item until it reaches the desired status: No access (red), Read‐only
(yellow) or Full access (green). You can also check the appropriate items on the left to be more specific
about the allowed rights.
NOTE: A user with Read‐only rights will not be able to print components in EntraPass.

Defining Login Options for an Operator

The Miscellaneous tab allows you to define operator login and system display options:
• Operator login options: you can allow or restrict an operator to login an EntraPass workstation or server.
• Active windows that can be kept on the desktop: EntraPass allows operators to keep five active windows
on the desktop.
220 System

• Component display options: components can be displayed with our without their physical address. The
physical address can appear on the left or right of the component name.
1 Select the Miscellaneous tab to define parameters for the security level being defined.
2 In the Login restrictions section, select the appropriate login options:
• Select Allow login on server to allow the operator to login to the EntraPass server (Primary or
Redundant).
• Select Allow login on workstation to allow the operator to login to any application in the system.
3 The Keep on application desktop section allows users to increase the number of active windows on the
desktop. In fact, operators can open five windows at the same time: one configuration window and four
windows from the other categories. EntraPass windows are classified in five categories:
• Configuration screen: this group includes all the menus that allow an operator to program the
system. This group includes such menu items as: User menu (card, Badging, card access group,
access level, visitor, card type; Definition menu; Group menu; Devices menu; System menu; Video
menu; Custom and In/Out reports.
• Operation screen: this group includes all the Operation menu items and the Video playback option.
• Status screen: this group includes windows of the Status menu, Current recording menu and Report
state menu.
• Database screen: The following menus are included in this category: Option menu (card format,
authentication password, select languages, Printers options, Changes date and time, etc.); Items of
the User menu (Daypass, batch operations and Import/Export CSV); View Report, Operation on In/
Out, and View exported videos.
• Report screen: this group includes Quick Report, Custom and In/Out report requests and Video list
windows.
NOTE: These options allow operators to keep more than one window active on the desktop. They can
bring to front or send to back the window they want to display, simply by pressing [ALT‐F6].
4 In the Components physical address section, specify how the component's physical address will be
displayed. This will also affect how components will be sorted.
• Display on left—If selected, components will be sorted by their address (i.e. 01.01.01 Controller xyz).
• Display on right—If selected, components will be sorted by their component name (i.e. Controller
xyz 01.01.01).
• No display—If selected, the address will not be displayed (i.e. Controller xyz) and components will be
sorted by name.
5 In the Miscellaneous section:
• Hide card holder pin content: If selected, it offers you the ability to hide the card holder pin content
from the view.
• Hide Camera from video view: If you are using the Video feature, EntraPass enables you to deny
viewing permission to a specified security level.
NOTE: Checking the Hide camera from video view option tells the system to verify access permission to
cameras before loading a video view. For example, if the selected operator’s security level has access
to a video server but not to all cameras defined in the video server and has access to the selected
video view, the system will hide the camera that has been un‐selected when assigning permission to
the video server. For details, see "Limiting Access to a Specific Camera" on page 453.
System 221

Hiding Card Information

EntraPass offers you the ability to hide card information fields from view. For example, you can decide
that a certain security level (Guard for example) can view or modify card information field. To do so,
select the security level, then under the Card database fields tab, check the box that corresponds to the
fields you want to hide.
1 Select the Card database fields tab to limit the number of card fields which are visible to the operator
who is assigned this security level.
2 Select the fields (either individually or in groups) that will be hidden to the selected security level. Click
on a field box repeatedly to scroll through the different status (Normal, Hide or Read only).

Assigning Video Custom Buttons

EntraPass offers you the ability to customize five buttons for use in the Video interface. System installers
and administrators can customize buttons for use by operators in the Video desktop. For example, a
button customized for Playback with fixed delay with specific pre‐record and record delays and assigned
to a specific Security level will enable operators to trigger the actions related to the specific button. If
you associate a custom button with a specific task (play back or generating video events, additional
buttons are added to the Video desktop (Desktops > Desktop dedicated to video viewing)
1 From the Security level drop‐down list, select the security level you want to define/edit.
2 Select the Video custom button tab to assign permission to this operator. The following permission can
be granted:
• Playback with fixed delay
• Playback with custom delay
• Generate recording event with fixed parameters
• Generate recording event with custom parameters.
3 Select the option you want to assign to the operator being modified.
NOTE: Pressing the button associated with Playback with fixed delay will start a play back with the
specified duration. This includes the pre‐alarm recording time and the maximum recording time.

Workspace Definition
Workspaces allow System Administrators to grant or deny operators access to system physical
components such as gateways, sites, relays, etc. Workspaces are defined according to the type of tasks
the operators will be allowed to perform in EntraPass; creating and editing items, viewing components,
printing lists or reports, etc. Operators who are assigned a given workspace will not be able to see nor
modify EntraPass components that are not selected in that workspace definition. Workspaces can also
be used by operators to discriminate the information they want to view on screen. For example, a
System Administrator who has access to all components of the EntraPass system may want to view only
specific components. In that case, the System Administrator can define a specific workspace for that
environment and work within those parameters.
NOTE: There is only one default Installer workspace created when you install EntraPass for the first
time.
222 System

Workspace Filtering
• Hierarchical filter: items in a list will be displayed according to the item selected in the level above. For
example, when selecting a specific site (parent), the system will automatically adjusts itself to display
only the corresponding controllers (children). And if you select a specific controller (parent), the system
will adjust itself to display only the corresponding doors (children), and so on.
NOTE: If a tab is empty, verify that you have selected components from it’s parent.
• Once you have selected the Hierarchical filtering mode, it will remain activated under all tabs.

Selecting EntraPass Applications

This feature allows you to select the applications that will be available to an operator who is assigned
this workspace. In the following example, the workspace (Administrator) will not view messages sent by
the EntraPass SmartLink application because it is not assigned to their workspace.
1 From the Workspace tab, select the workspace you want to define or edit.
NOTE: When an operator is allowed to use the “Network alarms message desktop (Desktops menu),
only alarm events originating from the EntraPass applications and components of the applications
that are selected in this window will be displayed. The workspace definition acts as a filter for the
“Network alarms message desktop”.
• Select All EntraPass applications if you want all the displayed applications to be available to the
operator who is assigned the workspace
• You can also select individual EntraPass applications from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Gateways and Sites

1 Move to the Gateway and Site tab to select the list of gateways and sites that will be available to an
operator who is assigned the workspace.
• Select All gateways and sites if you want all the displayed gateways and sites to be available to the
operator assigned to this workspace.
• You can also select individual gateways and sites from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Schedules
• Move to the Schedule tab to select the list of schedules that will be available to an operator.Select
All schedules if you want all the displayed schedules to be available to the operator who is assigned
this workspace.
• You can also select individual schedules from the displayed list.
3 Save your modifications.
System 223

Defining Controllers
1 Move to the Controller tab to select the list of controllers that will be available to an operator who is
assigned the workspace.
• Select All controllers if you want all the displayed controllers to be available to the operator who is
assigned this workspace.
• You can also select individual controllers from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.
NOTE: When you select a controller, you also select all the components defined “under” or related to
the controller (i.e. doors, relays, inputs, outputs). Make sure that you have also selected the gateway
(Gateway and Site tab) for which the selected controller is defined. If the gateway is not selected, the
controller will not be available even if it is selected in the list.

Defining Doors
1 Move to the Door tab to select the list of doors that will be available to an operator who is assigned this
workspace.
• Select All doors if you want all the displayed doors to be available to the operator who is assigned
this workspace.
• You can also select individual doors from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Relays
1 Move to the Relay tab to select the list of relays that will be available to an operator who is assigned the
workspace.
• Select All relays if you want all the displayed doors to be available to the operator assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select individual relays from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Inputs
1 Move to the Input tab to select the list of inputs that will be available to an operator who is assigned the
selected workspace.
• Select All inputs if you want all the displayed inputs to be available to the operator assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select individual inputs from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Access Levels

Associating specific access levels to a workspace allows you to control the access levels that an operator
can define or modify. For example, a security guard may have the right to issue cards that are valid for a
given door or access level only.
224 System

1 Move to the Access level tab to select the list of access levels that will be available to an operator who is
assigned this workspace.
• Select All access levels if you want all the displayed access levels to be available to an operator who
is assigned this workspace.
• You can also select individual access levels from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.
NOTE: Make sure that you have also selected the gateway for which the selected access level is
defined. If the gateway is not selected, the access level will not be available even if it is selected in the
list.

Defining Card Types

This feature restricts the operator action. In fact, card types that are not selected in this menu will not
be available to an operator when creating or editing cards. For example, you may decide that an
operator with the Guard workspace will not be able to issue a specific card type such as Security. To do
this, select the Guard workspace, then uncheck Security when filtering card types for the Guard
workspace.
1 Move to the Card type tab to select the card types that will be available to an operator who is assigned
the selected workspace.
• Select All card types if you want all the displayed card types to be available to the operator assigned
this workspace.
• You can also select individual card types from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Card Access Group

This feature gives operators access to specific card access groups for batch operations according to their
workspace.
1 Move to the Card access group tab to select the list of card access groups that will be available to an
operator who is assigned this workspace.
• Select All Card access group if you want all the displayed card access groups to be available to the
operator who is assigned this workspace.
• You can also select individual card access groups from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Reports
This feature gives operators access to specific reports according to their workspace. For example, a
System Administrator may have access to all the reports that can be generated whereas the Guards’
Supervisor may only have access to all Guard Tour related reports. The reports will be generated from
the Archived Message list on the workstation desktop. Once the reports have been assigned to
workspaces, operators will only have access to reports that correspond to their workspace.
System 225

1 Move to the Report tab to select the list of reports that will be available to an operator who is assigned
this workspace.
• Select All reports if you want all the displayed reports to be available to the operator who is assigned
this workspace.
• You can also select individual reports from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Graphics
1 Move to the Graphic tab to select the list of graphics that will be available to an operator who is assigned
the workspace.
• Select All graphics if you want all the displayed graphics to be available to the operator assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select individual graphics from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Workspaces
This feature gives operators access to information that pertains to specific workspaces according to
other operators workspaces. For example, Guards in the system may have a workspace assigned to them
according to the area they are patrolling and the type of information they can view and edit in
EntraPass. The Guard’s Supervisor, however, must have access the information available to all the
Guards working in his department. In that case the list of workspaces for the Supervisor will contain all
the Guards’ workspaces defined in EntraPass.
1 Move to the Workspace tab to select the list of workspaces that will be available to an operator who is
assigned the selected workspace.
• Select All workspaces if you want all of them to be available to the operator who is assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select individual workspaces from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Specifying Security Level

The Security level tab in the workspace only limits the operators to select which security levels they can
assign when creating/modifying operators.
1 Move to the Security level tab to select the security level(s) that you want to assign that workspace. If
you must create a new security level, See Chapter 11 ‘Security Level Definition’ on page 218.
• Select All security levels if you want to assign them all to that workspace.
• You can also select individual security level from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Video Servers

The video server list allows you to assign or limit operator access to specific video servers and cameras.
For example, even if a workspace level allows access to a video server, you still have the ability to
226 System

restrict access to a specific camera for that workspace. This feature makes it easier to define or modify
permission for accessing a video server, a video view or other video menu items.
1 Move to the Video server tab to select the list of video servers that will be available to an operator who
is assigned the selected workspace.
• Select All video servers if you want all of them to be available to the operator who is assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select individual video servers from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.
NOTE: To filter video views available to an operator, the operator’s workspace must have access
permission to the video server associated with this specific video view. For example, if operators are
granted access permission to a video view but their workspace definition does not give them access to
the video server where the video view is defined, the video view will not be available to operators with
this workspace.

Defining Cameras
1 Go to the Camera tab to select the list of cameras available to an operator who is assigned the selected
workspace.
• Select All cameras if you want all the cameras to be available to the operator who is assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select specific cameras from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Video Views

1 Move to the Video views tab to select the list of video views that will be available to an operator who is
assigned the selected workspace.
• Select All video views if you want all of them to be available to the operator who is assigned this
workspace.
• You can also select individual video views from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Tasks
Associating tasks to a workspace allows you to control the tasks that an operator can define or modify.
1 Move to the Task Builder tab to select the list of tasks that will be available to an operator who is
assigned this workspace.
• Select All tasks if you want all the tasks to be available to the operator assigned this workspace.
• You can also select individual tasks from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Panels
Associating panels to a workspace allows you to control the panels that an operator can define or
modify.
System 227

1 Move to the Panel tab to select the list of panels that will be available to an operator who is assigned this
workspace.
• Select All panels if you want all the panels to be available to the operator assigned this workspace.
• You can also select individual panels from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Panel Components

Associating panel components to a workspace allows you to control the panel components that an
operator can define or modify.
1 Move to the Panel Component tab to select the list of panel components that will be available to an
operator who is assigned this workspace.
• Select All panel components if you want all the panel components to be available to the operator
assigned this workspace.
• You can also select individual panel components from the displayed list.
2 Save your modifications.

Defining Events
This feature is used to define the event messages that can be displayed to operators who are assigned
the selected workspace.
1 Move to the Events tab to select the list of events that will be displayed on an operator workstation.
• Select the events you want to display for the operator who is assigned this workspace.
2 Save your modifications.

Event Parameters Definition

Defining event parameters is one of the most powerful features of the system. For each event, you can
determine how it will be processed by the system. For example, you can:
• Direct events to output devices (such as Messages desktop and log printer),
• Send instructions to a SmartLink application,
• Define schedules that will allow, for example, to send alarms to an EntraPass application only at night,
• Send a specific event to a specific EntraPass application, etc.

There are more than 400 system events. The most common among them are:
• Access granted
• Input in alarm
• Card modified by operator, etc.
Events are associated with system components, such as doors, controllers, gateways, EntraPass
applications, etc. Every event message is associated with a system component and output devices or
group of devices. For example, an Access granted event can be defined for each individual door or by
default it can be defined for all doors. This flexibility allows for different actions or responses on a door‐
by‐door basis.
228 System

Defining Events Parameters

The Event parameters dialog allows you to customize your system events. In fact, you can specify events
that will be printed automatically or acknowledged during a specific schedule. You can also send
instructions to inform an operator of an alarm through other media (i.e.: email, pager, etc.) when alarms
are generated. By default, all events are defined to be displayed on all the Message desktops of all
EntraPass applications defined in the system. You can customize your system events by manually
associating events and components. There are two types of associations: manual and default
association.
• Default associations: Default associations are preset in the system. By default all events messages
occur on all components associated with them and are displayed in Messages desktops. You may
keep the default settings.

Default associations
Comments
Component Workstation
Default Default All events originating from all components are sent
to all workstations
Default (Specific) Workstation 2 All events originating from all components are sent
to only Workstation 2
Specific (Door 1) Default Only events originating from Door 1 are sent to all
workstations
System 229

• Manual associations: Manual associations are setup by administrator and allow to send messages to
Message desktops for specific events. The following table shows the three types of manual
associations:

Manual association
Example
Component Workstation
Specific Specific Events generated by Door 1 are sent
to only Worksation 1.
Specific Unspecified or default Events generated by Door 1 are sent
to all Workstations (default).
Unspecified or Specific Events generated by any of the Doors
default (default) will be sent to Workstation
1 only.

NOTE: Manual associations take priority over default associations. When you define a manual
association between an event message and a component, the default association is ignored. It can be
restored by deleting the manual association. Manual associations should be used with caution. The
most common use for this feature is the SmartLink application.
1 From the System tab, click the Event parameters icon.
2 From the Event category selection drop‐down list, choose a category between Access control events and
Intrusion events.
3 From the Event drop‐down list, select an event for which you want to define settings.
NOTE: By default, all events are defined to be sent to the Messages desktop of all EntraPass
workstations defined in the system with an always valid schedule. It is recommended to keep default
settings especially when these settings apply to all events/components. However, you may decide to
create manual associations if you want a specific event to generate a specific message or alarm. The
selected event will appear on all doors and will be displayed on all EntraPass workstations.
4 In the Display settings section, specify the display options: by default, all events are programmed to be
displayed in the Messages desktop window of all the EntraPass workstations of the system, and are
assigned an Always valid schedule.
NOTE: If you are running EntraPass SmartLink application, this schedule must remain to “Always valid”
or otherwise messages/commands will not be forwarded to the application.
5 From the Print popup menu, select a schedule to determine when the event will be printed. When this
schedule is valid, the selected event will be printed on the printer defined on the workstation to which it
is being sent.
6 From the Color drop‐down list, select the color that will be used to display the event in the Message
desktop. The default colors are set according to the following convention:
• Red for alarm events;
• Green for elements returning to a normal condition;
230 System

• Yellow for warnings and errors;

• Blue for other events.
7 In the Alarm Settings section, specify:
• Alarm (schedule)—When this schedule is valid, the event will be sent to the Alarms Desktop of the
selected workstations and will require an acknowledgement from the operator.
• Instructions—Select the instruction that will be sent to the Instruction desktop with the event to be
acknowledged. Instructions will only be sent when the alarm schedule is valid.
NOTE: For the SmartLink application, the instruction does not require that the alarm schedule be valid.
You can leave the Alarm schedule field blank, and the instruction will be sent anyway.
8 Assign the Priority level to the event using the slider. This determines the sequence in which alarm
messages will be displayed to the operator in the alarm queue. The priorities are preset to the most
common values (0 = higher, 9 = lower).
9 In the SmartLink section, click on the three‐dot to select a Task schedule.
10 Click on the three‐dot to select a Task Builder.

Creating Associations
1 In the Event parameters window, select an Event category and an Event from the drop‐down lists. From
the component pane (on the left) select a component and then select an EntraPass workstation to which
the event message will be sent.
2 Click the Save icon to create the new association. In this case, All access ‐ Door opened events that will
occur on the selected door will be sent to the assigned workstation computer (selected on the right‐hand
side).
NOTE: The Save icon is enabled only when the selected event/component becomes part of an
association.

Viewing Default Parameters

1 From the component pane (on the left) select a component and then select an EntraPass application to
which the event message will be sent.
2 Click on the View default parameters icon in the toolbar to view the default parameters message box. It
will show if the event parameters were set by default or manually.
3 Click again on the View default parameters icon to close the message box.

Deleting and Restoring Associations

You may decide, for example, that an event from a specific component should no longer be sent to the
Message desktop of all workstations, or to a specific desktop. To do this, you have to delete the existing
association. It is recommended to use this feature with caution.
System 231

1 In the Event parameters window, select the category and then the event you want to modify from the
Event drop‐down list.

2 Click the Delete icon in the toolbar.

3 From the Delete event parameters window, make your choice:
• Restore default: this option will apply the default alarm and display settings.
• Suppress messages: if you select this option, the alarm and display settings fields will be left blank
and ready for new information. Once you have deleted the settings, you must re‐define them.
• Cancel: select this option if you want to cancel the delete operation.

Printing Event Parameters

EntraPass allows you to print events parameters (alarm and display settings) for the selected events.
1 From the Event parameters window, select the Printer icon.
2 In the Select events pane, select the events to be included in your printout or click on the Select all
button to select all the events from the displayed list.
3 In the Select workstations pane select the EntraPass workstation (or workstations) to be included in your
printout or click on the Select all button to select all the EntraPass workstations from the displayed list.
• Print empty fields: If selected, the system will print the fields that do not contain any information.
Only the field title will be printed.
• Print with default values: If selected, the system will print the default associations as well as manual
associations.
NOTE: If you do not select this field, only manual associations (not involving defaults) will be displayed
in the report. If you do not have manual associations (Component x with workstation y), the report will
be empty.
• Print components reference: If selected, the system will print the component physical address next
to the component identification.
232 System

• Use the Font button to choose a different font (and font size) for your report.
• Select the Preview button before printing, if desired.

Instructions Definition
This menu is used to define instructions that must be assigned to events. When an alarm is generated,
the instruction will display in the Instruction window (Desktop menu) for acknowledgement. Usually,
each line will contain a single directive; the response instructions will be composed of several directives
(lines). This allows for greater flexibility when modifications are required.

Defining an Instruction
1 From the System main window, select the Instruction icon.
2 To create a new instruction, click the New icon. To modify an existing instruction, select one from the
Instruction drop‐down list.
3 Enter the instruction name/identification in the language section.
4 If the Mandatory alarm comment checkbox selected, the operator will have to add a comment in order
to mark the alarm as “acknowledged”.
5 Select an appropriate language tab to enter the instruction. Instructions are entered in one selected
language.
NOTE: You may enter up to 511 characters (including spaces) per instruction.
6 To assign instructions to events, see "Event Parameters Definition" on page 227.

Defining a SmartLink Task with Task Builder

This section of Chapter 11 has been relocated in Chapter 6, See Chapter 5 ‘Task Builder Dialogs
Description’ on page 115.

Message Filters Definition

The Message filter feature allows you to define filters for the Filtered Messages desktop. These filters
are used to view a specific selection of events. There are many pre‐defined filters such as: access events,
controller events, etc. These filters can be accessed by all operators. You can select or create filters
directly from the “Filtered Messages” desktop or from the Message Filters menu.
NOTE: For more information, see "Filtered Messages Desktop" on page 243.

Defining Event for a Message Filter

1 In the System main window, select the Message Filter icon.The Message filter window appears.
2 From the Message filter drop‐down list, select an event message type (for example: Door events or Relay
events) for which you want to define a filter. You may also click the New icon to create your own filter.
3 From the Event list, select the events that must appear in the selected filter. You may check the Select all
events option, if you do not want to select specific events. For example, for a Door events type filter, you
may decide to include all events or select the Access‐denied events.
System 233

4 Select the Door filters tab to filter doors that will send messages to the Filtered messages desktop.
Additionally, when “Access events” are filtered, the cardholder’s picture can be displayed with the event
(if pictures are assigned to cardholders). You can select which doors will display the cardholder picture
when the event for this door is generated.
5 Check the All doors option or choose specific doors for which the cardholders’s picture will be displayed
an door event.
6 From the Door filter type, select the filter that will be used for filtering Door events:
• Door filter: Only events related to the selected doors will be sent to the Filtered Message desktop
• Pictures filter: Cardholders’ pictures related to cards presented to the selected doors will be sent to
the Filtered Message desktop
• Filters for doors and pictures: Door events related to the selected doors as well as cardholders’
pictures that triggered door events on the selected doors will be sent to the Filtered Message
desktop.
7 Select the EntraPass applications tab to filter applications that will send messages to the Filtered
Messages desktop.
8 Check the All EntraPass applications option for the Filtered Messages desktop to receive all events
originating from all EntraPass applications defined in the system. You may also choose to display events
from specific applications. To do this, select the EntraPass application from which you want to receive
events.
9 Select the Gateway and site tab to filter gateways and sites events sent to the Filtered Messages desktop.
10 Check the All events option to receive events originating from the components of the gateways or sites.
You may select the gateway or the site that will send events to be displayed.
NOTE: When you use filters, the system retrieves events that are already displayed in your Message
desktop and sorts these events according to the settings of the selected filter. If events originating
from a specific gateway are displayed in your messages desktop and this gateway is not selected in the
filter definition, then these events will not be displayed when you select this filter.
11 Select the Special filter tab to filter events according to their type.
• Picture: all events associated with a cardholder’s picture will be displayed in the Filtered Message
desktop.
• Fail‐soft: all events generated by a controller in stand‐alone mode following a communication failure
will be sent to the Filtered Message desktop. Fail‐soft messages are identified with a + sign in the
Filtered Message desktop (and Message Desktop) when this option is select when defining the
Messages list properties (Desktop > Message Desktop > right‐click an event > Properties).
• Video: all video record events will be sent to the Filtered Messages desktop.
NOTE: When you use filters, the system retrieves events that are already displayed in your Message
desktop and filters these events according to the settings of the selected filter. If events originating
from a specific gateway are displayed in your messages desktop and this gateway is not selected in the
filter definition, then these events will not be displayed when you select this filter.
234 System

Database Structure Definition

Use the Database structure menu to browse the system database. It will display the entire structure of
the database including:
• The physical components (EntraPass applications, gateways, sites, controllers, doors, relays, inputs and
auxiliary outputs), and
• The logical components (cards, schedules, reports, instructions, groups, etc.).
Operators can edit or sort the system components from the Database structure window.

Viewing the Database Components

1 From the System toolbar, click on the Database structure icon.
NOTE: If the V ideo feature is enabled in EntraPass, its components will appear in the Database
explorer.
2 To display only the Physical components, select the physical components icon. When selected, only the
physical components of the database will be displayed.
NOTE: By default, physical components are always displayed.
3 To display Logical components, select the logical components icon. When selected, logical components
of the database will be displayed along with the physical components.
4 You may use the Refresh button to refresh the display in order to obtain the most recent information
saved in the server database.
5 You may select the Full Expand button to fully expand the tree structure and view all sub‐components of
a selected component. For example, if you use this button on a controller, the system will display the
controller components (doors, inputs, relays) on the right‐hand side of the window.
6 You may select the Full Collapse button to fully collapse the tree structure and hide all sub‐components
of a selected component.
7 To edit a component, right‐click it and select Edit from the contextual menu. The system will display the
corresponding definition window so you can modify its parameters.
8 To sort the component, right click the component, then select Sorted by from the contextual menu. Sort
the components listed in the right‐hand pane of the window for an easier find. You can sort by
component or name.
NOTE: You can define how the component's physical address will be displayed. This will also affect how
components will be sorted. For more on this, see "Security Level Definition" on page 218.
EntraPass Desktops 235

EntraPass Desktops
The Desktops Toolbar
Use the Desktops toolbar to define Desktops. Desktops can receive and display system events (current or
historical), alarms, cardholders’s picture, system graphics, etc. A desktop can also be used to
acknowledge alarms, display instructions, etc. There are eight (8) pre‐defined desktops. These can be
configured as follows:

• Desktop 1: All system events

• Desktop 2: System events and pictures
• Desktop 3: Filtered system events
• Desktop 4: Filtered system event and picture, etc.
• Desktop 5: Alarms screen
• Desktop 6: Graphic screen
• Desktop 7: Custom Report
• Desktop 8: Video desktop, if the Video option is enabled in EntraPass.

The following windows can be combined with other desktops:

• Instructions
• Pictures
• Custom Reports

It is possible to display more than one window at a time. Depending on their security level, operators
can modify the settings of each of these windows (background color, size, toolbar, etc.). However, an
operator whose access level is ‘read‐only’ on a given desktop cannot modify, move, maximize or
minimize a desktop.
NOTE: Only operators with the required security level can customize their desktops (System tab >
Security Level). They also have the ability to allow “Read‐only operators” to modify their desktop
settings. In this case, the changes apply only to the current session.

Work Area Customizing

EntraPass enables operators, with appropriate permissions, to customize their work area, to create a
temporary workspace and to modify the desktop properties. To define an operator’s security level:
System tab > Security Level.

Creating a Temporary Workspace

1 From the Desktop window, right‐click in the area below the menu bar.
2 Choose Select a temporary workspace from the shortcut menu.
236 EntraPass Desktops

3 Choose the Component list filter workspace and the Event message filter workspace from the drop‐down
menus in order to create a temporary workspace.
• The Component list filter workspace lets you select the specific component list of an existing
workspace.
• The Event message filter workspace (optional) lets you select only the upcoming messages, not
the buffered messages, from an existing workspace.
NOTE: A temporary workspace must include a Component list filter workspace selection to be enabled. If
you only select an Event message list filter workspace, the temporary workspace banner will not display.
4 Click OK. A banner displays below the menu bar with the names of each selection of the temporary
workspace.

5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to return to the original workspace or double‐click on the banner to create or modify
the temporary workspace.

Changing the Display Properties

1 From the Desktop window, right‐click anywhere in the window.
2 Select Properties from the shortcut menu.
3 From the Properties window that appears, select the display options: you may change the default size of
buttons, the default background color, etc.
• Small buttons: If this option is selected, small components’ icons are displayed with no descriptive
text. This option can be appropriate for operators who are familiar with EntraPass icons and do not
need an additional description.
• Large buttons with images: Icons are displayed with their description.
• Large buttons without images: Large buttons are displayed with no description.
• Display menu: check this option to view the system menu.
• Display toolbar: check this option to view the toolbar for system menus.
• Background color: select a background color for the whole work area.
• Change system font: click this button to change the font for all the user interface.
EntraPass Desktops 237

Specific Desktop Customizing

EntraPass enables operators with appropriate permission to customize their desktop. Moreover,
operators with full access permissions can permit operators with read‐only permission to customize
their desktop. They can also customize a specific desktop and transfer this customized desktop to other
operators using the Assign desktop feature. The following sections explain how to customize a desktop:
• Customizing a desktop by a full access operator
• Customizing a desktop for a read‐only operator
• Transferring a customized desktop

Customizing a Desktop for a “Full Access” Operator

Operators with full access permission have the ability to customize their desktops. To grant full access to
an operator: (System > Security Level).
1 Select the desktop you want to customize, right‐click and select Properties in the menu to open the
Desktop properties dialog.
2 From the Desktop name field, assign a meaningful name to the desktop you are configuring.
3 Select the window type:
• Floating window—a floating window can be resized and positioned anywhere in the work area
screen. For example, you can choose to send it to the back or to bring it to the front. If a floating
window was sent to the back, you may bring it to the front by right‐clicking the desktop button, then
selecting the Bring to front menu item.
• Desktop window—a desktop window is trapped within the work area. It is not possible to send the
window in the background. It always remains within the main work area.
4 To save your changes:
• Click OK—If selected, you just save your the changes, the window is not displayed.
• Click OK & GO—If selected, this function saves your changes and displays the window you have just
configured.
NOTE: When opening a desktop window for the first time, you may need to re‐size it in order to view
the information correctly. To do so, point to the frame border you want to change; when the pointer
turns into a double‐headed arrow, drag the border to exact size. You may then position the window in
the work area to the desired position.

Customizing a Desktop for a “Read‐Only” Operator

The security manager or an operator with the appropriate security level can give permission to
operators who do not have the appropriate permission to customize their desktop during a session.
238 EntraPass Desktops

1 Login, using the user name and password of the operator with ‘full access’ security level.
2 Select the desktop you want to customize, right‐click and select Properties in the menu to open the
Desktop properties dialog.
NOTE: A Permit button appears when the operator who is logged on has ‘read‐only’ access permission.
The permission acquired during this session will be valid until the operator logs out. Click the Permit
button. The operator login window appears. Enter your user name and password, and click, OK. The
temporary permission will be granted.

Transferring a Customized Desktop

Another possibility available to the Security Manager (or to the operator with the appropriate security
level) is to customize a desktop, and then to assign the settings to other operators who may not have the
appropriate security level to modify their desktop settings.
1 Right‐click the desktop you want to assign the settings.

2 Select the Assign (desktop) option from the shortcut menu.

3 From the displayed window, select the operators to whom you wish to assign the desktop properties (you
must check the appropriate checkbox). You may select operators one by one, or you may use the Select
all button.

Desktops Colors
Event colors can now be displayed in a separate column. Text and message background colors can also
be selected.
1 From any message desktop, right‐click on a message and select Properties.
2 Click on the dropdown list and choose a color for the background.
3 Select Display event color in separate column if needed.
4 Click on the second dropdown and choose a color for the message text.

Message List Desktop

By default, the first desktop is defined as the Messages List Desktop. It displays all system events. Events
are displayed with their icon, date and time, description, system components involved in the event such
as controllers, cardholder pictures (if defined), etc. When a new event is displayed, the window scrolls
up. The newest events are added at the bottom of the window.
EntraPass Desktops 239

Viewing and Sorting System Events

By default, the first desktop is dedicated to displaying system events.When you select an event from the
list, you interrupt the incoming sequence (the green status indicator located at the bottom left part of
the desktop turns red when scrolling is interrupted). By default, the scrolling will restart automatically
after a pre‐set period of time, unless the auto‐scroll parameter was disabled, In that case, to restore the
normal scrolling, click the Restart Scroll button.
NOTE: If you configure a Desktop as a message screen and a picture screen, two windows are displayed
simultaneously when you select the desktop.
1 Select the first desktop. By default, all system events are displayed in ascending order with an area at the
bottom of the screen that displays the selected event in the list.
NOTE: You may change the message color: System > Events parameters. You may also change the
events display order; see "Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops" on page 239.
2 From the Message list screen, you may change the sorting criterion by clicking on the Sequence drop‐
down list. You may choose to sort by:
• Sequence: Events are sorted according to the normal sequence (default). New events are added at
the bottom of the window. (This option is not available for Archived Messages Lists.)
• Date and time: This sort order interrupts the normal scrolling of events. This feature is useful when
you want to know when an event was generated. This time may be different from the “normal
sequence” for dial‐up sites for instance or after a power failure.
• Event: When selected, the system sorts the Event message column in alphabetical order, grouping
identical events. For example, all Input in alarm events are grouped together in alphabetical order.
• Message type: When selected, the system sorts the Event message column in alphabetical order,
grouping similar events. For example, all Site events are grouped together in alphabetical order.
NOTE: To go back to the default display, Select Sequence from the Sequence drop‐down list.
3 Clicking the Text filter button (top left of the window) will open the Text filter dialog that allows to enter
a key word to display all the events that contain that keyword in the Message list. To close the Text filter
dialog box, click Cancel or the Windows closing button (X).
4 To return to the normal display of events in the Messages list screen, click the Text filter button.

Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops

1 From the displayed shortcut menu (Message desktop > Right‐click a message), select Properties.
2 From the Properties window, select the appropriate display options.
• Multi‐line—Usually, events are displayed on a single line. You can increase the line spacing between
events by checking the appropriate option (1, 2, 3 or 4 lines).
• Show icons —You can choose to display different types of icons beside each event.
• Message type—When you select this option, the system inserts an icon next to events
indicating the type of event. For example, if the event is a “door forced open” an icon
representing a door is displayed (a hand represents a manual operation, a diskette represents
the operation that modified the database, etc.). Access events are represented by the login/
logout icons.
240 EntraPass Desktops

• Picture—When you select this option, the system inserts a card icon next to events containing
cardholder pictures.
• Fail‐soft messages—When you select this option, the system displays a plus (+) sign next to the
events that occurred when controllers were off‐line.
• Video: check this option if you want the selected desktop to display video data from the video
server connected to your system.
• The Miscellaneous section allows you to enable additional options:
• Keep card picture—When selected, the system keeps the latest card picture (if the Picture
window option is selected) until another event containing a card occurs.
• Display toolbar—Displays/hides the toolbar on the top of the Message Desktop.
• Manual properties save only—When you select this option, you have to click the Save button
(once selected, the button is disabled). The system saves all the settings defined in the
Properties window as well as the position of the window within the Messages Desktop.
• Display selected messages (full)—When you select this option, a smaller window is added at the
bottom portion of the Message window. It displays the selected event with its full description.
This feature is very useful when your Message window is too small to display the entire
description of an event.
• Display events in bold: select this option to increase the legibility of text event messages
displayed in EntraPass desktops (Message list, Filtered messages and Alarm desktops).
Moreover, if the color selected for an event message is the same color as the background color,
the event message will be displayed in black bold so that it can always stand out. (This option is
not available for Archived Messages Lists.)
• Last Message on Top: By default, event messages are displayed in ascending order of
occurrence, with the area at the bottom of the screen reserved for the highlighted event. You
can select to display the events in descending order, with the highlighted event showing above
the list of event messages.
• Auto‐scroll delay (mm:ss): Will automatically start scrolling the message list after a pre‐set delay
when the operator selects an item in the list. By default, this option is turned on with a preset
delay. You can select to turn this option off which means that the operator will have to click the
Restart Scroll button in the Messages List. (This option is not available for Archived Messages
Lists.)
• Message background color—Allows the operator to modify the background color of the message
window.
NOTE: To change the font color of system messages: System > Event parameters.

Performing Tasks on System Messages

EntraPass enables you to perform various tasks on system events. These include:
• Deleting messages
• Viewing card information
• Validating card status and card transaction
• Modifying the desktop properties (such as display options), etc.
• Play, edit and export video recordings
EntraPass Desktops 241

• Play archived videos from the EntraPass Video Vault

NOTE: Some tasks are related to the selected desktop. For example, if you right‐click an alarm event,
the shortcut menu displays tasks that are related to alarm events. For details, see "Alarms Desktop" on
page 245.
1 From the Message desktop, right‐click an event to enable a shortcut menu:
2 Do one of the following:
• New message filter: This option displays the Message filter dialog to define new message filters (See
Chapter 11 ‘Message Filters Definition’ on page 232 for more information).
• Edit message filter: This option displays the Message filter dialog to edit an existing message filter
(See Chapter 11 ‘Message Filters Definition’ on page 232 for more information).
• Delete all: This option allows an operator to delete all the events displayed.
• Card: This menu items offers two choices: View card transactions and Search card. Select View card
transactions to display all access information related to the cardholder who has triggered the access
event. The Search card shortcut allows you to browse the card database and to display information
about all the card numbers associated with this specific card user name from the View card
information window. From this window, operators can perform a variety of tasks including viewing
and validating information contained on a card, such as the card number, cardholder name, card
state (valid or invalid), card type, etc. They can also select a card and view its transactions or view
and validate a card access. For details about validating cardholders’ access and last transactions, See
Chapter 8 ‘Cards Definition’ on page 167.

Also, in order to reduce the quantity of data retrieved, a filter can be added to the user name or to the
card information fields (1 to 10) when searching for a card. Enter a name for the filter and click the
button on the left side of the field to display the contextual menu.
• Video recording: This menu items offers three options: Play, Play/Edit/Export and Play from Vault.
Selecting Play allows users to play the video event in the Playback window, offering options to snap
(copy) it and save it for future use. Selecting Play/Edit/Export offers users features similar to the
ones in the Video Event List. Operators can then display details about the event (camera, server,
comment field) and camera information, etc. The video event can also be played and exported.
Selecting Play from Vault allows operators to view a video that is already stored in the EntraPass
Video Vault.
NOTE: If camera icons are not displayed, simply right‐click a video event message, select properties
from the shortcut menu, and check V ideo in the Show icons section of the Properties
• View parent: Displays the parent of each component related to the selected event.
• Edit: This feature offers you the ability to edit each component associated with the selected event. If
Edit is selected, a shortcut menu displays components associated with the selected event. In this
example, the Site definition modified event involves the EntraPass application, the operator who was
on duty when the event was generated and the site related to the event. It is now possible to edit
any of the three components by selecting it from the shortcut menu. If the selected event is an
access event and if the card that triggered the event has already been registered in the system, it will
be possible to edit the card. However, if the card is associated with an Access denied ‐ card unknown
event, the card will be created and registered in the system.
242 EntraPass Desktops

• Send to back: This option only works when the window type is set to floating. It sends the active
window behind the main application window. To bring back to front, right click the desktop button,
then select Bring to front.
• Help: Displays the EntraPass Online Help.
• Properties: This menu item enables users to modify the display properties for the selected desktop.

Add, Modify or Delete Tagged Events

You can see, in the desktop message list, if a component was newly created, modified or deleted. Database events
are precessed by the following signs:

• + (New)
• = (Modified)
• ‐ (Deleted)

Picture Desktop
If you selected Picture screen when defining the Message desktop, it will be displayed with the Picture
window. Access events are displayed with the cardholder’s picture if you have set the appropriate
display option in the Message filter definition (System > Message filters). For details, see "Message
Filters Definition" on page 232.

Modifying Pictures Display Options

1 From the Message list and Picture, select an access event, then right‐click the cardholder’s picture.
NOTE: Send to back—This option only works when the window type is set to floating. It sends the
active window (Picture window) behind the Message desktop main window. To bring it back to front,
right click the Message desktop button, then select Bring to front from the shortcut menu. From the
shortcut menu, select Properties.
2 From the Aspect drop‐down list, select the display size for the picture:
• Design size: the cardholder’s picture will be displayed with its original size.
EntraPass Desktops 243

• Stretch —This option stretches the picture to the window size without maintaining proportions. The
picture may appear distorted.
• Stretch ratio—This option stretches the picture to the window size while maintaining proportions.
3 The Display multiple pictures option allows you to show up to four photos, depending on your needs.
When selected, you can keep the default value “Message” or choose a specific door for each of the four
photos.
4 Check Apply all the following items for all cells to assign the parameters to all cells.
5 Select the information you want to see displayed with the cardholder’s picture:
• Door: The door where the card was presented will be displayed above of the cardholder’s picture
• Event: The event message will be displayed
• User information: The User information field will be displayed above the picture.
• Comment: If this option is selected, a comment field appears below the cardholder’s picture. The
comment entered when defining the card appears in this field.
NOTE: If a door is associated to a cell (photo) and the option Door is selected (Display selected fields),
the name of that door will be displayed in blue instead of the usual black color.

Filtered Messages Desktop

The Filtered Messages desktop allows operators to display specific events. For example, you can create
filters to display events that are related to a specific controller and from a particular gateway of the
system. If this is the case, those events will be displayed in the Filtered Message desktop. Filtered
messages are defined in the Message filters menu: System > Message filters.
NOTE: When you use filters, the system retrieves events that are already displayed in the Messages
desktop and filters these events according to the selected filters.

Configuring a Filtered Messages Desktop

1 From the Desktop main window, select the desktop you want to configure as a Filtered messages
desktop.
2 Assign a meaningful name to the Filtered message desktop; then define the desktop type (Message
window, Picture window or both).
3 You can change the Text filter, to display specific events. For details on the Filtered messages desktop,
see "Message List Desktop" on page 238.

Custom Report Desktop

The Custom Report desktop allows operators to display events that come from pre‐defined reports, view
the report generation state and, when available, to play video recordings from the EntraPass Video
Vault. Security levels will determine which custom reports are available to each operator. The Custom
Report message list operates the same way as all message lists in EntraPass except that it has an extra
combo box that allows operators to select a pre‐defined custom report.

Custom reports are defined under Report > Custom Report.

Security levels for reports are defined under System > Security Level > under the Report tab.
244 EntraPass Desktops

Configuring a Custom Reports Desktop

1 From the Desktop main window, click the desktop button you want to configure as a Custom Reports
Desktop.
2 Assign a meaningful name to the Custom Reports Desktop, then define the desktop type (Message
window, Picture window or both).
3 Select the sort criteria you want to use to display historical data from the drop‐down list (Date and Time,
Event, or Message Type).
NOTE: The sequential sort option is not available for archived messages.
4 You can enter a text string that will be used for searching specific archived messages (when applicable).
5 In the combo‐box, select the custom report you want to generate. The list of available reports
corresponds to your security level.
6 After selecting the report, a Date and Time window will popup requesting a reporting date and time
period.
7 Enter Start and End date and time or click the calendar icon to open the calendar and select the start and
end dates, and then type in the start and end times.
8 Check the Clear Screen Before Process Request box in order to clear the Custom Report message list of
the previous search results.
9 Click OK. The status indicator light located at the bottom left of the screen will change from green to blue
to indicate a custom report is being generated. It will turn green again when the data transfer will be
completed and the data will be displayed according to the criteria you have selected.

To Create and Edit Custom Reports from a Desktop

• When your security level allows you to create new reports, you can access the Custom Report dialog
from the New Report command in the Custom Report Desktop pop up menu. For more information on
Custom Reports, see see "Custom Reports Definition" on page 259.
• When your security level allows you to edit existing reports, you can access the Custom Report dialog
from the Edit Report command in the Custom Report Desktop popup menu. For more information on
Custom Reports, see "Custom Reports Definition" on page 259.

To Display Custom Report State in Real‐time

This feature allows you to view the progress of report generation for a specific report in the Custom
Report Desktop List.
1 Right‐click an entry in the Custom Report Desktop window. A contextual menu will pop up.
2 Select Report State. The Report State dialog will open displaying Report generation information.
3 When the report is finally generated in the Desktop window, the information in the Report State dialog
will disappear. Click Close.

Comment Entry and Display

Also, a comment can be added to any type of event. In the fifth column from the left, a ‘‐‘sign will indicate that a
comment has been added by the system while a ‘+’ sign will indicate a manually added comment. From the
Custom Report Desktop, you can display the comments associated to each event.
EntraPass Desktops 245

To view associated comments, select the event and use a right‐click to display the contextual menu, then select
View Comment. A comment can also be added using Add a New Comment.

Playing archived video recordings from a Desktop Message list

1 Select the video you would like to play and right‐click to access the contextual menu.
2 If the video has been stored into the EntraPass Video Vault, the Play from Vault option will be enabled.
Once you click on it, the Video Playback window will open and start playing the selected recording.

Alarms Desktop
The Alarms desktop is used to view and to acknowledge alarm events. Alarm events are defined in the
Event Parameter menu (System > Event Parameters). Any event can be defined as an alarm event. Alarm
events require operator acknowledgment and are displayed in the Alarms desktop. A schedule must be
defined for all alarms (System > Event parameters, Alarm settings). When an alarm is generated during a
valid schedule, operators have to acknowledge the alarm. Alarms are displayed with date and time,
alarm description, details, instructions (if defined) and associated graphic or video clip. New events are
added at the bottom of the Alarm desktop unless you have setup the list to display in descending order
(in the Alarm Desktop Properties dialog).

Defining an Alarms Desktop

1 From the Desktop main window, select the desktop in which you want to display alarm messages, then
define the window type: Floating or Desktop type.
2 Specify the secondary windows that will be associated with the Alarms desktop:
• Display on new alarm: Will open the Alarms desktop automatically when an alarm occurs.
• Message screen: This window allows operators to view and acknowledge alarms that have an
“acknowledgement schedule” selected in the Event Parameters definition menu (System > Event
Parameters > Alarm settings) or to display the auto‐acknowledge button configured in the Operator
dialog (System > Operator > Privileges).
• Instructions screen: This window displays the instruction that is linked to the event to be
acknowledged (i.e. call the police, send a message to a client application, etc.). Instructions are
defined in the System > Instructions. Then after, they may be associated with events.
• Graphic screen: This window will display the location of the alarm being reported (if graphics are
defined in the system). For more information on assigning graphic, see "Graphics Definition" on page
109.
NOTE: An Alarm desktop may be defined as a Message window, a graphic window and an Instruction
window. These features may apply to a single desktop. When you select a desktop defined with these
three features, three windows are displayed simultaneously. For a better display, you may need to
resize and to position the windows.
246 EntraPass Desktops

Viewing System Alarm Messages

1 Select the Alarm desktop. Alarm events are displayed according to the criteria selected in the Sorted by
field.
NOTE: Alarm messages are archived and can be retrieved at all times.
2 You can double‐click the log area (middle of the window) to add a comment. The Add a comment
window opens and enables you to enter text data. Once you have finished and clicked the OK button to
close the window, the alarm event will be preceded by a + sign, indicating that an annotation has been
added to the alarm event.
NOTE: Acknowledgments and flags will not be identified by a “+” sign.
3 You may change/define the sorting order (Sorted by drop‐down list):
• Sequence—alarms are sorted by their order of arrival. This the default sequence. The window scrolls
to the end each time a new alarm is displayed.
• State—alarms are sorted according to their status (acknowledged, to be acknowledged or flagged).
When you use this option, you interrupt the normal scrolling of events. Select “sequence” to go back
to the default display.
• Date and time—alarms are sorted according to the date and time of their arrival.
• Event—The Event messages column is sorted in alphabetical order, grouping identical events For
example, all Input in alarm events are grouped.
• Priority—Events are sorted by priority (as defined in Event parameter).
4 You may right‐click anywhere in the window to enable the Properties window from which you can enable
alarm status icons:
• Red—To be acknowledged or suspended. If suspended, the suspension delay is displayed. When the
delay expires, the operator is required to acknowledge again. If the delay is not expired but the
operator wishes to acknowledge a suspended alarm, he/she has to click on the delay. The delay will
be reset to zero.
• Green—Acknowledged.
• Yellow—Flagged.
• Black—Deleted. To view alarms that have been manually deleted, select the View deleted logs from
the Properties.
• Blue—Manual log.
5 Select the Manual / Automatic buttons to toggle the acknowledgement method (automatic or manual).
Only operators who are assigned this feature in the Operator Definition menu can use this option. For
more information, see "Operators Definition" on page 215.
NOTE: The Manual / Automatic acknowledgement option is only available through the Alarms Desktop.
When the operator logs out, it will return to “manual” by default.
EntraPass Desktops 247

6 Right click an alarm message to perform additional tasks on alarm events:

• Acknowledge—When selected, a green point is inserted beside an alarm event to indicate that the
event was acknowledged.
• Re‐visit—When selected, the system flags the selected event. A yellow indicator is inserted beside
flagged events.
• Clear re‐visit: Remove the flag for the selected event.
• Add comment—Allows operators to enter comments concerning the selected event. The added
comments are displayed in the bottom part of the alarm window. A blue + sign beside an alarm event
indicates that a comment was added to the alarm event (visible when icons are enabled: right‐click
an alarm event > Properties > Show icons).
• Print event and comment—When selected, the system prints the alarm event and the associated
comment.
• Delete event—When selected, the selected alarm event is marked for deletion (the indicator
becomes “black” to indicate that the event has been marked for deletion). To view the events
marked for deletion, before you actually purge them, right click anywhere in the window and select
Properties then select View deleted logs.

Displaying Alarm Desktops Automatically

EntraPass enables users to display graphics automatically ‐ from any desktop ‐ as soon as an alarm
occurs.This feature enables operators on duty to automatically view new alarms without having to open
the alarm desktop and secondary windows associated with it. If Display on new alarm is checked the
alarm desktop (and its secondary windows) will be displayed as soon as an alarm occurs regardless of
the active window.
248 EntraPass Desktops

1 Define a desktop and customize it as an alarm desktop: for this, you have to check the items of the
Alarms desktop section.
2 Check the Display on new alarm option so that operators can automatically view new alarms without
having to open the alarm desktop and secondary windows associated with it.
NOTE: If this option is selected when defining a Filtered message desktop for instance and if the
desktop icon is selected, the filtered message desktop will be displayed (the background color of its
icon turns blue), but the windows below the Display on new alarm section will not be displayed; they
are only displayed when a new alarm occurs. If those windows are displayed (on new alarm), clicking
the “X” in the top right hand corner of one of them will close all the open windows. If Display on new
alarm is not checked, the alarm desktop and all its secondary windows will be displayed on call (that
is, when the alarm desktop is selected).
3 Click OK and Go for your configuration to take effect immediately.
NOTE: When you define a desktop as an alarm desktop to be displayed on new alarm, it is
recommended to reopen the Automatic Alarm Display desktop, to position its windows the way you
want them to appear, then to click OK and GO again. This way, it will appear exactly as you have
defined it.

Acknowledging Alarms/Events
Usually, operators have to acknowledge receipt of an alarm condition (event—such as intrusion, input in
alarm, etc.) by responding in ways such as clicking the acknowledgment button. In EntraPass, operators
acknowledge alarm messages from an alarm warning box or from the Alarms desktop window.

When an alarm message is acknowledged by an operator, the notification is acknowledged or removed at all
workstations.

NOTE: A sound can be added to alarm events. For more details about setting options for an alarm
sound, see "Multimedia Devices Configuration" on page 281.
Acknowledgement options are setup in the EntraPass application definition (Devices > EntraPass
application (selected Workstation) > Alarm tab, Acknowledgement parameters). Events that require
operator acknowledgment are defined in the System > Event Parameters.
NOTE: If the component that is in alarm is assigned to a video view, the video view or video recording
is automatically displayed when an alarm occurs.
EntraPass Desktops 249

Automatic Acknowledgement
Alarms can be automatically acknowledged without operator intervention. This option is enabled in the
Operator definition menu (System > Operators > Privileges, Auto acknowledge).
NOTE: In order for the Manual button to display on the Alarm Desktop window, it is important to close
the EntraPass session and reopen it after you have selected the Auto acknowledge option.
NOTE: Only operators granted the appropriate access privilege should be using this option. If the
Automatic acknowledge feature is used, the alarm message box is not displayed; therefore, it will not
be possible to suspend alarms. If this option is enabled in the Operator definition menu, the Manual
button is added to the Alarms desktop. This button toggles between Manual and Automatic
acknowledgement.

To Acknowledge an Alarm Message

1 When the Acknowledgement required message box appears, take one of the following actions:
• Click the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the displayed alarm event. The red status button
turns green once an alarm is acknowledged.
• Click the Suspend button to suspend alarms while doing other operations in the system. The alarm
will be suspended for the delay time specified in the EntraPass application definition menu. Once the
suspended alarm delay time expires, the system prompts the operator to acknowledge the alarm.
• Click the Re‐visit button if you want to acknowledge an alarm message, and if you want to identify it
for future reference. A flagged alarm is identified by a yellow button.
• Click the Mute button (speaker icon) if you want to stop the alarm sound.
NOTE: The Acknowledgement required message box will be presented in a format without the
Instructions window if there are no instructions associated with the alarm message.
NOTE: If the component that is in alarm is assigned to a video view, the video view or video recording
is automatically displayed when an alarm occurs.

To Acknowledge Alarms from the Alarms Desktop

Each workstation has its own alarm desktop which displays alarm events received from the server. When a
workstation starts up, alarms displayed on the desktop will have a “to be updated” status (a blue icon in the
second column). Once communication is established with the server, all events will be updated on the alarm
desktop. The blue icon will then be replaced by a red icon (alarm), a yellow icon (flag) or a green icon
(acknowledged).

NOTE: This process will occur each time a workstation have a communication failure with the server.
1 Select the alarm event you want to acknowledge (one that has been flagged, for instance), Right‐click to
enable a shortcut menu.
2 Select Acknowledge from the sub‐menu. The status indicator becomes green.
NOTE: To tag an alarm message for specific purposes, select the alarm event you want to identify;
right‐click and select Flag from the sub‐menu. You can also click an alarm message until the color of its
status indicator changes to the desired color.
250 EntraPass Desktops

Mandatory Alarm Comment

If an instruction with the Mandatory alarm comment checkbox selected in System/Instruction is assigned to an
alarm, the operator will have to add a comment in order to mark the alarm as “acknowledged” (See "Instructions
Definition" on page 232 for more details).

NOTE: The alarm sound will stop while a comment is entered by the user.
If the alarm event has already been acknowledged, a warning message will be displayed for you to confirm that the
comment should be added.

Instruction Desktop
The Instruction window displays the instructions to follow when an alarm is reported. Instructions will
only be displayed if this option is enabled during the Event Parameters settings (System > Event
parameters, Alarm settings).

Viewing an Instruction About an Alarm Message

1 You may view instructions about an alarm by selecting the Alarms desktop defined as a message and an
instruction window, or defined as an instruction window. When a desktop is defined as being both a
message window and an instruction window, the two windows are displayed at the same time:
2 You may also view an instruction about an alarm by selecting an alarm message and right‐clicking it.
NOTE: This feature is very useful when the Alarms desktop is too small to display the entire description
of an event.

Graphic Desktop
The Graphic desktop displays the graphical location of the alarm being reported (if graphics are defined
in the system). A graphic corresponds to the secured area of the system where components (EntraPass
application, controllers, inputs, relays, etc.) are located on a site. With graphics, operators can easily
view the exact location of a component installed on a site, or the status of components and devices such
as area groups, areas, doors, contacts, motion detectors, controllers, assigned to the graphic. In an
emergency situation where muster reporting has been defined, icons will indicate when all employees
have vacated the area. Operators can perform manual operations directly from the displayed component
(for example lock/unlock a door). To define interactive floor plans, see "Graphics Definition" on page
109.

Viewing Graphics in the Graphic Desktop

1 Right click the desktop icon you want to assign to graphic, name the desktop (Graphics, for example),
then define the window type (Floating or Desktop).
2 Click OK and Go to display the Graphics desktop.
EntraPass Desktops 251

3 Right click anywhere in the Graphic desktop, then, from the shortcut menu, select the graphic you want
to display.
NOTE: If the window is smaller than the graphic size, you can click‐hold‐and‐drag the graphic to move
it around within the Graphic window.
4 You may right click anywhere in the graphic to enable a shortcut menu in order to:
• Adjust the display size of the selected graphic (Fit to screen, Design size or Picture size.
• Select Auto result for the system to display a message indicating the cause of the communication
loss in case of communication failure. If Auto result is not selected, operators will have to manually
request the results for the component by using the Show result.
5 Right‐click a component in abnormal condition to enable a sub menu.

NOTE: Components in alarms are represented by their animated icons. Selecting an animated icon and
viewing its parent components allows operators to learn more about the “alarm condition”.
6 Select Full status from the shortcut menu to display the error list related to one or all the components in
alarm.
7 Select Comment to display comments already assigned to the device (please refer to see "System
Devices" on page 57 for more information).
8 Select the Double click menu item to allow operators to modify the status of a component in alarm from
the Graphic desktop. For example, if the displayed component is a door and if the Double click menu
item was set to Unlock, an operator can manually open the door from the Graphic desktop.
NOTE: When you modify the Double‐click feature via the Graphic desktop, the system does not save the
modifications. Modify the default Double‐click feature via the graphic definition (Definition > Graphics,
Design window, right click a component > Default dblclick menu item). For more information on how to
create graphics and on how to assign components to graphics, see "Graphics Definition" on page 109.
252 EntraPass Desktops

Video Desktop
If the Video feature is enabled in EntraPass, you can configure a desktop as a Video desktop.

Defining a Video desktop

1 From the Desktop menu, right‐click a desktop to bring up the Desktop properties window.
2 In the Desktop name field, assign a name to the new desktop.
3 Select the window type for this desktop.
4 Check the Video window options

Using the Video desktop

1 In the Desktop window, select the desktop defined as the Video desktop.The Video display window
appears (Intellex or HDVR).

2 Select an icon (in the lower part of the window) to determine for instance the size of the views or to
display the Panel window (a small window associated with the video display).
EntraPass Desktops 253

The following table shows the available options:

View Icon Description

Large. This view sets the window to 1024x768 pixels

Medium. This view sets the window to 800x600 pixels

Small. This view sets the window to 640x480 pixels

Tiny. This view sets the window to 400x300 pixels.

Creates a new video view

Shows panel window

These buttons appear in the lower part of the Video desktop

when the operator who is logged on was assigned specific
Video playback
permission for viewing and generating video events. This
custom buttons offer a fast way for viewing or generating
video events.
Edits the current video view

Shows the help related to the Video desktop

Closes the Video window

Video Server Status

EntraPass offers the ability to display parameters of the video devices connected to the Video server.
Operators can for example view information related to network data transfer (images and digital
sounds).
NOTE: Installing and using the V ideo feature may take a great amount of your company network
bandwidth (LAN or WAN). The network administrator may control the use of the network bandwidth
for V ideo transfer.
254 EntraPass Desktops

Viewing the video server full status

1 From the Graphic desktop window, right‐click the Video Server icon to display a shortcut menu.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Full status to display information about the video server status.
NOTE: The content of the Full Status window depends on the video server associated with EntraPass.
The following list provides a short description of the displayed fields.

Item Description
Unit name The network name of the remote DVMS system (Intellex in this
example). The Unit name is followed by the DVR IP address
Unit type The type of the unit. can be Intellex, Iris (network client), etc.
Schedule mode The current schedule mode of the remote DVMS unit. It indicates
how images are recorded by the DVR installation. The values for this
field can be:
• Regular (regular schedule)
• Single (only a single camera)
• Custom (a custom schedule has been set by the operator).
Recording in progress The active record statue of the remote DVMS unit. Values can be:
• True: is recording
• False: is stopped.
Time span (h:mm) The time interval (in second) between the oldest and newest images
in the database.
Unit version The official version of the DVMS unit.
Number of cameras The number of cameras connected to the Video server. The source of
the video data is generally a camera, but it may also be a television
station or other video source.The value varies from 0 to 16.
Record mode The record mode can be linear or circular
• (Linear: if you select this option, the recording will continue
uninterrupted until the available space is finished;
• Circular: if you select this option, the DVR will notify the operators
before the recording space is completely filled. The operator will
then choose to continue the recording or to stop it. By default, the
recording mode is set to Circular.
Recording mode The recording standard of the remote unit. The recording standard
depends on the area.Values can be:
• NTSC: the NTSC standard is mainly used in America and in many
Asian countries such as Japan and South Korea or
• PAL: the PAL standard is mainly used in Germany, Great Britain,
China, Australia and Brazil.
EntraPass Desktops 255

Item Description
Estimated remaining images The estimated number of frames that may still be recorded in the
video database before the DVMS unit space is completely filled. This
option is only useful if the recording mode is linear.
Interface version (API) Indicates the version of the application interface between EntraPass
and the selected Video server.
Number of audio The number of audio streams available of the video server unit. The
source of the audio data is generally a microphone, but may be
another audio source.
Record rate The rate code value. This value indicates the aggregate recording rate
for the DVR unit in number of frames per second. The value can be: 1,
2.5, 7.5, 15, 30, 60, 120, other value.
Total number of images The total number of images in the remote unit’s database.
Version compatibility Compatibility between the versions of the DVR unit and the
application interface used.
Number of text The numbers of text data streams available from the DVMS. The text
data source may be a cash register or other device.
256 EntraPass Desktops
Reports 257

Reports
The Report Toolbar
Use the Report toolbar to define and generate reports. These reports may be generated automatically or
requested manually. Reports can be sent by email or by using SmartLink.

There are five types of reports:

• Quick report: these are based on selected group of events (i.e.: door, controller, etc.) and event types
(normal, abnormal, etc.)
• Custom report: these are historical and card use reports. The historical report type contains archived and
filtered events, whereas card use reports contain events related to card use.
• In/Out report: these are defined according to selected doors and cards defined as In/Out.
• Roll Call Report—this report is a snapshot of who has swiped a card at a reader or a group of readers,
within a certain reset period.
Under the Report toolbar, EntraPass users may also:
• Archive— this feature allows an operator to select pre‐defined reports to view on screen or to print.
• Report state—this features allows an operator to view the status of all reports that have been previously
generated.
• In/Out Adjustment on In/Out reports to add, insert, and delete In/Out entries.7

Quick Report Definition

The Quick report feature offers a rapid method of creating reports for certain types of events. For
example, it is possible to create a report regarding all abnormal or normal access events in just a few
seconds. Quick report files may be viewed using the EntraPass Quick Viewer, a utility that allows users to
display Quick report files and all .QRP files. These include report files that are saved from a report
preview. The Quick Viewer is launched from Windows® Start menu, without the need to launch the
software.

Defining a Quick Report

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Quick report request icon.
2 From the Event drop‐down list, select the event type for the current report (access, controller, door,
relay, input, operator, manual operation events, etc.). If you have selected “access events”, the Card tab
appears in the window.
3 Among the Event type options, select the event type to be included in the report.
• Normal—Quick report can create reports based on normal events. In an access report, normal events
would be such events as “access granted” for instance.
• Abnormal—Such events as access denied (bad access level, supervisor level required), workstation
server abnormal disconnection, gateway communication failure, or all events related to a process
that is not complete (a controller reload failure, for example), are considered abnormal.
• Normal & abnormal—Select this option to include normal and abnormal events in the report.
258 Reports

• Custom events—Select this option to include your own events. The Custom tab appears when the
Custom events option is selected. This option allows the operator to selects the components that
have generated the selected events according to the setting in the “event” field.
NOTE: When you use the Event field, you have to specify which component(s) should be used or not
used. Once you select an event (i.e. access), the system displays all the doors of the gateway. If you
select Controllers, the system displays all the controllers for the gateway. Once you have selected an
event (i.e. controller events), select the controllers (i.e. list of controllers) to be included in the report.
4 Select the Card tab to specify filter details about the report. The Card tab appears only if a card‐related
event is selected.
5 In the Card index drop‐down list, specify the information that will be used as the filter. For example, if
you select “card number”, only access events in which the defined card numbers appear will be selected.
NOTE: If you select Card number, the Lower and Upper boundary editable fields display the default
numerical values to be replaced by card numbers. If you select Card user name, these fields are enabled
to receive text data. For example, you can enter A in the Lower boundary field and F in the Upper
boundary fields for the system to include events in which the selected door is defined and events in
which the defined card numbers appear but only for card users whose names begin with A to F. If you
select All, the editable fields are disabled.
6 In the Report name tab, enter a name for the report (this name will be displayed on your report).
7 In the Start/end date tab, enter the date and time on which the system will start to collect the events. For
example, if you enter 7:00 and an event occurred at 6:00, this event will not be included. To target events
that occurred during a specific time frame, use the Time period tab.
8 In the Time period tab, check the Specific time frame option to include events that match the specified
time frame. Enter the target time for the report.
9 If you want to overwrite the previous file, select the Miscellaneous tab then check Overwrite existing
output file. If you do this, the existing default output file will be replaced by this new one.
10 Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report with a
priority of 99.
11 Define the output parameters:
• Database output type: Select the database output format (Sybase, DBase IV, CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF or
text).
• Directory—Indicates where the report is saved and stored. The default folder is:
C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Sever_CE\Report\your file.xx.
• Output filename—Indicates the output file name. By default, reports are saved on disk in
C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Sever__CE\Report\your file.xx. The report filename is composed of the
Reports 259

date and time on which the report was created. You can modify the filename if necessary, but do not
modify the extension.

• Database output process—Select the appropriate output processes. A report template is associated
with each output.
• Database only: The report will be saved in the system database.
• Display (custom, detailed, summary or statistics) report: The report will appear on‐screen.
• Report printed by (sequence, date & time or event): The report will be printed according to the
specified sort order.
• Email (custom, detailed, summary or statistics) report: The report will be sent by email to a
specified valid email address.
• Send to workstation—Select the workstation to which the quick report should be sent.The list
contains all workstations where SmartLink applications have been installed. When SmartLink is
installed on two or more workstations connected to the network, you can generate reports on one
workstation and send the results to another workstation by selecting the SmartLink that corresponds
to the workstation where you want to display the report.
12 Click on the Execute button to launch the report.
13 Click on the Preview button to view the report.

Custom Reports Definition

The Custom report definition feature allows users to define customized reports and card use reports
with their own automatic execution parameters. Reports that are defined with automatic settings are
automatically generated at the specified time. However, they may be requested manually when needed.
The “Report Request” menu enables operators to trigger reports by overriding automatic settings. When
requested manually, automatic settings are ignored.
260 Reports

Defining a Default “All Events” Report

You may generate a default report that will include all events. The default report is an Historical report
type. EntraPass enables you to send an automatic report by email.
1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Custom report icon. The Custom report window appears.
2 Only the language section can be modified for the all events report.
3 You can indicate which component status to display (New, Modified or Deleted). In reports, events will be
precessed by the following signs:
• + (New)
• = (Modified)
• ‐ (Deleted)
NOTE: The checkboxes under Specific database event will be displayed only when a database event is
selected.
Reports 261

Defining a Custom Report

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Custom report icon. The Custom report window appears.
2 To create a new report, click the New icon (in the toolbar) and enter the necessary information in the
language section. To modify an existing report, select it from the Report drop‐down list.
3 You may check the Select all events option. All the 426 possible events will be checked and included in
the report. You may choose to check specific events that you want to include in the report. Move left or
right to view the other events.
4 Check the Overwrite existing output file option if you want the system to replace the existing output file
each time the report is automatically generated according to the settings defined in the Automatic
report schedule tab.
5 Check the Allow WebStation Request for historical report request through the EntraPass WebStation.
The WebStation component must have been registered with the EntraPass Server in order to display the
checkbox.
6 Check Bypass operator workspace to issue a report with no regards to the operator’s workspace
permissions (See "Creating or Editing an Operator" on page 216 for more information).
NOTE: This feature is also available for In/Out reports.
NOTE: If the operator owns the appropriate modifications rights for a Custom or IN/Out report, he can
check the Bypass operator workspace option by himself.
NOTE: When you select the Historical report type with a filter mode (Filter mode drop‐down list), the
system will display additional tabs: Components and Cards when events are selected.
7 Historical Reports Only. If you selected Historical report, check the Specific time frame option. If selected,
the time frame specified will be used by the system. Only events (event time) that are within this specific
time frame will be included in your report. For example, if you define 8:00 to 8:30, only events which
occurred during this time frame will be included in the report.
8 Select the Automatic report schedule tab to specify details about the report. For details about defining
an automatic report, see "Defining Automatic Report Schedules" on page 263.

Defining Components for a Historical Report

If the selected report is a Historical report type and if you have selected a Filter mode, the Components
and Cards tabs will appear only when the corresponding events are checked. You have to specify the
components and cards that may affect the report.
1 Historical Reports Only. Select one of the 3 Filter modes. These filters are used to target specific events
that were generated from selected components. You can select various filtering methods. When you use
this field, you have to specify which component(s) and card(s) to use.
2 Select the event(s) or check Select all events.
3 Move to the Components tab. The Components window lists all the component types that have a direct
link with the selected events.
262 Reports

4 Select an event type to display its items in the right‐hand pane. If you select Card type, the right‐hand
pane displays all the card types defined in the system. If you select Doors, all the access system doors are
displayed in the right‐hand pane.
NOTE: If an item in the left‐hand pane (Selected components) is selected, its color changes (turns red).
When it is deselected, it resumes to the default color.

Defining Card Options for a Custom Report

1 In the Custom report window, move to the Cards tab. It is displayed only when access events are
selected. It is used to add more filters to your report in order to target specific events.
2 Select the All Cards option to include all cards.When you do this, the other fields are disabled. When you
select the Use card type as filter option, you can add filters for your report. You can view the fields that
are included/excluded as filters and specify a lower and upper boundaries for each selection.
3 Specify the information that will be used as a filter (Filter index drop‐down list). For example, if you
select “Card number”, as the filter index, only access events in which the defined card numbers appear
will be selected.
4 From the Filter mode drop‐down list (None, Include, Exclude), specify if the system should exclude or
include the value range that you specify in the Upper/Lower boundary fields. When a filter mode is
selected (Exclude or Include), the “Boundary” fields are enabled.
5 Enter the value range in the Lower/Upper boundary fields according to the selection in the Filter mode
field. These may be, for example, alphabet letters (if the filter index is by names; or numeric, if the filter
index is by card number). You could, for instance, use the card user name and specify A to F in the Lower/
Upper boundary as the lower and upper boundaries. As a result the system will include events in which
the selected door is defined and events in which the defined card numbers appear but only for card
holders whose names begin with A to F.
NOTE: Users may select more than one filter for the same report using the filter index. Events will be
filtered n times depending on how many filter indexes are defined for the report.

Defining a Card Use Report

The card use report feature is used to create reports that will list cardholders who did/did not generate
events since a specific number of days or a specific date. For example, operators could request a report
including “access granted” events that were generated since a specific date.
NOTE: When you select a card use report option, the Use definition tab appears in the Historical report
window. It allows you to define the card use parameters, such as: used since a specific date, not used
since 30 days before today, etc.
The system displays five event types:
• Access denied (bad location, bad access level, bad card status, etc.)
• Access granted
• Database (events that have affected the database, such as card definition modified)
• Other events
• In/Out events (entry, exit)
Reports 263

1 In the Custom report window, select a report from the Report drop‐down list. If you are creating a new
report, click the New icon in the toolbar, then enter the necessary information in the language section.
2 From the Report type drop‐down list, select Card use report. When you select the Card use report type,
only events related to card usage are displayed in the left‐hand pane.
3 You may check the Select all events option (when it is checked the display pane is disabled), or you may
select only the events you want to include in the report.
4 Check the Overwrite existing output file option if you want the system to replace the existing output file
each time the report is automatically generated according to the settings defined in the Automatic
report schedule tab.
5 Check the Allow WebStation Request for historical report request through the EntraPass WebStation.
The WebStation component must have been registered with the EntraPass Server in order to display the
checkbox.
6 You may also check the Process separately option if you want the events to be processed individually for
each card. For example, if you want a report for “Access denied events” and “Access granted events”, if
you do not check the Process separately option, the report will contain all these events. When the
Process separately option is checked the report will display Access granted events and Access denied
events separately.
NOTE: The Process separately option appears only when the report type is a Card use report.
7 Move to the Use definition tab to specify the card use options (Not used since or Used since) and defined
periods.
NOTE: The Use definition tab appears only when the selected report type is a Card use report.
8 To define the target period, check the From checkbox and enter a date in the From field. You may select
a date in the calendar when you click the Calendar button. Alternatively, you may use the up/down
controls or enter the Number of days back, starting from today’s date.
9 When you have finished defining the report, save it. You may request it using the Report request button
in the Report toolbar.
10 Select the Automatic report schedule tab to specify details about the report. For details about defining
an automatic report, see "Defining Automatic Report Schedules" on page 263.

Defining Automatic Report Schedules

For both Historical and Card use reports
Use the Automatic report schedule tab to define automatic settings for your reports so they can be
automatically generated when needed. These settings indicate:
• The frequency: when the report should be generated (none, weekly, monthly, once)
• The time period covered
• The output process (display, print, etc.)
• The output type (dBase, Sybase, CSV, PDF)
• The destination (workstation)
• The language and the filename
1 In the Custom report window, move to the Automatic report schedule tab.
2 From the Schedule mode drop‐down list, select the frequency at which the report should be executed:
264 Reports

• Select None if you want the report to be manually requested (see Report Request).
• Select Weekly if you want a report every week. You have to check the day on which the report should
be executed automatically.
• Select Monthly if the report is needed once a month. You have to specify the day (ex. the second
Friday of the month or the 15th day of the month) when the report will be executed automatically.
• Select Once if you want the report to be executed automatically on a specified date.
3 Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report with a
priority of 99.
4 In the Start at this time field, enter the time at which the system will start executing the report.
5 Specify the Scheduling parameters.
NOTE: These settings are ignored when the report is requested manually by an operator.
• Start this many days back—The report will start collecting events according to the number of days
specified in this field. It is based on the present date.
• Start at this time—Once you specify the amount of days, specify the starting time (i.e.: 7:00am). For
example, if you enter 7:00, events that occurred at 6:00 will not be included in the report.
• Stop this many days back—The report will include the specified number of days entered in this field.
It is based on the present date.
• Stop at this time—Once you specify the number of days, specify the ending time (i.e.:5:00 pm), that
is, the day on which the system will stop collecting data; you may also specify the time at which it
will stop. For example, if you enter 7:00 and an event occurred at 8:00, then this event will not be
included. To target events that occurred during a specific time frame, you have to use the Specific
time frame option.
NOTE: The start and end time are only used for the first day and last day, for example if you start
collecting events on Monday at 8:00 and end on Friday at 17:00 all events between 8:00 Monday and
17:00 Friday will be included. The system does not use the start and end time for each day but for the
whole period.

Specifying Additional Options for an Automatic Report

1 Select the More button to add more settings to the automatic scheduled report. When you click the
More button, the Automatic report output definition window appears.
2 From the Output type drop‐down list, select the output format of the report. You may choose Sybase,
Dbase IV, CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF or text formats.
NOTE: From the Database output process, you can select Email custom report if you want this report to
be automatically sent to specified recipients. If you choose this option, select the Email tab to enter
the recipients’ email address in the Send Email to field. EntraPass enables you to protect the report by
a password before emailing it.
3 You may check the Automatic filename (...) option. The default file name is YYY_MM_DD‐HH_MM_SS.X,
indicating the year_ month_ day‐hours, minutes_second.file extension.
NOTE: For details on the output type and the output process, refer to the table below. It gives a
comparison of the different report formats.
Reports 265

The following table shows the difference between these database formats and their output file formats:

Database Description
SyBase The new EntraPass database.
Dbase IV A popular database management system format for storing data that is sup‐
ported by nearly all database management and spreadsheet systems. Even
systems that do not use the DBase format internally are able to import and
export data in Dbase format. Output formats are .db and .rdf.
CSV Will save the report in a comma separated values format (yourfile.csv). A data
format in which each piece of data is separated by a comma. This is a popular
format for transferring data from one application to another; because most
database systems are able to import and export comma‐delimited data.
Excel Microsoft Excel file type.
PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is an open standard for document
exchange. It can be opened with the free application Adobe Reader.
RTF The Rich Text Format (RTF) is a proprietary document file format with
published specification for cross‐platform document interchange.
Most word processors are able to read and write some versions of RTF.
text A text file is a kind of file that is structured as a sequence of lines. Can
be opened by a large number of editing tools.

4 From the Output process drop‐down list, select the report template. It will be used with the requested
report. For details on the output format, see "Defining a Report Output Format" on page 265.

Defining a Report Output Format

Historical and Card use reports
1 If you select Database only (CSV, Sybase and Dbase): The report will include the following information:
event sequence, date and time, event message, description types (displays a specific number that
identifies a component in the system), description names (displays the name of the component as
defined in the system—name of description type number) as well as the card number (for card‐related
events).
NOTE: A database only report is saved in the reports folder in the specified format. It will not be
printed nor displayed.
2 If you select Display custom report ‐ Display card last transaction report (Sybase Only): The report will
automatically be displayed on your desktop when completed. You can customize the report before you
print it manually. For more information on how to customize the report, see "Previewing Reports" on
page 274. The report will include the following information: event sequence, date and time, event
message, card number (for card‐related events) and descriptions 1 to 4 which contain details on the
event.
266 Reports

3 Report printed by sequence (Sybase Only): This report is sorted by event sequence number (order in
which they were generated by the system) and printed automatically at the printer of the destination
workstation.
4 Report printed by date and time (Sybase Only): This report is sorted by date and time and printed
automatically at the printer of the destination workstation.
NOTE: The printed reports (option three and four) will be saved in the reports folder in the specified
format. They will also be printed but not displayed.
5 Report printed by event (Sybase Only): This report is sorted by event message (alphabetically) and
printed automatically at the printer of the destination workstation. The report is saved in the reports
folder in the specified format, but not displayed.
In/Out Reports
In/Out reports will be saved in the reports folder, they are not printed nor displayed. User have to
manually retrieve the report to view it, they can also use the “Archive” menu.
1 Single file with all data (CSV only): The report is generated in one file containing the data and the
descriptions (date & time, transaction ID, card number, card user name and door description).
2 Database with transactions (CSV & DBase IV): The report is generated with all the data and transactions
in one single file. It includes the date & time, the transaction ID, the card number and the card user
name.
3 Display In/Out report (Sybase only): The report will automatically be displayed on the desktop when
completed. You can customize the report before you print it manually. It contains: the card number, card
user name, entry time, exit time, contents of the card information field as selected in report definition
and total hours per cardholder. For more information on how to customize the report, see "Previewing
In/Out Reports" on page 275.
4 Two (2) databases with all data (Sybase & DbaseIV): the report will be generated in two separate files:
• One file containing: date, time, event message (transaction type), pkcard, pkdoor, pkdoorgroup.
• One file containing: pk description (explaining pkcard, pkdoor and pkdoorgroup), card number,
object and contents of card information field selected in the report definition menu.
NOTE: PK refers to a component unique number within the system
5 Single database with all data (Sybase & DbaseIV): The report will be generated in one file containing the
data and the descriptions (date and time, transaction ID, card number, card user name, door description
and sequence).
6 CSV compilation In/Out (CSV Only): The report will be generated in two files. One file containing a total,
of hours for instance, by department, and the other file containing detailed information. Depending on
the number of days covered by the report, a “day” column will be reserved for each day.
• Automatic filename—Select this feature if you want the system to automatically use the date and
time as the filename. You cannot use the “overwrite existing output file” when you use this option.
• Filename—If you wish to overwrite the same report (for example—every week), you can enter a
filename here and when the report will be executed according to specifications, the new report will
replace the oldest report.
• Destination: this is where the report should be sent/printed automatically.You can also use the
Overwrite existing output option to specify a different destination file.
Reports 267

• Report language—This field is used to include additional information in your report. Select from the
displayed list.

Requesting Reports
With this feature operators can request pre‐defined Historical reports or Card use reports that were
created using the Custom Report menu. Operators can also email the report to one or multiple
recipients.
NOTE: If your report contain automatic settings, these will be ignored. You must indicate new settings.
1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Report Request icon. The Report request window appears.
2 In the Report list display pane, select the report that you want to execute.
3 Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report with a
priority of 99.
4 You may define output parameters, including the database output type format (Sybase, DBase IV, CSV,
PDF, Excel, RTF or Text), the target folder, the output filename, etc. For more information on how to
select an output format, see "Defining a Report Output Format" on page 265.
NOTE: If a Card use report is selected, the “Date and time” section is disabled.
5 Click Execute. A system message informs you that the report is being processed. The Report options
window appears and is then minimized to the task bar.

6 Select the Preview button to define the report and filter options. This will increase the readability of the
report by adding, for instance, alternating band colors, framing events, icons in the reports, etc., or by
sorting events in the report (by event ID number, alphabetical order or date and time).
7 Enter the description in the Search description field. The report is updated in real‐time when you enter a
filter option.
8 You may use Preview to preview the report or the Properties button to view details about the report.
When you click the Preview button, the system will display the result of the report. From that window,
you can save the report in various formats or print the report.

Requesting an Event Report

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Report request icon. The Report request window appears.
2 Specify the Start and End time. By default, the end date and time are set to the system time.
3 Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report with a
priority of 99.
268 Reports

4 You may specify the output parameters or leave these to default.

NOTE: It is important to know the differences among the output type and processes. For details, see
"Defining a Report Output Format" on page 265.
5 You may select the Report state icon from the toolbar to view the report status.
6 Select the Archive icon from the toolbar to view the report. The default report name is YYYY_MM_DD_‐
HH_MM_SS.db.

Emailed Reports
EntraPass allows you to email any report to one or more recipients. The email feature is enabled when
defining an EntraPass workstation and when specifying the report database output format.
Custom, In/Out and quick reports can be sent by email to any valid email address.

Defining a Report to Email

1 Under the Report toolbar, select Quick report request, Report request or In/Out request.
2 In the Report List, select the report you want to email.
3 Define the report’s parameters.
4 In the Database Output Process drop down menu, select the email (detailed, summary or statistics)
report you want to send.
5 Click the Define Email parameters button to open the Automatic report output definition window.
6 In the Send Email to enter the recipient’s email address. For multiple recipients, addresses are separated
by a semi‐colon.
7 Click OK to close this window.
NOTE: Sending reports does not compromise the security of your data. In fact, EntraPass allows you to
protect rpf files with a password. Only recipients with the correct password will be able to access the
file. You cannot set a password to CSV files.
8 Click the Execute button to send the report to the specified recipient. The report will be sent to the
workstation selected in the Send to workstation drop‐down list and to the specified recipients.

Send Reports to Workstations Using SmartLink

You can send reports to a workstation where SmartLink is installed (even though EntraPass is not
installed on that machine). When SmartLink is installed on two or more workstations connected to the
network, you can generate reports on one workstation and send the results to another workstation,
using SmartLink.
1 Under the Report toolbar, click the icon that corresponds to the type of report you want to send. This
option is available in the Quick Report Request dialog, the Report Request dialog and the In/Out Request
dialog.
2 In order to send a report to another SmartLink workstation, you must first select an existing report or
define a new one.
3 In the Send to workstation drop down menu, select the SmartLink that corresponds to the workstation
where you want to send the report.
Reports 269

• When the report is ready, it will popup on the recipient screen.

• If SmartLink is running as a service, the report will not be displayed on screen. But it will be saved to
the Reports directory.

In/Out Reports Definition

This feature is used to define customized In/Out reports with automatic execution parameters.
NOTE: Reports can be defined with automatic settings so they are generated when you need them or
can be requested manually using the “In/Out report request” icon. When requested manually,
automatic settings are ignored.

Defining In/Out Reports

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the In/Out Report icon.
2 If you select the Doors option, only the doors defined as “In/Out” doors (in the Door definition menu)
are displayed. Check the View deleted doors to add deleted doors to the list. When you select the Door
group option, the View deleted doors option is disabled. The system displays the door groups of your
system; then you may select one.
3 Check the Overwrite existing output file option if you want the system to replace the existing file. If you
leave this option unchecked, the system will create another output file.
4 Select Display Hours and Minutes to add them to the report.
5 Select the Card tab to add other filters for the report.

NOTE: The Card type tab appears when the Use card type as filter box is checked.
6 Select a filter index, then select a filter mode (None, Include, Exclude). If you have selected a filter index,
select the filter mode and enter the value range in the Upper/Lower boundary fields. To include all the
fields, leave the filter mode to None. For example, if you select Card number as the Filter index, leave the
filter mode to None so that all events triggered by cards will appear in the report.
7 To add information in the sort criteria, select an item from the Additional information drop‐down list.
NOTE: Repeat these steps for all the card information fields that are listed in the filter index field. You
could use the card user name and specify A to F in the Upper/Lower boundary fields for the system to
include events in which the defined card numbers appear but only for card users whose names begin
with A to F (G and up will not be included even if the card number is included in the range).
8 Select the Card type tab if it is displayed, then specify the Card types that will be included in the report.
This tab appears if you have checked the Use card type filter option.
270 Reports

9 Select the Automatic report schedule tab to specify information for automatic reports. For details, see
"Defining Automatic Report Schedules" on page 263.
10 Select the Rules tab to define the rules of In/Out in employee time reports. Rules can be created to
define periods of time as specific values. For example, all employee entries between 7:50 AM and 8:15
AM can be defined as the value of 8:00 AM on reports.
• Select the Keep only the first entry (first IN) and the last exit (last OUT) option to get the time
lapsed between the first reading of the card on an entry reader and the last reading of the card on an
exit reader.

In/Out Reports Request

The Request In/Out reports feature is used to request the pre‐defined In/Out reports that were created
using the In/Out Report Definition menu. This feature is useful when you want to override automatic
settings.
NOTE: If the report contains automatic settings, these will be ignored.

Requesting a In/Out Report Manually

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the In/Out Request icon. The In/Out Request report window appears.
2 From the Report list display pane, select the In/Out report that you want to execute.
3 Specify Date and time as well as the Output parameters.
4 Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report with a
priority of 99.
5 Click Execute to trigger the report.
NOTE: The In/Out report is automatically saved in the output folder of the Application selected in the
Send to workstation field.
NOTE: For the Sybase output type, the system displays a report preview window. For other output
formats, you will have to retrieve the report manually since it is not printed or displayed. To view all
the reports that have been generated, use the Archive button in the Report toolbar. For details on
reports output formats, see "Defining a Report Output Format" on page 265.

Operations on In/Out
Use the Operation on In/Out feature to manually insert, add or delete In/Out transactions in the
database. This feature is useful for an organization using the In/Out feature for the payroll system, for
instance.

Adding a Transaction in the In/Out Database

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Operations on In/Out icon.
2 Enter the Card number for which you want to modify the In/Out transactions, then click the Load button.
If you do not know the number, use the Find button.
NOTE: The card number field is mandatory to start loading.
Reports 271

3 Select the View deleted transactions option if you want to view the transactions that were previously
deleted. Deleted transactions are marked with an “X” in the Delete column.
4 Check the Find deleted cards option if you want to find the deleted cards. This does not apply to entries
that were added manually.
5 Specify the Start date, the day on which the system will start to collect the events, by clicking the
Calendar icon and selecting a specific date. Only events that occurred on this date and after are
displayed.
NOTE: The Start date is mandatory to start loading.
6 Specify the End date, that is the day and time on which the system will stop collecting events. Only
events that occurred on the specified date and before are displayed. If you do not specify an end date,
the system will include all the data up to the present day time.
7 In the Site drop‐down list, select the appropriate site to view the In/Out doors.
NOTE: The gateway is mandatory to start loading.
8 You may check the All Doors option, then all the doors displayed under this field will be selected. You
may also select specific doors. All the In/Out events that were generated for the selected doors will be
displayed.
9 Check the View deleted doors option so that even doors that are no longer defined as In/Out doors (but
that have been defined as In/Out) will be displayed.
NOTE: Doors are mandatory to start loading.
10 Enter the necessary information in the transaction table. The transaction table displays the transactions
for the selected cardholder:
• The Delete column indicates transactions that have been deleted (if the View deleted transactions
option is checked). These are identified by an X.
• The Date column indicates the date on which the transaction occurred. Use this field to specify the
date when you manually insert a new transaction.
• The Time column indicates the time at which the cardholder entered or exited an area. Use this field
to specify the time (entry or exit) when manually inserting a new transaction.
• The Transaction column indicates the transaction type. For every entry transaction, there should be
an exit transaction.
• Entry—indicates that this is an entry transaction generated when a cardholder presented his/
her card at a door defined as entry.
• Exit—Indicates that this is an exit transaction generated when a cardholder presented his/her
card at a door defined as “Exit”.
• Manual entry—Indicates that this is an entry transaction that was manually inserted or added in
the system. When you manually insert a transaction, you have to specify if this transaction is an
“Entry” transaction or an exit transaction. For every entry, there should be an exit.
• Manual exit—Indicates that this is an “exit” transaction that was manually inserted or added in
the system. When you manually insert a transaction, you have to specify if this transaction is an
entry transaction or an exit transaction. For every entry, there should be an exit.
272 Reports

• The Door column indicates which door was accessed by this user. When you manually insert a
transaction, you have to specify the door according to the transaction type (Entry or Exit).
NOTE: If you are inserting an entry transaction, only doors defined as “Entry doors” will be displayed in
the list. If your are inserting an exit transaction, only doors defined as “Exit doors” will be displayed in
the list.
11 Click the Load button to load the transactions from the server for this cardholder. You have to enter the
card number, select the gateway/site and door(s), then click the Load button. The button is disabled once
you have loaded the transactions.
12 Click the Add button to add a transaction to the existing transaction list. The new transaction will be
added at the end of the list.
13 Use the Insert button to insert a transaction between existing transactions or above any transaction.
14 Click Cancel to cancel any insertion or modification that was made BEFORE saving.
NOTE: When you delete a transaction that was added manually, it is permanently deleted from the list;
as opposed to transactions that were generated by controllers. When they are deleted, they are
identified by an X in the Deleted column.

Roll Call Reports

The Roll call report is used to take a snapshot of who has swiped a card at a reader or a group of readers
within a certain reset period. With the Roll call, one or many doors in EntraPass may be configured as
entry points for a certain perimeter and upon criteria later defined in this document. Based on the last
location a card holder has passed, operators will receive reports on who has entered this perimeter.

The roll call report is handled by the EntraPass Server. In order to operate properly, the server and the
gateway must be running. This allows an accurate reading of the card holder location and for the system
to react on a triggered input. The EntraPass Global, the Corporate Server and the Workstation may run
as services on Windows. The Roll Call functionality is available in both application and services.

Functionalities
• A maximum of 8 roll call reports can be configured through EntraPass.
• Doors must be assigned to a report number (1‐8) in order to be considered for the roll call report (see
"Doors Configuration" on page 88 for more information).
• At runtime, the Roll call report will list all individuals that have swiped a card at a pre‐defined reader. No
other card holder will be shown in the report than the ones who have entered a perimeter after the last
perimeter reset.
• To create an “in‐out” functionality, the operator must make sure that doors considered “out” of a
building or site have a different roll call number. Any door that doesn’t have a number assigned to it will
have no effect on the location of the card holder for the roll call report.
• A configurable reset of the report is available and the default value is 12:00PM (midnight) every day. This
function cleans the report. Reset can be performed for all reports in the roll call report window.
• Upon manual request in Report –> Roll Call Report or on trigger of a pre‐configured input, a report can
be generated up to 3 times to a pre‐defined printer, workstation or email address.
Reports 273

Roll Call Report generation

1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Roll call report icon:
2 Select the roll call sector. If the roll call sector you wish to select is not listed, click on the button next to
the drop‐down arrow.
3 Specify the report destinations:
• Report Destination: Select a destination using the three‐dots button.
• Output printer: Select the printer(s) from the list.
• E‐mail recipient: Enter the name(s) of the recipient(s) to email the report to.

Example of a Roll Call Report

Report State
Use the Report state feature to display a list as well as the status of all requested reports that are still
pending. From the Report tool bar, click on the Report state icon:

Report state fields:

• Priority: Priority level for the treatment of messages (1 to 99). A a priority of 1 will be processed before a
priority of 99.
• CPU: Level of CPU usage to be allowed to process the report (Lower, Normal, Higher).
• Report: Name of the report in process.
• Destination: Displays the workstation or SmartLink name to which the report will be sent to.
• Progress: When the report is processed, it displays the date in treatment, from the start to the end.
• Count: Indicate the number of records in the report.

Contextual menu for pending reports:

Select a report then right click on it to display the contextual menu:
• Next to be processed: Indicates that this is the next report to proceed.
• Promote: Increases the priority level (above the next lower priority report).
• CPU: Allows you to change the CPU usage for the treatment of reports (Lower, Normal, Higher).
274 Reports

• Help: Click to see the related help topic.

Contextual menu for in process reports:
Select a report then right click on it to display the contextual menu:
• Abort with data: This function ends the process and the gathered informations are sent to the recipient.
• Abort without data: This function ends the process and the gathered informations are erased.
• Priority: Allows you to change the CPU usage for the treatment of reports (Lower, Normal, Higher).
• Help: Click to see the related help topic.
NOTE: A red dot indicates a pending report In/Out. A green one, a report in process.

Archive Viewing
The Archive feature enables users to view the reports that were defined and saved in the system.
Operators can use it to view reports in any format, or to customize a report before printing it.
NOTE: When you create a report (csv, db or dbf), the system automatically creates an associated rdf
file. This rdf file is the one that is listed in the Archive window. When you click “Preview”, the system
automatically launches the appropriate program to view the report.

Displaying a Report
1 Under the Report toolbar, click the Archive icon. The system displays the default destination folder. If the
report was saved in a different folder, browse the disk, using the scroll‐down arrow (bottom of the
window) to the report you want to display.
2 Select the report you want to view. If there is a printer installed, the Preview button is enabled. It is used
to preview the report before printing it.
NOTE: You must have a printer installed on your computer in order to preview or print reports. To setup
a printer, click on Start > Settings > Printers > Add Printer. For more information, consult your system
administrator.
3 Click the Details button to display information about the report. If you click the Details button, the
Report details window appears, displaying information related to the selected report file such as the
report filename, title, type, date, etc. The Workspace as report filter field indicates whether the report
has been filtered according to the requester’s workspace restrictions.
4 Click the Details button again to close the Report details window.
5 Click the Preview button to view the report in the system displays the Report preview window.

Previewing Reports
1 From the Archive window, select the report you want to view in the right‐hand pane. If you select a
report generated by Sybase, the Report Options window will display allowing you to customize your
report before printing it.
NOTE: If you select a CSV type of report, the report will be generated in a WordPad window, in text
format.
Reports 275

2 Define the filter options: enter a text string in the Search description field. The report will be sorted
leaving only events containing the specified text string. You may refine your filter:
• Contains: All events which contain the specified text will be included in the report.
• Starts with: All events which start with the specified text will be included in the report.
• Ends with: All events which end with the specified text will be included in the report.
• Exact words: All events containing the exact specified text will be included in the report.
3 Click on the Preview button, select a printer from the drop‐down list and click OK. The system displays
the result of the report. From that window, you can:
• Search text within the report
• Print a report
• Save a report in various formats such as PDF, RTF, HTML and TXT
• Load a report (in a.QRP format)
4 Click Properties to access the Reports details window where detailed information is displayed:
• Report filename: Displays the whole path where the report was saved as well as its name.
• Report title: Displays the title of the report.
• Start date: Reports are created for a selected time frame. This option specifies the starting date of
this time frame.
• End date: Reports are created for a selected time frame. This option specifies the ending date of this
time frame as well as the time.
• Requested: Displays the date and time at which the report was requested.
• Delivered: Displays the date and time at which the report was produced and printed.
• Requested by: Displays the name of the operator that requested the report.
• Count: Displays the number of transactions (lines) in the report.
• Output process: Displays a list of the possible templates used for this report.

Previewing In/Out Reports

1 In the Archive window, select the report you want to view. If the selected report was defined as a
“Display In/Out Report” and “Sybase Database” as the output format, the following window appears.

2 Select the display options:

• Group by— Select this option for easier management. The report data may be grouped by card user
names or by card numbers.
276 Reports

• Sort by—You may choose a sort order, by user names, or by card numbers.
• Report type—Select this option for easier management. You may choose to include details with or
without total.
3 Click Preview to display the result of the report. From that window, you can save the report (in.QRP
format) or print the report.
EntraPass Options 277

EntraPass Options
The Options Toolbar
The Options toolbar offers users the ability to change a number of system parameters. These include
changing the display format, the authentication password, the date and time, or changing server
parameters. The following menu options are available from both the Workstation and the Server
toolbars:

• Select a default display format

• Change the authentication password
• Select a language
• Change the system date and time
• Modify the system parameters
• Configure custom messages
• Schedule automatic backups

The following utilities are only available from the EntraPass Workstation application:
• Configure printer options (log and badge printers)
• Configure multimedia devices (alarm, video and signature capture settings)
• Configure custom Messages
• System registration
• Verify server database
• Verify workstation database

Default Display Format Selection

The EntraPass system can accommodate various reader types. Depending on the reader type, the card
display format may vary. The Display format dialog allows you to select the default format that will be
setup automatically when creating a new card.

Defining a Card Display Format

1 Under the Options toolbar, click on the Display format icon.
NOTE: The Card #2, Card #3, Card #4, Card # 5 sections will not appear unless the Enhanced User
Management option is activated.
2 Select a display format for Card #1.
• Decimal: Refers to numbers in base 10.
• Octal: Each octal digit represents exactly three binary digits. An octal format refers to the base‐8
number system, which uses eight unique symbols (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7). Programs often display
data in octal format because this format is relatively easy for humans to read and can easily be
translated into a binary format, the format used in computer programming.
278 EntraPass Options

• Hexadecimal: Each hexadecimal digit represents four binary digits. An hexadecimal format refers to
the base‐16 number system, which consists of 16 unique symbols: the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters
A to F. For example, the decimal number 15 is represented as F in the hexadecimal numbering
system. The hexadecimal system is useful because it can represent every byte (8 bits) as two
consecutive hexadecimal digits. It is easier for humans to read hexadecimal numbers than binary
numbers.
• FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard): This card format can use more than 32 bits of data.
3 Check the Use multiple card format box if your environment contains multiple reader types and you
would like to have the capability to select a different reader, that is not the default reader, when creating
a new card.
4 Select one of the Duplicate PIN process in the scrolling box. This feature can be used for example while
loading cards in a batch. An operator may decide to set the PIN option to allow duplication. Later, if
desired, the duplicate PINs can be changed to prevent confusion.
• No duplication: An error appears on the workstation; the PIN field will be reset to the default value
(00000) and will be highlighted, inviting you to enter a new and valid PIN. Only PIN 00000 will be
duplicated regardless of the PIN setting option.
• Notify when duplication: the server verifies if this PIN already exists. If the PIN exists, a message box
appears, indicating that the PIN exists. A Details button will allow operators to view a list of
cardholders who were issued this PIN.
• Duplication: no test will be processed, the PIN will be accepted even if it is a duplicate.
5 Number of PIN digits (KT‐400 only): This function allows using the Keypad Pin Digit option with the new
KT400 firmware. You can choose to have 4, 5 or 6 digits (See "Card Options Definition" on page 173 for
more information).
NOTE: The PIN number must be set up once and kept that way in order to avoid any in duplication if
truncated or filled by the system.
6 When the Enhanced User Management option has been chosen, select an alternate default display
format for Card #2. Repeat Step 6 for Card #3, Card #4 and Card #5.
7 Under the Global display format for KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400, select the appropriate option to
coordinate with the selection in the upper section of the dialog.
• 24‐bit Wiegand card, 5‐digit PIN (KT‐200 default): for up to 24‐bit for KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300 and KT‐
400.
• 32‐bit card, 5‐digit PIN: for up to 32‐bit for KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400.
• 24‐bit Wiegand card, 6‐digit PIN: for up to 24‐bit for KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400.
• Up to 16 characters ABA card, 6‐digit PIN: for up to 16 for KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400.
NOTE: KT‐100, KT‐300 and KT‐400 controllers will do a hard reset on card format change. Avoid
alternating between different card formats because this may result in lost card information.
EntraPass Options 279

Connection Password Modification

The connection password is used to authenticate EntraPass Workstations to the EntraPass Server. The
connection password window is automatically displayed when the system has not yet been registered.

CAUTION:
Keep in mind that there is no way to reset the connection
password if forgotten after its modification.

NOTE: If you are not using a specific password for authentication, then the user will have to use the
master default password for workstation authentication. The default connection password is kantech,
in lower case. Passwords are case sensitive.

Changing the Connection Password

1 From the Options main window, select the Connection password icon.
2 Enter the current connection password (case sensitive) in the Old authentication password field. The
default authentication password is kantech, in lower case.
3 Enter the new authentication password in New authentication password field (case sensitive).
4 Enter the new authentication password in the Verify authentication password for confirmation. This field
will verify that the new connection password was typed properly (case sensitive).
5 Click OK to exist. When you receive an error message, make sure that the data you have just entered in
the New authentication password and in the Verify authentication password fields are identical (case
sensitive).
NOTE: The connection password is different from the operator password. The connection password is
used to authenticate workstations, whereas the operator password is used to open a session.

System Language Selection

EntraPass allows you to run the software in the language of your choice. The basic languages are English,
French, Spanish, German and Italian. The Vocabulary Editor utility enable users to add other custom
languages.

Changing the System Language

1 From the EntraPass main window, select the Options toolbar, then click the Select language icon.
NOTE: When you modify the primary language, the database operation will be suspended during the
operation and the changes will be effective only when you shutdown and then restart the system. The
database language will be modified according the ascii values of the characters in the primary
language. Accents and special characters of different languages may have an impact on your
database.
280 EntraPass Options

2 From the Select primary language drop‐down list, select the language you want to use as a primary
language. From the Select Secondary language drop‐down list, select the language you want to use as a
secondary language.
3 Log out of EntraPass and login again.

Printers Selection and Configuration

The Printer options dialog that can be accessed under the Options toolbar allows users to select a log
printer that will be used when printing events and to select a report or a badge printer.

Selecting and Setting Up a Log Printer

When you define events (in the Events parameters definition menu), it is possible to determine how and
when events will be printed. For example, you can decide to dispatch events to an EntraPass application,
a printer, or to activate a relay. Your decision may be based on, for instance, schedules that will send
alarms to a remote terminal at a specific moment.
NOTE: You need to assign a “print” schedule to certain events to print them at a specified time.
1 From Printer options dialog select the Log printer tab.
2 Select a printing option in the Printer type section:
• No log printer—If you select this option, no event will be printed, even if a print schedule is defined
for the events.
• Use Network/Local Windows® printer (page printer)—If you select this option, all events sent to the
printer will be buffered and printed when a full page is ready to be printed. Events will be printed on
the network/local printer ‐ not on a specific log printer.
• Use local dot matrix printer—If you select this option, all events sent to the printer will be printed
one‐by‐one and one under the other, or it will print one event per page, depending on your printer
type. Select the printer port that will be used in the “printer” field. Specify if messages and alarms
will be printed on this printer.
3 In the Printer selection section, specify whether you want to print message or alarms.
• Print messages log—If you select this option, all events that are assigned a “display” schedule in the
events parameters menu will be printed.
• Print alarms logs—If you select this option, all events that are assigned an “alarm” schedule (and
need to be acknowledged) in the events parameters menu will be printed.
4 From the Printer drop‐down list, select the specific printer that will be used as a log printer.
• If you have selected a dot matrix printer, select the Port on which the printer is connected to
communicate with the computer. The Port field appears when a dot matrix printer is selected.
• If you are using a network/local printer, select the Font and the Font size. The font and font size
influence the number of events that will be printed on one page. Using a smaller font increases the
number of events printed on a page.

Selecting and Setting Up a Report Printer

The Report printer will be defined to print reports.
EntraPass Options 281

1 From the Printer options window, select the Report printer tab.

Selecting and Setting Up a Badge Printer

The Badge printer will be defined to print badges that are created in EntraPass.
1 From the Printer option window, select the Badge printer tab.
2 Check the Badge printer option if a badge printer will be used; as a result, the Print badge and Preview
badge button will be displayed in the Card, Visitor, and Day pass windows.
3 From the Select badge printer drop‐down list, select the appropriate badge printer.
4 If you want the picture on the reverse side of the badge to be inverted, click the Invert Reverse Side box.
5 Check the Use barcode 39 as font when appropriate, and select the corresponding Font.

System Date & Time Modification

The Change system option should be used with caution and only when necessary; this functions may
affect logical components of the access system (i.e. schedules, etc.).If, for any reason, you want to adjust
the system time and date, it is better to do so using the Server parameters settings (Options > Server
Parameters > Time adjustment). For details on network time adjustment, see "EntraPass Options" on page
277.
1 From the Option main window, select the Date and Time icon.
2 Enter the date in the Date field, or select a date from the calender. Connected components of this
application will also receive the date change notification.
3 Enter the time in the Time field. Connected components of this application will also receive the time
change notification.
4 Click OK to exit.
NOTE: If you want the system to automatically change the time when necessary, use the T ime
adjustment tab of the Server Parameters definition menu. For details, see "EntraPass Options" on page
277.
IMPORTANT NOTE: You should not change the time using Windows® settings. It is strongly recommended to
change the system time through the server parameter settings.

Multimedia Devices Configuration

The Multimedia devices utility allows you to set up your system multimedia objects:
• Alarm sound
• Video capture devices
• Signature capture devices
• Video feature devices

Selecting an Alarm Sound

1 From the Options main window, select the Multimedia devices icon.
2 Check the Assign alarm sound option if you want an alarm sound notification.
3 Select a sound from the displayed list.
282 EntraPass Options

4 Select a Priority level for the selected sound so that it is played when an alarm defined with this priority
is sounded.
NOTE: The Priority level refers to the order in which alarm messages are displayed in the Alarm
desktop. In EntraPass, O is associated with the highest priority, and 9 to the lowest.For more
information, see "Event Parameters Definition" on page 227.
5 Click the Play button to listen to the selected sound. The system will play the selected sound.
6 Click the Add button to add a new sound from your personal files. Clicking on this button displays a new
window allowing you to add new alarm sounds.
NOTE: The Current selection section displays the sound currently selected (in use). You can adjust the
delay of the alarm sound in the Delay field.

Defining Video Options

1 From the Multimedia devices window, select the Video capture tab.
2 Check the Enable video capture box to enable the video capture options in your system.
• MCI device: Standard Windows® capture drivers.
• Twain device: Twain capture drivers. (Recommended).
• Use overlay: Option activated for image capture devices.
• Enable controls menu: Activates options (such as zoom, pan and tilt) on image capture devices, if
applicable.
• MCI device number: Select identification number of MCI device.
• Portrait: Enables portrait orientation of captured images.
• Landscape: Enables landscape orientation of captured images. (Default value).
3 Click the Test button to verify if the video camera is functional.

Setting Up the Signature Capture Device

1 From the Multimedia devices window, select the Signature tab.
2 Check the Enable Signature pad option to enable the use of a signature pad device.
3 From the displayed list of supported Signature pad devices, select the driver for the signature pad you
want to use.
4 Check the Remote application box if the signature device is setup as such.
5 Select a Pen width.
6 Use the Test button to check if the driver selected is functional. When you click the Test button, the
Signature Pad Test window appears. This window appears whenever you choose the Signature pad
option (Card, Visitor and Daypass definition windows).
7 Select the Video tab to set video options for use with the Video Integration feature. This option allows
you to choose between the windows or video format for Video playback (for Intellex only).
• Disable DirectX option: DirectX is a Windows® technology that enables higher performance in
graphics and multimedia, including video and sound. By default, DirectX is enabled with the Video
feature. However, you may want to disable it; if for example Video images are not correctly displayed
or are not displayed at all, disabling DirectX can be useful. However, when DirectX is disabled, the
system will use more system resources.
EntraPass Options 283

• The Video bandwidth control option allows you to reduce or increase the bandwidth required to
stream live video without compromising video storage quality and computer performance. The
range value is between 64 KB/s and 8192 KB/s.
NOTE: The video bandwidth control value cannot exceed the EntraPass Server value (see page 476).

System Parameters Configuration

The System parameters dialog allows the System Administrator to modify parameters that define the
EntraPass system. This dialog may be accessed from a workstation or a server. Parameters have been
grouped together under different labels such as Server, Gateway, Firmware, Image, etc. If the Video
Integration feature is enabled in your system, the corresponding parameters will appear under the
Video label.

Server Parameters
Under the Server tab, you will define server logs capacity, diagnostic capabilities, security parameters,
disk free space threshold, network alarms and icon status.

Server Logs
You can define the maximum number of records to store in the system logs and the system error logs (up
to 100,000). Records include transactions such as: login to server, logout from server, disconnection,
connection, stop or start server, registration requested, etc. These records are kept with the date/time,
the workstation (where the event or error came from), the operator and the description of the
transactions.

Disk Space
The Disk Space feature has been developed as a protection against system failures that may be caused
by the lack of disk space. This feature allows you to monitor the amount of free disk space for optimal
system operation or for generating reports. In fact, EntraPass offers the ability to have the system abort
the execution of a report if the free disk space has reached a specified threshold.
• Disk free space threshold (MB) scroll‐down list: specify a disk free space threshold that indicates when
you want the system to send a message when the amount of free space falls below the value indicated.
This value is in mega bytes. The range value is 2000 up to 99999 MB.
• Time between notifications (hh:mm): enter the amount of time between notifications when the disk free
space has reached the quota specified in the Disk free space threshold field. For example, if you enter
00:30 in the field, a system warning will be displayed every half an hour. The time range value is 00:10 to
24:00.
• Quick backup: When this option is checked, the main server do not close the tables during the
synchronization with the mirror database. Messages can still be received and the database viewed. A
yellow icon is then displayed on the left to indicate that the system is in read only mode.

Redundant Server
NOTE: The Redundant Server component will be available only if it has been previously registered.
284 EntraPass Options

You can define the Auto‐restart delay (m:ss) for the Mirror Database and Redundant Server. The time
range value is 1:00 to 9:59.

Quick synchronize: When this option is checked, the main server do not close the tables during the
synchronization with the mirror database. Messages can still be received and the database viewed. A
yellow icon is then displayed on the left to indicate that the system is in read only mode.
NOTE: The MS/SQL Interface program is not supported by the Mirror Database and Redundant Server.
Even though the MS/SQL Interface cannot connect to the Mirror Database and Redundant Server, the
MS/SQL Interface will buffer all the events.

Logout and Idle

You will access this tab to specify the EntraPass applications behavior when idle (when there is no action
on the keyboard from the operator).
• Automatic logout on idle: the operator will have to re‐inter his user name and password to enable the
server application again. The maximum allowed delay is (mm:ss): 9 minutes and 59 seconds.
• Send to tray on idle: the server application will be minimized and sent to the task bar when the specified
delay expires, if the operator who is currently logged in is inactive. The maximum allowed delay is
(mm:ss): 59 minutes and 59 seconds.
• Must login to close a Server application: if checked, this option obliges operators to authenticate
themselves by entering user name and password to close the Server application.
• Notify last log out: if checked, EntraPass will notify the last operator who is logging out.
• Display description in title bar: the workstation/server name will be displayed on top of the window.
• Display description in taskbar: the workstation name will be displayed in the lower part of the window.
• Display Login List: if checked, the five most recent operators to log into any EntraPass application will be
displayed in the login dialog. This feature allows for easier system access for the operators who will
simply select their user name and enter their password. It can also be used for administrative follow up
where a System Administrator can view the list of operators who have recently logged on a specific
application.
NOTE: Despite the advantages, it is recommended to disable the Display Login List whenever system
security is at stake.

Schedule
The Schedule tab is where you will be able to upgrade to advanced schedule capability. In fact, EntraPass
offers users more flexibility and ease of use by grouping schedules per gateway, site or system logical
components. This option is not automatically enabled upon installation of version 3.18 and higher of
EntraPass.
NOTE: Make sure that you really need to upgrade to advance schedule before checking the box.
Schedules are grouped as follows:
• System schedules: System schedules are applicable to system logical components such as: event
parameters, operators login schedules, video triggers, etc. System schedules are not loaded in a
particular controller; they are applicable to all the system. You can program an unlimited number of
system schedules.
EntraPass Options 285

• Corporate site schedules: These are defined per site. You can define 100 schedules per Corporate site for
such purposes as power supervision (controllers), door unlocking, REX trigger (doors), activation mode
(relay), input monitoring, etc.
• After checking the box and clicking OK, a warning will popup on screen indicating that the action is
reversible but with consequences.
• We strongly suggest that you perform a backup of your data before activating this option.

• Once the process has been completed, you will notice that the Schedule tab will have disappeared from
the System Parameter dialog.
• Extend schedule interval to 20: This feature (for EntraPass and WebStation 5.01) allows increasing the
number of schedule intervals to 20. Clicking OK will display the following warning message:

A validity test will be performed by EntraPass to ensure that existing schedules are not linked with
controllers other that KT‐400. In addition, the following rules need to be followed:
• A 20 intervals schedule can be changed to 4 intervals but not the opposite.
• For Multi‐site gateways, 20 intervals schedules are compatible with KT‐400 and KT‐400 V1
controllers only.

20 intervals schedules that are not supported cannot be selected. The icon is displayed at the right
side of the field.
NOTE: Schedules with 20 intervals can be used with KT‐400 and KT‐400 V1 controllers only.

Diagnostic
The diagnostic feature allows the system to make network diagnostic.
• Allow diagnostic on network uses the PING (Packet INternet Groper) utility program. This stand‐alone
program diagnoses network intermittent related problems and/or determines whether a specific IP
address is accessible. For details on the PING program, see "System Utilities" on page 305.
286 EntraPass Options

• Show system database reference will display system components unique numbers. For example, if you
are in the Door dialog, you can view the door number by placing your mouse cursor over the Door scroll
list. A hint will pop up to display the component’s (door) unique number.

Icon Status
The Status time out delay (m:ss) parameter allows you to define a period of time before the workstation
queries the server for the latest icon statuses. The higher the delay, the lower the icon refresh rate will
be therefore creating less traffic on the network. The maximum time out delay is 1 min. 30 seconds.

Service Login Information

The information entered here is required when the Server runs as a service and network resources need
to be accessed from the Server. Service Login Information is required for the Backup Scheduler when
using a network drive.
• You need to check the Login Server Service Application box to enable the feature.
• You must enter the server Domain name or Computer name, the Login name and the Password twice for
confirmation.
NOTE: When there is no domain name or workgroup configured, you must enter the Computer Name
instead, in the Domain Name field.
•

Firmware Parameters
This section contains all the information pertaining to controllers, gateways and IP communication
module, as well as the section to update you firmware.
NOTE: The KTES tab will be available only if a KTES controller have been previously defined in the
system. See "Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration" on page 80 for more information.

KT‐100
The KT‐100 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT‐100 controllers. The
system will use this data to update the installed controllers.

KT‐300
The KT‐300 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT‐300 controllers. The
system will use this data to update the installed controllers.

KT‐400
The KT‐400 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT‐400 controllers. The
system will use this data to update the installed controllers.
• When checked, the Enable TFTP KT‐400 updater option will allow operators to upgrade the KT‐400
firmware from the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in EntraPass.
EntraPass Options 287

• Enable automatic firmware update: Select to make an update of each KT‐400 with a different firmware
version.
NOTE: The automatic firmware update function applies only to KT‐400s that support it.
NOTE: The Multi‐site Gateway must be restarted in order to enable the TFTP KT‐400 updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator to disable this option and not allow
operators to update the firmware.

KTES
The KTES tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for the KTES. The system will
use this data to update the installed KTES.

Kantech IP Link
The IP Link tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for the Kantech IP Link
module. The system will use this data to update the installed firmware.
• When checked, the Enable TFTP IP Link updater option will allow operators to upgrade the IP Link
firmware from the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in EntraPass.
NOTE: The Multi‐site Gateway must be restarted in order to enable the TFTP IP Link updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator to disable this option and not allow
operators to update the firmware.

KT‐401
The KT‐401 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT‐401 controllers. The
system will use this data to update the installed controllers.
• When checked, the Enable TFTP KT‐401 updater option will allow operators to upgrade the KT‐401
firmware from the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in EntraPass.
• Enable automatic firmware update: Select to make an update of each KT‐401 with a different firmware
version.
NOTE: The automatic firmware update function applies only to KT‐401s that support it.
NOTE: The Multi‐site Gateway must be restarted in order to enable the TFTP KT‐401 updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator to disable this option and not allow
operators to update the firmware.

Image Parameters
The Image section is where you will define parameters for the badging features. You will define image
quality for picture, signature and background images.
• If you are using the badging feature, it is recommended to leave the jpeg quality to default. Reducing the
image quality may affect the quality of the pictures imported from badges.
288 EntraPass Options

• If you are not using the badging feature, you may reduce the jpeg quality of your images so that they will
not occupy a large space in the database. You must take in consideration, however, that reducing the
quality of the saved images may affect the quality of the photos imported into badges.
A parameter allows you to save cards and visitor card pictures, signatures and background graphics to a
file instead of directly to the database. We are offering this option for sites that have large banks of
pictures and graphics. The picture, signature and graphic database can currently contain up to 2 Gb of
data each. The parameter will be used in instances where a site may need more space to save pictures,
signatures and graphics.

Picture and Badging

The picture and badging feature allows you to adjust the image and signature quality for use with the
Badging feature.
• Unchecking Use JPEG format for pictures, signatures and badges tells the system to save pictures (or
signatures) in a tiff format.
NOTE: Remember that this may affect the image quality. If you are not an advanced user, leave these
values to default.
• The User picture, Signature, Badge background and Badge picture indicate the quality of the image that
will be saved. If you choose 10, the saved image quality will be poor; 100 indicates an excellent quality.
• Select the location of the Picture (Signature) transparent color position for pictures and signature. Four
choices are available (top‐right, top‐left, bottom‐right and bottom‐left). By default, the system chooses
the bottom left‐hand corner for the transparent background color. EntraPass allows operators to choose
a more suitable color.
• When checking the Save card pictures and signatures in a file box, the system will create Picture and
Signature directories under C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_CE\Data where all pictures and signatures
will be saved instead of directly in the database.
• When checking the Save visitor pictures and signatures in a file box, the system will create Picture and
Signature directories under C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_CE\Data where all visitor pictures and
signatures will be saved instead of directly in the database.
NOTE: When modifying an existing picture or signature, EntraPass will save it to the appropriate file
and delete the corresponding entry in the database.

Graphic
The graphic feature allows you to adjust the graphic quality for use with the EntraPass software.
• Unchecking Use JPEG format for graphics tells the system to save graphics in a tiff format.
NOTE: Remember that this may affect the image quality. If you are not an advanced user, leave these
values to default.
• The JPEG quality value for Graphic background (picture) indicates the quality of the image that will be
saved. If you choose 10, the saved image quality will be poor; 100 indicates an excellent quality.
EntraPass Options 289

• When checking the Save graphics in a file box, the system will create a Graphic directory under
C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_CE\Data where all graphics will be saved instead of directly in the
database.
NOTE: When modifying an existing graphics, EntraPass will save it to the appropriate file and delete
the corresponding entry in the database.

Report Parameters
The Report tab enables users to define the field separator for reports, disk free space threshold and user
name format.

CSV
Under the CSV tab, you can define the field separator for your reports.
• By default, the system uses a comma (,) as the Field separator. You can modify the comma for another
character. Other options are: Period, Equal, Semicolon, Colon, Space and tab.
• It is recommended to check the Date and time on separate fields option. When selected, CSV (comma
separated values) as the output process for your reports, by default, the system includes the date and
the time in a single field. When you select this option, the system will separate the date and the time
fields.

Disk Space
This feature is a protection when for instance a huge report has been requested. In this case, the system
will abort the execution of the report and displays an alert message indicating the reason of the
cancellation.
• Abort report if free space lower than (MB) scroll‐down list allows you to specify the minimum amount of
free disk space required for the execution of reports. The range value is 2000 to 999,999 MB.
• Maximum event for email report scroll‐down list allows you to specify the maximum number of events
that can be sent via an email report. The range value is 100 to 100,000 events.
• Maximum event for standard report scroll‐down list allows you to specify the maximum number of
events that can be sent in a report. The range value is 1000 to 500,000 events.

User Name Format

Specifying the user name format will tell the system how cardholder’s names will be displayed in
EntraPass.
• Parse user name should be checked if you want to select a method of parsing the user’s name in the
system.
• User name format lets you select the parsing method. Options are: Begin with last name, Begin with first
name.
• Parse user name with lets you select the character that will be used to parse the user name
fields.Options are: Comma, Period, Equal, Semicolon, Colon, Space.
290 EntraPass Options

• Strict search on card field should be left empty unless you wish to keep the previous method (EntraPass
Version 3.17 and lower) of strict searching a card field for reports.
NOTE: Prior to version 3.18 of EntraPass, the system used a strict search method that required
Administrators to enter specific upper and lower boundaries to attain specific results. For example, for
generating a report that included all users whose last name started with A, the lower boundary had to
be A and the upper boundary had to be AZZZZZ. Now, the system will display all user names that start
with an A just by entering A as a lower and upper boundary.

Video Parameters
The Video section will display only if the Video integration option is enabled in the EntraPass system.
You will define the time synchronization, remote video process and JPEG format for video images.

Parameters
The Parameters tab allows you to define parameters for the video process.
• Disable manual time synchronization will keep the EntraPass server from updating the video server date
and time following a manual modification of time. This feature is useful when, for example, you want to
keep all recording events that occurred at the video server regardless of the actual time at the EntraPass
server.
• The Remote video process control parameters section contains parameters that define remote
management of video processes between the EntraPass Server and the video servers connected to
EntraPass. It manages all the tasks (controls) related to: recordings, polls, events, and presets and
patterns.
• Preset and pattern control application field allows you to enter the number of applications that will
be simultaneously launched for processing presets and patterns. The system is preset with a range
value of 1 to 8 concurrent applications.
NOTE: A Preset and Pattern Control application is launched each time a video recording is started
following a trigger on a preset. If you set this number to 1 and if there are for instance more than 1
video servers with presets and patterns defined, the control application will process presets on all
video servers. If you decide to increase the number of Preset and Pattern Control Applications, keep in
mind that running many concurrent applications takes a great amount of system resources.
• Reset remote video process application will allow the system to terminate and automatically restart
the Remote Video Process application a few seconds later. This option may be used in instances
when the video events are not being displayed.
• Reset remote video process applications control will allow the system to terminate the Control
applications (recordings, polls, events and preset and patterns) and automatically restart the Remote
Video Process application.
• Log Video process error will allow the system to keep a log of all video process errors in the
EntraPass server files. Video process errors are logged in C:\Program
files\Kantech\Server_CE\Bin\Log. Each Remote Video Process Control application generates a log
file:
• RVP_LOG_00.txt (errors generated by RVP0.exe)
• RVPPoll_LOG_01.txt (errors generated by RVPPOLL1.exe)
EntraPass Options 291

• RVPEvent_LOG_02.txt (errors generated by RVEVENT3.exe)

• RVPRecord_LOG_03.txt (errors generated by RVPRECORD3.exe).
• RVPControl_LOG_04.txt (errors generated by RVPCONTROL4.exe).The system will generate as
many log files as there are control applications running concurrently (RVPControl_LOG_05 to
08). The number of error log files will be equal to the number defined in the Preset and pattern
control application field.

Snap
The Snap option allows you to define the image quality that will display in the video thumbnails.
• The Video image snap indicates the quality of the image that will be saved as a thumbnail for each video.
If you choose 10, the saved image quality will be poor; 100 indicates an excellent quality.

Intellex
The Intellex options allow you to define the bandwidth allowed for the video process (for Intellex only).
• Disable DirectX will disable DirectX, a Windows® technology that enables higher performance when
working or viewing graphics and other multimedia contents, including video and sound. By default,
DirectX is enabled with the Video feature. You may sometimes need to disable it if, for example,
video images are not correctly displayed or are not displayed at all.
NOTE: The system will use more system resources when DirectX is disabled
• Limit video bandwidth allows you to reduce or increase the bandwidth required to stream live video
without compromising video storage quality and computer performance. The range value is between
64 KB/s to 8192 KB/s. The value will apply to all workstations including the EntraPass Server.
However, for any specific workstation, this value can be reduced locally from the Options toolbar >
Multimedia Devices > Video on page 282.
• Video vault save delay is used to indicate the time delay before the video vault recording can be
played back.
NOTE: The workstation value cannot exceed the EntraPass Server value.

HDVR
• Video vault save delay is used to indicate the time delay before the video vault recording can be
played back.

TVR
• Video vault save delay is used to indicate the time delay before the video vault recording can be
played back.
292 EntraPass Options

Time Parameters
The Time section allows you to specify which gateway will be used to automatically adjust the time of all
the computers connected to the EntraPass server. This feature is very useful when managing remote
sites.
NOTE: The gateway polls the first controller on the first site at 5:47 am or 05:47, 1:47 pm or 13:47 and
7:47 pm or 19:47 to get the controller time.
• No time adjustment will disable the option.
• By Gateway will automatically synchronize the time of all computers with the Gateway selected in the
scrolling list.
• By Server will automatically synchronize the time of all computers at regular intervals. You must also
select the rate of Hours between refreshes in the adjacent selection box. The range value is 1 to 9999
hours.

Credentials Parameters

Card
Under the Card tab, System Administrators will be able to migrate their EntraPass system to enhanced
user management where users are managed by their user name as well as their card number(s). Each
card holder will be handled by user name and have up to 5 different numbers. This will allow for creating
cards without assigning card number to the new cards, see "Issuing a New Card in Enhanced User
Management Environment" on page 168. This option will be used with the EntraPass WebStation for
card management. For more information on the EntraPass WebStation, please refer to the EntraPass
WebStation User Manual, DN1709.
NOTE: Enabling the migrate to enhanced user management is NOT REVERSIBLE through the software.
However, when the system is migrating data, a backup is performed in EntraPass, so this can be
restored to return to its previous action.
• Migrate to enhanced user management: when checked, EntraPass will migrate to the enhanced user
management (See "Issuing a New Card in Enhanced User Management Environment" on page 168
for more details).
After checking the box and clicking OK, a warning will popup on screen indicating that the action is
irreversible before EntraPass performs a backup of your data.

Once the process has been completed, you will notice that the option is greyed out under the Card tab.
EntraPass Options 293

Workstation and Server

Toolbar Buttons
The toolbar buttons size can be increased up to 2.5 times the original size, in order to improve visibility
of the text below the button. This is applicable to the EntraPass Server and the EntraPass Workstation.
Logout and log back in to apply the change to the toolbar.

Integration
The Integration tab allows the user to select third party hardware that has been integrated to EntraPass
by Kantech.

DLL registration: The available DLL in this menu will be used to specify which type of hardware the
customer will connect to EntraPass.
• Click on Add to integrate another DLL. For additional details, See Chapter 4 ‘Integrated Panel
Configuration’ on page 103.
NOTE: The DLL integration must be done at the EntraPass Server in order to communicate with the
Multi‐site Gateway where the third party hardware is physically connected and powered up.
Virtual keypad: The Virtual keypad tab allows the user to customize the virtual keypad screen display.
Three different display modes can be selected: Floating, Modal or Stay on top.

Dealer Information
Kap Reminder
A message will be displayed reminding the user that the KAP period is ending. There are two different
notifications: a pop‐up on the screen or an email containing the following information:

Pop‐up Message

A pop‐up message is automatically generated by EntraPass to advise the user that his KAP is expiring:
• 60 days before expiration
• 30 days before expiration
294 EntraPass Options

• On expiration
• 30 days past expiration
The reminder message has to be acknowledged by the user. It will be logged in the events database (displayed in
the Message List) and will appear in reports.

Email

The Dealer Information window has been modified in order to configure the email reminder. Up to 4 recipients
can be added. Clicking the Send reminder now button will save the information and send a reminder immediately.
An new event will also be logged in the desktop events list.
Each workstation will also receive a 60 seconds notification popup message.

The Kap Reminder feature can also be accessed from the About window.

Backup Scheduler
A backup is a copy of the systems database which serves as a substitute or alternative in case the
computer fails. If your system computer fails, you may restore a backup copy onto another computer (on
which the EntraPass Server application has been installed).
• Back up your files regularly, at least once a week or more if many modifications were made to the
database.
• We recommend that you make two backups of all your database files. To be especially safe, keep them in
separate locations.
• To backup your files, you can use:
• the menus of the Server/Backup Tab, or
• the Backup Scheduler to apply automatic schedules, or
• other third party software and hardware (the third party software is not recommended).
NOTE: By default, when you backup or restore files, the Server databases will temporarily be disabled
(not available). The Workstations will not be able to modify the databases.
The Backup Scheduler program is used to schedule automatic backups of your data, archives, and In/Out
databases. Define the default settings and the system will do the rest.
EntraPass Options 295

Configuring the Backup when the EntraPass Server is Running as a Service

These steps are required when the EntraPass Server is running as a service and you must backup to
another computer within the same workgroup or domain.
NOTE: You must have full administrator privileges to perform the following steps at the EntraPass
Server. Please refer to the network administrator, if you don’t have the privileges or you are not
familiar with W indows Administrative Tools.
1 From the EntraPass Server, go to Options > System Parameters > Server > Service Login Information.
2 Fill‐in all the mandatory fields: Domain name, Login name, Password and Password Confirmation.
NOTE: The Domain Name or the Workgroup must be the same for both, the EntraPass Server and the
backup computer.
3 Click OK.

Scheduling Automatic Backups of the System Database

1 From the Options toolbar, select the Backup Scheduler icon.
2 Select the tab corresponding to the information you want to backup: Data, Archive, In/Out or Video
event (In/Out).
NOTE: By default, the system will automatically backup your files every Sunday at 4:00 AM for all new
installations. Setting this feature at 4:00AM has an added benefit of not interfering with the system
processing time or other tasks scheduled around midnight.
3 Select the Automatic backup option to enable the options displayed in the window. The options
displayed depend on the tab that is enabled.
4 Select the Backup folder:
• Default folder—will backup your files in a system default backup folder. By default, the name of the
backup sub‐directory is generated automatically according to the following convention:
X_YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_SS (Where 'X' = Data or Archives or In/Out (D, A or T), year, month, day,
hour, minutes, and seconds.
NOTE: By default, the system backs up all the information originating from the following directories:
C:\Program files\Kantech\Server\Data or Archive or Time on video or V. The information is sent to:
C:\Program files\Kantech\Server\Backup\X_YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_SS.
• Specific folder—will backup your files in a sub‐folder labeled according to the default convention in
the XXX folder.
5 Select the Backup type: The options that are displayed depend on the type of the data to be saved.
• Under the Data tab only:
• Separate files: will backup the databases one by one.
• Self‐extracting compressed file: will create an executable file (*.exe) that will compress the
information1 so as to reduce the amount of disk space taken by the backup.
• Under the Archive, In/Out and Video Event tabs only:
• Separate files (full backup): will backup all databases.
296 EntraPass Options

• Self‐extracting compressed file (full backup): will create an executable file (*.exe) that will
compress the information so as to reduce the amount of disk space taken by the backup.
• Separate files (incremental): will backup all databases. Only the information that was modified
since the last backup will be saved.
• Self‐extracting compressed file (incremental): will create an executable file (*.exe) that will
compress the information so as to reduce the amount of disk space taken by the backup. Only
the information that was modified since the last backup will be saved.
NOTE: Restoring a self‐extracting backup after an EntraPass upgrade can only be done from the
EntraPass Server where the original self‐extracting backup was done.
NOTE: When you have selected “full backup”, each time a backup is done a new sub‐folder containing
the data or the self‐extracting file will be created. If you are using the incremental backup type, only
the information that was modified since the last backup will be saved. If you want to restore
information, you will have to restore all the sub‐folders one‐by‐one (starting from the oldest).
6 Select the frequency of the backup,
• Weekly: the backup will be carried out once a week. Specify which day (example, the backup will be
executed every Thursday).
• Monthly: the backup will be carried out monthly, specify the day of the month (example, the backup
will be carried out every first day of the month).
• Daily: the backup will be carried out every day.
• Now: this option allows you to request a backup when you need it.
7 Enter the time at which the backup will start (24:00 format).
8 Repeat steps 1 to 8 for all the remaining tabs.
9 Click on OK to save.

Custom Messages
The Custom Messages option allows operators with proper security rights to define custom messages
that can generate an event based on a schedule. Up to 10 custom messages can be programmed to
trigger an event at a preset time. And each custom message can be triggered when the schedule
becomes valid, invalid, or both. In other words, you can trigger up to 20 custom events if you take into
account the start and/or end of a schedule interval.

Each custom events will be displayed in the Messages List on the Desktops.

Setting up Custom Messages

1 From the Options toolbar, click Custom Messages.
2 In the first tab, enter the first custom message you want to see display in the Messages List. Two fields
are available for primary and secondary languages.
3 Select a preset schedule that will determine when the custom event will be triggered.
4 Select if you want the custom event to be triggered when the schedule becomes Valid or Invalid, or both.
5 Move to the second tab to enter a second custom message, and so on.
EntraPass Options 297

System Registration
This menu is used to register new system components such as the KTES, Workstation, Gateway,
SmartLink, etc. in order to register and use the system's database and to establish communication with
the Server.
NOTE: For more information on how to install and register new applications, See Chapter 2 ‘Software
Installation’ on page 9. Before you install new applications, make sure that you have the proper serial
numbers for the installation.

Checking Server and Workstation Databases

Server Database
1 From the Options toolbar, click the Verify Server DB icon. The system displays a warning.
2 Select Yes to continue.
NOTE: This is a surface operation. If your system is experiencing problems, you must run the Database
Utility program from the W indows® Start menu. For more information, See "Verifying Database
Integrity" on page 306.

Workstation Database
1 From the Options toolbar, click the Verify Workstation DB icon. The system displays a warning.
2 Select Yes to continue.
NOTE: This is a surface operation. If your system is experiencing problems, you must run the Database
Utility program from the W indows® Start menu. For more information, See "Verifying Database
Integrity" on page 306.
298 EntraPass Options
The EntraPass Server 299

The EntraPass Server

The EntraPass Server is a dedicated computer on a network that manages the access control system
database. It is used to receive and dispatch information received from the different gateways and
workstations receiving information from connected controller sites. In some applications, a Redundant
Server and a Mirror Database can be used as an alternative if the Primary server failed. The EntraPass
server can be used for:
• Displaying all the workstations connected to the server, the system event log and system error log
• Registering new connections and system options (workstation, gateway, client applications, etc.)
• Creating and restoring backups (Data, Archives, In/Out and Video Event databases)
• Restoring data (Data, Archive, In/Out and Video Event databases)
• Verifying database integrity
• Changing the database language
• Cleaning the database by clearing records relating to previously erased data

Server Launch
In order to access the EntraPass Server commands, you have to start the Server and login. Operators are
identified when they log in. This allows them to have access to the security system menu associated with
their security level, and to establish communication and initiate interaction with the workstations.
However, it is not mandatory to login for the Server to operate.
1 From the Windows® Start menu, click Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate > Server > Server. You
may also click the Server icon on the desktop, if applicable. After loading itself, the server login screen
will display on the screen.
2 Enter your User name and Password (case sensitive) and click OK to continue. To modify this password,
see "Operators Definition" on page 215.
NOTE: To allow an operator to login to the server, select the “Allow login on server” option, during the
Security Level definition of an operator. For more information, see "Security Level Definition" on page
218.
The status bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the communication status and the colored flags
represent the status of a system logical or physical component: Green indicates that communication is
ok, Red indicates that theirs communication problems, Purple indicates that the database is locked for
authentication.
• Database availability state
• Database locked state: it turns red when the database is locked
• System date and time
• Login name of the operator who is currently logged in the Server
• Number of client connections, that is, the number of workstations connected to the server
• Number of system logs (messages and events)
• Number of error logs
• Computer name (NetbEUI) where the server is installed
300 The EntraPass Server

• Server’s IP address
• Secondary IP address, if the Mirror database and Redundant server communicate with the server
through a TCP/IP connection and if they are configured in the system
• Other IP address, if applicable.

Server Connection list

This menu allows operators to view various lists which show current operational status between the
EntraPass server and the workstations connected to it

Viewing Applications Connected to the Server

Operators can view the status of all EntraPass applications from the Workstation or Server user
interface.
1 In the EntraPass server application, select the Connection tab and click the Connection List icon.
2 Click the + sign next to each workstation to view details about a workstation (such as: registration codes,
TCP/IP address, connections, messages buffered, etc.).

Backups
The Backup Toolbar
A backup is a copy of your system database which serves as a substitute or alternative in case the
computer fails. Backing up your files safeguards them against accidental loss when for example the hard
disk fails or when you accidentally overwrite or delete data. If your computer system fails, you may
restore a backup copy onto another computer, on which the EntraPass server has been installed.

The EntraPass Backup tab allows operators to perform manual backups of the system data (D), archive
(A) and In/Out (T) databases. It is also used to restore backup data. Safeguard tips:
• Back up your files regularly, at least once a week or more if many modifications were made to the
database.
• We recommend that you make two backups of all your database files. To be safe, keep them in different
locations.
• To backup your files, you can use:
• The menu of the EntraPass Backup utility, or
• The EntraPass Backup Scheduler to apply automatic schedules parameter, or
• Other third party software and hardware.
NOTE: By default when you backup or restore files, the EntraPass database will temporarily be
disabled.On the EntraPass application main window, you will notice that the second colored square at
the bottom left of the screen turns red when the database is unavailable. Modifications done on the
workstations will not be applied to the database until the database is available again.
All the system data can be found under the following path: C:\Program Files\Kantech\ Server_CE\XXXX.
If you are using a third party program to perform backups, it is recommended to backup the whole
Kantech directory and sub‐directories. Each time a backup is done (even if it is done automatically), a
The EntraPass Server 301

new sub‐folder containing the data or the self‐extracting file is created. If you are using the
“incremental” backup type and you want to restore information, you will have to restore all the sub‐
folders one‐by‐one (starting with the oldest).

Creating Backups of Type D, A, and T

By default, the name of the sub‐directory in which the data/archive/In/Out databases will be saved is
generated automatically according to the following convention:X_YYYY_MM_DD‐h_mm_ss, where X is
the data type (D for Data, A for archive and T In/Out). The following steps explain how to backup data.
The same steps apply also when you backup archives or In/Out data.
1 Select the item you want to backup: data, archive, In/Out databases. The system displays the backup sub‐
directory in which the information will be saved. You may keep the default folder, or you may browse
your disk to specify a new destination folder for the backup.
NOTE: By default, the system/workstation will backup all the information originating from the
following directory: C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_CE\Data or Archive or In/Out to
C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Server_CE\Backup\ X_YYYY_MM_DD‐h_mm_ss, where X is the data type.
The data type is followed by the year, month and day information as well as the time of the backup.
2 Select the Backup type:
• Separate file: the system will back up the databases one by one (standard). This backup type includes
the Regdata.ini file containing the following identification data: software used to create the backup,
backup type (data, archive, In/Out), operator who requested the backup, date and time of the
backup as well as the software version.
• Self‐extracting compressed file: the system will create an executable file (.exe) that will compress the
information so as to reduce the amount of disk space taken by the backup. The system displays
information identifying the backup: software used to create the backup, backup type (data, archive,
In/Out), operator who requested the backup, date and time of the backup as well as the software
version.
NOTE: If you want to use the .exe file on its own to restore a self‐extracting backup, make sure that the
EntraPass system code is the same as the one stored in the .exe backup file or else the extraction will
not work. In cases where your system has failed and EntraPass data and applications are no longer
available, we strongly suggest that you reinstall EntraPass and use the backup functionality to restore
your backup instead of using the .exe file on its own.
3 From the Drives drop‐down list, select the drive on which the backup will be performed. A list of choices
is available according to your computer settings. To save as default, leave as is.
4 You may click the New folder button if you want to specify a new destination folder.
5 Click OK to launch the backup procedure. The backup process can be viewed on the bottom part of the
window.
NOTE: You can use the “Backup Scheduler” to schedule or plan automatic backups. To schedule
automatic backups see "EntraPass Options" on page 277.When you backup or restore files, the Server
databases are temporarily disabled. You cannot modify the databases when a backup is in process.
302 The EntraPass Server

Restoring Data (D, A and T)

If you are restoring data, it is strongly recommended to perform a backup before you do so. If you are
using a third party program to restore the data, it is recommend to restore the whole Kantech directory
and sub‐directories.
1 From the Backup tab, select the desired Restore button (Data, Archive, In/Out). The system displays the
Restore data window. It displays the path of the backup folder.
2 To change the destination folder, browse the Drives drop‐down list. Click OK to launch the restore
process.
NOTE: By default, the system restores all the information originating from the following directory:
C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Server_CE\Backup\ X_YYYY_MM_DD‐h_mm_ss to C:\Program
Files\Kantech\Server_CE\Data or Archive or In/Out.
NOTE: It is recommended to reload the Gateway after restoring the data (Operation > Reload data).

Viewing the System Logs

The System Log window contains all the login and logout events for all workstations defined in the
system. The logs are displayed with date and time, the workstation name, the operator name using the
workstation as well as the log type. The System Log window contains all the login and logout events for
all workstations defined in the system.
1 To view system log, select the View System Log icon.
2 From the Sorted by drop‐down list, select the sorting criterion: the system events will be displayed
according to your specifications.
• Date and time— This is the normal incoming sequence, if you select another sorting mode, you
interrupt the normal sequence. Select date and time to restore the normal sequence. To do this, you
have also to use the “restart scroll” button.
• Operator—When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Operator column in
alphabetical order.
• Workstation—When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Workstation column in
alphabetical order.
• Text filter—When selected, a new window will be displayed. From that window, enter the text string
(i.e.: kantech), and the system will only display logs containing the specified string text. To return to
normal display, click on text filter.
3 You may change the background color. To do this, right‐click on the window and select a color from the
displayed shortcut list.
4 You may also clear the window. To do this, right‐click in the window, then select Clear from the shortcut
menu.

Viewing System Error Logs

The system errors are displayed with the date and time, the workstation name where the error
originated from, the code number and its description.
The EntraPass Server 303

1 Select the View system errors icon to view all the errors that occurred in the system.
2 You may also use the right‐click menu to change the window background or to clear all the data
displayed.
NOTE: For information on system registration, see "System Installation" on page 14.

System Registration
This menu is used to register new system components such as the KTES, Workstation, Gateway,
SmartLink, etc. in order to register and use the system's database and to establish communication with
the Server See "System Registration" on page 297.

Server Utilities
This menu allows users to verity the system database integrity and to restore the system data bases. This
menu is also accessible from workstations. For more information on the system utilities, See Chapter 16
‘System Utilities’ on page 305.
1 Select the Utility toolbar to use the server utilities.
2 Select an icon in the toolbar (according to the task you want to perform, such as, for example, Verify
database integrity. The appropriate dialog will display on screen.

3 Click the Yes button. The system automatically starts the operation and displays a progress bar indicating
that the process is on‐going.
NOTE: Certain windows may provide only a Yes or No button rather than a Rebuild button to start the
operation.
NOTE: The Clean database utility also provides a Yes or No button to clear records from the database
relating to previously erased data.
304 The EntraPass Server
System Utilities 305

System Utilities
This section groups the utility programs of the EntraPass Software. These programs are accessible from
the Windows® Start menu. The following programs are launched from the server or the workstation.
• Database Utility — Program intended to re‐index archived files, update database fields, verify archived
files, verify the database integrity, verify the database index, verify the database links and to verify the
database hierarchy while the server is shutdown.
• EntraPass Video Vault Application — Program used to manage video segments archive. This program
will process requests from EntraPass users to view archived video segments and to monitor video
archiving processes.
• Express Setup — Program used to configure all the components related to a gateway including the type
of readers used, type of connection, number of controller sites, number of controllers in a site, etc.
• KT‐Finder: Program used to configure locally or remotely Kantech IP devices such as the Kantech IP Link,
the KT‐400 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller and the KT‐NCC Network Communications Controller (Note).
NOTE: The KT‐NCC Network Communications Controller is only available with EntraPass Global Edition.
• PING Diagnostic — Program used to diagnose network intermittent related problems.
• Quick Report Viewer — Program used by the operator to view reports without having to start EntraPass.
• System Report Viewer — Program used by the operator to view reports without having to start
EntraPass. This utility is installed from the Setup window.
• Vocabulary Editor — Program used to translate, in the language of your choice, the display text of the
software.
• Workstation — Configuration program, similar to a standard workstation, used by the system
administrator to configure the system logical and physical components.
• Migration Utility — Program used to transfer database information for the upgrade from Special to
Corporate Edition or Corporate Edition to Global Edition.
• The Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface — The MS‐SQL Interface is a program that creates a real‐time copy of the
EntraPass card database in the MS‐SQL or ORACLE Server. This program allows user to modify, add or
obtain card‐related information, all this in real‐time, from the MS‐SQL or ORACLE Server. The Oracle/MS‐
SQL Interface card database, which contains cardholder information, will be updated automatically as
soon as new information is available in the EntraPass card database.
NOTE: The MS‐SQL Interface program is not supported by the Mirror Database and Redundant Server.
• The SmartLink Interface — The SmartLink interface allow users to define a message and format data that
may be sent on the second COM port or to a disk file. Using the SmartLink feature, you can interface to
just about any intelligent device such as video matrix switchers, paging systems, etc.
• EntraPass Online Help — This is the same content as the reference manual but without the screen
captures. Simply click on the (? Help) button and the corresponding topic displays on screen. The online
help language follows the primary language selection, if the EntraPass primary language is english, the
online help will be in english as well. The online help is available in five languages; english, french,
spanish, german and italian.
306 System Utilities

Database Utility
The Database utility program verifies the integrity of the database tables that are used to store events,
alarms, network alarms, and graphics. Basically, the system scans all the system database tables and
corrects errors (when they are found). Usually, the system verifies the database integrity automatically
at start‐up (a system message is displayed). If an operator decides not to perform a database check at
startup, he/she may trigger the operation later, using the Database Utility program. It may also be
necessary to launch the database utility program when for instance the system experiences problems
frequently. This operation should be executed when the system is not used since the system database is
not available during operations on the databases. Some verifications such as re‐indexing the archive
files, updating database fields, verifying archive files, or swapping database languages require that the
EntraPass applications be shutdown. Once all the EntraPass applications that are running on the
EntraPass Server computer are closed, you can start the Database utility. When an operation that
requires the application to be shutdown is launched, the operator is warned that the database access
will be suspended during the operation.
NOTE: The EntraPass Server must be shutdown before you run the database utility.

Running the Database Utility

1 You can use the icons under the Utility tab in the EntraPass server application, or launch the Database
Utility from the Windows® Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > Workstation > Database
Utility.
NOTE: When you select the File > Workstation menu, the system displays only two icons, the Verify
database integrity and the Update database fields icons. The File > Server menu offers more choices.

Verifying Database Integrity

1 Click the Verify database integrity icon in the toolbar. You have the choice to perform a quick or a
complete check.
• Quick check: The system scans through the database tables, but does not display a detailed report
afterwards.
• Complete check: The system scans through the database tables and a detailed report is displayed.

Updating Database Fields

This function is automatically executed when you perform a software is updated. If an operator
performs a database restore (Server, Options toolbar, Restore), the database fields are automatically
updated when the information is restored. Even when an operator performs a database restore outside
the Server (copies the databases from a third party backup program), this function is automatically
carried out when the Server is started up again.
1 From the EntraPass Database utility window, select the Update database field icon.
NOTE: Use this function when, for instance, you experience problems when starting the server or
workstation. When the system does not start, this may imply that there are problems in the database;
that the source and the structure do not match.
System Utilities 307

Verifying Database Index

The Verify database Index program allows to entirely rebuild the database index by using the information
that was copied in the primary databases and grouping it to rebuild the Registry.DB database. The latter
is used to increase the system performance.
NOTE: This program can be used when a database is corrupted because it has not been backed up.

Verifying Database Links

The Verify Database Links utility is used to rebuild all the links of the database. Moreover, this program
cleans the databases by deleting links that are no longer valid. For example, if a schedule was assigned
to a functionality and this schedule was deleted, the system will initialize the field where it was assigned
in the primary database. It will also remove the records that point to deleted components. For example,
if an access level is assigned to a gateway and this access level was deleted, it will delete the record in
the database. The Verify Database Links utility enables complete management of the links between each
component and ensures that the correct information is displayed when:
• Viewing the structure of a component's links to all other components of the system,
• Removing all the traces of a component within the database when this component has been deleted. For
example, if a schedule is deleted, the system will use the link list to initialize all the database fields that
contains this schedule.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use this function when it is obvious that the database links are incorrect.
This features is useful when for example the system experiences abnormal terminations.

Verifying Database Hierarchy

In EntraPass, the database is set up in a hierarchical way, which means that all components have a
parent and can have children components. The Verify database hierarchy utility is used to rebuild the
parent‐child links within the database. The results of this program are limited if the damages of the
database are severe.
NOTE: When a user tries to access a controller by selecting a gateway and a site and when the result
does not correspond to the reality, this means that the database hierarchy is probably corrupted. In
this case, the Verify database hierarchy feature can be used to correct the problem. If the problem
cannot be fixed, this could mean that the database is too damaged to be fixed. It will be necessary to
restore the database.

verifying Database Archive Files

This function is used to verify archive files. It assigns a new unique sequential value to all primary
indexes of archive files.

Verifying In/Out Files

This function is used to verify In/Out database files. It assigns a new unique sequential value to all
primary indexes of In/Out database files.
308 System Utilities

Verifying Video Event Files

This function is used to verify video event files. It assigns a new unique sequential value to all primary
indexes of video event files. Depending on the number of video event files you have, start with the quick
check of the database, if you get errors then do the complete check of the database.

Swapping Descriptions
This function is used to interchange or to swap the database descriptions.

Cleaning the Database

This option is used to physically remove database records which have been identified by the system as
erased. Most of these records relate to cards and are kept in the Deleted Components section of the
database. Using this option will considerably reduce the space required by your database. It will also
improve system performance relating to searches for card information. It will not affect the table
Registry, nor will it have an impact on historical reports.
NOTE: It is strongly suggested to back‐up the database before performing this operation. Clean
database will suspend operation of the database while cleaning is in effect.

Rebuilding Card Last Transaction Files

This function is used to rebuild the card last transaction files.

EntraPass Video Vault

The EntraPass Video Vault application addresses the need for optimal video data storage and archive
management. This application offers an easy way for collecting important video data for future
reference. In fact, video recordings have a limited life span depending on the video server setting and
capability. Moreover, since video recordings require a great amount of disk space, using an archive
management tool such as EntraPass Video Vault enables organizations to better manage and easily
retrieve video contents. EntraPass Video Vault enables EntraPass users to:
• View the status of video archiving requests
• Monitor the status of video servers associated with the active EntraPass Video Vault application
• Monitor video download logs
• Archive video segments
The EntraPass Video Vault application will process the following video segment types:
• Video segments that were triggered by an automated trigger
• Video segments triggered by a manual operation
• Video segments recorded following video server triggers
• Exported video segments tagged for archiving
NOTE: The EntraPass V ideo Vault application requires an additional license. It is possible to install
more than one EntraPass V ideo Vault application with EntraPass. Each EntraPass V ideo Vault must be
configured for use with EntraPass (Devices > EntraPass Applications).
System Utilities 309

Installing the EntraPass Video Vault

An Option Certificate is required to install EntraPass Video Vault. For details about installing EntraPass
advanced options, see "Adding System Components" on page 18.

Launching the EntraPass Video Vault

At startup, the EntraPass Video Vault application tries to connect to the EntraPass server. If you are
launching the application for the first time, you may need the EntraPass Server’s IP address. Also, make
sure to launch the EntraPass Server before attempting to run EntraPass Video Vault.
1 From the shortcut menu on the desktop, or from the Windows® Start menu, launch the EntraPass Video
Vault application.
• Video Vault root directory: indicates the default folder where video segments are stored. The
EntraPass Video Vault root directory is determined when configuring EntraPass Video Vault from the
EntraPass environment (EntraPass workstation application > Devices > EntraPass Applications >
EntraPass Video Vault). The default EntraPass Video Vault root directory is C:\Kantech Video Vault.
• Current process: indicates the number of video segments that are being retrieved for archival
purposes.
• (KVI, KVA, AVI, IMG) files archived: shows the number of video segment files retrieved by EntraPass
Video Vault.
• Default video file format: the default format for archiving files. This format is defined while
configuring video archiving parameters for the EntraPass Video Vault: EntraPass workstation
application > Video > Video server > Video Vault Parameters tab.
• Registered Video Server(s): indicates the number of video servers associated with he active
EntraPass Video Vault application. An EntraPass Video Vault application is associated with a video
server when defining the Video Server (EntraPass workstations application > Video > Video server >
Video Vault Parameters tab).
• Processing error count: indicates the number of unsuccessful video archiving processes. To learn why
the archiving process was not completed, login to Video Vault > Action menu item > Video Server
List. The Action menu item appears only when you have entered a valid operator user name and
password. EntraPass enables you to retry retrieving unsuccessful archiving processes from the Video
Events List window: EntraPass workstation application > Video > Video Events List.

Managing Archived Video Segments

1 From the EntraPass Video Vault main window, select System > Login to launch EntraPass Video Vault and
login.
2 Enter the User name and Password for EntraPass Video Vault, then click OK to close the Operator login
window. You cannot log in two EntraPass applications simultaneously using the same user name and
password. Since you must run EntraPass Video Vault and the EntraPass server at the same time, make
sure to use a different user name for EntraPass Video Vault.
310 System Utilities

NOTE: To view detailed information about the numerical values displayed on the main window, login to
EntraPass Video Vault.
3 To view the list of Video servers associated with the EntraPass Video Vault application and the status of
the archiving process, select the View Video server menu item.

• Video server on line, archive period valid: During this period, the EntraPass Server retrieves video
segments from the Video server and queues them for archiving by EntraPass Vault. All video
segments originating from video triggers (automatic or manual) and segments tagged to be archived
in the Video Events List are archived in the EntraPass Video Vault.
• Video server offline, archive period valid: This status is tagged with a red flag. It indicates that the
EntraPass server cannot retrieve video segments from the Video server for various reasons. Video
segments recorded during that period will not be available for EntraPass Video Vault.
System Utilities 311

• Video server online, archive period not valid

• Video server offline, archive period not valid
4 To view the list of drive on which video data have been archived, select the View drive list menu item.
The Drive list window shows the status of all the files retrieved by EntraPass Video Vault from the Video
server.

• Disk ready
• Disk space lower than 100 MB
• Network drive not available
• Cannot access this drive
5 Select Transaction log to view the list of transaction errors.

NOTE: The transaction log window shows all the transactions that have occurred in the software since
the last time it was run. The Filters fields enable users to select the type of transactions to be
displayed.
312 System Utilities

Vocabulary Editor
The Vocabulary Editor allows users to translate the display text of the software in the language of their
choice. EntraPass offers you the possibility of adding up to 99 languages for the purpose of changing the
text language in the graphic user interface. However, you can only run the software in two languages at
a time, a primary and a secondary language. If you want to use the software in a language other than
English, French, German, Italian or Spanish, you can have the database dictionary translated in the
language of your choice. You will then have to integrate the translated dictionary in the software. The
creation of a new display language is carried out in three stages:
• Translating the source text,
• Integrating the newly created language to the EntraPass dictionary in the Server,
• Distributing the new custom language to all EntraPass application.
NOTE: In order to be able to run a new language, your operating system (W indows®) must support the
desired language. For example, your keyboard (characters) and window (display) must support the
specific characters of the desired language. The computers where EntraPass applications are running
must also support the language. For more information on language support, refer to your system
administrator.

Installing the Vocabulary Editor

EntraPass Vocabulary Editor is a stand‐alone program. You can install it and run it independently. If you
want to translate the system language, you just have to install the Vocabulary editor and then to
translate the vocabulary database.
NOTE: You do not need an additional license to install the Vocabulary Editor. You just have to select it
in the Setup window. For more information, see "System Installation" on page 14.

Translating the System Language

EntraPass Vocabulary Editor is a stand‐alone program. You can run it independently, you do not need to
launch EntraPass software to run the Vocabulary editor. The Vocabulary Editor program will assist you if
you want to translate the software in a language, other than English, French, Spanish Italian or German.
1 Start the Vocabulary editor from the Windows® Start menu: click Start > All Programs > EntraPass
Corporate Edition > Vocabulary Editor > Vocabulary Editor.
2 Select one of the available languages and click on New. The system displays the Select language window.
3 Select the source language for the translation, then click OK. The newly selected language is transferred
to the right in the Custom Languages display list.
4 Click on the new Custom Language and then on the Edit custom language button to start translating the
software vocabulary. The system displays the dictionary database.
System Utilities 313

NOTE: You must make sure that the Customdictionnary directories are regularly backed up
(C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Vocabulary Editor\CustomDictionary\files.xxx.ath) or
C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\”Application type”\CustomDictionary\files.xxx.0
The table below shows the value of the Vocabulary Editor color codes.

VOCABULARY EDITOR COLOR CODES VALUE

Green Valid text string.
Blue/Green New text string.
Red Obsolete text string.

• The “Source language” column contains text based on the basic language that was selected during
the creation of the vocabulary. This column will serve as a “source” for the translation. Software
language columns cannot be modified by the user.
• Use the right‐click to enable a contextual sub‐menu or use the Language editor toolbar. A hint
appears when you position the mouse over a button.
314 System Utilities

Integrating the Custom Language in EntraPass

Once the translation is finished, you have to integrate the new dictionary into the system dictionary so
that system operators can use it. The table below describes the icons action in the vocabulary editor
dialog. These options can also be selected from the Actions menu.

Icon Description
Apply changes to operational dictionary: this option is useful when you want to
test your changes before you update other workstations.
Restore operational vocabulary: this option allows the user to easily restore
the default languages. It creates a self‐extracting file which restores the
original dictionary.
Scan dictionary for new entries: this option is useful when the software was
updated.
Create self‐extracting file for update: If you decide to implement the new
vocabulary. The system creates an Updatedictionary.exe file, and prompts you
to select a destination folder for the file.

1 Start the Vocabulary Editor. The Vocabulary Editor window toolbar displays five buttons.
NOTE: The Graphic User Interface will only appear in one of five languages: English, French, German,
Italian or Spanish.
2 Select a newly translated vocabulary.
• You may choose to Apply changes to the Operational dictionary: this option is useful when you want
to test your changes before you update other workstations.
• Restore the operational vocabulary: this option allows the user to easily restore the default
languages. It creates a self‐extracting file which restores the original dictionary.
• Scan dictionary for new entries: this option is useful when the software was updated for example.
3 If you decide to implement the new vocabulary, select the Actions menu, then choose Create self‐
extracting file for update option. The system creates the Updatedictionary.exe file, and prompts you to
select a destination folder for the file:
4 Select the destination folder for Updatedictionary.exe. By default, the Self‐extracting file is stored in
C:\Program Files\Kantech (application).
NOTE: It is recommended to copy the Updatedictionary.exe file on a network folder if you want
operators to access the file to update their software application.

Distributing the New System Vocabulary

Before you run the file, make sure to exit the EntraPass software; otherwise the operation will not work.
To update the system vocabulary, you have to update the EntraPass server first. If you have a Mirror
database application, close it before you shutdown the server (so it does not start the Redundant Server
when you close the EntraPass server). Once the Mirror database application is shutdown, shutdown the
System Utilities 315

Primary server, update it and re‐start the server. Update the Mirror database and the Redundant server,
then start the Mirror database.

Updating the System Vocabulary

1 Exit all EntraPass programs.
2 Start Windows Explorer® > Kantech > (EntraPass application), then copy the Updatedictionary.exe on the
server.
3 Double‐click Updatedictionary.exe. The system displays the EntraPass applications that are installed on
the computer.
4 Select each application, then click the Update dictionary button.
5 You have to copy Updatedictionary.exe on every computer where EntraPass is installed, and then double‐
click it in order to launch the language update. To do so, you have first to exit all EntraPass applications
before you run the self‐extracting file.
6 Select the application you want to update (one at a time) and click Update dictionary button. The system
will automatically copy the vocabulary to the Custom Dictionary directory then merge the custom
directory with the application dictionary.
NOTE: You MUST update all the applications in the system.
NOTE: To restore the dictionary back to original default values, follow the same procedures as for
updating the dictionary.
7 Once you have finished updating the dictionary database for the Primary Server, the Mirror Database and
the Redundant Server, start the Primary server.
8 Select the Options toolbar, then select the Select language icon.
9 In the Select the language window, select the primary language and the secondary language. The newly
integrated language is displayed in the list. It is important to select the language at this stage, otherwise
the operators of the system will not be able to use it.
NOTE: For example, if your primary language is “English” and your secondary language is “French”: if
you select your new language (i.e. Russian) as primary, all operators who have “English” as their
display language in the Operator menu will be modified to “Russian”. On the other hand, if you change
the secondary language to “Russian” and operators are using “English”, you will have to manually
select “Russian” in the Operator definition menu”. To assign the desired language to an operator, use
the System definition menu, then select the Operator definition menu.
10 Before you update all the applications, login on the server and verify the display language. If everything
seems to be normal, then you can proceed with the system update. Remember, the computers must
support the language (display and keyboard).
NOTE: For every language you are installing, be sure to select the correct keyboard (Start > Settings >
Control panel > Keyboard). The selected keyboard is displayed in the system tray.

Upgrading the System Vocabulary

When you upgrade your system, the new or modified strings are automatically inserted in the system
vocabulary and also in the custom dictionary. If you have added a custom language to your system, you
316 System Utilities

have to translate the new/modified strings following a system upgrade. Therefore, you have to re‐edit
the vocabulary and create a new self‐extracting file. When you re‐open the vocabulary table, new
strings are indicated by a green point. Obsolete strings (no longer used) are tagged red.
NOTE: For easier management, we recommend that you always edit your vocabulary from the same
computer and integrate it to the system using a self‐extracting file.

Express Setup Program

The Express Setup program offers a quick and simple way to configure all the components of a system
gateway: type of readers used, number of sites, site name, number of controllers on a site, etc. For
example, it enables users to modify a door’s name by automatically applying default settings to all relays
and inputs of controllers connected to the selected door.

Configuring a Multi‐site Gateway Site Using Express Setup

1 From Windows® Start menu: Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > Workstation/Server >
Express Setup. You may also launch Express Setup by clicking the Express Setup icon from the registration
window or gateway definition window.
NOTE: The Operator login window appears only when starting Express setup in stand‐alone mode.
2 Enter your Operator user name and password, then click OK. The OK button is enabled when the
Password field contains data.
3 Select the gateway for which you want to configure a site, then click the New site icon.
4 Enter the Site name in the Site description field, then select the reader type.
5 Select the Controller type for this site.
NOTE: The KTES option is available for a Multi‐site Gateway only.
NOTE: There is no reader type or number of controllers to select when the controller type is a KTES.
6 Select the Reader type.
7 Set the Number of controllers.
8 Specify the Connection type. This indicates how the site communicates with the gateway computer. The
connection types available will follow the controller type selection.
• Select Direct (RS‐232 or USB), if the site is integrated to the gateway computer and connected to it
by an RS‐232 serial port. If the connection type is direct, then you have to specify the serial port
(com:) as well as the controller site baud rate (usually set at either 9600 or 19200). The default value
is 19200.
• Select Ethernet (polling) if the site communicates with the gateway through a terminal server device
(Lantronix) using a port number. Then you have to specify the terminal server’s IP Address and Port
number. To configure the terminal server, follow the manufacturer’s instructions or refer to the
terminal server documentation.
• Select Dial‐up (RS‐232) modem if applicable.
• Select Secure IP (KT‐400) if applicable. Complete the associated tabs.
• Select Secure IP (KTES) if applicable. Complete the associated tabs.
System Utilities 317

• Select Secure IP (IP Link) if applicable. Complete the associated tabs.

9 Click OK.
10 Specify the minimum configuration for the controllers or KTES defined in the site. This includes assigning
a name to the controller/KTES, specifying the passback option, and entering the serial number.
NOTE: The serial number column appears only for the KT‐100, KT‐300, KT‐400 controllers and the KTES.
The passback type column only appears for the KT‐300 and the KT‐400. The passback feature will not
allow any card to re‐enter unless it has been used to exit. This requires that readers be used for both
entry and exit.
11 For a new site with a KTES, go to Step 15.
12 Check the Same door 1 and 2 and Same door 3 and 4 option if a reader is installed on each side of the
door. The Same door 3 and 4 boxes are available only when you are using KT‐400.
13 Select the appropriate Passback type (none, soft or hard). If a door is defined as an access door, there is
no anti‐passback defined for this door. An entry or an exit door can be assigned a passback option.
14 Go to Step 17.
15 Check the Door contact option.
16 Check the Postal lock option, if applicable, for a KTES only.
17 Enter the Serial number, if this column is displayed. The serial number (S/N) is on a sticker and generally
starts with Axxxxxxx.
18 Click OK. The components associated with the controller and to the site are created in the server
database. By default, the KT‐200 and KT‐300 are assigned two doors except for the KT‐400 which is
assigned four doors, if the Same door option is not checked. The following table summarizes default
values that are assigned to controllers.
NOTE: When the system is updating the database, the second status flag turns red, indicating that the
system database is locked. When you try to access another system menu while the database is locked,
an error message appears. Simply wait until the system database becomes available.
The following are default values assigned to controllers by the Express Setup program.

Controller or KTES Door Relay Input zone Auxiliary output

KT‐100 1 4 4 2
KT‐200 2 2 16 4
KT‐300 2 2 8 4
KT‐400 4 4 16 16
KTES 1 3 4 2
318 System Utilities

The following tables summarize how input zones are used by the system for controllers.

Input zone System use Controllers

1 Door 1 contact KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300 and KT400
2 Door 1 Rex
3 Door 2 contact KT‐300
4 Door 2 Rex
5 Door 2 contact KT‐400
6 Door 2 Rex
9 Door 2 contact KT‐200
10 Door 2 Rex
9 Door 3 contact KT‐400
10 Door 3 Rex
13 Door 4 contact
14 Door 4 Rex

The following tables summarize how input zones are used by the system for the KTES.

Input zone System use Kantech Telephone Entry System

1 Door Contact KTES
2 Postal Lock
3 Door Rex
4 Future
System Utilities 319

The following table summarizes how output zones are used by the system.

Auxiliary output Use Controllers

1 LED (Door 1) KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300 and KTES
2 Buzzer (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 2) KT‐200 and KT‐300
4 Buzzer (Door 2)
1 OUT1 (Door 1) KT‐400
2 OUT2 (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 1)
4 Buzzer (Door 1)
5 OUT1 (Door 2)
6 OUT2 (Door 2)
7 LED (Door 2)
8 Buzzer (Door 2)
9 OUT1 (Door 3)
10 OUT2 (Door 3)
11 LED (Door 3)
12 Buzzer (Door 3)
13 OUT1 (Door 4)
14 OUT2 (Door 4)
15 LED (Door 4)
16 Buzzer (Door 4)

NOTE: The remaining components (relays and input zones) are undefined, that is, they have been
created but not yet defined. Components that are defined are grayed out. You cannot select them or
change their description. You can change their description in their respective definition menu (Devices
> Relays/Input zones).
By default, the system assumes that:
• The reader is ioProx Kantech XSF Format,
• The power supervision schedule is always valid,
• The failsoft delay is enabled for 45 seconds,
• The resistor type is none (KT‐100, KT‐300, KT‐400 and KTES),
• The wait for second card delay is 30 seconds.
320 System Utilities

Configuring a Controller Using Express Setup

When you select a connection type to a new site and immediately save, the system prompts you to use
the Express Setup tool to define the device. You may also launch this tool by selecting a controller and
clicking the Express Setup ( ) in the Controller dialog.
1 From the Controller window, select an undefined controller.
2 Under the General tab, select the Controller type.
3 Click on Save, a message box should display: Do you want to use the Express Setup program to configure
the associated devices. Click Yes to continue with the Express Setup.
• If you click on No, you can always return to the Express Setup by clicking on the icon.
NOTE: Please note that the KT‐300 is a 2‐door system while a KT‐400 is a four‐door system.
4 Specify if Both readers are installed on the same door, if applicable (not for a KTES). When two readers
are installed on the same door, the REX contact option is disabled.
5 Click the Advanced button to define the other devices, such as doors, inputs, relays and outputs.
NOTE: Components are listed in the left‐hand pane. The related tabs are displayed in the middle of the
window. When you select a component, its default name, number and default settings are displayed in
the language section. Select a component to enable its tab. Components that are assigned are gray
and cannot be modified at this stage. However, you may later modify any component description in its
definition menu (Devices > Controller/Door/Relay/Input/Output).

Configuring a KTES Using Express Setup

When you select a connection type to a new site and immediately save, the system prompts you to use
the Express Setup tool to define the device. You may also launch this tool by selecting a KTES and
clicking the Express Setup (rabbit icon) in the KTES dialog.
1 From the Site window, click on New to define a new site. Assign it a name for both languages.
2 Under the General tab, select the Controller type: Secure IP (KTES).
3 Click on Save, a message box should display: Do you want to use the Express Setup program to configure
the associated devices. Click Yes to continue with the Express Setup.
• If you click on No, you can always return to the Express Setup by clicking on the icon.
4 Check the Door contact and the REX contact options.
5 Check the Postal lock option, if applicable.
6 Click the Advanced button to define the other devices, such as doors, inputs, relays and outputs.
NOTE: Components are listed in the left‐hand pane. The related tabs are displayed in the middle of the
window. When you select a component, its default name, number and default settings are displayed in
the language section. Select a component to enable its tab. Components that are assigned are gray
and cannot be modified at this stage. However, you may later modify any component description in
KTES dialog menu (Devices > Kantech Telephone Entry System).
System Utilities 321

Defining Relays
You may configure relays to define their operation mode, activation and deactivation schedules. If you
want to assign a name to the relay, you have to select it. When you use the Select All button, the default
names are kept.
1 Select the first relay if you want to modify its description. The relay tab is enabled. You have to check the
box beside the relay name in order to enable the language section.
2 Check the appropriate options for the Operating mode.
3 In the Automatic activation schedule drop‐down list, choose the appropriate activation schedule.
4 In the Disable relay action drop‐down list, choose the appropriate action.

Defining Inputs
By default, the response time for a REX is 250 ms; it is 500 ms for other input zones. The alarm restore
time is 500 ms by default. The Express Setup program allows you to define the Input Normal State and
Monitoring Schedule.
1 Select the first undefined input (its checkbox is not gray). Check its box to enable the language fields,
then assign names to it.
2 Choose the Input normal state option.
3 Select the Monitoring schedule from the drop‐down list. If you want to assign a custom schedule to the
selected input, you have to define it in the Definition > Schedule.

Defining Auxiliary Outputs (LED and Buzzer)

If you want to change their assignment, you may do so while defining a controller or a KTES and in the
Devices > Output.
1 Select the first undefined output (its checkbox is not gray). Check its box to enable the language fields,
then assign names to it.
2 Choose the Operating mode option.
3 Assign a door to the output from the Selected doors drop‐down lists.
The following table summarizes how output zones are used by the system.

Auxiliary output Use Controllers

1 LED (Door 1) KT‐100, KT‐200, KT‐300 and KTES
2 Buzzer (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 2) KT‐200 & KT‐300
4 Buzzer (Door 2)
322 System Utilities

Auxiliary output Use Controllers

3 LED (Door 1) KT‐400
4 Buzzer (Door 1)
7 LED (Door 2)
8 Buzzer (Door 2)
11 LED (Door 3)
12 Buzzer (Door 3)
15 LED (Door 4)
16 Buzzer (Door 4)

Quick Report Viewer

The Quick Report Viewer program allows operators to view previously saved reports without having to
start EntraPass. It is used to view / display / load reports that were previously saved (in a.QRP format)
during a print preview or Quick reports. For details on requesting and generating reports, See Chapter
13 ‘Reports’ on page 257. This program is useful when EntraPass is off‐line and when a report must be
displayed for specific purposes.
1 From the Windows® task bar, click Start > All Programs > EntraPass > Server > Quick Report Viewer.
2 Click the Open button to open a report. The system displays the Open window:
3 By default, when a report is saved in a QRP format, the system automatically saves it in “My Documents”
folder. If you have saved the report in another folder you have to browse to the folder to select the
report.
4 Click Open to preview the report. Once you have selected the requested report, the system will display
your report:
5 Use the toolbar buttons to preview the report:

Icon Description
Use the Zoom out button to zoom out the report view.

Use the Zoom In button to display details (view closer).

Use Previous Page and Next Page buttons to change pages.

Use the Open button to open a report located in any folder on

your computer.
Use the Print button to print the report. There will be no
printer setup dialog box, the report will automatically print, to
cancel the printing, click Cancel.
System Utilities 323

Icon Description
Use the Quit button to quit the application.

PING Diagnostic
This stand‐alone program is used to diagnose network intermittent related problems and/or to
determine whether a specific IP address is accessible. It works by sending a packet (block) to the
specified address and waiting for a reply. The PING diagnostic program is used primarily to troubleshoot
Internet connections.
NOTE: If you want this option to be available, you have to select the “Allow diagnostic on network”
field when defining the server parameters. For more information, see "The EntraPass Server" on page
299.
1 From the Windows® Start menu, click Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > Workstation/
Server > PING Diagnostic.
2 From the scrolling list, select the application you want to monitor (Server, Workstation, Gateway, etc.).
3 Select the Block size from the drop‐down list. This field is used to select the amount of data that will be
sent. Selections vary from 1KB to 1024KB (1MB).
4 In the TCP/IP address field, enter IP address of the computer you want to test the communication link.
NOTE: See your Network Administrator for the required TCP‐IP address.
5 When you have entered the TCP/IP address, click the Test button to execute the command. The
information will be sent 16 times.The system displays the number of bytes sent and the number of bytes
received and the delay (in milliseconds).
NOTE: The delay between attempts should be similar, except for the first attempt which could be
longer than the others. If you do not have a response, the message will be displayed in the following
format: Sent(block) Bytes, No Answer (1717)

Workstation
This utility program is useful when a workstation or gateway needs to be configured. It contains all the
menus and features necessary to configure a system with event display, desktops, manual operations or
reports. The system installer can configure all workstations directly from this program without having to
go from workstation to workstation.

Start the Workstation config system utility from Windows® start menu Start > All Programs > EntraPass
Corporate Edition > Server > Workstation. This program can also be launched from a shortcut on the
desktop. When using this option, you must first create the operators and security levels (System
toolbar), then define the gateway, sites, controllers (Devices toolbar).
NOTE: For more information See Chapter 2 ‘Software Installation’ on page 9.
324 System Utilities

Migration Utility
Migrating EntraPass Special Edition to Corporate Edition
EntraPass offers you the ability to migrate your database from Special Edition to Corporate Edition.
Before start the migration process, you must take a backup of your EntraPass Special Edition database.
For more information on backing up your database, see "Backups" on page 300. You will then install
EntraPass Corporate Edition. For details on installing EntraPass Corporate Edition, see "System
Installation" on page 14.
NOTE: Do not run EntraPass Corporate Edition and do not register at this time.
The next step will be to run the migration utility. Once your database has been migrated, you will run
EntraPass Corporate Edition and register it with Kantech Technical Support. For more details on
upgrading EntraPass Special Edition to EntraPass Corporate Edition, see Application Note DN1619.

Migrating EntraPass Special Edition Database to Corporate Database

1 Install EntraPass Corporate Edition (do not run it, do not register it). For details about the software
installation, See Chapter 2 ‘Software Installation’ on page 9.
2 Run the Migration Utility: from the Windows Start menu > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition >
Server > Migration from EntraPass Special Edition. The Migration Utility main window appears.
3 From the Migration window, navigate to the EntraPass SE database directory.
4 Launch EntraPass Corporate Edition. Register EntraPass Corporate Edition. To register EntraPass
Corporate Edition, call Kantech technical support. For details, See Chapter 2 ‘Software Installation’ on
page 9.

The Gateway Interface

A gateway is a software interface that is used to convert the information received from the sites/
gateway (which receives information from the controller loops) to the server. The server and the
gateway communicate in the same protocol while the controllers and the site/gateway communicate in
the same protocol. Usually, the Gateway software are installed on the same computer. Sometimes, the
Gateway can be installed on an external computer which is linked to another computer equipped with
the Gateway software interface (that communicates the information to the server). The access control
system is in fact composed of two different systems:
• Computers are used to enter information and access the database.
• Door controllers (grouped in loops) are managed through the Gateway.
The System menu lets you login/logout and reload the Gateway.

Starting the Gateway

You can start the Workstation and the Gateway, the workstation only or just the Gateway only interface.
System Utilities 325

1 Click on Start > All Programs > EntraPass (software) > Gateway > Gateway. This is when you only have the
“Gateway Only” software installed. You may also click Start > All Programs > EntraPass (software) >
Workstation & Gateway > Gateway (when you have the Workstation & Gateway software installed).

Reloading the Gateway

This option is used to reload information to a specific gateway. It is used to refresh all or some
parameters relative to the network. Information included in the Server is downloaded to each gateway,
then the gateways reload the controllers. When you perform this operation, the controllers will be
working on their own (fail‐soft mode).

The status bar indicates the system's date and time, the name of the operator who is currently logged,
the status (could be any message such as running, etc.) and the IP address of the EntraPass server (the
green square indicates the server state, if yellow then it is the Redundancy Server).
• Configuration data received from the server: The progress bar indicates that configuration data is being
received from the EntraPass Server. Configuration data can be information such as “Card modifications”,
etc.
• Data requested by workstation: The progress bar indicates that data is being requested from the
EntraPass Workstations of the system (could be any). Data can be information such as “Status Requests”,
etc.
• Messages generated by the gateway: The progress bar indicates that messages are generated from the
gateway. These messages can be: Access granted, input in alarm, Access denied—bad access level, etc.
• Configuration data sent to the controllers: The progress bar indicates that configuration data (which was
received by the EntraPass Server) is being forwarded to the controllers.
NOTE: The progress bars indicate data transfers being executed and that information is being sent
back and forth.

MS/SQL Interface
The MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface is a program that creates a real‐time copy of the EntraPass card database
in the MS‐SQL or ORACLE Server. This interface allows user to modify, add or obtain card‐related
information, all this in real‐time, from the MS‐SQL or ORACLE database. The MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface
card database, which contains cardholder information, will be updated automatically as soon as new
information is available in the EntraPass card database.
NOTE: The MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface program is not supported by the Mirror Database and
Redundant Server.
Depending on the client interface that is used (EntraPass or MS‐SQL/ORACLE Client) to add or modify a
card, the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface program ensures that the modifications is conveyed to the EntraPass
Server and vice versa and that the information, whatever its origin, is updated in both databases. (For
more information, see the “exchange data process” diagram).
326 System Utilities

Installing the MS/SQL Interface

It is recommended to install the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface program on a computer where use is at its
minimum, since the data exchange process is processed through the computer running the software.
Depending on the size of the database and the number of transactions, the updating process may
require more memory. Furthermore, the computer on which the software will be installed must meet
the same requirements as an ordinary EntraPass Workstation (see "Minimum System Requirements" on
page 9).
1 Install the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface component (CardGateway) by following the installation procedure,
see "System Installation" on page 14 (use the appropriate installation code).
2 You MUST install MS‐SQL/ORACLE client on the same computer as the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface
program. You can also install the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface program on a computer where an existing
MS‐SQL/ORACLE client software is already installed,
3 To complete the installation, you must create the database in the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Server. To do so, you
can manually create the database or you can use the automatic integrated function to automatically
create the database in the Server (see MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface Configuration below).

Configuring the CardGateway

For more information on how to configure the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface program in order to create the
database automatically or to manually create the database, user name and password in MS‐SQL/ORACLE
Server, see "Creating Server Databases Manually" on page 51.

Starting the CardGateway

1 From the Windows® tool bar, click on Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > MS‐SQL and
Oracle Interface > MS‐SQL and Oracle Interface. The display language depends on the settings of the
operator that was previously logged in this workstation.
Once you have performed the above steps, the software will try to establish a link with the server.
During the process, the following screen will be displayed:
2 When the application connects to the MS‐SQL/ORACLE server for the first time, it creates 5 tables in the
KANCARD database named: tbCard, tbCardType, tbCardAccessGroup, tbTransactionIn and
tbTransactionOut.
NOTE: Information or data that is being transferred from the EntraPass primary server to the MS‐SQL/
ORACLE Interface database will be compressed for faster transfer.
The first three tables (tbCard, tbCardType, tbCardAccessGroup) are filled at the first connection with all
the Cards, Card Access Groups and Card Types. Writing in these tables is not necessary because the MS‐
SQL/ORACLE Interface periodically updates them. They should only be read. The tbTransactionIn table is
used to create, modify or delete cards from the MS‐SQL/ORACLE server. The MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface
scans this table periodically. When it finds a card, it creates, modifies or delete this card in the EntraPass
server depending on the value of the State column of the tbTransactionIn record (a state value of 0 will
create or modify the card and a state value of 1 will delete the card). Once this is done, the MS‐SQL/
ORACLE Interface will delete the card from the tbTransactionIn table.
System Utilities 327

The tbTransactionOut table contains the history of all creations, modifications and deletions of cards
(since the start of the CardGateway). All successful creations, modifications or deletions of a card done
by the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface after reading this card in the tbTransactionIn table will also be found in
the tbTransactionOut table.
3 Then, the main application screen will be displayed:

System configuration
• Server name—This field indicates the name of the SQL or Oracle Server as defined in the workstation
definition menu.
• EntraPass State—This field indicates the real‐time status of the EntraPass server. In case of failure,
messages would appear here.
Database
• Database State—This field indicates the real‐time status of the card database.
Transaction Report
• Data received from the EntraPass Server—When card‐related information are modified within the
EntraPass server (database), the information is also forwarded to the MS‐SQL/ORACLE Interface
database where the SQL or Oracle Server will collect the information. This field indicates the number
of transactions that were executed and sent to the card database.
• Data updated on SQL Server—
• Nb of cards sent to EntraPass Server—This field indicates the number of cards that were added or
modified in the SQL or Oracle client application and that were sent to the EntraPass Server’s
database.
328 System Utilities

Transactions
The registry contains the details of the transactions that are processed by the CardGateway program.
You must login to access this screen.
Diagram
The diagram below shows the “DATA EXCHANGE PROCESS” between the CardGateway program and the
MS‐SQL/ORACLE database.

The SmartLink Interface

The SmartLink interface allow a user to define a message and format type that may be sent on the
second COM port or to a disk file. The following pages explain how to build a character string that can be
sent through the SmartLink. Using the SmartLink feature, you can interface to just about any intelligent
System Utilities 329

device such as video matrix switchers, paging systems, etc. To do this, a RS‐232 link is cabled between
one of the EntraPass Workstation and the external device. The necessary command strings and protocols
can be easily edited on site to fit just about any job.

The SmartLink simplifies the interfacing to “alien” intelligent devices because it provides the system
installer all the tools necessary to build and maintain the actual interface without having to purchase
“special” drivers from Kantech. In communications, a link is a line or channel over which data is
transmitted. The transmission of data from one computer to another, or from one device to another. A
communications device, therefore, is any machine that assists data transmission. For example, modems,
cables, and ports are all communications devices.
Required Material
• A computer that meets the same requirements as an EntraPass Workstation (see "Minimum System
Requirements" on page 9),
• Installation CD‐ROM for the SmartLink application including the serial number.
Installation
1 Create the new application in the Workstation Registration menu, see "Minimum System Requirements"
on page 9 for more information on how to create new applications,
2 Install the SmartLink application on the computer (see "System Installation" on page 14).
3 Once the SmartLink application is installed, you need to configure the SmartLink application,
4 If you are using the Message Mode, you will need to create tasks. For more information on how to create
tasks with the Task Builder, See Chapter 5 ‘Task Builder Definition’ on page 115.

Configuring the SmartLink Application

The configuration is done on an ordinary EntraPass workstation or any EntraPass Workstation for
configuration (found on the same computer as the Server software). Depending on the modes that will
be used for the SmartLink (Messages or Commands), you must program the workstation accordingly.

Starting the SmartLink Application

1 From the computer where the SmartLink application is installed, click on the Windows® task bar and
select Start > All Programs > EntraPass > SmartLink > SmartLink. The SmartLink application will be
started. Refer to the SmartLink Reference Manual DN1327 for more information on the SmartLink
Application.
NOTE: Limited support is provided on the SmartLink interface.

Network Consumption
The consumption of network time can be divided in many categories:
Messages:
• A message originating from a Server can generate:
• Minimum: 128 bytes + (# workstations, SmartLinks * 32 bytes)
• Maximum: 128 bytes + (# workstations * 416 bytes)
330 System Utilities

• A message originating from a Workstation, Gateway, etc. generates 56 bytes.

• Using pictures (cardholders) on a system will increase the network traffic. The increase will mainly
depend on the number of workstations that are using this option, the number of cards in the system as
well as the number of transactions per card.
Reloads:
Since reloads are sporadic actions that have few impacts on the network, it is possible to break down
the reload consumption of the Gateway into commonly used features.

Features Bytes Details

System 256 ‐
Controllers # * 32 Where # = 0 to 128
Doors # * 32 Where # = 0 to 256
Relays # * 16 Where # = 0 to 2048
Inputs # * 16 Where # = 0 to 2048
Auxiliary outputs # * 16 Where # = 0 to 512
Areas # * 32 Where # = 0 to 100
Alarm partitions # * 64 Where # = 0 to 100
Controller groups # * 32 Where # = 0 to 100
Door groups # * 80 Where # = 0 to 100
Relay groups # * 320 Where # = 0 to 100
Input groups # * 320 Where # = 0 to 100
Access level groups # * 80 Where # = 0 to 100
Access levels # * 640 Where # = 0 to 248
Schedules # * 64 Where # = 0 to 99
Cards # * 16 Where # = 0 to 32,000
Holidays # * 64 ‐
Event parameters # * 16 Where # = 0 to 50,000

Manual Operations:
There are 2 types of manual operations:
• Operations that are used to execute functions such as unlocking a door. These operations, which are
occasionally requested, usually involve an insignificant amount of information.
• Operations which are used to recuperate a component or request a card list. Even though these
operations can be frequently requested, they usually involve an insignificant amount of information. For
example, requesting a door status only requires 16 bytes OUT and 64 bytes IN.
System Utilities 331

EntraPass Online Help

Getting the Online Help
1 There are two ways of calling the EntraPass Online Help:
• By clicking on the (? Help) button.
• From the Windows® task bar, click Start > All Programs > EntraPass Corporate Edition > Server >
English Help.
332 System Utilities
333
334
Animated Icons 335

Animated Icons
Animated icons indicate the status of physical or logical components in the windows of EntraPass
software. They represent the component status in real time and simulate a movement by displaying a
series of pictures associated with the component. If a particular component status is difficult to identify,
use this section to identify it.

Controllers
Controller animated icons indicate the status of a door controller in the graphic window (Desktop >
Graphic desktop) or in the “Operation” window.
Status unknown

Appears when the EntraPass application has not received the component' status after four (4) attempts.
It is displayed in:
• the Operation window (alarms, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload data)
• or the Desktop > Graphic desktop.
Controller AC failure

Appears when the controller is in AC failure. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset Controller AC failure and Tamper Switch in “alarm”

Appears when the controller is in AC failure and the tamper switch is in alarm. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset
Controller is not communicating

Appears when the controller is not communicating. It is displayed in:

• the “Operation” — “Controller Reset” windows.
• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.
336 Animated Icons

Controller communication is regular (no problem)

Appears when the controller is communicating and the communication is regular. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset.
Controller status is not yet known

Appears when the status of the controller is not yet known. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
Controller is in “Reset” and AC failure

Appears when the controller is in “reset mode” and in “AC failure”. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset.
Controller is in “Reset”, “AC failure” and “Tamper in alarm”

Appears when the controller is in “reset mode”, in “AC failure” and the tamper is in alarm. It is displayed
in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset
Controller is in reset and tamper in alarm

Appears when the controller is in “reset mode” and the tamper is in alarm. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset.
Controller tamper in alarm
Animated Icons 337

Appears when the controller tamper is in alarm. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset when the controller tamper is in alarm.
Controller reloading firmware

Appears when the controller is reloading firmware. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset.
KT‐400 controller trouble

Appears when there is a KT‐400 controller trouble. It is displayed in:

• the Desktop > Graphic desktop
• the Operation > Controller.

Doors
Icons representing a door state indicate the status of door within the graphic window (from the desktop)
or within the “Operation” window.
Door forced open

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and that no access granted nor request to exit was
permitted. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door, Elevator Door
Door forced open (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and that no access granted nor request to exit was
permitted and the reader is disabled. it is displayed in:
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic)
• the Operation > Door, Elevator Door
338 Animated Icons

Door closed and locked

This animated icon appears when the door is closed and locked. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door
Door closed and locked (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door closed and locked and that the reader is disabled. It is
displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door.
Door status unknown

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the door is not yet known.
Door open too long

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than the permitted delay set in “open time”.
It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door, Elevator door.
Door open too long (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than the permitted delay set in “open time”
and that the reader is disabled. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door, Elevator door.
Animated Icons 339

Door open and unlocked manually

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and it was unlocked by an operator. it is displayed
in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.
Door open and unlocked manually (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and it was unlocked by an operator and the reader
is disabled. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.
Door is opened and unlocked by schedule

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and it was unlocked by a schedule. It is displayed
in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.
Door is opened and unlocked by schedule (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened, and it was unlocked by a schedule and the reader
is disable. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.
Door pre‐alarm on open too long

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than half the time permitted delay set in
“open time”. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
340 Animated Icons

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door pre‐alarm on open too long (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than half the time permitted delay set in
“open time” and the reader is disabled. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.
Door still opened schedule invalid

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and the unlock schedule is invalid. It is displayed
in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.
Door still opened schedule invalid (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and the unlock schedule is invalid and the reader is
disabled. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door/ Elevator door.
Door unlocked by an operator

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by an operator (manually). It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.
Door unlocked by an operator (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by an operator (manually) and the reader is
disabled. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
Animated Icons 341

• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Door unlocked by a schedule

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by a schedule. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.
Door unlocked by a schedule (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by a schedule and the reader is disabled.
It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.
Elevator door unlocked and closed

This animated icon appears when the elevator door is closed and unlocked. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Relays
Relays icons indicate the status of a relay within the graphic window (from the desktop) or within the
“Operation” window.
Relay activated by an event

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is triggered by an event.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by an event.
Relay temporarily activated by an event
342 Animated Icons

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is temporarily activated by an event.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is temporarily activated by an event.
Relay activated by an input

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is triggered by an input.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by an input.
Relay temporarily activated by an input

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is temporarily activated by an input.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is temporarily activated by an input.
Relay activated by an operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is activated by an operator.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is activated by an operator.
Relay temporarily activated by an operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) for a relay temporarily activated by an operator.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is temporarily activated by an operator.
Relay activated by a schedule

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is activated by a schedule.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is activated by a schedule.
Animated Icons 343

Relay deactivated

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is not activated.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is not activated.
Relay status unknown

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the relay is not yet known.

Inputs
This section is used to indicate the status of an input within the graphic window (from the desktop) or
within the “Operation” window.
Input activated—Not supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated and the monitoring schedule is
invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated and the monitoring schedule is invalid.
Input activated—Supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated and the monitoring schedule is
valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated and the monitoring schedule is valid.
Input activated—Not supervised manual operation

This animated icon appears in:

344 Animated Icons

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated, manually operated and the
monitoring schedule is invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated, manually operated and the monitoring schedule is
invalid.
Input activated—Supervised manual operation

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated, manually operated and the
monitoring schedule is valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated, manually operated and the monitoring schedule is
valid.
Input activated—Supervised temporarily manual operation

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated, manually operated and the
monitoring schedule is temporarily valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated, manually operated and the monitoring schedule is
temporarily valid.
Input in alarm—Not supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and the monitoring schedule is
invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and the monitoring schedule is invalid.
Input in alarm—Shunted by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and it is shunted by an operator.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and it is shunted by an operator.
Animated Icons 345

Input in alarm—Supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and the monitoring schedule is
valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and the monitoring schedule is valid.
Input in alarm—Supervised by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and it is supervised by an operator
(continuous supervision).
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and it is supervised by an operator (continuous
supervision).
Input OK—Not supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and the monitoring
schedule is invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and the monitoring schedule is invalid.
Input OK—Shunted by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and it is shunted by an
operator.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and it is shunted by an operator.
Input OK—Supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and the monitoring
schedule is valid.
346 Animated Icons

• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and the monitoring schedule is valid.
Input OK—Supervised by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and it is supervised by
an operator (continuous supervision).
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and it is supervised by an operator
(continuous supervision).
Input status unknown

This animated icon appears in the “Graphic” desktop when the status of the input is not yet known.

Sites and Gateways

These icons indicate the status of a site, or gateway within the graphic window (from the desktop) or
within the “Operation” window.

Controller Site:
Site status is not yet known

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the controller site is not yet known.
Controller site connected

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the site is connected and communication is OK.
• the Operation > Reload data when the site is connected and communication is OK.
Controller site connected and in “Reload Data”

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the site is connected and is in “reload data” state.
Animated Icons 347

• the Operation > Reload data when the site is connected and is in “reload data” state.
Controller site—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (Desktop—graphic) when the site is disconnected and there is a communication
failure.
• the Operation > Reload data when the site is disconnected and there is a communication failure.

Gateway:
Gateway—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (door, elevator door, relay, input, reload gateway) window when the gateway is in
communication failure.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is in communication failure.
Gateway in “Reload Data”

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (Desktop—graphic) when the gateway is being reloaded.
• the Operation > (door, elevator door, relay, input, reload gateway) when the gateway is being reloaded.
Gateway—Communication Failure during Reload Data

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (reload data gateway) window when the gateway loses communication during a reload
data operation.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway loses communication during a reload data
operation.
Gateway communication is regular (no problem)

This animated icon appears in:

348 Animated Icons

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is communicating and the communication is
regular.
• the Operation > Reload data gateway, communication is regular.
Gateway Trouble

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is not communicating.
• the Operation > Reload data gateway, the gateway is not communicating.
Gateway Trouble when Reloading

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is not communicating.
• the Operation > Reload data gateway is not communicating with the gateway during a reload data
operation.

Gateway (Gateway Software Interface):

Gateway OK—communicating

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is communicating.
• the Operation > Reload data when the gateway is communicating.
Gateway in “Reload Data”

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is being reloaded.
• the Operation > Reload data when the gateway is being reloaded.
Gateway—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when gateway is not communicating.
Animated Icons 349

• the Operation > Reload data when the gateway is not communicating.

EntraPass Application
Application status is not yet known

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the application is not yet known.
Application attempts communication

This animated icon appears in:

• the startup window when the workstation attempts to communicate with the server.
Application—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the workstation is in communication failure.
• the “Operation” window (alarm, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload gateway) when the workstation
is in communication failure.

Others
Database Initialization

This animated icon appears in:

• the startup window when the workstation initializes the database.
Data not available

This animated icon is used to indicate a transient stage. This could indicate that the requested
information is not currently available.
350 Animated Icons

No state available

This animated icon is used to indicate a transient stage. This could indicate that the requested
component status is not currently available.
Output status is not yet known

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the output is not yet known.
Status unknown

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (alarms, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload) window when the workstation has not
received the component' status after four (4) attempts.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the workstation has not received the component' status
after four (4) attempts.
Error in process

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (alarms, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload data) window when a specific error is
detected.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when a specific error is detected.
Undefined Component

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” window (alarm, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload data gateway) when the
component does not exist.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the component does not exist.
 351

Index
Numerics Controllers 335
Doors 337
1st IN last OUT
Inputs 343
Time & Attendance reports 270 Others 349
3rd party hardware Relays 341
Configuration 103, 105
Site and gateway 346
DLL integration 293
Anti‐passback
Graphic 109
Hard anti‐passback 79
Operations 149, 165
Soft anti‐passback 79
A Assign alarm sound 281
Abort report if free space lower than (MB) 289 Assigning an Access Level to a Cardholder 173
Access Authentication 46
Control 1 Password Modification 279
Events 96 Automatic
Levels Activation schedule 98
Administrator 36 Backup 295
Arming 97 Backup scheduler 295
Bad 96 Logout on idle 284
Create groups 204
Definitions 190
B
Primary access level 173 Background
Managed by user 104 Live video 111
Schedule Web page 111
Tenants 198 Backlight delay (KTES) 85
Acknowledging alarms Backup 300
Acknowledge schedule 230 Folder 295
Automatic 216 Scheduler 294
Definition and purpose 248 Separate files 295
Set priority 230 Type 295
Using the alarm message box 48 Badging 3
Activate relay temporarily 101 Creating a badge 179
Adding 18 Edit a badge layout 179
Adding system components 18 Get picture from file 175
Advanced schedule capability 284 MCI 175
Paste picture 175
Alarm
Video images 175
Controls
Definition 48
Bandwidth
Message box 48
Video 282, 291
Response time 100 Batch operations
Sound 281 Card filter 193
Allow diagnostic on network 285 Battery trouble (KTES) 85
Animated icons Buffer (KTES) 85
352

Buttons Last transaction files

Resize 293 Rebuild 308
C Last transactions 188
Lost 170
Camera Management
Definition 132 WebStation 292
Card Modification date 168, 170
Access group Modifications count 168, 170
Access levels 190 New 167
Definitions 190 Number 168
Access levels to cardholders 173 Passback option 174
Adding a signature from a signature capture de‐ Pending 174
vice 176 Print a list of cards 187
Assign a picture 175 Printing 187
Assign picture from file 175 Printing badges 177
Assigning a Picture from a File 175 Show cardholder information with picture 47
Assigning a Picture Using a Video Camera 175 Start date 173
Card access group 173 State 174
Card format Stolen 170
Hard reset 278 Trace 170
Multiple card format 278 Type definition 191
Card number 169, 170 Usage restriction 174
Trace 170 Use count options 174
Change card format Use reports
Decimal 277 Schedule mode 263
Hexadecimal 278 WebStation 263
Octal 277 User name 168
Copy to visitor card 168 Validate card access 186
Create a day pass 191 Wait for keypad 174
Create card types 191 CardGateway
Creation date 170
Mirror Database and Redundant Server 2, 52
Database fields
Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface 49
Security level 221
See Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface 49
Definition 167
Cardholders
Delete when expired 173
Access Levels 173
Display Format
Defining 277
Changing the Authentication Password 279
Enhanced user management 292 Changing the System Language 279
Expired 174 Checking Server and Workstation Databases 297
Filter 193 Clean Database 308
FIPS 278 Clear alarm messages 47, 48
Hiding card information 221 Clear annotation 112
Importing a signature from a file 176 Clear background 111
Information fields 168 Communication protocol 63
Keep picture on desktop 240 Communication timing 62
 353

Component links Create patterns 194

Display 36 Exporting procedure 195
Components physical address 220 Importing procedure 196
Concurrent Logins Custom images 112
WebStation 218 Custom language
Configuration KTES 312
3rd party hardware 103 Custom Messages 296
Controllers 66 D
Doors 88 Database
EntraPass Gateways 58 Checking 297
EntraPass workstations 44 Logical components (view) 234
Inputs 99 Output Type 258
Integrated component 105 Status 211
Mirror Database and Redundant Server 52 Structure 234
Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface 49 Utility program
Relays 98 Rebuild card last transaction files 308
Sites/Loops 61 Swap descriptions 308
System devices 41 Verify Database hierarchy 307
Contact Verify Database links 307
Interlock 94 Verify Time & Attendance files 307
Options Verify video event files 308
Doors 91 Verify integrity 306
Controllers 41 Date and time on separate fields 289
Animated icons 335 Day Pass Definition 191
Configuration 66
Daylight saving time 62
controller local area
KT‐400 79
Decimal 277
Create groups 203 Definition
Definition 66 Access Levels 190
Express setup 320 Day Pass 191
Hard reset 155 E‐mail parameters 268
Local area 89 Graphic 109
Loop baud rate 62, 316 Host modem 59
Reloading firmware 155 Schedule 107
Reset 154 Visitor 190
Soft reset 155 Delays
Status (graphic view) 209 Before message 119
Corporate gateway Before unshunt 101
Configuration 59 Exit and Entry 97
Express Setup 316 Reset delay for shunt temporarily 101
Corporate site schedules 285 DEOL
Credentials Double end‐of‐line 101
Enhanced user management 292 Design background picture 112
CSV Import/Export 194 Desktops
354

Alarms 245 Disk space 283

Alarms desktop Video Vault 56
Acknowledge 247 Display
Delete log 247 Description in task bar 284
Display graphic screen 250 Description in title bar 284
Display instruction screen 250 Login List 284
Flag 247 Multiple pictures 243
Print log 247 Displaying component links 36
Purge deleted log 247 DLL integration
Filtered messages 243 3rd party hardware 293
Floating 37 Doors 41
Historical reports 243
Animated icons 337
Messages desktop
Contact options 91
Auto‐rescroll delay 240
Create groups 203
Background color 240
Defining general parameters 88
Delete all 241
Elevators 94
Display events in bold 240
Events 95
Display last message on top 240
Group 203
Display message (in full) 240
Interlock options 94
Display toolbar 240
Keypad options 90
Keep card picture 240
Open reading 92
Manual properties 240
Options and alarm system 97
Message type 239
Options for controllers and the KTES 96
Multi‐line 239
Return to schedule 157, 160
Play archived video recordings 245
REX options 92
Send to back 242
Selecting a door 158
Show icons 239
Toggle command 120, 121, 122, 123
View parent 241
Unlock reading 92
Diagnostic 285 Draw frame 110
Dial information 119 Draw transparently 110
Dial‐up modem 64 Duress
Directory 258 Duress on access denied 85
Disabling Duress on access granted 85
Card readers 160 Keypad duress key 85
DirectX 282, 290 Options 78
Door reader 159
Manual time synchronization 290
E
Relay action 98 Edit background picture 110
Video 46 Edit system components 19
Disarming request 98 Elevators
Disk free space threshold 283 Cab
Reports 289 Doors 89
Server 283 Control
Video Vault 56 Unlock schedules (elevator floors) 95
 355

Controllers 71 Configuration 64
Create floor groups 204, 205 Event trigger
Create floors 109 Task builder 115
Door Events
Input definition 102 Acknowledge schedule 230
Selecting 160 Buffer
Doors 94 Controller 66
Locking floors 161 Color 229
Floor disabling 162 Deleting and restoring associations 230
Floor enabling 162 Display (schedule) 229
REB‐8s 71 Doors 95
Select cab for floor group activation 102 Instructions (assign to events) 230
Email Pager codes (KTES) 87
Options 49 Parameter definition 227
Reports 49 Parameters
Task builder 118 Task 230
Email report authentication 49 Print parameters 231
Enabling Print schedule 229
Arming request schedule 97 Set priority 230
Card readers 160 Viewing associations 230
Door reader 159 Expansion Modules
Duress function on KTES keypad 96 Configuring 76
Fail‐soft delay (KTES) 82 Exported Video 148
Postpone arming schedule 98 Express Setup 29, 316
Signature pad 282 Configuring a corporate gateway 316
TFTP IP Link updater 287 Controllers 320
TFTP KT‐400 updater 286, 287 KTES 320
Video capture 282 Extended door access delay 90, 96
Encryption 45 Tenant 198
End‐of‐line Extended number of ring before answer (KTES)
Double 101 81
KT‐400 66 Extended ring
KTES 82 Tenant 198
KT‐MOD‐INP16 module 77 Extended selection box 34, 40
Override default 101
Extended talk time (KTES) 81
Enhanced user management
External Alarm
Credentials 292
System interfaces 97
New card 168
System options 97
Enter network tag 120 System panel status 97
EntraPass
Configuring 44
F
Starting the server 25 Fail‐safe
Starting the workstation 27 Doors 88
Ethernet polling 316 Fail‐secure
356

Doors 88 Inputs 204

Fail‐Soft 233, 240 Relays 204
Filtered Message list and Picture 242 H
Find user timeout delay (KTES) 85 Hard anti‐passback 79, 89
FIPS 278 Hard reset
First entry last exit Card format 278
Time & Attendance reports 270 Hardware
First IN last OUT Definition 61
Time & Attendance reports 270 HDVR video format 57
Floating Heater kit activated (KTES) 86
Desktops 37 Hide PIN number (KTES) 84
Windows 37 Historical Reports 259
Floor Automatic filename 266
Confirmation 73 Automatic report schedule screen 263
Definition 109 Desktop 243
Group 95, 102, 204, 205 Destination 266
Frame color 110 Filter mode 261
G Output process 265
Gateway Output type 264
Animated icons 347 Preview 274
Configuration 58 Report language 267
Configuring 49 Schedule mode 263
Data reload 151 Selected components 261
General parameters 49 State 244
Hard reset 151 WebStation 261
Manual operations 151 Holiday
Starting 26 Definition 114
General parameters 44 I
Graphic Icons, see Animated icons 335
3rd party hardware 109 Immediate call 86, 96, 100
Definition 109, 110 Import/Export 194
Designing the background 112 Input module
Icons
End‐of‐line 77
Assigning system components 113
Inputs
Printing system components and graphics 113 Abnormal condition 100
Status (controller view) 209
Alarm system options 98
Task 109
Animated icons 343
Groups Arming request 97
Access levels 204
Configuration 99
Areas 205
Continuous supervision 164
Controllers 203
Create groups 204
Doors 203
Elevator door 102
Floors 204
Group 204
 357

Input to postpone arming 98 Doors 90

KTES 100 Relay activation 91
Monitoring schedule 99 KT‐100
Normal 164 Configuration 70
Normal condition 99 KT‐200
Performing manual operations 164 Auxiliary devices 71
Remote event reporting 102 Configuration 71
Response time 100 Expansion devices 71
Shunt 94, 101 KT‐2252
Tamper and Trouble 101 Elevator controllers 71, 72
Toggle command 120, 121, 122, 123 Program 71
Inserting serial device 120 KT‐300
Instructions Combus modules
Assign to events 230 Configuration 74
Definition 232 Controller
Integrated component Configuration 74
Configuration 105 KT‐400
Integrated panel Configuring 75
Configuration 103 Controller local area 79
Manual operations 165 Defining controller local areas 79
Integration Elevator floor associations
3rd party panel 41 Definition 80
Interlock options End‐of‐line 66
Doors 94 Ethernet Four‐Door Controller 62
Mantrap 94 Ethernet four‐door controller
Interval 108 Configuration 75
Intrusion 4 Expansion modules 76
Access managed by user 104 Configuration 76
Events 229 KTES
User access code 105 Custom language 312
IP Device Parameters 63 Duress options 85
IP Link 287 End‐of‐line 82
Event pager codes 87
K Express Setup 320
Kantech controllers Fail‐soft delay 82
Configuration 67 General parameters 81
Kantech IP Link 2, 62 Language and Welcome messages 83
Kantech Telephone Entry System 3 LCD settings 84
Configuration 80 Options 84
Options 82 Pager reporting 86
Keypad Phone line configuration 82
Enable duress function 91 Postal lock 81
Escape key 70 Relays parameters 85
Options Serial number 82
358

Setup Wizard 81, 320 Lost Card 170

Supervision schedules 85 M
Tenant administration levels 88
Tenant response settings 83
MAC address 63
Tenants list 82 Mantrap 94
Visitor call settings 81 Interlock options 94
Welcome Message 83 Manual Operations
Wiegand integration 83 Arm door 157
KT‐MOD‐INP16 76 Disable card readers 157
77
End‐of‐line Disable reader 160
KT‐MOD‐OUT16 76 Disarm door 157
Enable card readers 157
KT‐MOD‐REL8 76
Enable readers 160
L Integrated panel 165
Language Lock door or group of doors 157
Custom 312 Lock elevator door 160
KTES 83 Temporarily lock door 160
Operator 216 Temporarily lock/unlock door or group of doors
LCD setting (KTES) 84 157
Limit video bandwidth 291 Temporarily unlock door 160
Limiting Card Usage 174 Unlock door or group of doors 157
Line monitoring (KTES) 83 Unlock doors 160
Line Type (KTES) 82 Master Password
Load annotations 112 New 279
Local activation relay 102 Maximum event for email report 289
Local area after 89 Messages
Controls 47
Local area before 89
Definition (Filters) 232
Lock Desktop 238
Door temporarily 157
Inserting serial device 119
Elevator door 160
Migrate to enhanced user management 292
Elevator door temporarily 160
Group of doors 157
Mirror Database and Redundant Server
Mode
CardGateway 2, 52
Doors 88 Modem
Power trouble (KTES) 86 Call type 100, 102
Locking a Door Manually 158 Dial‐up 64
Log Printer 280
Instruction parameters 119
Serial port 119
Log Video process error 290
Modifying Pictures Display Options 242
Login
Motor lock delay 96
Name 216
Schedule 217
MS‐SQL Interface
Server service application 286 See Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface 49
Logout and Idle 284 Multimedia Devices 277, 281
Logout on idle 45
Alarm sound 281
 359

Signature capture 282 End‐of‐line 101

Video options 282 P
Multiple Pager
Pictures 243 Call type 95, 100
Must login to close a Server application 284 Call type (KTES) 86
Muster reports 205 Options 119
N Options (KTES)
Network KTES
Time adjustment 292 Pager options 86
New authentication password 279 Reporting (KTES) 86
Next character delay (KTES) 85 Panel
No call 86, 96, 100 3rd party hardware 149, 165
Notify last log out 284 3rd party panel 41
Number of rings before answer (KTES) 81 DLL integration 293
Parameters
O Credentials 292
Online help 5 Doors 88
Open time 89 Firmware 286
Operators Image 287
Allow login on server 220 Integration 293
Bypass workstation message filter 216, 217 Reports 289
Definition 215 Time 292
Language selection 216 Video 290
Login name 216 Workstation 293
Login Restrictions 220 Parse user name 289
Login schedule 217 Password
Password 216 Change master password 279
WebStation login 217 Operator 216
Options and alarm system 96 Performing a Hard Reset 151
Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface Photos
CardGateway 49 Multiple 243
Output Pictures
Activation period 103 Desktop 242
Associating door events to auxiliary outputs 103 Multiple 243
Device configuration 102 Transparent color position 288
Filename 258 PIN
Flash 103 Duplicate PIN process 278
Flash timed 103 Number 70, 174
General options 102 PING Diagnostic Program 323
Operating mode 102 Polling (KTES) 82
Selected doors 103
Port number 316
Steady 103
Steady timed 103
Postal lock
Override
Card holder used for postal activated 83
360

KTES 81 Server 297, 303

Postpone or disarm access level 98 System 17, 297
Power failure (KTES) 85 Relays 41
Power supervision schedule 70 Activated 162
KTES 85 Activation (KTES) 85
Pre‐alarm on door opened too long 92 Alarm system options 98
Preset and pattern control application 290, 291 Animated icons 341
Prevent arming request on input status 97 Configuration 98
Create groups 204
Print a log 247
Deactivated 162
Print cards 187 Group 204
Print event parameters 231 Operation mode 98
Printer, see Log printer 280 Parameters (KTES) 85
Printers Selection and Configuration 280 Resetting schedule 163
Priority level 282 Return to schedule 162
Programming mode timeout delay (KTES) 85 Selecting 162
Programming PIN timeout delay (KTES) 85 Temporarily activated 162
Q Temporary activation 101
To follow lock output 96
Quick backup 283 Toggle command 120, 121, 122, 123
Quick report Reloading Gateway Data 151
Definition 257
Relock
Emailing 268
Door on arming after exit delay 97
Request 257
Door on request to arm 97
Send to workstations 268 On access 92
Viewer 322
On door closing 92
R On door opening 92
Reader’s driver download 83 On Rex 92
REB‐8 Remote
Elevator controller Application 282
Programming 73 Event reporting
Relay expansion board modules 71 Enabling 102
Relays Modem delay 66
Definition 73 Video process control parameters 290
Redundant Server 283 Removing EntraPass 23
Address 52 Report queue priority level 258
Auto‐restart delay 284 Reports
CardGateway Limitations 52 Disk free space threshold 289
Quick synchronize 284 Historical report 259
See Mirror Database and Redundant Server 52 Quick report 257
System parameters 283 Quick report request 257
Regional configuration (KTES) 82 Report request 267
Registration Report state 273
see Workstation registration 303 Roll Call report 272
 361

SmartLink 268 Supervision 85

Time & Attendance report 269 Unlock 90, 95
Time & Attendance request 268 Unlock schedule # 1 (elevator doors) 95
WebStation 261, 263 Second card schedule required (two‐man rule)
Reset 96
Delay for shunt temporarily 101 Security level
Remote video process application 290 Administrator 215
Remote video process applications control 290 Assign to operator 217
See Controllers 154 Card database fields 221
Resettable REX function 93 Definition 218
Resetting a Door Schedule 159 Installer 215
Resize Read only ‐ (View components) 220
Toolbar buttons 293 Restricted 215
REX 71 Workspace 217, 225
Contact 92 Security parameters 45
Options Selecting
Doors 92 Applications 222
Primary and Secondary 92 Controller 155
Roll Call Gateway 151
Reports 257, 272 Primary language 280
RS‐232 Secondary language 280
Connection Self‐extracting compressed file 295
Configuration 62 Send to tray on idle 284
Serial port 316 Serial
S Com port 119
Saving Device for commands 120
Device for messages 119
Annotations 112
Number (KTES) 82
Card pictures and signatures in a file 288
Graphics in a file 289 Server
Visitor pictures and signatures in a file 288 Database Utility Program, see Database 306
Schedules 284 Disk free space threshold 283
Getting Started 299
2‐day continuous interval 108
IP Address 316
Acknowledge schedule 230
Login 299
Call 86, 96, 100
Logs 283
Card and PIN 91
Parameters 283
Days 108
Registration 297, 303
Definition 107
End time 108 Service Login Information 286, 295
Interlock 94 Setting Up a Badge Printer 281
Login schedule (operators) 217 Setting Up a Report Printer 280
Postal Lock 82 Show properties on Drop 112
Printing events 229 Show system database reference 286
REX 92 Shunt delay 94
Start time 108
362

Shunt input temporarily 101 System

Signature capture 282 Components 19
Site Data 300
Configuration 61 Date & Time 281
Retrieving site events 65 Modification 281
SmartLink 2 Installation 14
Application 53 Language selection 279
Command builder 120 Parameters 283
Configuring 53 Registration 17
Defining a SmartLink Task with Task Builder 232 Requirements 9
Restore previous SmartLink mode 117 Schedules 284
Save SmartLink mode 117 Tree view 37
Send reports to workstations 268 View log 302
Send reports using 268 T
Task builder 120 Talk time (KTES) 81
Tasks insertion menu for SmartLink 116 Talk time remaining warning (KTES) 81
WebStation 53, 55 Tamper and trouble
Soft anti‐passback 79, 89 Definition 101
Software installation 9 Inputs 101
Special Characters Tamper in alarm (KTES) 85
Welcome messages 84 Tamper switch supervision schedule (KTES) 85
SPI Port Task
KT‐400 76 Event parameters 230
SQL Interface Insertion menu for SmartLink 115
See Oracle/MS‐SQL Interface 49 Task Builder
Start a session 25 Definition 115
Starting the EntraPass server 25 Emailing 118
Starting the EntraPass workstation 27 Event trigger 115
Starting the gateway program 26 Graphic 109
State (cards), see Cards 174 Toggle 120, 121, 122, 123
Status Taskbar
Icon Description 46
Refresh delay 48 TCP/IP 64
Relay activation Technical Support 6
Configuration 78 Temporary activation timer 98
Time out delay 286 Temporary Shunt Timer 101
Stolen Card 170 Tenant
Strict search on card field 290 Admin level 198
Supervised door lock device 96 Administration level (KTES) 88
Suspend messages 46 End date 198
Suspend report delay on door relock 94 Extended door access delay 198
Suspend status update when not monitored 100 Extended ring 198
Swap descriptions 308 First phone number 197
 363

Hide 198 System 37

ID length 197 Trigger source 121
Language 198 U
List
Options 82
UDP 64
Name 197 Unlock
PIN 198 Door by schedule after first man in 94
PIN access schedule 198 Door temporarily 157
PIN length 197 Elevator door 160
Response setting (KTES) 83 Elevator door temporarily 160
Second phone number 198 Group of doors 157
Start date 198 On access door opened 92
Tenants list 197 On REX 93
Adding new tenant 197 Schedules (elevator floors) 95
Creating new 197 Time 89
Trace 198 Unlocking a Door Manually 158
Validation date 198 Unlocking a Door Temporarily 158
Wiegand display format on LCD 197 Updating the system 21
Wiegand interface for access granted 198 Use JPEG format for graphics 288
Tenants list Use JPEG format for pictures, signatures and
Export/Import Wizard 199 badges 288
Exporting 200 User access code 105
Importing 199 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 64
Terminal server 64 User name format 289
Three‐dots button 39 Users 167
Time & Attendance Reports 220, 266, 269 V
Add transactions 271
Doors 89 Validate Card Access 186
First IN last OUT 270 Verify authentication password 279
Operations 270 Video
Preview 275 Background 111
Request 268, 270 Bandwidth 282, 291
Select doors 269 Bandwidth control 283
Use specific card range 269 Displaying a view 147
Time base (KTES) 83 Event list 140
Time between notifications 283 Events recorded 133
Toggle Exporting files 144
General parameters for a view 134
Task Builder 120, 121, 122, 123
Image snap 291
Toolbar buttons
Integration 125
Resize 293 Linking video clips with key frames 144
Trace Password protection 145
Card 170
Playback 145
Card number 170 Playing segments 143
Tree view 37 Recording parameters 139
364

Server communication settings 127 Floating 37

Server options 290 Work area
Triggers definition 138 Modify 28
Vault 4 Workspace
Configuring 55 Defining access levels 223
Disk free space threshold 56 Defining applications 223
File format 56 Defining card access group 224
Vault definition 130 Defining card types 224
View modification 137 Defining doors 223
Viewing archived video segments 148 Defining events 227
View Defining gateways and sites 222
Last transactions 188 Defining graphics 225
Roll Call 165 Defining inputs 223
System tree view 37 Defining panel components 227
Visitor Defining panels 226
Call settings (KTES) 81 Defining relays 223
Definition 190 Defining reports 224
Visual feedback Defining tasks 226
see Reader 66 Defining video servers 225
W Defining video views 226
Defining workspace 225
Wait for access granted to arm 97 Definition 46
Wait for access granted to postpone 98 Security Levels 225
Web page Security levels 217
Background 111 Selecting applications 222
WebStation 3 Workstation
Card number 170 Automatic logout on idle 45
Card use reports 263 Suspend messages 46
Concurrent Logins 218
Connection timeout 55
Email reports 49
Enhanced user management 292
Historical Reports 261
Operator login 217
SmartLink 53
WebViews
Add Web page as background 111
Graphic definition 109
What is access control? 1
Wiegand
Display format on LCD 83
Integration (KTES) 83
Reader type 83
Windows
© 2012 Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved. www.kantech.com
DN1415‐1208